Download SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE
MANUAL
DIGITAL PLAIN PAPER COPIER
8070/6570
5570/4580
1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8442, JAPAN
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE FOR THE COPIER 6570, 5570
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.
1.
Transportation/Installation
• When transporting/installing the copier, move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers.
The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 250 kg (551 lb), therefore pay full attention
when handling it.
• Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V/20A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) or more for
its power source.
• The copier must be grounded for safety.
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.
• Select a suitable place for installation.
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.
• Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone.
• To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of
80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.
2.
Service of Machines
• Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.
• Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the
damp heater and their periphery.
• Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, the transfer belt and the highvoltage transformer.
• Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.
• When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections
and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.
• Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.
• Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.
− Avoid direct exposure to beam.
− Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.
− Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.
3.
Main Service Parts for Safety
• The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
4.
Cautionary Labels
• During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the copier.
5.
Disposition of Consumable Parts/Packing Materials
• Regarding the recovery and disposal of the copier, supplies, consumable parts and packing
materials, it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6.
When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless
otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble
small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, toothed washers in the wrong places.
7.
Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
8.
Precautions Against Static Electricity
• The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wrist band, pull out the power cord plug of the copier and make
sure that there is no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
Caution
:
Dispose of used RAM-IC’s (including lithium battery)
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Vorsicht
:
Entsorgung des gebrauchten RAM-IC’s (inklusive
der Lithium Batterie) nach Angaben des Herstellers.
1.
SPECIFICATIONS • ACCESSORIES • OPTIONS • SUPPLIES
1.1 Specifications
•
•
•
•
Copy process ................. Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)
Type ............................... Console type
Original platen ................ Fixed type (left side, center reference)
Acceptable originals ....... Sheets, books, and 3-dimensional objects
When the document feeder is used, sheet originals only (60 to 90 g/m2,
or 16 lb. to 24 lb.) (without carbon backing, staples and tape)
Maximum size: A3 (Ledger)
Item
Copy speed
6500/6570 (5500/5570)
65 cpm (55cpm)
4580
PM cycle
Region
400K (340K)
NAD, TWD, SAD, ASD, AUD,
MJD, UKD
45 cpm
80cpm
280K
NAD, ASD, MJD
440K
NAD, TWD, SAD, ASD, AUD
MJD, UKD
• Copy speed
Paper
supply
Model
(CPM)
LCF
6570
6500
5570
5500
65
55
45
—
8070
8000
B4, FOLIO
LG, COMP
—
—
A3, LD
—
—
Paper
size
A4, B5, A5-R
LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R
LT-R
8000/8070
80
—
Cassette
6570
8070
6500
8000
5570
5500
65
76
55
45
51
61
45
35
44
52
39
30
38
43
34
25
Manual feeding
Size selected
No size selected
6570
8070
6570
8070
6500
8000
6500
8000
5570
5570
5500
5500
48
48
33
33
48
33
45
25
42
42
33
33
42
33
35
25
37
37
33
33
37
33
30
25
33
33
33
33
33
33
25
25
* Manually placed originals, one-sided and continuous copy modes
(1) In the models of 6500/6570/5500/5570
* In the case of the automatic document feeder, 65 (55) sheets/minute when an A4 (LT) size
single-sided original is fed in the continuous copy mode at original size by the LCF.
* Re-processing speed of automatic duplexing unit .... A4, A5-R, LT, ST-R : 65 (55) sheets/minute
A4-R, LT-R
: 51 (45) sheets/minute
LG
: 44 (39) sheets/minute
A3, LD
: 38 (34) sheets/minute
Note: CPM in a parenthesis is the specification of the 5500/5570.
(2) In the models of 8000/8070 (4580)
* In the case of the automatic documnent feeder, 65 (45) sheets/minute when an A4(LT) size
single-sided original is fed in the continuous copy mode at original size by the LCF.
* Re-processing speed of automatic duplexing unit .... A4, A5-R, LT, ST-R : 70 (45) sheets/minute
A4-R, LT-R
: 57 (35) sheets/minute
LG
: 50 (30) sheets/minute
A3, LD
: 42 (25) sheets/minute
Note: CPM in a parenthesis is the specification of the 4580.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
11--1A
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
• System copy speed
(CPM)
Copy mode
6500/6570
5500/5570
4580
8000/8070
Single-sided originals
1 set
42
38
33
42
↓
Single-sided copies
3 sets
5 sets
55
59
45
51
41
42
61
67
Single-sided originals
↓
1 set
3 sets
32
43
28
39
24
33
32
44
Duplex copies
5 sets
48
43
36
49
Two-sided originals
↓
1 set
3 sets
23
39
22
35
17
31
23
40
Duplex copies
5 sets
45
41
36
47
Two-sided originals
1 set
28
28
28
28
↓
Single-sided copies
3 sets
5 sets
45
52
42
46
37
40
49
58
* Ten A4 or LT originals are set in the ADF. This includes the first copy time.
• Copy paper
Cassette
Size
A3 ~ A5-R
LD ~ ST-R
LCF
Manual feeding
A4, LT
A3 ~ A5-R
LD ~ ST-R
64 ~ 80 g/m2
Thickness
Special
Duplexing
—
—
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adjustable to a nonstandard size
64 ~ 130 g/m2
—
paper
•
•
•
•
Note
Tracing paper, label
Our company
paper, OHP film
recommended
First copy time ................ 3.6 seconds max. (A4 or LT, LCF, 100% manually placed original)
Warm-up time ................ Approx. 420 sec.
Multiple copying ............. 1 to 999, numerical keypad entry
Reproduction ratio ......... Fixed ratio: 100% or 101% (selected in adjustment mode)
Zoom ratios: 25 ~ 400% (in 1% steps)
Paper supply .................. Automatic feeding: LCF (capacity: 4000 sheets), 3 cassettes (capacity: 500 sheets each), manual bypass feeding (capacity: 100 sheets, 64 to 80 g/m2)
Manual feeding:
64 to 130 g/m2 (80 to 130 g/m2 paper is feed one
sheet at a time)
Original capacity (automatic document feeder)
............................ A4, A4-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, ST-R: 60 sheets
LG:
35 sheets
A3, LD:
30 sheets
Paper capacity (automatic duplexing unit)
............................ 60 sheets (Our company recommended paper 80 g/m2)
Toner supply .................. Automatic density detection and replenishment
Toner hopper supply
Exposure control ............ Automatic control and manually selectable (11 steps)
Weight ............................ Copier: 250 kg
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
11--2A
2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
• Power source ................. AC115V/20A, AC 220 • 240V/10A
• Power consumption ....... 2.0 kW or less
* The power of the automatic document feeder, automatic duplexing unit and LCF is supplied
from the copier body.
• Total counter .................. Mechanical total counter
• Machine size .................. Refer to the figure below
920mm
1111mm
742mm
* The specifications and external appearance are subject to change without notice in the interest of
product improvement.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 Accessories
Remarks
Unpacking Instructions
1 pc.
Operator’s Manual
1 pc.
Drum
1 pc.
Drum cover
1 pc.
CS card
1 pc.
Sheet CE
1 pc.
Original feed tray
1 pc.
Set-up report
1 set
Except MJD
For MJD
For NAD, MJD
1.3 Options
Finisher
DP4580,5570.6570,8070
DP5500,6500,8000
MJ-1006, MJ-1007
MJ-1015, MJ1016
Hole punch
—
MJ-6002N
MJ-6002E
MJ-6002F
MJ-6002S
Staple cartridge
STAPLE-600, STAPLE-700
Key counter
MU-8, MU-10
Working tray
KK-6570
1.4 Supplies
Drum
OD-6570
Developer
D-6570
Toner bag
TB-6550, TB-6550E
Toner
T-6570, T-6570E
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
1-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.5 System List
1) For DP4580/5570/6570/8070
Key counter
MU-10
Working tray
KK-6570
Staple
cartridge
STAPLE-600
STAPLE-700
Key counter socket
MU-8
Finisher
MJ-1016
MJ-1017
Supplies
Drum
Developer
Toner bag
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Toner
1-5
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
2) For DP5500/6500/8000
Hole punch
Key counter
MJ-6002N
MJ-6002E
MJ-6002F
MJ-6002S
MU-10
Working tray
KK-6570
Staple
cartridge
STAPLE-600
STAPLE-700
Key counter socket
MU-8
Finisher
MJ-1015
MJ-1016
Supplies
Drum
Developer
Toner bag
8070/6570/5570/4580 SPECIFICATIONS
Toner
11--6A
6
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
2.1 Sectional Views and Electrical Parts Location Diagram
2.1.1
Sectional View
[A] Front views of copiers excluding drive systems
1
13 14
5
10
4
6
3
2
9
12
11
29
31
30
7
34
8
23
24
19
17
15
16
120
28
121
26
18
20
67
32 33
117 112
115
113 116
21 27
114
25
66
22
122
37
68
38
41 40 39
109
49
71
36
35
70
48
50
51
108
118
123
119
55
54
69
74
111
110
53
72
52
42
56
44
47
45
43
46
73
57
80
58
65
64
59
60
61
62
63
82
75
105
83
92
84
90
76
104
85
87
103
101
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
97
99
100
102
2-1
96
94
93
91
89
107
106
77
6570/5570 OUTLINE
No.
Name
No.
Name
1
Carriage 1
39
Transfer belt
2
Mirror 1
40
Transfer belt drive roller
3
Reflector
41
Transfer belt cleaning brush
4
Exposure lamp
42
Transfer belt/toner recovery auger
5
Thermostat
43
Transfer belt power supply roller
6
Carriage 2
44
Lower damp heater
7
Mirror 2
45
Lower damp heater cover
8
Mirror 3
46
Transfer belt follower roller
9
CCD drive PC board
47
Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller
10
Scanner control PC board
48
Exit roller
11
Lens
49
ADU/eject selector gate
12
Original glass
50
ADU/reversal transport roller
13
Scanner optical cooling fan
51
ADU/ reversal selector gate
14
SLG board cooling fan
52
TR1 sensor
15
Toner empty detection lever
53
Empty sensor
16
Toner hopper
54
Holding gate
17
Toner stirrer lever
55
ADU inlet/reversal roller
18
Toner empty switch
56
Separation belt
19
Spiral shaft
57
Feed sensor
20
Toner transport auger unit
58
Aligning sensor
21
Upper magnetic roller
59
ADU/aligning roller
22
Lower magnetic roller
60
Feed roller
23
Transport roller
61
Pick-up roller
24
Leveler
62
Paper transport roller 1
25
Mixer 1
63
Paper transport roller 2
26
Mixer 2
64
Paper transport roller 3
27
Supply/recovery paddle
65
Paper transport roller 4
28
Auto-toner sensor
66
Manual pickup roller
29
Fur brush
67
Manual feed roller
30
Main blade
68
Manual feed separation roller
31
Discharge LED
69
LCF paper empty switch (S26)/tray up switch (S39)
32
Main charger
70
Manual feed tray
33
Main charger wire cleaner
71
LCF feed roller
34
Drum
72
LCF pick-up roller
35
Toner adhesion sensor
73
LCF separation roller
36
Separation claw
74
Aligning roller
37
Toner recovery auger
75
Elevator tray
38
Recovery blade
76
LCF (large capacity feeder)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
No.
Name
No.
Name
77
Tray bottom switch (S40)
104
Middle cassette
80
PFP upper aligning roller
105
Upper cassette
82
PFP upper feed roller
106
Wire rewind roller
83
PFP middle aligning roller
107
Tray motor (M30)
84
PFP upper paper switch (S28)
108
Lower heat roller
85
PFP upper separation roller
109
Thermostat
87
PFP lower aligning roller
110
Cleaning roller 3
89
PFP middle paper start switch (S32)
111
Lower separation claw
90
PFP middle separation roller
112
Upper separation claw
91
PFP lower paper start switch (S36)
113
Heater lamp
92
PFP middle feed roller
114
Upper heat roller
93
PFP lower separation roller
115
Cleaning roller 1
94
PFP lower Feed roller
116
Cleaning roller 2
96
PFP lower pick-up roller
117
Exit roller
97
Upper elevator
118
Exit switch (S10)
99
PFP middle pick-up roller
119
Cleaning roller 4
100
Middle elevator
120
Manual feed inlet fan
101
PFP upper pick-up roller
121
System fan
102
Lower elevator
122
Laser unit fan
103
Lower cassette
123
Transfer belt cleaning blade
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-3
6570/5570 OUTLINE
[B]
Front Drive System
126
127
125
136
128
130 132 129
133
137
138
131
134
135
139
140
141
No.
Name
No.
Name
125
Cleaning roller 2
134
Gate solenoid
126
Cleaning roller 1
135
End guide motor (M8)
127
Upper heat roller
136
Side guide motor (M9)
128
Belt for the toner auger (M15)
137
ADU inlet/reversal roller
129
Main cleaning motor (M11)
138
Forward rotation clutch
130
Toner recovery auger
139
Reversal clutch
131
Toner transport auger
140
Holding gate solenoid
132
Fur brush
141
Transport roller clutch
133
Transport roller (G23)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[C] Rear Drive System
150
149
148
146
145
147
204
206
205
208
156
153
152
155 154
157
159
158
160
207
176
163
151
200
175
177
209
162
199
198
167
178
197
201
203 202
161
169
168
164
196
195
165
194
174
193
173
172
171
170
166
192
179
191
180
181
190
182
189
183
184
186
185
188
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
187
2-5
6570/5570 OUTLINE
No.
Name
No.
Name
145
Scanning motor (M1)
178
Toner transport motor (M15)
146
Drive belt
179
PFP upper feed roller
147
Drive pulley
180
Upper feed roller clutch (CL6)
148
Follower pulley
181
PFP upper separation roller
149
Drive wire
182
PFP middle feed roller
150
Toner motor (M14)
183
Middle feed roller clutch (CL10)
151
Toner transport auger
184
PFP middle separation roller
152
Developer motor (M16)
185
Lower feed roller clutch (CL11)
153
Paddle
186
PFP lower feed roller
154
Upper magnetic roller
187
PFP lower separation roller
155
Lower magnetic roller
188
Pedestal motor (M31)
156
Mixer
189
Lower aligning roller clutch (CL9)
157
Drum motor (M12)
190
PFP lower aligning roller
158
Drum pulley (Drum)
191
Middle aligning roller clutch (CL8)
159
Drum drive belt
192
PFP middle aligning roller
160
Belt transport unit drive motor (M25)
193
Upper aligning roller clutch (CL7)
161
Belt transport unit contact/release cam motor (M26)
194
PFP upper aligning roller
162
Exit roller
195
LCF separation roller
163
ADU/reversal transport roller
196
LCF pick-up roller
164
Coupling
197
Feed motor (M32)
165
Aligning clutch
198
Manual feed separation roller
166
Aligning roller
199
Manual pick-up roller
167
ADU motor
200
Manual feed roller
168
Feed clutch
201
LCF feed roller
169
Separation belt
202
Aligning rollers
170
Feed roller
203
Aligning motor (M17)
171
Paper transport roller 1
204
Slot exhaust fan (M23)
172
Paper transport roller 2
205
Exit fan (M19)
173
Paper transport roller 3
206
Heater fan (M20)
174
Paper transport roller 4
207
Reversal fan (M27)
175
Upper heat roller pulley
208
Duct in fan (M22)
176
Fuser drive belt
209
Developer fan (M23)
177
Heat roller motor (M18)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-7
Pick-up roller
Weight
Empty sensor lever
Empty sensor
Separation pad
Feed cover switch
Aligning sensor
Size sensor
Size sensor lever
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
11
1
No.
9
8
7
5
10 12
6
4
2
1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
No.
13 14 15 16
3
Belt holding roller
Transport belt
Belt holding roller
DF open switch
Belt drop roller
Belt drive roller
Feed roller
Aligning roller
Timing sensor
17
Name
18
16
Transport belt cleaning brush
26
Flapper
24
22
Exit roller
Exit cover switch
23
Name
24
25
Exit sensor
Reversal roller
21
22
Belt follower roller
21
20
20
APS switch
18
25
19
No.
19
26
23
[D] Sectional View of Automatic Document Feeder
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2.1.2
Electrical parts layout
[A] Configuration of Units
Sca
ru
nne
nit
er
Upp
nit
mu
e
t
s
Sy
er
Las
t
unit
AD
er
Low
uni
U
unit
Rear side
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[B] Scanner Unit
(B-1)
PC board
2
1
3
Scanner unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
3
Name
CCD drive PC board (PWA-F-CCD-300)
Scanning optical system control PC board (PWA-F-SLG-300)
Scanning motor drive PC board (PWA-F-SDV-300)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-9
Symbol
CCD
SLG
SDV
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(B-2)
DC electrical parts (except motors, PC boards)
[A4 series]
1
2
Scanner unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
Name
Automatic paper size detector (APS1-6)
Home switch (HOME-SW)
Symbol
S1-6
S2
[LT series]
1
2
Scanner unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
Name
Automatic paper size detector (APS1-4)
Home switch (HOME-SW)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 10
Symbol
S1-4
S2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(B-3)
Motors
3
4
2
1
Scanner unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
3
4
(B-4)
Name
Scanning motor (SCN-MOT)
Document motor (DCM-MOT)
Scanning optical system cooling fan motor (OPT-FAN-MOT)
SLG PC board cooling fan motor (SLG-FAN-MOT)
Symbol
M1
M2
M3-1,-2
M4
AC electrical parts
5
6
4
2
1
3
Scanner unit
7
No.
1
2
3
5
6
7
Name
Damp heater (M) (D-HTR-M)
Damp heater (L) (D-HTR-L)
Fuse PC board (PWA-F-FUS-351)
Thermostat (85°C)
Exposure lamp (EXPO-LAMP) (EXP)
Lamp regulator PC board (PS-LRG-300)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 11
Rear side
Symbol
DHM
DHL
FUS
THMO
EXP
LRG
6570/5570 OUTLINE
[C] Laser Unit
(C-1)
PC boards
2
3
4
4
1
Laser unit
4
Rear side
4
No.
1
2
3
4
(C-2)
Name
PLG PC board (PWA-F-PLG-300)
Polygon mirror motor drive PC board (M/A-DRV-POL-300)
Sensor PC board (PWA-F-SNS-300)
Laser PC board (K-PWA-F-LDR-300)
Symbol
PLG
POL
SNS
LDR
Electrical parts (except motors, PC boards)
1
1
1
1
Laser unit
Rear side
No.
1
Name
Galvanomirror (ASM-GALVA)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 12
Symbol
GLV
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(C-3)
Motors
1
2
Laser unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
Name
Symbol
M5
M6
Polygon mirror motor (POL-MOT)
Laser unit fan (LSU-FAN-MOT)
[D] System Unit
(D-1)
PC boards
System unit
4
1
2
3
Rear side
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
System PC board (PWA-F-SYS-300)
Mother board (PWA-F-MTB-300)
Hard disk (HDD)
LAN printer board or SCSI board (option)
NIC board (option for LAN printer board)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 13
Symbol
SYS
MTB
HDD
LAN or SCSI
NIC
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(D-2)
Motor
1
System unit
Rear side
No.
1
Name
Symbol
M7
System fan motor (FAN-SYS)
[E] ADU
(E-1)
PC board
1
Rear side
ADU
No.
1
Name
ADU PC board (PWA-F-ADU-300)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 14
Symbol
ADU
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(E-2)
DC electrical parts (except motors, PC boards)
8
7
5
9 10
6
4
3
11
12
2
1
13
Rear side
ADU
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
Transport switch (TR2-SW)
End switch (END-SW)
Transport switch 1 (TR1-SW)
Transport clutch (TR-CLT)
Reverse clutch (REV-CLT)
Guide solenoid (GID-SOL)
Stack clutch (STK-CLT)
Feed switch (FED-SW)
Empty switch (EMP-SW)
Aligning switch (RGT-SW)
Aligning clutch (RGT-CLT)
Feed clutch (FED-CLT)
Side switch (SID-SW)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 15
Symbol
S3
S4
S5
CL1
CL2
SOL1
CL3
S6
S7
S8
CL4
CL5
S9
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(E-3)
Motors
1
2
Rear side
ADU
No.
1
2
Name
End guide motor (END-MOT)
Side guide motor (SID-MOT)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 16
Symbol
M8
M9
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[F] Upper Unit
(F-1)
PC board
1
Upper unit
No.
1
Rear side
Name
Motor control PC board (PWA-F-MOT-300)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 17
Symbol
MOT
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(F-2)
DC electrical parts (except motors, PC boards)
1
17
14
13
2
21
10
3
15
4
5
6
19
18
16
12
Upper unit
7
20
9
Rear side
11
8
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Name
Fuser exit switch (EXIT-SW)
Scraper solenoid (SOL3)
Toner supply sensor (TNR-HOP-SW)
Auto toner sensor (SNR-ATC-300)
Toner empty sensor (TNR-EMP-SW)
Paper stop switch (P-STP-SW)
Developer switch (DEV-SW)
Toner full switch (T-FULL-SW)
Main cleaning switch (CLN-M-SW)
Heat roller thermistor (THMS-HTR-300)
Developer bias transformer (PS-HVT-DB-300)
High-voltage power supply for main charger and transfer belt (PS-HVT-TM-300)
Reversal exit switch (TRNE-SW)
Reversal switch (TRN-SW)
Reversal door switch (EXC-SW)
Discharge LED lamp (ERS-300)
Gate solenoid (GATE-SOL)
Transfer belt touch switch (IR-TCH-SW)
Transfer belt separation switch (TR-SEP-SW)
Toner adhesion sensor
Drum thermister
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 18
Symbol
S10
SOL3
S11
ATS
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
THMSH
HVT-DB
HVT-TM
S17
S18
S19
ERS
SOL4
S43
S44
IQM
THMSD
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(F-3)
Motors
11
1
18
2
14
10
3
4
5
9
15
16
Rear side
13
7
8
6
Upper unit
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12
Name
Fur brush motor (FUR-MOT)
Main cleaning motor (CLN-MOT)
Drum motor (DRM-MOT)
Manual inlet fan motor (SFB-FAN-MOT)
Toner motor (TNR-MOT)
Toner transport motor (AUG2-MOT)
Developer motor (DEV-MOT)
Aligning motor (RGT-MOT)
Heat roller motor (HTR-MOT)
Exit fan motor (EXIT-FAN-MOT)
Heater fan motor (HTR-FAN-MOT)
Developer fan motor (DEV-FAN-MOT)
Duct in fan motor (DUCT-IN-FAN-MOT)
Duct out fan motor (DUCT-OUT-FAN-MOT)
ADU motor (ADU-MOT)
Transfer belt motor (TRB-MOT)
Transfer belt cam motor (TRB-CAM-MOT)
Reversal fan motor (REV-FAN-MOT)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 19
Symbol
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(F-4)
AC electrical parts
1
8
6
7
2
9
Rear side
Upper unit
5
4
3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Door switch (DOOR-SW)
Main switch (MAIN-SW)
Fuse PC board (PWA-F-FUS-351)
Damp heater (lower) (D-HTR-L)
Thermostat
Heater lamp (HTR-LAMP)
Fuser thermostat (THERMO-152-FUS)
EXIT door switch (EXIT-AC-SW)
Fuser switch (HTR-SW)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 20
Symbol
S41
S42
FUS
DHL-1,-2
THM-D
HTR-L
THM-F
S45
S46
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[G] Lower Unit
(G-1)
PC boards
2
1
Rear side
Lower unit
No.
1
2
Name
Logic PC board (PWA-F-LGC-300)
LCF PC board (PWA-F-LCF-150)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 21
Symbol
LGC
LCF
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(G-2)
DC electrical parts (except motors, PC boards)
11
8
7
6
14
13
12
25
15
16
9
31
10
17
1
3
18
29
21
23
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24
19
26
Name
Upper feed clutch (FD2-CLT)
Upper cassette switch (CST2-SW)
Upper aligning clutch (RGT2-CLT)
Middle aligning clutch (RGT3-CLT)
Lower aligning clutch (RGT4-CLT)
Manual paper width detector switch
(SFB-SIZE-SW)
Manual pick-up solenoid
(MANUAL-SOL)
Manual feed switch (M-FEED-SW)
LCF switch (LCF-SW)
LCF door switch (LCF-DOOR-SW)
LCF paper start switch
(LCF-FEED-SW)
LCF paper empty switch
(LCF-EMP-SW)
PFP upper paper stop switch
(PSTP2-SW)
PFP upper paper start switch
(FEED2-SW)
PFP upper paper empty switch
(EMP2-SW)
PFP upper tray up switch
(TUP2-SW)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
27
5 28
22
Lower unit
4
2
Symbol
CL6
S20
CL7
CL8
CL9
S21
No.
17
SOL5
21
S22
S23
S24
S25
22
18
19
20
23
24
S26
25
26
S27
27
28
29
30
31
S28
S29
S30
2 - 22
20
30
Rear side
Name
Symbol
PFP middle paper stop switch
S31
(PSTP3-SW)
PFP middle paper start switch
S32
(FEED3-SW)
PFP middle empty switch
S33
(EMP3-SW)
PFP middle tray up switch
S34
(TUP3-SW)
PFP lower paper stop switch
S35
(PSTP4-SW)
PFP lower paper start switch
S36
(FEED4-SW)
PFP lower empty switch
S37
(EMP4-SW)
PFP lower tray up switch
S38
(TUP4-SW)
LCF tray up switch (T-UP-SW)
S39
LCF tray bottom switch
S40
(LCF-BOTTOM-SW)
Middle feed clutch (FD3-CLT)
CL10
Lower feed clutch (FD3-CLT)
CL11
Middle cassette switch (CST3-SW)
S47
Lower cassette switch (CST3-SW)
S48
LCF door switch 2 (LCF-DOOR-SW)
S49
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(G-3)
Motors
6
1
2
Rear side
3
Lower unit
5
4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
PFP upper tray motor (TR2-MOT)
PFP middle tray motor (TR3-MOT)
PFP lower tray motor (TR4-MOT)
LCF tray motor (TRAY-MOT)
Pedestal motor (PFP-MOT)
Feed motor (FED-MOT)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 23
Symbol
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(G-4)
AC electrical parts
4
2
6
3
5
1
Lower unit
Rear side
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
SSR
Breaker
Noise filter
Switching power supply unit for JPD (PS-ACC-300JU)
Switching power supply unit for EUR (PS-ACC-300E)
Power outlet
Fuse holder (FUSE -HOLDER)
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 24
Symbol
SSR
BRK
NF
PS
POUT
FHOL
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2 Symbols and Functions of Components
(1) Motors
Symbol
Name
Function
M1
SCN-MOT (scanning motor)
Scans the optical system
M2
DCM-MOT (document motor)
Drives the copy range indicator
M3
OPT-FAN-MOT
Cools the optical system
Remarks
(scanning optical system cooling fan motor)
M4
SLG-FAN-MOT
Cools the SLG PC board
(SLG PC board cooling fan motor)
M5
POL-MOT (polygon mirror motor)
Drives the polygon mirror
M6
LSU-FAN-MOT (laser unit fan motor)
Cools the laser unit
M7
FAN-SYS (system fan motor)
Cools the system unit
M8
END-MOT (end guide motor)
Drives the ADU paper end guides
M9
SID-MOT (side guide motor)
Drives the ADU paper side guides
M10
FUR-MOT (fur brush motor)
Drives the fur brush
M11
CLN-MOT (main cleaning motor)
Drives the charger wire cleaner
M12
DRM-MOT (drum motor)
Drives the drum
M13
SFB-FAN-MOT (manual inlet fan motor)
Sends air to the cleaner and charger
M14
TNR-MOT (toner motor)
Supplies toner
M15
AUG2-MOT (toner transport motor)
Transport waste toner to the toner bag
M16
DEV-MOT (developer motor)
Drives the developer unit and suction fans
M17
RGT-MOT (aligning motor)
Drives the aligning roller
M18
HTR-MOT (heat roller motor)
Drives the heat rollers
M19
EXIT-FAN-MOT (exit fan motor)
Cools paper exit
M20
HTR-FAN-MOT (heater fan motor)
Cools the drum and cleaner
M21
DEV-FAN-MOT (developer fan motor)
Used for sucking air into the developer
M22
DUCT-IN-FAN-MOT (duct in fan motor)
Cools the machine inside
M23
DUCT-OUT-FAN-MOT (duct out fan motor) Cools the machine inside
M24
ADU-MOT (ADU motor)
Drives the ADU paper feed
M25
TRB-MOT (transfer belt motor)
Drives the transport belt
M26
TRB-CAM-MOT (transfer belt cam motor)
Contacts the transfer belt to the drum
M27
TR2-MOT (PFP upper tray motor)
Drives vertical movement of the upper tray
M28
TR3-MOT (PFP middle tray motor)
Drives vertical movement of the middle tray
M29
TR4-MOT (PFP lower tray motor)
Drives vertical movement of the lower tray
M30
TRAY-MOT (LCF tray motor)
Drives the LCF tray
M31
PFP-MOT (pedestal motor)
Drives all rollers in the feed and transport
systems
M32
FED-MOT (feed motor)
Drives the feed roller and manual roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 25
6570/5570 OUTLINE
(2) Solenoids
Symbol
Name
Function
Remarks
SOL1
GID-SOL (guide solenoid)
SOL3
SOL3 (scraper solenoid)
Drives the separation claw
SOL4
GATE-SOL (gate solenoid)
Drives the exit/ADU switching gate
SOL5
MANUAL-SOL (manual Pick-up solenoid)
Drives vertical movement of the manual
pick-up roller
(3) Electromagnetic spring clutches
Symbol
Name
Function
Remarks
CL1
TR-CLT (ADU transport clutch)
Drives the paper transport of the ADU
CL2
REV-CLT (ADU reverse clutch)
Exits the copy in reverse
CL3
STK-CLT (ADU stack clutch)
Stacks the copy in the ADU
CL4
RGT-CLT (ADU aligning clutch)
Aligns the paper feeding of the ADU
CL5
FED-CLT (ADU feed clutch)
Drives the ADU paper feeding
CL6
FD2-CLT (PFP upper feed clutch)
Feeds the PFP upper cassette paper
CL7
RGT2-CLT (PFP upper aligning clutch)
Transfers drive to the PFP upper
aligning roller
CL8
RGT3-CLT (PFP middle aligning clutch)
Transfers drive to the PFP middle
aligning roller
CL9
RGT4-SW (PFP lower aligning clutch)
Transfers drive to the PFP lower
aligning roller
CL10
FD3-CLT (PFP middle feed clutch)
Feeds the PFP middle cassette paper
CL11
FD4-CLT (PFP lower feed clutch)
Feeds the PFP lower cassette paper
(4) Counters
Symbol
T
Name
T-CTR (total counter)
Function
Remarks
Function
Remarks
Total counter
(5) Switches
Symbol
Name
S1-*
APS1-6 (automatic paper-size detector)
Detects the paper-size
S2
HOME-SW (home switch)
Detects the optical system home position
S3
TR2-SW (transport switch)
Detects a paper in the ADU transporting
section
S4
END-SW (end switch)
Detects the end guide position of the ADU
S5
TR1-SW (transport switch 1)
Detects a paper in the ADU transporting
section
S6
FED-SW (feed switch)
Detects a leading edge of the paper in
the ADU
S7
EMP-SW (empty switch)
Detects a paper on the ADU stacking tray
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 26
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Symbol
S8
Name
Function
RGT-SW (aligning switch)
Remarks
Detects aligning position of the paper in
the ADU
S9
SID-SW (side switch)
Detects the side guide position of the ADU
S10
EXIT-SW (fuser exit switch)
Detects exiting paper
S11
TNR-HOP-SW (toner supply cover switch)
Detects opening/closing of the toner
supply cover
S12
TNR-EMP-SW (toner empty switch)
Detects a no toner state in the toner hopper
S13
P-STP-SW (paper stop switch)
Used for stopping the feed roller
S14
DEV-SW (developer switch)
Detects attachment of the developer unit
S15
T-FULL-SW (toner full switch)
Detects a waste toner full state
S16
CLN-M-SW (main cleaning switch)
Detects the position of the main charger
wire cleaning pad
S17
TRNE-SW (reversal exit switch)
S18
TRN-SW (reversal switch)
S19
EXC-SW (reversal door switch)
S20
CST2-SW (upper cassette switch)
Detects misplacement of the upper cassette
SFB-SIZE-SW
Detects width of the paper
S21
(manual paper width detector switch)
S22
M-FEED-SW (manual feed switch)
Detects manual feed
S23
LCF-SW (LCF switch)
Detects attachment of the LCF unit
S24
LCF-DOOR-SW (LCF door switch)
Detects opening/closing of the LCF door
S25
LCF-FEED-SW (LCF paper start switch)
Detects the LCF feed roller
S26
LCF-EMP-SW (LCF paper empty switch) Detects LCF paper empty
S27
PSTP2-SW (PFP upper paper stop switch) Used for aligning paper supply from the
upper cassette
S28
FEED2-SW (PFP upper paper start switch) Detects paper supply from the upper cassette
S29
EMP2-SW (PFP upper empty switch)
Detects a no paper state in the upper cassette
S30
TUP2-SW (PFP upper tray up switch)
Detects rising of the upper tray
S31
PSTP3-SW (PFP middle paper stop
switch)
Used for aligning paper supply from the
middle cassette
S32
FEED3-SW (PFP middle paper start switch)
Detects paper supply from the middle cassette
S33
EMP3-SW (PFP middle empty switch)
Detects a no paper state in the middle
cassette
S34
TUP3-SW (PFP middle tray up switch)
Detects rising of the middle tray
S35
PSTP4-SW (PFP lower paper stop switch)
Used for aligning paper supply from the
lower cassette
S36
FEED4-SW (PFP lower paper start switch)
Detects paper supply from the lower cassette
S37
EMP4-SW (PFP lower empty switch)
Detects a no paper state in the lower cassette
S38
TUP4-SW (PFP lower tray up switch)
Detects rising of the lower tray
S39
T-UP-SW (LCF tray up switch)
Detects rising of the LCF tray
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 27
6570/5570 OUTLINE
Symbol
Name
Function
Remarks
S40
T-DOWN-SW (LCF tray down switch)
Detects the bottom position of the LCF tray
S41
DOOR-SW (door switch)
Used for ensuring safety
S42
MAIN-SW (main switch)
Used for switching the main power
supply ON and OFF
S43
TR-TCH-SW (Transfer belt touch switch) Used for touching the transfer belt
S44
TR-SEP-SW
(Transfer belt estrangement switch)
S45
EXIT-AC-SW (Exit door inter lock switch) Used for ensuring safety
S46
HTR-SW (Fuser switch)
Used for safety without fuser unit
S47
CST3-SW (Middle cassette switch)
Detects misplacement of the middle cassette
S48
CST4-SW (Lower cassette switch)
Detects misplacement of the lower cassette
S49
LCF-DOOR2-SW (LCF door switch 2)
Detects opening/closing of the LCF door
Used for separating the transfer belt
(6) Heaters and lamps
Symbol
Name
Function
Remarks
DHM
D-HTR-M (damp heater (M))
Maintains the optical system at the
preset temperature
DHL
D-HTR-L (damp heater (L))
Maintains the optical system at the
preset temperature
DHL
D-HTR-L (damp heater (lower))
Maintains the drum, and transfer/separation
charger case at the preset temperature
HTR-LANMP (heater lamp)
Used for fusing
EXP
EXPO-LAMP (exposure lamp)
Exposes the original
LRG
PS-LRG-300 (lamp regulator PC board)
Controls the exposure lamp
ERS
ERS-300 (discharge LED lamp)
Used for discharging the drum
HTR-L
(7) PC boards
Symbol
CCD
Name
PWA-F-CCD-300
Function
Remarks
Control CCD image pre-processing
(CCD image pre-processing PC board)
SLG
PWA-F-SLG-300 (scanning optical
system control PC board)
Controls the scanning optical system
SDV
PWA-F-SDV-300
(scanning motor drive PC board)
Drives the scanning motor
PLG
PWA-F-PLG-300 (PLG PC board)
Controls the laser unit
POL
M/A-DRV-POL-300
(polygon mirror motor drive PC board)
Drives the polygon mirror motor
SNS
PWA-F-SNS-300 (sensor PC board)
Detects the beam position
LDR
K-PWA-F-LDR-300 (laser PC board)
Drives the laser
SYS
PWA-F-SYS-300 (system PC board)
Whole system control and data processing
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 28
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Symbol
Name
Function
MTB
PWA-F-MTB-300 (mother board)
Option board connecting
HDD
Hard disk (HDD)
Stores image data
LAN or SCSI LAN printer board or SCSI board
Remarks
Printer
Option
Option for LAN
printer board
NIC
NIC board
Network interface card
ADU
PWA-F-ADU-300 (ADU PC board)
Controls the ADU
MOT
PWA-F-MOT-300 (motor control PC board) Drives the drum and transport belt
LGC
PWA-F-LGC-300 (logic PC board)
Controls the entire copier
LCF
PWA-F-LCF-150 (LCF PC board)
Displays LCF tray, scan key and tray
operations
IPC
(Finisher interface board)
Finisher interface board
(8) Transformers
Symbol
Name
Function
Remarks
HVT-DB
PS-HVT-DB-300
(developer bias power supply)
Generates high voltage for the developer
bias
HVT-TM
PS-HVT-TM-300 (high-voltage power
Develops high voltage for charging and
supply for main charger and transfer belt)
transfer and the developer bias voltage
(9) Other
Symbol
ATS
Name
Function
SNR-ATC-300 (auto toner sensor)
Remarks
Senses the toner temperature by a
magnetic sensor
GLV
ASM-GALVA (galvanomirror)
Control the beam position
FUS
PWA-F-FUS-351 (fuse PC board)
Cuts out an over current of the damp heater
THMS-HTR-300 (heat roller thermistor)
Detects the temperature of the heat roller
SSR
(SSR)
Switches the heater lamp
BRK
Breaker
Safety switch
NF
Noise filter
Cuts out a noise signal
THM-D
Thermostat
Protects over heating of the damp heater
THMO
Thermostat (85°C)
Protects the exposure lamp over heating
THM-F
THERMO-152-FUS (fuser thermostat)
Protects the fuser unit over heating
PS-ACC-300JU
(switching power supply unit)
Supplies electrical power
THMSH
PS
For UC, JPD
PS-ACC-300E
(switching power supply unit)
IQM
THMSD
For Europe
(Toner adhesion sensor)
Detects toner adhesion volume on the
drum surface
(Drum thermistor)
Detects drum surface temperature
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 29
6570/5570 OUTLINE
HDD
BT
8
2 - 30
8
9
4
5
6
1
0
2
3
IPC
ADU
LCF
PFP
PWA-F-SYS-300
LCD
Controller
VRAM
NVRAM
RTC
PCI-Bus(33MHz)
32
PCI-Bus
CODEC
CLK
SRAM
Serial-I/F
PFC
ASIC
PWA-F-MTB-300
LAN-Card
(for Debug)
ISA-Bus
SCSI
OSC
(Optional Board)
M-CPU
Gate
Array
64bit-RISC
ASIC
Serial-I/F
NVRAM
ROM
SRAM
PWA-F-LGC-300
Flash
ROM.1
Flash
ROM.1
Boot
ROM
SDRAM
OSC
Image Data
DRAM
SDRAM
Serial-I/F
I/O-Bus
6570/5570 OUTLINE
LCD
7
ADR/DAT-Bus
D/A
L-CPU
ASIC
Image Data
Serial-I/F
SRAM
EPROM
PWA-F-SLG-300
ADR/DAT-Bus
Galvano
DRV
Galvano
DRV
D/A
Image Data
EPROM
SRAM
Image Data
PWA-F-PLG-300
ASIC
S-CPU
Serial-I/F
ADF
A/D
A/D
Amp
A/D
Amp
Amp
Amp
DRV
Galvanic
Mirror 4
LD
Laser
Beam
Sensor
LD
PWA-F-LDR-300
DRV
Galvanic
Mirror 3
LD
PWA-F-LDR-300
DRV
Galvanic
Mirror 2
LD
PWA-F-LDR-300
DRV
PWA-F-LDR-300
Laser Unit
PWA-F-CCD-300
Galvanic
Mirror 1
PWM
PWM
PWM
PWM
ASIC
CCD
2.3 System Block Diagram
Finisher
ASM-F-PNL-300
CLR/STP
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
ADR/DAT-Bus
2.4 Removal of Covers and PC Boards
2.4.1
Removal of covers
[A] Right front cover
(1) Open the right front cover.
(2) Remove the screws on the hinges at both ends
(2 screws for each).
Hinge
Right front cover
[B] Left front cover
(1) Open the right front cover, then open the left
front cover.
(2) Remove the top and bottom hinge brackets (2
screws for each).
Hinge
Left front cover
[C] Lower front cover
(1) Remove the intermediate and lower cassettes.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
Lower front cover
[D] Rear cover
(1) Remove the 10 screws.
(2) Remove the lower hook (3 p’ces).
Rear cover
Fooks
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 31
8070/6570/5570/4580 OUTLINE
[E] Upper feed cover
(1) Slide the LCF unit.
(2) Remove the 2 screws.
[F] Lower feed cover
(1) Draw out the LCF, and remove the manual feed
unit.
(2) Remove the lower feed cover (3 screws, 1 connector, both sides hooks 4 pcs.).
Hooks
[G] Power switch cover
(1) Slide the LCF unit.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
Power switch cover
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 32
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[H] Rear top cover on paper (feed side) and
toner bag cover
(1) Remove feed-side rear cover (2 screws).
Feed side upper
rear cover
Toner bag cover
(2) Remove the 2 coin screws, open the toner bag
cover and remove the upper hinge screw.
(3) Remove the toner bag cover from the lower
hinge.
Toner bag cover
[I]
Upper exit cover, lower exit cover, PFP exit
cover, front exit cover and rear exit cover
(1) Remove the upper exit cover (2 screws).
(2) Remove the front exit cover (3 screws).
(3) Remove the rear exit cover (2 screws).
Upper exit cover
Rear exit
cover
(4) Remove the lower exit cover (4 screws).
(5) Remove the PFP exit cover (4 screws).
Front exit
cover
Lower exit cover
Left top cover
[J] Left top cover
(1) Remove the 2 screws.
PFP exit cover
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 33
6570/5570 OUTLINE
[K] Rear top cover
(1) Remove the ADF unit.
(2) Remove the 2 screws.
Rear top cover
Original glass
[L] Right top cover
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
Right top cover
[M] Toner supply cover
(1) Remove the right top cover.
(2) Remove the two hinges (1 screw for each), and
remove the toner supply cover.
Toner supply cover
Hinge
[N] Middle inner cover
(1) Open the right and left front covers.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
Left inner cover Middle inner cover
Right inner cover
[O] Right inner cover
(1) Remove the middle inner cover.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
[P] Left inner cover
(1) Remove the middle inner cover.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
6570/5570 OUTLINE
Left front cover
2 - 34
Right front cover
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Q] Belt transport unit right cover
(1) Push down the jam release in the direction of
the arrow, and draw out the belt transport unit
towards you.
(2) Remove the 2 screws.
Belt transport unit
left cover
Belt transport unit
right cover
[R] Belt transport unit left cover
(1) Remove the 2 screws.
[S] PFP inner cover
(1) Draw out the ADU unit.
(2) Remove the 4 screws.
PFP inner cover
2.4.2
[A]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Removal of PC boards
Locking support
Locking support
Logic PC board (PWA-F-LGC-300)
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the 15 connectors.
Remove the lock supports (2 pcs.) and the 2
screws, then remove the logic PC board.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 35
6570/5570 OUTLINE
[B]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Motor drive PC board (PWA-F-MOT-300)
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the 3 connectors.
Remove the lock supports (4 pcs.), then remove
the motor drive PC board.
[C] Lamp regulator PC board (PS-LRG-JU-300,
PS-LRG-E-300)
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the 3 connectors.
(3) Remove the 2 screws, then remove the lamp
regulator PC board.
[D]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Lamp regulator PC board
SDV-PC board
Locking support
Motor driver PC board
Locking support
SDV-PC board (PWA-F-SDV-300)
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the 3 connectors.
Remove the 2 screws and then remove the
SDV-PC board.
[E] High-voltage transformer for main charger
and transfer (PS-HVT-TM-300)
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the 5 connectors.
(3) Remove the lock supports (2 pcs.) and the 2
screws. Then remove the high-voltage transformer for main charger and transfer.
High - voltage transformer
for main charger / transfer
Lock supports
[F] Developer bias transformer (PS-HVT-DB300)
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
(3) Remove the 2 unit fixing screws and the earth
lead fixing screws, and take out the developer
bias transformer.
Ground wire fixing screw
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 36
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Remove the PC board fastener hook, and draw
out the developer bias transformer.
[G] Switching power supply unit
(1) Remove the front exit cover (3 screws).
(2) Remove the rear exit cover (2 screws).
(3) Remove the PFP exit cover (4 screws).
(4) Remove the power supply inner cover (5
screws).
Hook
Power inner cover
(5) Disconnect the 9 connectors.
(6) Remove the 4 screws, and remove the switching power supply unit.
Note: Claws are located on the base frame side
(floor side) of the connector shown in the
view A, and are difficult to see.
Claw
A
Base frame (floor) side
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 37
6570/5570 OUTLINE
[H] System PC board (PWA-SYS)
(1) Remove the glass holder, original glass and left
top cover.
(2) Remove the indicator screw, and slide the indicator to remove the scanner section lens cover.
(3) Disconnect the connector from the system PC
board side of the harness connecting the scanner logic PC board and the system PC board,
and remove the cover on the rear side.
(4) Remove the system PC board side of the harness connecting the system PC board and the
PLG PC board.
(5) Remove the screw fastening the system
electrics unit.
(6) Remove the upper exit cover, and open out the
lower exit cover.
(7) Remove the slot cover on the inside of the upper exit cover (15 screws).
(8) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the system
PC board and the 2 screws, and drive out the
system electrics unit.
(9) Remove the 6 screws, and draw out the system PC board in the direction of the arrow from
the mother PC board.
6570/5570 OUTLINE
2 - 38
Connector
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[I] HDD
(1) Remove the upper exit cover.
(2) Remove the system electronics slot cover (15
screws).
(3) Remove the screw and connector, and take out
the HDD unit.
Connector
HDD
(4) Remove the bracket (4 screws).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 39
6570/5570 OUTLINE
3.
COPYING PROCESS
3.1 Copying Process
2
Image processing
3
Original exposure
Scanning
4
Halogen lamp
CCD
180 W
600 dpi, 7500-pixels
Printing
Semiconductor laser
Pw = 4.7 nJ/mm2
1
Charger
Toner
–650V
10
Carrier
Discharger LED array
– –
Wavelength 660 nm x 16
–
5
–
9
Blade cleaning
–
–
–
–
–
8
–
Fur brush cleaning
+
+
Development
+
+
–
+
+
+
+
Magnetic roller
Bias –400 VDC+AC
–
–
–
–
–
Paper exit
~ ~
7
Fixing
– –
++++
Manual paper supply
Heat roller
Separation/Transfer
• 700 W x 1
50 µA
(100 sheets)
LCF
6
• 600 W x 1
(4000 sheets)
PFP
Cleaning brush + Blade
(500 sheets each)
5 µA
6 Transfer/separation: Transfers the visible im-
1 Charging: Negatively charges the surface of the
age from the drum onto the transfer (copy)
sheet.
Simultaneously separates the transfer sheet
and toner from the drum.
photosensitive drum.
2 Original exposure: Images are converted to
optical signals.
7 Fixing: Fixes the toner on the transfer sheet by
3 Scanning: Image optical signals are converted
applying heat and pressure.
to electrical signals.
8 Fur brush cleaning: Dirt and paper dust is
4 Printing: Image electrical signals are converted
cleaned from the drum.
to optical signals (for laser emission) and exposed on the photosensitive drum.
9 Cleaning: Mechanically removes any remain5 Development: – toner adheres to the surface
of the photosensitive drum and forms a visible
image.
ing toner on the drum.
10 Discharger LED array: Discharges any remain-
ing
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 1A
– charge from the drum.
8070/6570/5570/4580 COPYING PROCESS
3.2 Details of Copying Process
(1) Photosensitive Drum
The photosensitive drum has two layers, an
outer and an inner layer. The outer layer is a
semi-conductive layer. It uses an organic photoconductive carrier (OPC) material. The inner
layer is Aluminum and is a conductive material.
The resistance of the drum's semi-conductive
outer layer changes depending on the strength
of the incident light.
Formation of “Latent Image” is performed in the
following manner. The minus (negative) potential on the drum surface, corresponding to the
black areas of the original document, are removed (neutralized) by light from the scanner/
optics system while the minus charge remains
on the surface of the drum corresponding to
the white areas of the original document. The
resultant image (which the human eye cannot
see) is called “Latent Image.”
(2) Charging
Charging is the process of uniformly applying
a charge to the surface of the photosensitive
drum.
The minus (negative) electrostatic charge produced by the charge corona assembly is applied to the charge corona “grid.” Its purpose is
to produce a uniform minus (negative) electrostatic charge across the photosensitive drum
surface. The Grid Control Circuit that is part of
the Discharge Transformer ultimately determines the voltage potential on the drum surface. (See illustration)
8070/6570/5570/4580 COPYING PROCESS
33--2A
2
Base
Structure of the photosensitive drum
Time (t)
0
Surface potential (V)
• When the incident light is strong, its resistance decreases and the photosensitive drum
becomes a conductor.
• When the incident light is weak, the resistance increases and the photosensitive drum
becomes an insulator.
Photoconductive layer
Black area of original
– 500
White area of original
– 1000
Discharge Charging
process
process
Electric potential of the photosensitive drum
Main charger
Rotation of drum
Discharge
transformer
Grid control circuit
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Scanning
Scanning is the process of directing light at the
original document. Part of the scanning process is the conversion of reflected light (from
the original document) into electrical signals.
The Charged Coupled Device (CCD) receives
light from the optics area and converts them
into electrical signals that are sent to the Image Processing System for further processing
into digital signals.
CCD board
Scanner control PC
board
Image
processor
Logic PC board
(Example)
Light intensity
at the CCD
photodetector
(4) Printing (Latent Image forming)
Printing is the process of converting image signals (from the image processor) into optical
signals and then directing these signals towards the photosensitive drum via a laser unit.
This action produces an electrostatic latent
image on the surface of the drum.
Value of
signals to be
output
Light
255
Dark
0
Image
processor
 Contrast (differ ences in light and
 dark) is divided
 into 256 steps.

Printing
control PC
board
LGC
Polygonal mirror
Semiconductor laser
Photosensitive
drum
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-3
6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
(5) Development
Development is the process of converting the
electrostatic latent image into “visible image.”
The developing agent is “brushed” unto the
surface of the photosensitive drum by means
of magnetic roller(s). The developing agent,
commonly called “developer,” is coated with
toner (which has a minus/negative charge).
Toner is attracted to the latent image on the
drum surface on the areas whose surface potential is lower than the developer bias voltage
of the magnetic roller. At this point, the latent
image becomes developed image.
Magnetic roller
Drum
Intermediate tones
White background
Black solid
Magnet
Magnetic roller
Toner
Carrier
(always attracted on to the
magnet)
White background
Toner
Image is not developed
by bias potential
– 650V
When the d potential of
the photosensitive drum
is higher than the
developer bias:
Bias voltage
–400 VDC
Bias
Image is developed by toner voltage
– 400V
Toner
When the d potential of
the photosensitive drum
is lower than the
developer bias:
– 300V
– 200V
– 100V
Drum
Photoconductor layer
0
Aluminum base
• About Developing Agent
Carbon
(5 ~ 10%)
Two materials comprise the Developing
Agent (developer): the toner material and the
Ferrite
carrier material. The toner has a minus
5 ~ 20 µm
(negative) charge applied to it and the developer, a plus polarity (positive charge).
Mixing and agitating the carrier material dur-
Resin
(90 ~ 95%)
[Toner]
30 ~ 100 µm
[Carrier]
ing the mixing process produces electrostatic
charge of the material. This action produces
a plus polarity (positive charge) on the car6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
3-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
rier material. Toner, which has a minus (negative) charge, adheres to the carrier material
and producing what is commonly referred to
as “developer.”
Toner is a material mainly made with plastic
and carbon materials.
Carrier is ferrite beads with a coating layer
for the reason of the stabilization of the frictional charge with toner.
Note:
If the developer material is used for long periods
(beyond its normal life span), toner will become
stuck to the carrier.
↓
The carrier’s (charging) performance is lowered.
Result: 1. Image density is lowered.
2. Toner scattering occurs.
3. Fogging occurs.
Solution: Exchange the developer material.
Toner
Carrier
Where toner has settled,
no frictional electrification occurs.
Lines of magnetic force
S
Drum
N
S
• Magnetic roller
- Magnetic brush development The South and North poles are arranged, as
shown in the figure on the right inside the
magnetic roller. The developer material contacts the drum forming a brush.
This is caused by the lines of magnetic force
between the South and North poles.
Magnetic roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-5
6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
(6) Transfer/Separation
The transfer process transfers the developed
image onto the surface of the copy paper.
• Paper passing under the drum is held in contact to the belt by static electricity produced
by the transfer belt. onto the paper.
• Separation is accomplished shortly after
transfer begins.
Transfer belt
Paper
m
u
r
Dr
laye
um e
n
i
Alumubstrat
r
laye
of s
ive
t
i
s
n
tose
Pho
E
Toner
Paper
Transfer belt
ower s
ply ro
up
ller
P
1. Transfer
Plus bias is applied to the power supply
roller, and the transfer belt is charged to
have a plus bias. This causes an electric
field (E) to form between the transfer belt
(plus charge) and the aluminum layer
(earth) of the drum substrate. This, in turn,
polarizes the paper as shown in the figure.
Tone is transferred to the paper by electrostatic attraction acting between the toner
(minus charge) and the polarization charge
(plus charge) on the top surface of the paper.
Drum
2. Separation
The paper is held in contact against the belt
and separated from the drum by electrostatic attraction acting between the belt
(plus charge) and the polarization charge
(minus charge) on the bottom surface of the
paper.
Reference
Separation claw
• Combined use of transfer belt and separation
claw.
To prevent the copy paper from failing to be
Rotation of drum
separated during the operation, due to incomplete transfer belt charging or absorption of moisture, and thus jamming up the cleaner, a separation claw mechanically separates any copy
Paper
movement
paper which fails to be separated.
Transfer belt
6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
3-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(7) Fixing
Toner is melted into the fibers of the paper with
the application of heat and pressure.
Method:
Melting point of the toner is 100°C.
~110°C.
↓
Heat:
The upper (heat) roller applies the
required heat that melts the toner.
plus
Pressure:
Upper heat roller
Paper
Pressure
The pressure (lower) roller applies
pressure that fixes the melted toner
into the fibers of the paper.
The combination and the function
of the two rollers accomplish the
fixing process of the fusing system.
Upper heat roller
Heater lamp
Separation claw
Direction of paper
movement
(Pressure)
Lower heat roller
(8) Cleaning
This process cleans the surface of the drum. It
also collects the residual toner.
The following two processes are carried out:
(1) The fur brush scrapes of excessive toner
and paper scraps.
(The flicker scrapes off toner from the
brush.)
(2) Residual toner on the drum is scraped off.
The drum surface is cleaned.
Main blade
Rotation of drum
Fur brush
Flicker
Recovery blade
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-7
6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
(9) Discharge
This process electrically discharges any residual electrostatic charge left on the surface
of the drum.
If not removed, an uneven charge is placed on
the drum surface that will affect the print quality of the next copy. Double imaging will occur.
Method: A discharge LED array illuminates the
entire surface of the drum.
The drum becomes a conductor and all residual
charges will be grounded.
All electrostatic charges are removed at this
time.
The drum therefore is prepared to take on a
new charge.
6570/5570 COPYING PROCESS
3-8
Discharge LED array
Drum
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3.3 Comparison of Copying Process Conditions
6560
Process
8070 /6570/5570
1. Drum
OD-6560 (OPC drum)
OD-6570 (OPC drum)
(1) Sensitivity
(1) Highly sensitized drum
(1) Highly sensitized drum
(2) Surface potential
* (2) -650 V (grid voltage -720 V)
(2) -680 V (grid voltage -780 V)
Scolotron system (output variable
Scolotron system
by numerical keypad)
2. Main charger
Variable grid output (input 0 to 255 is
set up on control panel numerical
keypad)
3. Exposure
(1) Light control
(1) Automatic exposure + 11-step
(1) Automatic exposure + 11-step
step light control
(2) Light source
(2) 300W halogen lamp
Stabilized by regulator (bright-
LCD setting
(2) Laser scan (Adjustment not
needed)
ness is fixed even if voltage
changes)
None
Toner adhesion volume sensor
(1) Magnetic roller
(1) One magnetic roller
(1) Two magnetic rollers
(2) Auto-toner
(2) Magnetic bridge-circuit system
(2)
(3) Toner replenishment
(3) Toner hopper system
(3)
(4) Toner-empty detection
(4) Density sensing system/lever
joint use
(4)
(5) Toner
(5) T-6560, T-6560E
(5) T-6570, T-6570E
(6) Developer material
(6) D-6560
(6) D-6570
(7) Developer bias
(7) DC-200 V
6. Discharge before cleaning
Variable output semiconductor
transformer
None
7. Transfer bias
DC -1.4~-1.6 kV
None
8. Transfer
Transfer charger system
Transfer belt system
9. Separation
Separation charge system
Static electricity separation by
Separation claw applied
transfer belt
Separation claw applied
Tungsten lamp (white)
LED (red)
4. Image density control
5. Development
10. Discharge
* (7) DC-400 V + AC
(*) Digital copiers of the 8070/6570/5570 have a maintenance of image quality, so the values of Drum surface
potential and Developer bias are changed in response to the image quality based on the adjustment value.
This maintenance of image quality is applied from the first production of the 8070/6570/5570.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 9A
3A
8070/6570/5570/4580 COPYING PROCESS
Process
6560
8070 /6570/5570
11. Pre-cleaning discharge
None
None
12. Cleaning
(1) System
(1) Blade system + brush
(1)
(2) Recovered toner
(2) Non-reusable
(2)
13. Fur brush bias
Earth
14. Fixing
(1) System
• Fixing
(1) Long-life heat roller system
• Heat roller: Teflon-coated roller
(1) Long-life heat roller system
• Upper heat roller: Teflon-
(ø60) (lamp rating: 900W)
• Pressure
(2) Cleaning
coated roller (ø60) (lamp rating:
700 + 600W)
• Lower heat roller: PFA tube
roller (ø60) (without lamp)
• Pressure roller: PFA tube roller
(ø60) (lamp rating: 250W)
(2) • Heater roller cleaning roller
(2) • Upper heater roller cleaning
(ø18)
• Cleaning silicon felt roller (ø27)
roller (Cleaning roller 1) (ø33)
• Cleaning felt roller
• Press roller cleaning silicon
roller (ø28)
(Cleaning roller 2) (ø27)
• Lower heat roller cleaning felt
roller (Cleaning roller 3) (ø28)
• Cleaning metal roller
(Cleaning roller 4) (ø29)
(3) Heater temperature control
(3) ON/OFF control by thermistor
(3)
(upper/lower roller independent
temperature control)
15. Control
Microcomputer control
16. Drive system
Separated independent drive by DC
motor
8070/6570/5570/4580 COPYING PROCESS
33--10A
4A
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.
COPIER OPERATION
4.1 Operation Outline
Copier operation
Operation during warm up and standby
Automatic feed copying using PRINT key
Copying operation
Bypass-feed copying
Interrupt copying
4.2 Description of Operation
4.2.1
Warming up
(1) Initialize operation
• The main switch is turned ON.
• The heater lamp is turned ON.
• Copy quantity indicator “1” and “WAIT WARMING UP” are displayed.
• Fan
• Initialization of the scanning optical system
~ The carriages move to their home positions and then stop.
~ The carriages move to the peak detection position.
~ The halogen lamp is turned ON. ~ The peak is detected. (white color detection of the shading
correction board) ~ The halogen lamp is turned OFF.
~ Original size indicators are initialized and move to a position indicating the copy area.
• Initialization of the paper feed section
~ Each slot’s cassette trays move upward.
~ The ADU (auto-duplexing unit) guides move to the maximum size position after their home
position is detected.
• Initialization of laser optical system
~ The polygon mirror is rotated.
~ The beam position is controlled.
• Other
~ The main charger cleaner operates.
(2) Pre-running operation
When the heater reaches a preset temperature, the pre-run operation is carried out. (This operation
is not carried out if the heat roller is sufficiently hot.)
• The fuser unit rotates.
• The drum rotates.
~ The drum motor, fur brush motor and auger motor turns ON.
• Maintenance of image control
~ A patch is formed on the drum, and the reflectivity of this patch is read so that the optimum
conditions are set.
• This operation stops after 2 minutes of operation.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-1
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
(3) When the heat roller temperature is sufficient for fixing,
• The heater lamp is turned OFF.
• Copy quantity indicator “1” and “READY” are displayed.
4.2.2
Standby (ready)
• All keys on the control panel are operable.
• When there is no key input for a set amount of time.
~ The copy quantity “1” is indicated, the reproduction ratio indicates “actual size”, and the exposure is set to automatic.
4.2.3
Automatic feed copying using the START key
(1) The START key is pressed to ON.
• “READY” changes to “COPYING”.
• The main charger, developer bias and discharge lamp turns ON. The fans operate at high speed.
• The drum, transfer belt, fuser and developer are running.
(2) Cassette feeding
• The PFU motor and feed clutch on the feed trays turn ON.
~ The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, separation roller and transport roller start to rotate.
• Paper reaches the transport roller.
~ The paper stop switch of the paper feed tray turns ON.
• After a set amount of time, the feed clutch is turned OFF.
• Paper reaches the aligning roller.
~ The aligning switch is turned ON, and the aligning operation is carried out.
• After a set amount of time, the feed roller stops rotating.
(3) Carriage operation
• The exposure lamp is turned ON. → White shading compensation is carried out.
• The scanning motor is turned ON. → Carries 1 and 2 start to advance.
• At this time, if the toner density of the developer material is lower than the set value, the copier
enters the toner supply operation.
(4) After a set time lag after the carriage operation:
• The aligning motor is turned ON. → Paper is sent to the transfer unit.
• The counter is incremented.
(5) Shortly after the aligning motor is turned ON:
The transfer charge come ON.
(6) Termination of carriage scanning
• The scanning motor is turned OFF.
• The exposure lamp is turned OFF.
• The aligning motor is turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper exits the aligning roller).
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(7) Exit operation
• The exit switch detects the passing of the paper’s trailing edge.
• The main charger, developer bias and discharge lamp turns OFF.
• Operation of the drum, transfer belt, fuser unit and developer unit stops. The fans return to standby
mode rotation.
• The copier displays “READY” and enters the standby mode.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-3
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4.2.4 Bypass-feed copying
(1) A sheet of paper is inserted through the bypass guide.
• The manual feed switch is turned ON.
~ “READY FOR BYPASS FEEDING” is displayed.
• Carriages move to their home positions.
(2) The START key is pressed
• “READY FOR BYPASS FEEDING” changes to “COPYING”.
• The main charger, developer bias and discharge lamp turns ON, and the fans rotate at high speed.
• The drum, transfer belt, fuser and developer unit are running.
(3) Sheet-bypass feeding
• The manual pickup solenoid turns ON and the LCF motor rotates in reverse.
~ The manual feed roller is lowered.
~ The manual feed roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are running.
• Aligning operation
• Paper reaches the aligning roller.
• After a set time lag, the manual pickup solenoid and LCF motor turns OFF.
~ Paper feeding is terminated.
(4) Same as operation (3) through (6) of automatic feed copying using the START key.
4.2.5
Interrupt copying
(1) The INTERRUPT key is pressed.
• The interruption LED is turned ON.
• The copying operation is temporarily halted and carriages-1 and -2 return to their home position.
• “JOB INTERRUPTED JOB 1 SAVED” is displayed.
• The copying mode is set to automatic exposure and 1-to-1 reproduction ratio. The copy quantity
indicator remains unchanged.
(2) The preferred copying modes are specified.
(3) After interrupt copying is terminated:
• “PRESS INTERRUPT TO RESUME JOB 1” is displayed.
• When the INTERRUPT key is pressed again, the interrupt lamp goes OFF and the copier returns
to the conditions before the interruption.
• “READY TO RESUME JOB 1” is displayed.
(4) The START key is pressed.
The copying operation before the interruption is resumed.
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.3 Fault Detection
If a fault occurs in the copier, a symbol corresponding to the type of fault will be displayed in order to draw
the attention of the operator.
4.3.1
Classification of faults
A) Faults which can be cleared without resetting the door switch.
(1) ADD PAPER
(2) BYPASS MISFEED
(3) INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER
(4) ADD TONER
(5) REPLACE TONER BAG
B) Faults which cannot be cleared without resetting the door switch.
(1) CLEAR PAPER
(2) DEVELOPER UNIT MISLOADING
C) Faults which cannot be cleared unless the main switch (S1) is turned OFF.
(1) CALL SERVICE
4.3.2
Explanation of faults
A-1) ADD PAPER
[In the case of the copier and PFP cassettes] (When the cassette is not installed)
Detects the absence of the cassette tray.
↓
When the cassette is not installed:
When the cassette is installed but
there is no paper in the cassette:
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC





→ Paper empty status.
↓
Signal sent to control circuit.
↓
The ADD PAPER display will flash.
↓
*The START key will not function.
4-5
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
[In the case of the Copier and LCF and the pedestal] (When the cassette is installed)
By combining the operation of the tray motor and the condition of the tray-up switch and the empty
switch, the CPU detects whether or not there is paper.
• When the power is turned ON or when the LCF door is opened/closed (for the pedestal: when the
power is turned ON or when the cassette is loaded) ~
The PFC (Paper Feed Controller) causes the LCF to initialize.
↓
Detects whether or not there is paper
Tray motor comes ON ~ The tray rises.
At this time, both tray-up and LCF empty switches are OFF.
A fixed time later, if the tray-up switch is not turned ON:
→
The “ADD PAPER” is displayed regardless
of paper being present or not.
↔
The tray is
not normal
Turning OFF/ON the power clears this condition.
Within a fixed time, the tray-up switch is turned ON:
~ The tray motor stops.
At this time, if the empty switch is ON ~ It is determined there is paper.
At this time, if the empty switch is OFF ~ It is determined there is no paper.
↓
The add paper indication blinks.
• During copying, sheets of paper are fed and when the paper supply becomes low
→ The tray-up switch goes OFF → The PFC turns on the tray motor ~ The tray moves up.
→ The tray-up switch come ON → The tray motor stops.
• During copying, when the empty switch goes OFF despite the tray-up switch being ON
↓
It is determined there is no paper.
↓
The add paper indication blinks.
↓
Copying stops.
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
A-2) BYPASS MISFEED (
)
• During sheet bypass copying
 The manual pick-up solenoid has been turned ON


↓

 The paper stop switch-1 comes ON
* If the paper stop switch-1 does not come ON within the specified time: (E12)
↓
BYPASS MISFEED
↓
The BYPASS MISFEED symbol is displayed (
)
↓
Copying cannot be started
↓
Clearing method: Remove the paper from the sheet-bypass guide. The manual-feed switch
goes OFF.
A-3) INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER
• If the key copy counter (optional) is installed in the copier and is then withdrawn:
The INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER display appears
↓
Copying is not possible
• If the counter is withdrawn during copying:
The machine will stop after the paper being copied has exited.
B-1) CLEAR PAPER (
)
• Leading-edge jam detection by the exit switch: (E01)
The aligning motor is turned ON
↓
1.144 sec.*
The exit switch comes ON
Aligning motor
* When the exit switch has not come
ON after 1.144 seconds have elapsed.
Exit switch
↓
The CLEAR PAPER symbol (E01) appears
Timer
and copying will stop.
ON
ON
0
1.144sec
CLEAR PAPER (E01)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-7
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
Aligning motor
• Trailing-edge jam detection by the exit switch
: (E02)
Exit switch
The aligning motor goes OFF.
↓ 1.132 sec*
The exit switch goes OFF (detects paper exit)
Timer
* When the exit switch does not go OFF even
after 1.132 seconds:
↓
The CLEAR PAPER symbol appears (E02), and
copying stops.
OFF
ON
0
1.132sec
CLEAR PAPER (E02)
• Immediately after power ON
↓
The exit switch is detecting paper (ON)
↓
CLEAR PAPER (E03)
• If the front cover is opened during copying
↓
CLEAR PAPER (E41)
• Leading edge jam detection by the paper stop switch in front of the aligning roller:(E31~36)
After the leading edge of the paper passes the transport rollers, if the paper stop switch-1 is not
turned ON within a fixed time
↓
Paper misfeeding (E31~36)
• During paper feeding from the ADU:
After the feed clutch is turned ON, if the paper stop switch (S16) does not come ON within a
fixed time.
↓
Paper misfeeding (E53)
• During paper stacking in the ADU:
If the ADU jam switch does not detect any paper at the fixed timing
↓
Paper misfeeding (E50)
• During paper feeding from the copier and the pedestal:
After the feed clutch is turned ON, if paper stop switch does not come ON within a fixed time
↓
Paper misfeeding (E15,16,17,19: The error code is different according to the cassette used.)
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
B-2) ADD TONER (
)
Toner density has become low
↓
Toner empty detection: Auto-toner sensor
↓
Control circuit: f the ADD TONER symbol appears: copying is not possible
Clearing method: Open the toner supply cover and supply toner from the toner cartridge.
Toner supply operation: copying is possible
B-3) REPLACE TONER BAG (
)
The toner bag becomes full of toner
↓
The toner bag tilts due to its own weight: the toner-full switch will be turned ON.
↓
REPLACE TONER BAG display
• When the toner-full switch comes ON during copying
↓
Copying will stop after the last sheet has exited during copying
Clearing method: Replace with a new toner bag.
B-4) Developer unit misloading
Disconnection of the developer unit.
↓
Developer unit loading abnormal is displayed.
Clearing method: Connect the developer unit connector and close the front cover.
C-1) CALL SERVICE
If the CLEAR/STOP key and the “8” key are pressed simultaneously when the CALL SERVICE
symbol is flashing, one of the error codes will appear on the message display.
For the contents of the error codes, refer to the “SERVICE HANDBOOK”.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-9
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4.4 Flow Charts
4.4.1
Power ON to ready
Main switch ON
DC power ON
Restart
YES
Cover open?
NO
Heater lamp ON
• SCN-MTR
• DCM-MTR
• STOP-MTR
• GUIDE-MTR
P-STP-SW
ON?
Start of initialization
YES
NO
EXIT-SW
ON?
YES
NO
ADU-JAM-SW
ON?
YES
NO
A
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4 - 10
Paper jam
“E03”
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
A
Initialization of
laser optical system
T-FULL-SW
ON?
YES
NO
NO
Toner empty?
Main motor
6 sec. ON
NO
YES
T-FULL-SW
ON?
Toner-full cancel operation
YES
Toner bag replacement
Toner replenishment
Initialization
over?
NO
YES
20 sec. passed
since start of
initialization?
Carriage and indicator
indicate copy area
NO
YES
Service call
“C26”
Heat roller
pre-running sufficient
for fixing?
NO
YES
Pre-running OFF
Heat roller at
ready temperature?
YES
Thermistor
broken?
NO
Heater
broken?
NO
Polygon motor
NG?
YES
YES
YES
Service call
Service call
Service call
“C41”
“C44”
“CA1”
NO
READY
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 11
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
4.4.2
Automatic feed copying
Start key ON
Developer bias ON Fusing motor ON
Main charger ON
Developer motor ON
Discharge lamp ON Transfer belt motor ON
Drum motor ON
Transport system control
Process system control
Polygon mirror
OK?
YES
Optical system control
NO
Service call
“CA1”
Laser ON
Feed clutch ON
Exposure lamp ON
Transfer belt bias ON
Feed clutch OFF
Carriage advances
Carriage stops
Aligning clutch ON
Counter ON/OFF
Transfer belt bias OFF
Exposure lamp OFF
Scraper solenoid ON
NO
HSYNC
OK?
Service
call
“CA2”
NO
Scraper solenoid OFF
Aligning clutch OFF
Carriage retracts.
YES
NO
Number of remaining
copies=0?
Number of remaining
copies=0?
Carriage stops.
YES
End of optical
system control
YES
Laser OFF
Exit switch
check 1?
OK
Process control end
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
NG
Paper jam
“E01”
B
4 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
B
Paper jam
NG
“E02”
Exit switch
check 2?
OK
Main charger OFF
Discharge lamp OFF
Developer bias OFF
Drum motor OFF
Transfer belt motor OFF
Fuser motor OFF
Developer motor OFF
Drum rotation reversed
Standby
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 13
6570/5570 COPIER OPERATION
5.
DISPLAY UNIT
5.1 Detailed Drawing of the Control Panel and the Display Panel
The display unit consists of key switches and touch-panel switches for copier operation/selection of each
mode, LEDs and an LCD displaying the copier state or messages.
When the operator’s attention is needed, a graphic symbol lights or flashes and a message indicating
that particular condition is displayed in the LCD panel.
FUNCTION CLEAR
HELP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
COPY
STOP
ENERGY SAVER
TIMER
START
PRINTER
INTERRUPT
0
C
CLEAR
Arrangement of the control panel
LCD panel indicating operator’s attention
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-1
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5.2 Items Shown on the Display Panel
5.2.1
Display during normal copying
No.
1
Message
WAIT WARMING UP
Conditions of machine
Being warmed up
• Indicated after the main switch is
switched ON up until the machine
becomes capable of copying.
2
READY
operator’s instructions for copying
conditions are awaited.
COPYING
• The number and reproduction ratio of
copies are indicated, for example, as
“0”, “100%” when the main switch
comes ON.
• Copy quantity indicator indicates as
Capable of copying.
• Indicated when the machine is
capable of copying and the
3
Notes
“1”. When a digital key is pressed, the
set number is indicated.
• The set number is cleared to “1” by
pressing the CLEAR/STOP key.
• Returns to the initial condition if no
key input is given for 45 seconds.
• Manual copying is possible.
Now copying.
• Indicated by pressing the START
• After completion of copying, the copy
quantity indicator returns to the
key.
• Copy quantity indicator becomes
initially set number.
“1” and copying is completed.
4
WAIT 30 SEC FOR
Energy saving conditions.
WARMING UP
5
PLACE NEXT
ORIGINAL
6
• Released by pressing the ENERGY
SAVER key or the START key.
ADU 1-sided copying standby state.
• When using ADU 1-sided, and when
not using ADF.
Timer OFF
• No message is displayed in the
• Press the START key to clear.
display panel.
• Timer LED is turned ON.
C
Fig. 5.2-1
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5.2.2
No.
7
8
Display in the event of faulty conditions
Message
ADD PAPER
ADD TONER
Abnormal state & indication
Solution
Indication of lack of paper.
• Flashes when there is no paper in
• Supply paper to the selected cassette.
the cassette A in Fig. 5.2-2.
• Manual copying is possible.
• Select another cassette.
Indication of lack of toner.
• B in Fig. 5.2-2 is indicated when
• Released after the toner is supplied
and the toner supply cover is closed.
the toner in the toner hopper runs
out.
• When this message is displayed, it
is not possible to copy.
9
SET KEY COPY
Key copy counter withdrawn.
COUNTER
• Indicated when the key copy
counter is withdrawn when the
• Released and returned to normal
conditions by inserting the key copy
counter.
machine is READY or during
copying. C in Fig. 5.2-1.
• When it is removed after the
pressing of the START key, the
machine stops after that copy is
completed, but the counter counts it.
10
DISPOSE OF
USED TONER
Indication of need to replace the
toner bag.
• Open the toner bag cover and replace
the toner bag.
• Indicated when the toner bag is
full. D in Fig. 5.2-2.
Released after the toner bag is
replaced and the toner bag cover is
The copier stops.
closed.
B
D
A
Fig. 5.2-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-3
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
No.
Message
11
PAPER MISFEED
IN BYPASS
Abnormal state & indication
Bypass paper jamming
• Indicated when paper jams at the
bypass guide. A in Fig. 5.2-3.
12
13
Solution
The machine is returned to normal
conditions automatically by pulling the
paper out from the bypass guide.
Paper jammed in the machine.
Press the HELP/INFO key and remove
• Indicated when paper jams in the
machine. B in Fig. 5.2-3.
the paper jammed in the copier by
following the message.
MISFEED IN
Cassette paper misfeed.
Press the HELP/INFO key and remove
COPIER
• Indicated when paper supplied
from the cassette does not reach
the paper jammed in the copier by
following the message.
MISFEED IN COPIER
the sensor in front of the aligning
roller in a set time. C in Fig. 5.2-3.
14
MISFEED IN DOC.
FEEDER
Original jammed
• Indicates when an original is
Open the jam access cover and ADF
unit, and remove the jammed original.
jammed in the document feeder. D
in Fig. 5.2-3.
15
MISFEED IN
FINISHER
Paper jammed in the finisher.
• Indicates when paper is jammed in
the finisher. E in Fig. 5.2-3.
16
MISFEED IN
DUPLEXER
Remove the paper jammed in the
finisher and open and close the front
cover once.
Indicates when paper is jammed
in the ADU section.
Press the HELP/INFO key and remove
the paper jammed in the copier by
F in Fig. 5.2-3.
following the message.
D
A
B
E
F
C
Fig. 5.2-3
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
No.
Message
17
CALL FOR SERVICE
18
Abnormal state & indication
Solution
Some part of the mechanism,
motors, switches or sensors is
Turn OFF the machine, remove the
cause of the fault and turn the machine
abnormal. A in Fig. 5.2-4.
back ON.
TIME FOR PERIODIC
Indication of PM cycle.
Maintenance and inspection by a
MAINTENANCE
• Indicated when it is time for
periodic maintenance and inspec-
qualified service technician.
tion.
• Capable of copying.
A
Fig. 5.2-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-5
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
—
—
—
—
Manual feed jammed
Toner bag replaced
Paper jammed in the unit
Serviceman call
5-6
—
Pre-heating
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Digital
keys
—
—
—
—
—
—
Zoom
keys
—
—
—
—
—
—
Density
key
—
—
—
—
—
—
Paper
size
key
—
—
—
—
—
—
Copy
size
key
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cassette
key
—
—
—
—
—
*
Interrupt
key
(1) Energy saver condition is released by pressing the Energy saver key or the START key.
Note: Interruption condition is automatically released if the machine is not used for 45 sec.
(2) Avoid manual insertion during the copying operation since this may result in paper jamming.
* Interrupt key is acceptable during copying operation, but not acceptable during original scanning operation.
: Performs the action or indication according to the operation. – : Ignores the operation
—
Interrupted
—
—
—
—
Key counter missing
—
—
Lack of toner
—
—
—
Lack of paper
—
Copying
—
—
—
Zoom switching
Reserve setting enabled
—
Stop
keys
Copy ready
—
Clear
key
—
START
key
Warm-up
Condition
Operation
—
—
—
—
—
—
Energy
saver
key
—
—
—
—
—
—
Manual
feed
insertion
—
—
—
—
—
—
Touch
panel
5.3 Relation between Copier Conditions and Operator’s Actions
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5.4 Description of Operation
5.4.1
Dot matrix LCD circuit
(1) Structure
(320 x 240)
The DSP-LCD-230 is an STN black & white mode transmissive type LCD with a 320x240-dot display
capacity. It includes a driver LSI, frame, print board, and lateral CFL backlighting.
*STN:Super Twisted Nematic
(2) Block diagram
XSCL
UD0
UD1
UD2
UD3
WF
IC5
80
IC6
80
IC7
80
IC1
IC2
IC3
IC4
80
80
80
80
LP
LCDEN
VDD
GND
V0
VEE
power
supply
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
LCD PANEL
320 x 240 DOTS
5-7
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
(3) LCD drive operation
The following describes the drive operation to display the message “100% READY”.
PWA-F-SYS-300
GA
(scc)
1
1
3
SM
CPU
PROM
2
3
3
LCD
controller
4
2
R
A
M
3
4
4
LED
driver
LED
KEY CPU
LCD
The SM CPU requests the data for
displaying “100% READY” from the
PROM.
The PROM outputs the data for displaying the message to the SM
CPU.
The SM CPU writes the data for LCD
display to RAM IC41.
The LCD controller/driver IC42
reads the display data from RAM
IC41, and outputs the data to the
LCD.
Key switches
and
touch panel
PWA-F-DSP-300
(4) Data Transmission Method
1/tF
1/tF
FRAME
240
1
2
240
1
2
240
1
2
LOAD
FRAME
LOAD
CP
CP x(320/4) pulses
D0-D3
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5.4.2
LED display circuit
(1) Method of LED display
The following description is based on the example of displaying “TIME” on the LED display.
5VL
LDON0
Current
"L"
"L" 6
D16
G
Q3
(TIME)
LP1
R1
IC1(7932)
When the signal LDON0 changes to “L” level, the transistor is turned ON.
Also when pin 6 (D16) of IC1 changes to “L”, a current flows from 5VL via the transistor to LP1
(“TIME”) i.e. LP1 (“TIME”) is turned ON.
Conditions for LED to light
1 The transistor (Q2 or Q3) connected to the LED anode is ON.
2 The output connected to the cathode of that LED is “L”.
The LED comes ON when 1 and 2 above are satisfied.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-9
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5.5 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Control Panel
(1) Open the control panel.
(2) Remove the left, middle and right inner covers
(3 screws for each).
(3) Disconnect the connector inserted into the
copier frame.
(4) Remove the 3 screws fixing the control panel.
(5) Remove the control panel upwards.
(6) Disconnect the connector.
(7) Remove the 5 locking supports and screw.
(8) Disconnect the 7 connectors, and remove the
PC board.
(9) Remove the toothed screw and aluminum sheet
(2 places).
(10) Remove the 4 screws and bracket.
(11) Remove the 8 screws and LCD board.
(12) Remove the 9 screws and KEY board.
(13) Remove the 4 screws and LCD.
LCD board
6570/5570 DISPLAY UNIT
5 - 10
LCD
KEY board
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6.
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.1 Introduction
The following diagram shows the processes beginning at the Scanner section to the Printer section
(where light is transferred to the photosensitive drum.)
ASIC which is short for “Application Specific IC” is for a specific use.
Scanner
Image processor
Printer
Original
System board
[SYS]
Original glass
Scanner
[CCD]
Image
processing
[SLG]
Image processing/
Print control
[PLG]
Laser drive board
[LDR]
Polygonal motor
drive board
[POL]
LGC board
Semiconductor laser
device
Photosensitive drum
The following table shows the functions carried out by the two image processing boards.
Board
Number of ASIC
SLG board
(PWA-F-SLG-300)
PLG board
(PWA-F-PLG-300)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Fanction
High quality image processing, image memory editing, editing
1
1
processing, gamma correction, tone processing, external output
system interface
Smoothing processing, external input system interface, image area
control, laser related control
6-1
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.2 Image Processing Circuit
6.2.1
Overview
Unlike existing analog copiers where reflected light is projected directly to the photosensitive drum,
digital copiers project reflected light (from the original document) to the Charged Coupled Device (CCD).
The CCD converts optical images into electrical signals which ultimately undergo shading correction
which is nothing more than compensations for variance in the light source and the CCD unit.
After shading corrections are made, signals are sent to the image processing section where processing
operations are performed. Data are then sent to the printer section for conversion into light beam that are
directed to the photosensitive drum for printing of the latent image.
The image processing operation is performed by the SLG board (PWA-F-SLG-300) and PLG board
(PWA-F-PLG-300).
(1) Image processing circuit on the SLG board
One image processing ASIC is mounted on the SLG board and implement the following functions:
<Functions>
High quality image processing, image memory editing, editing processing, gamma correction, tone
processing, external output system interface
(2) Image processing circuit on the PLG board
One image processing ASIC is mounted on the PLG board and implements the following functions:
<Functions>
Smoothing processing, external input system interface, image area control, laser related control
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6.2.2
Configuration
Figure A shown below represents the image processing section of this digital copier.
CCD board
(PWA-F-CCD-300)
CCD
A/D conversion
Shading correction
Image processing section
SLG board
(PWA-F-SLG-300)
Scanner system image processing ASIC
High quality image processing
Image memory editing
Editing processing
Gamma correction
Tone processing
External output system interface
SYS board
(PWA-F-SYS-300)
PLG board
(PWA-F-PLG-300)
Printer system image processing ASIC
Sort copy, group copy, magazine copy, simplex reduction
concatenation, duplex reduction concatenation, image
combination, date annotation,
sheet insertion mode, etc.
Smoothing processing
External input system interface
Image area control
Laser related control
: Image data flow
Laser drlve board
(PWA-F-LDR-300)
Laser drive
Fig. A. Construction of the image processing section
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-3
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.3 SLG Board (PWA-F-SLG-300)
6.3.1
Features
(1) The image processing ASICs are controlled by CPU on the SLG board (PWA-F-SLG-300).
(2) The image processing functions of the SLG board implement
the following functions:
• High quality image processing
• Image memory editing
• Editing processing
• Gamma correction
• Tone processing
• External output system interfacing
6.3.2
Functional description of the image processing circuit
An ASIC mounted on the SLG PC board implement the functions described below.
(1) High quality image processing
(A) Range correction
This function converts image signals to density range width and corrects it to match each original
document’s image. When copying the images of an original having a certain amount of background
(such as appear in newspapers), it reduces the background density.
<Example>
Dynamic range width
Smaller
Text
Density
Lower
Larger
No. of pixels
Background
Smaller
No. of pixels
Larger
Extended dynamic range width
After range
correction
Density
Lower
Higher
Higher
Histogram
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(B) Filtering
This function is comprised of a low-pass filter circuit and a high-pass filter circuit.
(a) Low-pass filter circuit
This circuit eliminates image and electrical noise as well as restrict Moire. It provides an image
that closely resembles the original document’s. It does this by averaging the differences between
the targeted pixel and those adjacent to it.
For example, assuming the density of the target pixel position to be x and the densities of its front
and back positions to be a and b, respectively, the density of the target pixel position x’ after lowpass filter operation is given:
For (3 x 1) matrix,
a
x
b
x’ =
a+b+x
3
The above operation is performed for all pixel positions to accomplish high original reproducibility.
The following figure shows the primary scanning pixel is processed by the low-pass filter.
Density
Density
After low-pass filter
operation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Primary scanning pixel positions
Primary scanning pixel positions
(b) High-pass filter circuit
When images with sharp edges are scanned and directed to the CCD, the edges of these characters tend to become dull in appearance. This is due to the physical imperfections of the CCD
lens as well as the mirrors that direct the light to it.
To compensate for this phenomenon, an edge-enhancement operation is performed. It recognizes the differences in density between the targeted pixel and those adjacent to it an makes
compensations to ensure that the final output image closely resembles the image of the original
document. (See illustration below)
Solid black area
Low contrast area
Original
Image signal
After correction
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-5
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
(2) Image memory editing
Editing functions such as enlargement/reduction and mirror image copying are performed by using a
line memory. The line memory is used for storing one line of pixel data in the primary scanning
direction and is updated with new pixel data each time the next line is scanned.
(a) Enlargement/reduction
This function is accomplished by using line memory control in the portion of the operation.
<Example> Enlargement
100%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
200%
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
<Example> Reduction
100%
1
2
3
4
5
50%
1
3
5
7
9
(b) Mirror image
This function reverses the right side and the left side in the primary direction of the original and
this reversed image is output.
(3) Editing operations
Trimming, masking and negative/positive reversal functions are accomplished.
(a) Trimming
With the rectangular area signal, the image signals inside the rectangular area are left and other
image signals are erased.
(b) Masking
Using the rectangular area signal, the image data inside the rectangular area are erased with
other image signals left.
(c) Negative/positive reversal
This function reverses image data from negative to positive or vice versa on the entire area.
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Gamma correction processing
This function is used to correct the input/output characteristics of the scanner/printer so that image
signals are obtained which have input/output characteristics matching a particular copying mode.
(5) Tone processing
This function works to process tone so that faithful reproduction of halftone images such as photographs are accomplished.
(6) External output system interface
This function performs the output control of the output interface for the SYS board (PWA-F-SYS300).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-7
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4 PLG Board (PWA-F-PLG-300)
6.4.1
Features
(1) The image processing ASICs are controlled by CPUs mounted on the PLG board (PWA-F-PLG-300)
and the LGC board (PWA-F-LGC-300).
(2)
•
•
•
•
The image processing functions of the PLG board work to accomplish the following:
Smoothing processing
External input system interface
Image area control
Laser related control
6.4.2
Functional description of the image processing circuit
An image processing ASIC of the PLG board works to accomplish the following:
(1) Smoothing processing
This function works to eliminate jaggedness occurring on character edges of images input from the
external input system interface for smooth image output.
(2) External input system interface
This function works to control the input interface to the SYS board (PWA-F-SYS-300).
(3) Image area control
This function works to set the effective image area of four directions of output image.
(4) Laser related control
This function works to control the DAPC (Double Auto Power Control) and to adjust the multiple laser
beam position.
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6.5 Scanner
Light that is reflected from the original document’s surface is directed to the CCD where photovoltaic
conversion occurs. During this operation, optical image data are converted into electrical signals which
are then converted into digital signals by the A/D conversion portion of the image processing system.
CCD
Signal
amplification
A/D
conversion
Shading
compensation
To next stage
(1) Photo-voltaic conversion
A conversion from optical signals to electrical signals performed by the CCD. See Chapter 7, 6-1.
(2) Signal amplification
The amplification of the electrical signals from the CCD.
(3) A/D conversion
The conversion from Analog signals to Digital signals.
(4) Shading correction
Corrections made by the shading compensation circuit to make up for distortions of images produced
by the mirrors and the elements of the CCD. See Chapter 7, 6-2.
6.6 Printer
Image signals processed by the PLG board perform the laser writing operation through the writing control ASIC and the laser drive board processings.
(1) Setting of effective image area ......................... • The top, bottom, left and right margins are set.
(2) Synchronization Clock Generation block .......... • HSYNC and the reference clock signal at printer
of horizontal synchronizing signal (HSYNC)
block synchronized with the signal.
(3) Laser drive block ............................................... • ON/OFF control of the semiconductor laser and
DAPC (Double Auto Power Control) control.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-9
6570/5570 IMAGE PROCESSING
7.
SCANNER
7.1 Functions
During a scanning process, light is directed at the surface of the original document and then to the CCD
via mirrors and the CCD lens and a slit. The CCD unit in which optical image data are converted to
electrical signals accomplishes photovoltaic conversion. The resultant analog signals undergo A/D conversion, which ultimately become digital signals. These signals undergo compensation processes in
order to produce the required image. Digital signals are then sent to the printer section of image processing.
CCD drive PC board
Exposure lamp
Reflector CRG-1
Drive pulley
Rail for CRG-1
CCD sensor
Original glass
Rail for CRG-2
Lens
CRG-2
Scanner control PC board (SLG board)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-1
6570/5570 SCANNER
7.2 Configuration
The following describes the configuration of the optical system and the purpose of its components.
(1) Original glass
The original glass is where the original document is placed for scanning. The exposure lamp illuminates the original document.
(2) Carriage 1
Carriage 1 is the optical assembly that has the exposure lamp and is used for scanning the original
document. The illustration below shows some of the components that make up the assembly.
Thermostat
Mirror 1
Carriage 1
a. Exposure lamp
The exposure lamp is the light source used for illuminating the original document. It is a 180-watt
Halogen lamp.
b. Reflector
The reflector’s purpose is to maximize the amount light being directed to the original document
that is emitted by the exposure lamp.
Reflector
Original
Glass
Exposure lamp
Reflector
Mirror 1
c. Mirror 1
Mirror 1 is for guiding light reflected from the original to mirror 2. Mirror 2 is described later on.
d. Thermostat
It is a temperature-control device that prevents over-heating of the exposure lamp’s assembly.
6570/5570 SCANNER
7-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Carriage 2
The Carriage 2 assembly directs light reflected from mirror 1 to the CCD assembly. It contains mirrors
2 and 3. The scanner motor drives this assembly. Its scanning speed as well as the distance that it
travels is half that of carriage 1.
Mirror 2
Mirror 3
Carriage 2
(4) Lens → CCD
Light reflected from mirror 3 is projected to the CCD. The CCD is located at the focal point of a fixed
lens.
(5) CCD drive PC board
The Image processing board performs image correction preprocessing (amplification, mixing, A/D
conversion and shading correction of electrical signals obtained by the CCD).
CCD drive PC board
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-3
6570/5570 SCANNER
(6) Automatic original detection unit
The automatic original detection unit (APS sensor) uses sensors located on the lens cover and on
the base frame for detection of the size of the original without the process of scanning.
(7) Original width indicator unit
The original width indicator unit is for indicating the original width currently selected by the copier.
The original size is displayed by the yellow lines on the indicator and carriage 1.
Original indicator unit
Carriage 1
Copiable width
Copiable length
6570/5570 SCANNER
7-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7.3 Description of Operation
7.3.1
Scanning motor
CRG-2 pulley
27
CRG-2
CRG-1
Carriage drive wire
Scaning motor
Motor pulley
3GT-Z24
Idle pulley
27
Idler pulley
27
Wire windup pulley/motor deceleration pulley
39.75/3GT-Z28
Optical System (rear side)
Scanner motor drive is transferred to carriages 1 and 2 via the timing belt and the carriage drive wire.
Initially, carriage 1 moves to the home position. The actuation of the “home switch” determines the home
position of Carriage 1 assembly. During a PRINT cycle, carriages 1 and 2 are driven to scan the original
document.
7.3.2
Document motor
The document motor positions the “original width indicators” to indicate the placement position of the
original document when the reproduction ratio is changed from its default setting of 100% or when a
particular paper size is selected from any of the cassette trays.
7.3.3
Optical fan motor
The optical fan motors rotate to cool the optical unit during copying and stop rotation during standby.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-5
6570/5570 SCANNER
7.4 Drive of the 5-Phase Stepping Motor
7.4.1
Features
Up till now, 2-phase hybrid stepping motors having a step angle of 1.8 have been regarded as being the
highest performing motors. Compared to these motors, however, 5-phase stepping motors have the
following features:
(1) A small step angle (full step: 0.72°, half-step: 0.36°) achieves a resolution 2.5 times that of conventional stepping motors. As 2.5 times the number of steps can be used when moving the same distance, high-speed positioning using optimum acceleration and deceleration is now possible.
(2) Extremely small fluctuation in operating torque achieves little vibration and smooth rotation. This
makes a 5-phase stepping motor ideal for applications where uneven torque and noise are a problem.
(3) As vibrations are small even at the resonant point, special dampers are not required, and the motor
can be used in all operating ranges.
(4) The self-start frequency is roughly 2.5 times higher than that of 2-phase stepping motors, and moreover, 5-phase stepping motors do not have a resonant range. This achieves speed control with a large
variable speed ratio without the need for acceleration and deceleration.
(5) Response is much faster than that of 2-phase stepping motors, allowing higher speed setting.
(6) 4- and 5-phase excitation systems achieve excellent damping characteristics.
(7) The step angle can be varied (e.g. 0.72°, 0.36°, 0.18°) depending on the excitation system.
7.4.2
Principle of the stepping motor
The fundamental differences between a 2-phase hybrid stepping motor and a 5-phase stepping motor
are the number of stator main poles and the winding configuration. A 2-phase stepping motor is wound in
a 2-phase, 4-pole configuration, whereas a 5-phase stepping motor is wound in a 5-phase, 2-pole configuration. Fig. 7.4-1 shows the relationship between stator and rotor teeth in a 5-phase stepping motor,
and the winding configuration.
A phase (blue)
Stator
B phase (white)
(green)
C phase (brown)
(gray)
Rotor
D phase (black)
(purple)
E phase (orange)
(yellow)
(red)
Fig. 7.4-1 Structure of 5-phase Stepping Motor
6570/5570 SCANNER
7-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
The stator comprises 10 main poles, with two main poles in apposition forming a single phase. The coil
is wound so that the two opposite main poles are the same polarity (N or S). Assuming a rotor tooth pitch
of τR, the stator teeth are arranged in such a way that the stator teeth on adjacent main poles shift by 0.6
τR with respect to the rotor teeth. This means that the stator teeth on adjacent main poles shift by (0.60.5) τR=τR/10 with respect to teeth on the rotor cup on the opposite side that are shifted by 0.5 τR. Fig.
7.4-2 illustrates this relationship.
0.6 τR
Stator
0.5τR
1
10
τ
R
Rotor
Fig. 7.4-2 Relationship between Stator Teeth and Rotor Teeth
Consequently, if the polarity of the stator is moved as shown in Fig. 7.4-3, the rotor rotates clockwise 1/
10th of the rotor tooth pitch at a time.
τR
10
A Phase
N
=
1
360
×
= 0.72° ...................... (1)
10
50
B Phase
C Phase
D Phase
S
N
N
1
S
3
2
4
S
N
B Phase
A Phase
S
C Phase
D Phase
N
7
6
E Phase
S
S
8
S
S
5
S
N
N
E Phase
N
10
9
N
N
S
Fig. 7.4-3 Movement of Poles at 1-phase Excitation
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-7
6570/5570 SCANNER
7.4.3
5-phase motor drive circuit (fixed current type)
The drive circuit mainly comprises the following:
• microstep drive controller (IC4)
• driver (IC5)
• current detection resistor (R2)
VDD
2
R31
1/10W1M
R26
2
1/10WO
10
[HCU045]
R28
1
2
1/10WO
R29
1
2 12
1/10WO
R30
2
1
1/10W330
1
IC2
[VCC]
[GND]
13
1
R32
1
1
[HCU045]
1
11
IC2
[VCC] 14
7
[GND]
2
1/10WO
14
7
X1
2
1 BM
C14
1 2
68P/50
C18
1 2
68P/50
GND
GND
+36V
VDD VDD
GND
PULSEM
TP13
1
2
A1
R18
1/10W4.7K
1
2B7
2C7
2D7
2B7
2C7
2D7
2D7
2D7
SCNCLK-0A
SCNDIR-0A
SCNRST-0A
H.OFF-1A
SDATA0-0A
SDATA1-0A
SDATA2-0A
SDATA3-0A
[U7001S]
IC4
PM
EXTAL
MO
XTAL
CW/CK
PA
CCW/UD
PB
RST
PC
ISEL
PD
DSEL
PE
POFF
NA
D00
NB
D01
NC
D02
D03
ND
D10
NE
D11
D12
D13
[VDD]
[VDD]
[VSS]
[VSS]
[VSS]
2
2W820
K
1
R4
D3S6M K
CH1
1
2
2W470
GND
20
21
19
22
23
7
11
10
8
9
24
25
5
6
3
ZD1
A
K
U1ZB12
GND
2
+36V
VDD
D2
DBLC40
36
35
34
33
32
30
29
28
27
26
D1
SF12-50
A2
4
5
A
C4 + 1
100/25
2
[AZ5301S]
IC5
VM
PA
A0
PB
B0
PC
C0
PD
D0
PE
E0
NA
RS1
NB
RS2
NC
ND
RS3
NE
OCRF
[VCC0]
[VCC1]
[VCC2]
[VCC3]
[GND]
18
13
14
15
16
17
12
2
4
1
MOT-A
MOT-B
MOT-C
MOT-D
MOT-E
1
R2 2
5W0.1
C3 330/50
TP1
3A2
3B2
3B2
3B2
3B2
+
11
12
1
2
24
3
14
25
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
19
43
6
31
47
R3
1 R6 2
1/10W10K
1 R5 2
1 R1 2
5W0.1
2
1
SCNVREF
1/10W1K
GND
GND
GND
GND
3B2
SCNVREFA
Fig. 7.4-4. PWA-SDV
– Excitation Process of Phase A –
1 H.OFF is set to ON (High).
2 CLK signal, rotation direction DIR signal and division data (DATA 0 to 3) are input.
3 After about 10 ms, SCCLK is input.
4 IC4 outputs excitation ON according to the division data from PA1 (Pch side) and NA to NE (Nch
side). IC5 receives this excitation signal, drive and flows current to the motor.
5 The current flowing to the motor passes through the current detection resistor R2 as it is as the total
current. The total current and the CPU set current value are compared by IC5. IC5 controls the motor
drive power.
6570/5570 SCANNER
7-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7.5 Exposure Control Circuit
7.5.1
Overview
[A] The exposure control circuit is comprised of the following four blocks:
(1) Lamp regulator
This circuit applies voltage to the exposure lamp correspondent to the duty ratio of the PWM signal.
(2) CCD sensor circuit
This circuit reads the amount of light from the shading correction plate. This information is used to
compare the light intensity reflected from the original document and the light from the shading correction plate. Adjustments are made in the image processing circuit for enhancement of signals.
(3) Image processing circuit
This circuit converts the signals from the CCD into binary values and performs a series of image
processing operations such as gamma correction, shading correction, etc.
(4) Control panel
The duty ratio of PWM signal can be set at increments of 1% through the digital keys by the operator.
Note: The ON/OFF switching of the exposure lamp is carried out by a unique signal (EXPO-ON) separate from the PWM signal.
Original
Shading correction plate
Exposure lamp
Lamp
regulator
PWA-CCD
CCD sensor
PWA-CCD/PWA-SLG
PWA-SLG
A/D
Control panel
1
4
7
2 3
5 6
8 9
Image processing
circuit
Main CPU
IC37
Key input
Construction of exposure control circuit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-9
6570/5570 SCANNER
[B] The exposure control circuit has two functions:
(1) Normal mode
The duty ratio of the PWM signal is controlled at 55% (lamp voltage : 61.25V).
(2) Check mode
Through input from the digital keys, the PWM signal output is varied from 30% ~ 70% to allow the
exposure to be set arbitrarily.
7.5.2
Lamp regulator function
The figure below shows a typical characteristic diagram. Control is performed so that a voltage across
the lamp voltage proportional to the duty ratio of PWM signal is produced.
Lamp voltage
[V]
70
Actual-use range
61.25
50
Actual-use range
10
55
90
PWM duty [%]
Setting for normal operation
Characteristic diagram of the lamp regulator
7.5.3
Control section
The control section consists of the folllowing 2 blocks:
1 Scanner CPU
Comprised of software, the main CPU calculates the voltage to be applied to the lamp according to
the normal mode and check mode.
2 PWM timer circuit
This comprised by the following circuit. The exposure data is converted to PWM signals by the
scanner CPU, and output to J9-26 via IC2 from the scanner CPU PWM output terminal.
PS-ACC
S-CPU
IC2
J9-26
LRG
PWM
7407
6570/5570 SCANNER
Lamp regulator
7 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7.5.4
Lamp regulator circuit
The lamp regulator circuit ensures that illumination from the exposure lamp is constant. Any tendencies
for variances in illumination is monitored and controlled by a series of detection and comparison circuits.
Its principle control is as follows:
(1) AC115V (or 220/240V) power source is rectified to provide DC160V (or 310/340V) which is used as
the power source for the exposure lamp.
(2) The PWM1 signal for light adjustment is averaged by an integration circuit and provides reference
VS for feedback control of the lamp regulator circuit.
(3) When the oscillator circuit is triggered by EXPO-ON/OFF signal, it generates a lamp drive PWM2
signal which turns on the lamp drive transistor (Tr1), causing current I1 to flow through:
Capacitor C → Exposure lamp (L) → Primary side of T1 (P) → Lamp drive transistor (Tr1) → Capacitor C
This causes current I2 proportional to the winding ratio of T1 and the rate of change of I1 to generated
on the secondary side of T1(s).
(4) The amount of lamp current converted to detection voltage VD by a current detection circuit is compared with the smoothing signal VS of PWM1 signal from the logic circuit by a comparison circuit
whose difference signal VF is fed back to the oscillator circuit.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 11
6570/5570 SCANNER
(5)
When the lamp drive transistor (Tr1) is turned OFF, the counter electromotive force of T1 causes
current to flow along:
Primary winding of transformer T1 (P) → Freewheeling diode D1 → Exposure lamp (L) → Primary
winding of tranformer T1 (P)
This causes continuous current I3 to flow through the exposure lamp (L) regardless of the drive
transistor (Tr1) being turned ON/OFF.
Relay-SW
Rectification
circuit
AC
Thermostat
I3
Capacitor
C
Exposure lamp
(L)
D1
I2
I1
PWM2
Vcc
EXPO
ON/OFF
VD
VF
Comparison
circuit
Lamp
drive
(Tr1)
S
Oscillator circuit
P
Current
detection
T1
VS
Vcc
PC
PWA-SLG
Integration
circuit
PC
PWM1
PC: Photo coupler
Construction of lamp regulator circuit
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7.6 Outline of Control
7.6.1
Photo-voltaic conversion
The purpose of photo-voltaic conversion is to form electrical signals corresponding to the intensity of light
reflected from the original. A CCD is used for photo-voltaic conversion. CCDs are single-chip photovoltaic conversion device in which several thousands of photosensing elements several microns square
are arranged in a single line. This copier uses a CCD having 7,500 of these photosensing elements.
The photosensor comprises a P-layer, N-layer semiconductor. Optical energy generates a (–) (minus)
charge on the P-layer proportional to the optical energy and irradiation time. The charge generated at the
photosensor is transferred to the transfer area, shifted from center to right and left in the figure below
according to the transfer clock, and is output from the CCD. During this operation, in order to increase the
image transmission speed from CCD, even-numbered and odd-numbered image signals are separated
into left and right signals, and 4 channels are output in parallel.
Transfer block
Transfer area
1
2
3
4
7497 7498
7499 7500
Photosensor area
Optical energy
P-layer
N-layer
Detailed photosensor
Transfer area
Shift register
Transfer clock
Fig. 7.6-1 Principle of CCD Photo-Voltaic Conversion
7.6.2
Shading compensation
The following problems affect the voltage values obtained by photo-voltaic conversion by the CCD:
1 Variation in light distribution from the light source.
2 Light intensities vary at the CCD elements. The elements farthest from the center do not receive as
much light as those elements in the center of the CCD.
3 The photo-voltaic capacities of each of the 7,500 CCD elements are uneven.
Consequently, these problems must be compensated. This is called “shading compensation.” Shading compensation involves normalizing optical energy according to the following equation based on
already known scanned black data and white data, and compensating for uneven illuminance of the
image data and device unevenness.
(S – K)
I = k × —————
(W – K)
where,
k:
Coefficient
S:
Image data before compensation
K:
Black data (in black memory)
W:
White data (in white memory)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 13
6570/5570 SCANNER
7.7 Automatic Original-Size Detection Circuit
This circuit detects the original size (standard sizes only) using reflection-type photosensors on the base
frame and lens cover of the optical unit.
7.7.1
Principle of original-size detection
The reflection-type photosensors are located on the base frame and lens cover of the optical unit. Each
photosensor comprises an infrared light emitting diode (LED, light-emitting side) and a phototransistor
(light-receiving side). When an original is placed on the original glass, the light emitted by the LEDs is
reflected by the original and led to the phototransistor. In this way, the presence or absence of an original
is detected by whether reflected light exists or not.
[A4 Series]
[LT Series]
Original
Original
Original glass
APS
Original glass
APS
Fig. 7.7-1
7.7.2
Original size detection
(1) If the copier is set in the original size detection mode, the carriage is set at its home position.
(2) Detection is performed in an instant when the platen cover is opened, each sensor receive the
reflecting light and the condition of a matrix shown in (4) are satisfied.
(3) Original size detection is performed when the output signals from each sensor are input to the SCPU (IC7) on the scanner control PC board.
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
A5-R
B5-R
A4-R
A5
B5
B4
A3
[A4 Series]
APS-4
A5-R
B5-R
A5 A4-R
B4 B5
A5-R
APS-5
APS-1
B5-R
A5
APS-2
B5
APS-6
A4-R
B4
APS-3
A3
A3
LG
ST-R
LT-R
ST
LD
LT
[LT Series]
APS-3
ST-R
ST-R
APS-1
APS-4
ST LT-R LG
ST
LT-R
LG
APS-2
LT LD
LT
LD
Fig. 7.7-3 Sensor Detection Points
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 15
6570/5570 SCANNER
(4) Original size is determined by a combination of the presence/absence of the original at the each
locations stated in step (3). Combination charts for size determination of A4 series and LT series are
shown below.
[A4 Series]
APS-1
APS-2
1 beam sensor (No.)
APS-3
APS-4
APS-5
APS-6
A5
A5-R
A4
A4-R
A3
B5
B5-R
B4
: Original presence
blank : Original absence
: Original presence or absence
[LT Series]
1 beam sensor (No.)
APS-1
APS-2
APS-3
APS-4
ST
ST-R
LT
LT-R
LG
LD
: Original presence
blank : Original absence
* Platen SW=OFF
• Following judgement is performed by the APS sensor output signal.
Size decision :Size is displayed on the LCD panel and select a specific paper or reproduction ratio.
Size not fixed :Reproduction ratio and paper are not selected.
The carriage-1 is stay on the standby position even though the reproduction ratio is changed when
original size is changed.
* Platen SW=ON
• Keep the recognized original size (or no original state) just before the platen SW is turned on regardless the APS sensor output signal.
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 16
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Supplementary comments
• Concerning the reflecting photointerruptor:
The reflecting photointerruptor consists of an infrared diode and a phototransistor. It detects
originals by use of pulse modulation.
Original
8µsec
130µsec
LED
Phototransistor
The light emitting diode (LED) is driven by pulses with a period of 130 msec. If a signal which has
the same characteristics is received by the phototransistor, an original is determined to be present.
Pulse modulation is performed within the reflecting photointerruptor.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 17
6570/5570 SCANNER
7.8 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Original glass
(1) Remove the 2 screws and glass holder.
Note: During assembly, feed the mylar sheet under the original glass.
Glass fix
(2) Tilt the original glass up at an angle ( 1 ), and
remove in the direction of the arrow ( 2 ).
2
Glass
1
[B] Automatic paper size detector
(1) Remove the original glass, and move the carriage to the feed side.
(2) Remove the original width indicator unit.
(3) Remove the lens cover (11 screws, 1 connector).
Automatic paper-size detector unit
[A4 series]
Automatic paper-size detector unit
[LT series]
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 18
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Remove the APS cover (2 screws).
(5) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector
and remove the harness from the 3 clamps
(base side). Then remove the automatic paper
size detector.
A4 series : 6 pcs.
LT series : 4 pcs.
[C] Exposure lamp
(1) Move the carriage to the center.
(2) Remove the reflector (Upper) (2 screws).
(3) Loosen the front side screw fixing the holder.
(4) Remove the exposure lamp from the blade.
Note: When installing the exposure lamp on the
holder, face the projection of the lamp opposite to the reflector. Do not touch the glass
surface of the exposure lamp with your bare
hand.
APS cover
Clamp
Carriage
Blade
Blade
Exposure lamp
Holder
Exit side
Lamp
Protrusion
Reflector(Upper)
Reflector(Lower)
[D] Thermostat
(1) Remove the screw and draw out the thermostat from the carriage.
(2) Release the harness from the terminal, and
remove the thermostat.
Note: If the thermostat has been used once, it
should be replaced with a new one, because
it is designed basically for one-time use only.
Do not push the reset pin to reuse a thermostat that has been operated once.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 19
Thermostat
Terminal
6570/5570 SCANNER
[E]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Copy area indicator unit
Remove the rear cover.
Remove the top left cover.
Disconnect the connector from the relay harness.
(4) Remove the 8 screws fixing the indicator unit,
and then remove the indicator unit.
Indicator unit
(5) When removing the document motor, remove
the 2 screws.
(6) When removing the belt, remove the 2 screws
and the cover first.
(7) When removing the shooting plate board, remove the 2 screws, leaf springs and glass first.
Belt
Shading board
Document
motor
Plate spring
[F] Scanning motor
(1) Disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and stepped screw, then
the scanning motor bracket.
Scanning motor
Screw
Connector
(3) Remove the 3 screws and then the scanning
motor.
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 20
Scanning motor
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[G] Optical fan
(1) Remove the top left cover.
(2) Remove the indicator unit, and disconnect the
2 connectors.
(3) Remove each of the 2 screws and the fan.
Optical fan
[H] Carriage 1
(1) Remove the original glass.
(2) Remove the blindfold cover on the control panel
and top rear cover.
(3) Disconnect the power supply cable from the
clamp, disconnect the connector, and remove
the earth terminal (1 screw).
Connector
Ground terminal
(4) Move the carriage to the feed side.
(5) Remove each screw fixing carriage-1 on the
front and rear.
(6) Move carriage-1 to the center, tilt the entire
carriage-1 using the notch on the frame, and
draw out upwards to remove.
Clamp
Carriage 2
Carriage 1
[I] Mirror 1
(1) Remove carriage-1.
(2) Remove the 2 leaf springs fixing mirror 1.
Plate spring
Plate spring
Mirror 1
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 21
6570/5570 SCANNER
[J] Carriage 2 and carriage drive wire
(1) Remove the original glass, top rear cover, top
left cover, top right cover, control panel, PC
board, 2 ADF brackets and top rear frame (9
screws).
(2) Remove the top front frame (8 screws).
Rear top frame
Front top frame
(3) Remove the 11 screws, 1 connector and the
lens cover.
Lens cover
Connector
(4) Remove the 4 screws, and disconnect the 7
connectors. Then, remove the scanner control
PC board (SLG board).
(5) Loosen the wire tension bracket, and remove
the spring.
(6) Remove carriage-2.
Note: When assembling carriage-2, adjustment is
necessary.
PC board
Hook
Spring
Carriage wire
6570/5570 SCANNER
7 - 22
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(7) Remove the shaft cover (1 screw). (only on
TWD, ASD, MJD destination models)
(8) Remove the shaft and pulley assembly (1 stop
ring), and remove the wire from the pulley.
Notes: 1. When attaching the wire, make sure that
the wire is hooked on as shown in the
figure below.
2. When attaching the wire, refer to the
Service Handbook.
3. When attaching carriage-1, carriage-2
and the wire, adjustment is necessary.
CRG-2 pulley
27
CRG-2
CRG-1
Carriage drive wire
Scaning motor
Motor pulley
3GT-Z24
Idle pulley
27
Idler pulley
27
Wire windup pulley/motor deceleration pulley
39.75/3GT-Z28
[K] Mirrors 2 and 3
(1) Remove carriage-2.
(2) Remove each of the 2 leaf springs.
Mirror 2
Mirror 3
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 23
6570/5570 SCANNER
[L]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Lens unit
Remove the damp heater.
Remove the shield bracket (2 screws).
Remove the 5 screws, and disconnect the 2
connectors.
(4) Draw out the lens unit upwards.
Shield bracket
FG clamp
Notes: 1: When replacing the lens unit, do not
touch the fixing screw (arrow in the figure:
8 points).
• Pay attention to the two screws (see above figure) on the rear side (see in the figure A.)
(Front side)
(Rear side)
A
2: Also, when handling the unit, take sufficient care not to hold the adjustment section and the lens.
8070/6570/5570/4580 SCANNER
Ch_07-01.p65
24
7 - 24
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
01.6.19, 8:38 AM
3: When installing the lens unit, lens scaling adjustment is necessary (Refer to the
Service Handbook).
Installation standard
Setting holes
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Ch_07-01.p65
25
77- -24251
8070/6570/5570/4580 SCANNER
01.6.19, 8:38 AM
[M] Upper damp heater
(1) Remove the lens cover.
(2) Remove the 1 screw, disconnect the cable from
the clamp, and disconnect the 2 relay connectors. Then, remove the upper damp heater.
(3) Remove the screw fixing the damp heater for
the mirror.
Remove the clamp fixing the cable.
(4) Remove the 2 screw fixing the cable bracket.
(5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the cable. Then, remove the damp heater unit.
[N] SLG board cooling fan
(1) Remove the original glass and the lens cover.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and the harness from
the clamp, and disconnect the connector connected to the APS harness from the lens cover
to remove the fan.
[O] Home switch
(1) Remove the 2 claws fastening the home switch
mounting section on the base to remove the
home switch.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 25
Claws
6570/5570 SCANNER
8.
PRINTING
8.1 Function Outline
The laser optical system functions to irradiate the photosensitive drum with a laser beam producing a
latent image. The printer controller circuit generates the laser beam. The Laser drive board converts the
image signals to light emissions that are ultimately sent to the laser diode for irradiation.
The polygonal mirrors, the lenses, the reflective mirrors, as well as other optical elements, play a role in
directing the laser beam to the photosensitive drum.
The unit should not be disassembled in the field, as they are susceptible to dust which would deteriorate
the quality of its output.
Laser unit
Laser diode
Lens
Aperture
Cylinder lens
[Rear side]
Laser drive board
Polygonal mirror
[Exit side]
Polygonal
mirror motor
Galvanic mirror
Half mirror
fθ2 lens
Polygonal
mirror motor
drive board
Reflection mirror
HSYNC detection board
To the drum
[Front side]
Slit glass
(Laser light window)
fθ1 lens
[Feed side]
HSYNC detection mirror
Fig. 8.1-1 Laser Scanning Overview
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-1
6570/5570 PRINTING
Feed side
Rear side
Front side
PLG PCboard
Exit side
Fig. 8.1-2 Laser Optical Unit Overview
6570/5570 PRINTING
8-2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8.2 Structure
(1) Laser Unit
The laser unit comprises a laser diode, laser drive board, finite lens and aperture.
1 Laser diode and laser drive board
The laser diode controls emission of laser beams based on the laser control (ON/OFF) signals
from the laser drive board.
2 Finite lens
The finite lens focus the laser beam on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
3 Aperture
The aperture regulates the shape of the laser beam at the laser beam irradiation position.
4 LASER SAFETY
The beam of the semiconductor laser is itself extremely weak (about 120 mW), but focusing the
parallel rays results in an increase in energy to which extended exposure is hazardous.
The laser optical system of the digital plain paper copier is encased in metal which in turn is
housed in the external cover. There is thus no risk of leaks during use, nor during normal servicing.
Note, however, extreme care must be exercised when servicing involves focusing the laser. Such
operations are hazardous and must not be attempted unless you are specifically trained to work
in this area.
The warning label shown below is attached on the left side of the upper inner cover.
DANGER – LASER RADIATION WHEN OPTICAL UNIT OPEN OR DRUM UNIT REMOVED
AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
>PS<
VORSICHT – LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN DIE ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET ODER
DIE TROMMEL ENTFERNT UND DIE VERRIEGELUNG UNWIRKSAM GEMACHT WIRD.
NICHT DIREKT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
DANGER – RAYON LASER LORSQUE LE BLOC OPTIQUE EST OUVERT, LE
TAMBOUR RETIRE ET LE VERROUILLAGE HORS D’USAGE.
EVITER L’EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU RAYON.
[CAUTION]
• Do not insert tools that are highly reflective into the path of the laser beam.
• Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc.
(2) Galvanomirror
Four laser units are mounted on this scanning unit, and 4-line scanning is possible by scanning of
one plane of the polygonal mirror.
The galvanomirror controls the position of the laser beams in the secondary scanning direction so
that optimum pitch (42.3 µm) between the four laser beams can be maintained at all times.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-3
6570/5570 PRINTING
(3) Half mirror
Half mirrors are used for combining and aligning to separate optical axes the laser beams that are
emitted from the four laser units. The transmissivity and reflectivity of each half mirror are designed
so that the laser power is the same at the point that the four laser beams are combined.
Laser 1
Half mirror 1
2
Half mirror 2
3
Half mirror 3
4
1 2 3 4
6570/5570 PRINTING
8-4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Laser beams
(4) Polygonal Mirror Motor Unit
The polygonal mirror motor unit comprises a
polygonal mirror and a polygonal mirror motor.
1 Polygonal mirror motor
The polygonal mirror motor rotates the polygonal mirror at high speed as follows:
During standby: 18608.1 rpm
During copying (600 dpi): 18608.1 rpm
2 Polygonal mirror
The laser beams emitted from the laser diodes are reflected by this mirror. As the polygonal mirror is rotated by the polygonal
mirror motor, the direction of the reflected
laser light moves in sync with mirror rotation. The direction of movement is the primary scanning direction of the image with
four scans ending in one plane of the polygonal mirror as four lasers are mounted.
As the polygonal mirror has eight planes,
32 scans are completed in one rotation of
the polygonal mirror.
A
Drum
Laser beams
B
Drum
Laser beams
Drum
C
Four scans are completed by completion of steps
A to C .
Four scans are carried out on one plane of the
polygonal mirror. 32 scans can be carried out with
one rotation of the polygonal mirror.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-5
6570/5570 PRINTING
(5) fθ lens 1 and 2
These lenses perform the following compensations on the laser light reflected by the polygonal
mirror.
1 Equidistant scanning
Wide
The laser light reflected on the polygonal
mirror is scanned at the same angle as the
polygonal mirror is rotated at the same
Narrow
speed. That is, when the scan is completed,
the dot-pitch on the drum becomes the wide
spaces at both edges and the narrow
Drum
spaces in the center. So, in order to make
the dot pitch equidistant, laser light is compensated so that it is scanned on the drum
at equal speeds.
Lens 1
Lens 2
Equidistant
Mirror plane is tilted.
2 Pyramidal error compensation
The reflecting plane of the polygonal mirror is tilted in either of two directions with
respect to the perfect vertical. Deviation of
the laser light (with respect to the perfect
horizontal) caused by this reflected plane’s
pyramidal error is compensated.
3 Laser beam sectional shape
The sectional shape of the laser beam on
the drum is compensated.
Deviation
(6) HSYNC detection PC board
After the laser beams are scanned by any reflecting plane of the polygonal mirror, they are reflected
by the HSYNC detection mirror to become incident to the PIN diode on the HSYNC detection PC
board. The primary scanning synchronizing signal is formed by detection of these laser beams. The
pitch (42.3 µm) between the four laser beams and the laser beam power are detected on the drum
surface.
6570/5570 PRINTING
8-6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(7) Laser drive board
This drive board has the following functions:
1 APC control function (for compensating unevenness in the laser intensity caused by temperature)
2 Laser ON/OFF generating function
3 Function for generating synchronizing signals in the primary scanning direction
(8) Reflection mirror
The mirror reflects and guides laser light reflected by the polygonal mirror onto the drum.
(9) Slit glass
The slit glass is located at the position where the laser beam is output from the laser unit to prevent
dust inside the laser unit.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-7
6570/5570 PRINTING
8.3 Laser Diode
The laser used in this copier is an AlGaInPtype semiconductor laser. This laser outputs in the singlehorizontal mode, and its oscillation wavelength is about 685 nm. This semiconductor laser is powered by
a +5VDC power supply, and its optical output is controlled to about 2.5 mW. Output of a PIN diode for
monitoring light output built into the semiconductor laser is used for controlling this.
The semiconductor laser has the optical forwardoutput current, and monitors the current characteristics shown in the figure on the right. Emission
of light is started when the forward current reaches
or becomes greater than the threshold current. The
monitor current is disparate due to the characteristics of each of the semiconductor lasers. Optical
output must be adjusted so that it is maintained at
a constant value.
Also, as the optical output of the semiconductor
laser drops when its temperature increases, APC
is also required to maintain the optical output at a
constant value. APC is also carried out on the bias
current when the copier is not printing to improve
the optical output rise time due to the temperature
characteristics of the laser used in this copier.
Optical
output
(mW)
Low
temperature
High
temperature
Forward current
Monitor current
Current (mA)
Bias current
Threshold current
Fig. 8.3-1
Semiconductor laser
Laser power
comparison
circuit
Laser driver
circuit
Constant
optical output
Monitor output
Monitor
conversion
Fig. 8.3-2 Block diagram
Fig. 8.3-2 shows a block diagram of the semiconductor laser control circuit. The monitor output from the
semiconductor laser is controlled for each of the semiconductor lasers beforehand so that a constant
voltage is maintained when the optical output is 2.5 mW. After conversion, the voltages are fed back to
the laser power comparison circuit. Here, comparison of the laser power voltage set to the control circuit
is carried out for every single scan. As a result, the laser driver circuit increases the forward current when
laser power is insufficient. Alternately, the forward current is decreased when laser power is excessive
so that the optical current is constant. Likewise, the bias current is controlled so that it is constant.
6570/5570 PRINTING
8-8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8.4 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Laser light unit
(1) Remove the FAX glass holder, original glass
and left top cover.
(2) Slide the carriage to the feed side, and remove
the 2 fastening screws on the laser unit from
the panel holes.
(3) Remove the indicator screws, and remove the
scanner section lens cover after sliding the indicator.
(4) Disconnect the connector on the system board
side of the harness connecting the scanner logic
board and system board, and remove the cover
on the rear side.
Cover
Connector
(5) Disconnect the connector on the system board
side of the harness connecting the system
board and PLG board.
Connector
(6) Remove upper exit cover, and open the lower
exit cover.
(7) Remove the slot cover on the inside of the upper exit cover (15 screws).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-9
6570/5570 PRINTING
(8) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the system
board, and remove the 2 screws to draw out
the system electronics unit.
(9) Disconnect the 2 connectors on the PLG board
and realy connector of the harness from the
PLG board and remove the harness from the
clamp.
(10) Remove the unit positioning stay (2 screws).
Connector
Stay
Clamp
(11) Draw out the laser unit along the rail paying
attention to where you are holding it.
Note: Before you draw out the laser unit, make
sure that the connectors in step (10) are disconnected.
Notes: 1. Temporarily place the laser unit that you
removed with the motor side facing up
so that the laser unit is not subjected to a
load.
2. Take care not to dirty the slit glass of the
laser unit with fingerprints or other marks.
6570/5570 PRINTING
8 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[B] PLG board
(1) Disconnect the 4 connectors at section A (WHPLG-GLV) and section B (WH-PLG-LDR1 to 4300).
A
B
(2) Turn the laser unit over to its motor side, remove the fixing screw on the PLG board, and
disconnect the connectors at section C (WHPLG-SNS1-300) and section D (WH-PLGPOL).
Note: During this operation, prevent the connector at section A from becoming disconnected.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 11
E
C
D
6570/5570 PRINTING
9.
PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.1 General
9.1.1
Functions
This unit feeds paper which is set in the LCF, the cassette or the manual feed tray to the transfer position.
The paper feed section is mainly comprises an aligning section, large capacity feeder (LCF) and paper
feed pedestal (PFP).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9-1
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.1.2
Motor drive circuit
■ Brush motor drive circuit
• Feed motor (M32) (FED-MOT)
• Tray motor (M30) (TRAY-MOT)
• Main cleaning motor (M11) (CLN-MOT)
• Belt cam motor (M26) (TRB-CAM-MOT)
: Driven by IC39 (LGC PC board: TA8428K)
: Driven by IC37 (LGC PC board: TA8429H)
: Driven by IC58 (LGC PC board: TA8428K)
: Driven by IC2 (LGC PC board: TA8428K)
The block diagram of TA8428K is shown below.
Detector for
overheating
and overvoltage
Short-circuit
protector
Control logic
1
2
D11
D12
3
M (+)
4
5
6
7
GND
M(-)
Vcc
Vcc
DI1 and DI2 are input terminals for the signals from the microcomputer.
In the control logic section, forward and backward rotation of the motor is controlled (ON and OFF) based
on the signals from the microcomputer.
Output
Input
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
Remarks
DI1
DI2
M(+)
M(-)
H
H
L
L
Brake
L
H
L
H
CW
H
L
H
L
CCW
L
L
OFF
(high impedance)
9-2
STOP
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
■ Pulse motor drive circuit (Constant voltage bipolar type)
Aligning motor (M17) (RGT-MOT) is driven by 2SD1415A of Q2 to Q5 on the logic PC board. The circuit
is shown below.
A
DC
24V
ZDA
A
X
ZDA
QA
B
ZDB
QA
DA
ZDB
QB
DA
B
QB
DB
DB
2SD1415 X 4/STA404A
Construction of motor drive
In the case of 2-phase excitation, AB, BA, AB, and BA will be successively excited. While transistors QA
and QB are ON, current from the +24V stabilized power supply will flow into phases A and B.
Next, while QA is OFF and QA is ON, the current which flowed through phase A will be cut off owing to the
disappearance of a flow path. At this point, however, phases A and A will be inductively coupled, causing
the current from the 24VDC power supply to be diverted through diode DA to phase A, in the direction
marked X. When the currnet flowing in this direction becomes zero, current will flow through QA to excite
phase A.
At the instant when QA goes OFF, the current which flowed through phase A abruptly decreases, causing
a high voltage to appear at the collector of QA. Because of Zener diode ZDA, however, the collector
voltage is held at the Zener voltage, protecting transistor QA and diode DA.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9-3
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.1.3
Detection of the remaining amount of paper
■ Paper-empty detection
• When the LCF or the cassette has run out of paper, the LCF door is opened, or the cassette is
removed, the “ADD PAPER” symbol ↓ lights on the display panel on the copier.
■ Detection principle
• When the cassette is selected and after the START button is depressed, the tray is lifted to the feed
position and makes contact with the feed rollers. The Tray-Up Switch is directly connected to the feed
roller assembly and thus it is actuated moments after the feed rollers make contact with the paper.
After the completion of every paper-feed operation (per tray unit), the same unit is repositioned to the
down position and is removed from the feed roller assembly and thus, from the Tray-Up Switch. The
PFC measures the period of time that it takes the Tray-Up Switch of each cassette to be actuated
(turned ON) for every time that it is used. It does this for every paper feeding operation. Obviously,
the Paper Feed Control Circuit (PFC) acknowledges the differences in the duration of time it takes for
the Tray-Up Switch to actuate during every print cycle and makes calculations based on time differences every time the tray is used. These calculations are translated into icons depicting one of five
displays on the LCD panel. See illustrations below.
PFP cassette
LCF
N
Status
N=0
Display
N
Status
Empty
N=0
Empty
1<
=N<
= 125
Paper remaining
1<
=N<
= 500
Paper remaining
125<N <
= 250
Paper remaining
500<N <
= 1000
Paper remaining
250<N <
= 375
Paper remaining
1000<N <
= 2000
Paper remaining
375<N
Paper remaining
2000<N
Paper remaining
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9-4
Display
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.2 Aligning Section
9.2.1
Introduction
The aligning section aligns the leading edge of paper fed from the LCF, PFP and manual feed tray, and
transports the paper to the transfer position. This section comprises an aligning roller, paper stop switch
and its drive mechanisms (aligning motor).
(1) Aligning roller
Paper fed from the feed roller is held in contact against the aligning roller, which is at rest, to align the
leading edge. The upper and lower aligning rollers then rotate to transport paper to the transfer
position.
The aligning rollers are brushed to prevent paper dust from adhering to them.
(2) Paper stop switch
Detects that the leading edge of paper has arrived at the aligning roller.
It also detects that the trailing edge of paper has passed through the aligning roller.
In the former case, the copier detects that the aligning rollers have completed paper alignment.
The switch also uses paper jam detection.
9.2.2
Configuration and drive system
Upper aligning roller
G20
Notes
Lower aligning rolle
G
TP
TB
Z
P
TP16
TP22
: Forward rotation
: Backward rotation
: Gear
: Timing pulley
: Timing belt
: Number of teeth
: Pich (mm)
Aligning motor
G25
TB(Z58/P3)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9-5
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.2.3
Disassembly and replacement
[A] Upper aligning roller
(1) Remove the aligning motor and developer stay
front side and rear side 3 screws for each.
(2) Remove the front E-ring, bearing and bush.
(3) Slide the upper aligning to the rear, take off the
rear bushing, and then remove the upper aligning roller.
(4) When replacing the roller, also remove the 2
set screws, 2 E-rings, pulley, bearing, bush,
gear and pin.
Developer stay
Bush
E-ring
[Front side]
[Rear side]
[Rear side]
[B] Upper brush
(1) Remove the developer and one brush Fixing
screw.
(2) Remove the upper brush in the direction of the
arrow.
Brush fixing screw
[C]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Lower aligning roller
Remove the aligning unit.
Remove the paper guide (2 screws).
Remove the spring hooked on the roller end.
(2 screws).
(4) Remove the clip on the front side, and slide the
roller together with the bush and bearing to the
front side, draw out the rear side from the frame.
Then, lift the roller upwards to remove.
(5) When replacing the roller, remove the gear and
the pin.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9-6
(2)
Paper guide
Aligning roller (L)
Clip
(2)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[D] Lower brush
(1) Remove the developer and the cleaner. After
drawing out the transfer belt unit, remove the
brush fixing screw.
(2) Remove the lower brush in the direction of the
arrow.
Note: When assembling, insert the projection of
the brush securely in the hole in the rear
frame.
[E]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Aligning motor
Remove the flywheel.
Remove the waste toner transport pipe unit.
Remove the motor bracket (3 screws).
Note: When installing motor bracket, Make sure
tat the motor bracket is fastened properly
matching the embossed sections for positioning shown in the figure on the right.
Embossed section
for positioning
Motor bracket
Contact
Embossed section for positioning (fulcrum)
(4) When replacing the motor, loosen the 2 set
screws, remove the flange and pulley, and then
the 3 screws.
Note: When assembling, align the cut surface of
the pulley with the one of the shaft.
Set screw
Aligning motor
Flange
Pulley
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9-7
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[F] Paper-stop switch
(1) Remove the aligning unit.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and the bracket fixing
the paper stop switch.
(3) Disconnect the connector, remove the two
hooks, and then the paper-stop switch.
Note: When installing the switch bracket, install
the switch bracket so that the positional relationship between the actuator and switch
is as shown in the figure on the right.
Aligning unit frame
Actuator
Switch
Mounting switch
[G] Aligning unit
(1) Disconnect the connector on the rear side.
Wheel
Connector
(2) Remove the developer and the cleaner, draw
out the belt transport unit, and then remove the
pin bracket (1 screw).
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9-8
Belt transport unit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Slide the aligning unit to the front side and remove in the direction of the arrow.
Note: When installing the aligning unit, prevent the
two leaf springs from becoming bent.
1
2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9-9
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.3 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
9.3.1
Introduction
For making large volumes of copies, the large capacity feeder (LCF) is designed to stack about 4,000
sheets of copy paper.
The LCF consists of the following three main parts:
(1) Tray section
1 Elevator tray ................... The elevator tray is designed to transport the stacks of paper to the
paper feed mechanism. The unit functions to keep the paper biased
towards the feeding mechanism so that paper is always in contact with
the feed rollers. When paper supply is exhausted, the tray will be lowered.
2 Elevator mechanism ...... The wire on either side of the elevator tray are wound around (or unwound from around) the wire winding pulley by the tray motor drive to
move the elevator tray up and down.
3 Switches ......................... Switches detect at the bottom and top positions of the elevator tray
and the presence of paper.
When the belt winding pulleys rotate counter
clockwise (arrow A ), the elevator tray moves
up using the principle of a tackle.
R
F
Wire winding
pulley
A
Tray elevation gear
A
(2) Paper feeding section
This unit sends paper which is set in the LCF or the manual feed tray to the aligning section.The
paper feed secton is mainly comprised of pick-up rollers, feed rollers, separation rollers, manual-feed
switch, paper-empty switch, tray-up switch, paper-start switch and also their drive mechanism.
The drive mechanism has the feed motors for driving and the manual pick-up solenoid for up-anddown operation.
1 Pick-up roller
This roller is for feeding paper out of the manual feed tray or LCF unit to the feed roller.
The manual pickup roller feeds paper vertically.
2 Feed roller
This roller is opposite of the separation roller. It is responsible for feeding paper to the aligning
roller.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 Separation roller
This roller is responsible for allowing only one copy paper to pass through during a paper feeding
process. When more than one sheet of paper is present at the feed roller area, the tendency for
more than one paper to feed through. The separation roller reverse-rotates and that action pushes
the paper that is below the sheet that is to be fed, backwards thus not allowing it to be fed. Only
the top paper is fed through. The principle of co-efficient of friction is what allows the top sheet of
paper to be fed and not the lower sheet.
The following explains the switches for detecting paper presence, height of the tray and paper feeding position to control the respective rollers ON and OFF.
4 Manual-feed switch
Detects if paper is set in the manual feed tray. If so, manual paper feeding takes priority over
cassette paper feeding.
5 Paper-empty switch
This photointerruptor sensor detects paper in the LCF. If there is paper in the LCF, the actuator is
lifted by the paper and the sensor detects the presence of paper.
6 Tray-up switch
When the tray is lifted to allow the paper set in the LCF to contact with the LCF pick-up roller, the
tray-up switch detects the height of the tray.
7 Paper-feed switch
Detects the leading/trailing edge of paper passing through the feed roller.
The switch is also used for paper jam detection.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 11
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.3.2
Construction and drive mechanism
(1) Tray section
Tray up switch/LCF paper empty switch
LCF feed roller
LCF pick-up roller
LCF separation
roller
Elevator wire
Elevator tray
Wire fixing stay
Wire takeup pulley
Tray-bottom switch
Elevator tray
Guide pulley
Elevator wire (front side)
Wire winding
pulley
Tray elevation gear
Belt
Tray motor
Side pulley
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
Rise rotation direction
(forward direction)
9 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Paper feeding section
TB (Z105/P2)
Manual pick-up roller
TP20
Manual feed roller
Manual pick-up solenoid
Manual separation roller
G20
TP30
TP20
G22
G30
LCF pick-up roller
TP20
TP20
TB(Z57/P2)
LCF feed roller
TB(Z96/P2)
TB(Z78/P3)
TP20
LCF separation roller
Rear side
Feed motor
G20 G20
TP10
TP20
G22
TP27
TB (Z110/P2)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
G30
TP78/G18
9 - 13
Notes
: Forward rotation
: Backward rotation
G : Gear
TP : Timing pulley
TB : Timing belt
Z : Number of teeth
P : Pitch (mm)
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.3.3
Description of operation
■ Operation of elevator tray
(1) When the LCF door is closed with the power ON, the tray motor rotates in a forward direction and the
elevator tray rises.
(2) When the paper rises it pushes the LCF pick-up roller to which the tray switch and the LCF empty
switch are connected. When this happens, the motor turns OFF.
(3) The LCF pick-up roller moves down 2 to 3 mm when 10 to 20 sheets are fed. When this happens, the
tray-up switch is actuated and electrically turns on the motor that raises the tray up 2 to 3mm. This
raises the paper up to the level where it feeds efficiently.
(4) When paper supply runs out in the LCF, the empty switch's actuator falls into a hole in the tray’s
platform. When this happens, the motor is energized and is made to rotate in the direction that allows
the paper tray to lower. Simultaneously, the LCD panel displays the ADD PAPER symbol. The tray
motor stops when the LCF bottom switch is actuated.
(5) When the tray is loaded with paper, and the door closed, the motor turns ON and drives the paper
tray upward until it reaches the paper feed mechanism which turns the motor OFF.
Note: The other time the motor rotates in the direction to move the tray down is when the TRAY DOWN
key is depressed. Opening the door and then closing it allows the motor to energize and raise the
tray.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
■ Up-and-down movement of manual pick-up
roller
When the manual pick-up solenoid is energized,
the pick-up bracket is lowered and allows the
Manual pick-up roller to also lower.
When the manual pick-up solenoid is de-energized, the pick-up bracket is raised by the action of the solenoid’s spring that pulls back the
lever and thus,the pick-up roller.
Manual pick-up roller
Pick-up bracket
Spring
1
Lever 1
Manual pick-up
solenoid
Pick-up bracket
Manual pick-up roller
2
3
Manual pick-up roller
Pick-up bracket
Lever 1
Manual pick-up solenoid
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 15
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
■ LCF pick-up roller
The LCF pickup roller remains lowered due to the
force of gravity. The lower limit is fixed by the
bracket.
The tray height for the LCF is controlled by the trayup switch.
Bracket
LCF pick-up roller
■ Paper feed operation (manual feed, LCF feed)
Manual feed roller
Manual feed switch
Manual pick-up roller
Manual feed tray
Manual separation
roller
LCF paper-empty
switch / tray-up switch
Upper aligning roller
Lower aligning roller
Paper-stop switch
LCF paper-start switch
LCF feed roller
LCF separation roller
LCF pick-up roller
LCF (large capacity feeder)
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 16
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(1) Manual feed
• The manual feed switch detects the presence of paper in the manual feed tray.
• The manual pick-up solenoid is turned ON and the manual pick-up roller is lowered.
• The feed motor revolves in a backward* direction and the manual pick-up roller, manual feed
roller, and manual separation roller rotate, and paper feeding is started.
• The manual pick-up solenoid is turned OFF, the manual pick-up roller rises, the paper presses the
paper-stop switch and is aligned at the aligning rollers.
• The feed motor stops, the aligning motor turns, and the paper is transported to the transfer process.
(2) LCF feed
• When the LCF is installed, the LCF pick-up roller remains in the lowered position.
• The feed motor revolves in a forward* direction and the LCF pick-up roller, LCF feed roller, and
LCF separation roller rotate, and paper feeding is started.
• The paper presses the paper-stop switch and is aligned at the aligning rollers.
• The feed motor stops, the aligning motor turns, and the paper is transported to the transfer process. In multicopying, the next sheet is fed to the paper-start switch by the feed motor and waits.
* Forward rotation: clockwise viewed from the rear.
** Backward rotation: counterclockwise viewed from the rear.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 17
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
■ Paper separation function
Since the paper cassettes do not have separation
claws, a pair of rollers (feed roller and separation
roller) are used inside the machine, as shown in
Fig. 9.3-1.
The separation roller is connected to its shaft
through a spring joint torque limiter. The feed roller
is rotated in the direction of the arrow ( ) at the
same timing as the pick-up roller by the feed motor. The sepatation roller is driven in the direction
of the arrow (
) through the torque limiter. But
when there is no paper or only one sheet between
the rollers, the friction between the rollers or that
between the sheet and the separation roller is large
enough to force the separation roller in the direction of the arrow ( ), causing a slip in the torque
limiter.
However, if multiple-sheet feeding occurs (Fig. 9.32), since the friction between the sheets is small,
the lower sheet is forcibly separated from the upper sheet and is sent back in the direction of the
arrow (
) by the separation roller. The Upper
sheet is fed in the directino of the arrow (
) by
the feed roller.
The direction of
paper feeding
Paper-feed roller
Spring joint
(torque limiter)
Sparation roller
Fig. 9.3-1
Paper-feed roller
1
2
Separation roller
Fig. 9.3-2
Examples:
If only sheet of paper 1 arrives at the separation roller, the force of the feed roller, which is
greater than that of the separation roller, causes
the separation roller to rotate in the ( ) direction, sending the paper on to the aligning rollers.
If two sheets of paper ( 1 and 2 ) arrive at the
separation roller, the force of the respective
rollers is greater than the friction between the
sheets of paper, and the top sheet 1 is sent in
the (
) direction by the feed roller while the
bottom sheet 2 is sent in the (
) direction
by the separation roller.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 18
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.3.4
Disassembly and replacement (LCF
section)
[A] LCF door
(1) Open the LCF door, take out the 3 screws holding the hinge, and remove the LCF door.
LCF door
Hinge
[B] LCF feed cover
(1) Remove the LCF door.
(2) Remove the 5 screws.
LCF feed cover
[C] LCF unit
(1) Open the right front cover and remove the LCF
knob (2 screws).
(2) Pull the LCF release lever to move the LCF
unit toward the arrow
in the figure.
Note: Take care not to pinch your fingers.
LCF release lever
LCF knob
(3) Remove the 2 screws each at the front and rear
that fasten the LCF unit to the rails.
LFC unit
Rail(front side)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 19
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
(4) Lift the LCF unit to remove it.
LCF unit
[D] LCF fornt cover
(1) Remove the 4 screws and then remove the LCF
front cover.
Drive bracket
[E] Elevator wire
(1) Lower the elevator tray as for as possible, and
turn the power switch OFF.
(2) Remove the LCF front cover.
(3) Remove the 2 screws and the lowest PFP paper feed guide.
(4) Remove the 2 screws and drive bracket.
PFP paper feed guide unit
(5) Remove the wire winding pulleies (front and
rear sides) from the LCF unit together with the
flange.
(6) Remove the gear claw. You can now disassemble the gear and flange, and remove the elevator wire.
Elevator wire
Wire winding pully
Flange
9 - 20
Flange
Claw
Clip
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
Elevater wire
Wire winding pully
Clip
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(7) Remove the 4 clips (front and rear) fastening
the elevator wire.
LCF stay
(8) Remove the 2 elevator wire clips each on the
front and rear sides and the 4 elevator wires.
Elevator wire clips
Elevator wire
Notes: Precautions when installing the elevator
wires
1. Judging the elevator wires
The longer of the 2 elevator wires is 1
B
(LCF door cover side), and the shorter is
2 the (LCF paper feed side).
2. Taking up the elevator wires
Take up the 2 elevator wires ( 1 , 2 ) so
that the following relationships are satisfied for each of the four pulleys ( A to
D ):
A
1
Inner side
2
—
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
B
C
Inner side
D
A
2
1
Inner groove
Outer groove
D
Lower side
C
Outer side Upper side
9 - 21
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
3. Securing the elevator wire gears
Insert elevator wire 1 into the gear
groove followed by elevator wire 2 .
Gear
4. Installing the gears
Install so that the line formed by joining
the arrow marks is horizontal. If the arrow marks are out of alignment, this
causes the elevator tray to be an angle.
Flange
Horizontal
Arrow marks
[F] Tray motor
(1) Disconnect the connector, take out the 3
screws, and then remove the tray motor unit.
(2) Remove the 3 screws, and then take out tray
motor.
Note: Always carry this out with the elevator tray
lowered.
If the tray motor unit is removed while the
tray is up, the tray is in danger of dropping.
Connector
[G] LCF door switch/LCF motor switch
(1) Remove the LCF front cover.
(2) Remove the 2 connectors.
(3) Remove the 2 screws and the LCF door switch
unit.
(4) Remove the screw, the cover bracket and the
fast-on terminal.
(5) Remove the 2 screws and LCF door switch.
(6) Remove the 2 screws and LCF motor switch.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 22
Tray motor
Tray motor unit
LCF door switch
Fast-on
tarminal
LCF motor switch
Connector
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[H] Tray bottom switch
(1) Raise the elevator tray, and stop at the middle.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and the bottom switch
unit.
Bottom switch unit
(3) Remove the and connector on the tray bottom
switch from the tray bottom switch unit. You can
now remove the switch.
[I] LCF switch/PFP upper paper-stop switch
(1) Pull out the LCF unit.
(2) Remove the handle of front side and guide lever (1 screw for each).
Tray bottom switch
Connector
Guide lever
Handle
(3) Take off the top screw of link, and then remove
the 2 guides (2 screws for each).
Guide
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 23
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
(4) Disconnect the connector, take out the 2
screws, and then remove the LCF switch
bracket. Take out the 2 screws, and then remove LCF switch.
(5) Take out the 2 screws, and then remove the
PFP upper paper-stop switch bracket. Disconnect the connector and take out the screw, and
then remove PFP upper paper-stop switch.
LCF switch
PFP upper paper stop switch
[J] Manual pick-up roller
(1) Remove the clip and draw out the shaft from
the holder arm by pressing down the manual
pickup roller. Then remove the pickup roller.
Clip
Pulley
Manual feed pick-up roller
Holder arm
Clip
[K]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Manual feed roller
Draw out the LCF unit.
Remove the clip of the manual pick-up roller.
Take off the clip of the manual feed roller on
the front, and then remove the manual feed
roller from the holder arm with the shaft.
[L]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Manal separatin roller
Draw out the LCF unit.
Remove the front paper guide (1 screw).
Remove the clip and draw out the manual separation roller from the shaft.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
Timing belt
Manual feed pick-up roller
One-way built-in side
9 - 24
Paper guide
Clip
Manual feed roller
[L]
Clip
Manual separation roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Notes: Observe the following when assembling the
pick-up roller, feed roller, and separation
roller:
1. Mount the timing belt securely on the
pulleys.
2. Mount the timing belt in the correct position.
3. Clips are to engage securely into the
grooves in the shafts.
4. Check that there is no oil, on the timing
belt, pulley, or roller surfaces.
Manual separation roller
Spring joint
[M] LCF pick-up roller
(1) Open the LCF door.
(2) Remove the clip and remove the weight from
the front side.
(3) Slide the shaft and remove the pick-up roller.
Papar guide
Weight
LCF pick-up roller
Clip
[N] LCF feed roller
(1) Open the LCF door and remove the paper guide
(2 screws).
(2) Remove the clip and draw out the LCF feed
roller from the shaft.
Note: The roller can be drawn out more easily from
the shaft by pressing the separation roller
shaft down.
LCF feed roller
Clip
Clip
LCF separation roller
[O] LCF separation roller
(1) Open the LCF door and remove the paper guide
(2 screws).
(2) Remove the clip and take the LCF separation
roller off the shaft.
Note: The roller can be drawn out more easily from
the shaft by pressing the pick-up roller up,
and pressing the separation roller shaft
down.
LCF pick-up roller
Weight
Built-in
one-way
clutch
LCF feed roller
LCF feed roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 25
Built-in spring joint
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[P] Feed motor
(1) Remove the LCF unit out and remove the
manual feed tray.
(2) Disconnect the connector, remove the 3 screws
and the timing belt from the pulley to remove
the motor bracket.
(3) Remove the feed motor (3 screws).
Feed motor
[Q] Varistor
(1) Draw out the LCF unit and remove the varistor
(2 screws).
Notes: 1. When assembling, attach the short lead
directly to the paper guide.
2. Tighten the screws securely.
[R] Manual pick-up solenoid
(1) Draw out the LCF unit.
(2) Remove the rear paper guide (1 screw).
Paper guide
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 26
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Disconnect the connector, take out the 2
screws, and then remove the manual pick-up
solenoid.
Note: When assembling, fasten the screws diagonally as shown below.
Manual pick-up solenoid
Solenoid
Screws
[S] Manual-feed switch
(1) Remove the paper guide.
(2) Disconnect the connector, take out the screw,
and then remove the switch bracket.
(3) Release the 4 hooks from the switch bracket,
and then remove the manual-feed switch.
Connector
Manual feed switch
[T] LCF paper-empty switch/tray-up switch
(1) Open the LCF cover.
(2) Disconnect the 2 connectors, and remove the
screw to remove the switch bracket.
(3) Unhook the 4 claws to remove the switches.
Connector
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 27
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[U] LCF paper-start switch
(1) Draw out the LCF unit and remove the manual
feed tray unit.
(2) Remove the paper guide (2 screws on the rear
side).
(3) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector
and remove the switch bracket.
(4) Unhook the 4 claws to remove the switches.
[V] Manual feed tray unit
(1) Draw out the LCF unit and disconnect the 2
connectors on the rear side.
Connector
(2) Remove the 2 screws fixing the manual feed
tray unit.
(3) Bring the width guide towards the outside, and
draw out the manual feed tray unit while pressing the manual pick-up roller down.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 28
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.4 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
9.4.1
Introduction
The paper feed pedestal (PFP) consists of three front-loading cassettes, which can feed paper independently.
The PFP consists of the following components.
1 Font-loading cassette ......... A cassette which allows paper to be loaded from the front.
2 Elevator mechanism .......... The paper in the cassette is loaded on top of the tray. The tray motor can
raise tray so that the top sheet of paper in the tray is in the pick-up
position.
3 Paper feed mechanism ...... The paper feed mechanism consists of the pick-up roller, feed roller,
separation roller and aligning roller which transport the paper from the
cassette to the aligning roller in the copier.
4 Switch ................................ Switches (sensors) detect whether the cassette is inserted, whether there
is any paper, the tray height and the movement of paper on the paper
feed path.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 29
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 30
Lower tray
PFP lower tray-up switch
PFP lower paper-empty
switch
Middle tray
Middle elevator
PFP middle tray-up switch
PFP middle paper-empty
switch
Upper tray
PFP middle pick-up
roller
MIddle feed clutch
Upper elevator
Upper feed clutch
Lower elevator
PFP lower pick-up roller
PFP upper paper-start switch
PFP upper separation roller
PFP middle separation
roller
PFP middle paper-start
switch
PFP middle feed roller
PFP lower aligning
rollers
PFP lower paper-stop
switch
PFP middle paper-stop
switch
Middle aligning clutch
PFP middle aligning
rollers
Upper aligning clutch
PFP upper aligning
rollers
PFP upper paper-stop
switch
Lower aligning clutch
PFP lower separation
roller
PFP lower paper-start switch
PFP lower feed roller
Lower feed clutch
PFP upper pick-up roller
PFP upper tray-up switch
PFP upper paper-empty switch
PFP upper feed roller
9.4.2
Component names
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.4.3
General operation
■ Explanation of operation
[A] From power-on to the ready state
(1) When the copier power is switched ON, power is also supplied to the PFP. At this time, the PFP tray
motors (M27), (M28) and (M29) are turned ON in the CCW direction causing each tray to start to rise.
When the rising trays switch on the PFP tray-up switches (S30), (S34) and (S38) (L→H), the PFP
tray motors (M27), (M28) and (M29) stop and the trays no longer move. At this time, if the PFP paperempty switches (S29), (S33) and (S37) are OFF (L), there is assumed to be no paper and the PFP
tray motors (M27), (M28) and (M29) are switched ON in the CW direction, lowering the trays.
When the PFP paper-empty switches (S29), (S33) and (S37) aer ON (H), it is assumed that there is
paper in the tray and the tray stays in the raised position for two seconds. If there is no copy request
during this time, the tray is lowered.
(2) If the cassette is not inserted when the power is switched ON, the PFP tray motor for that level cannot
be switched ON. When the cassette is inserted, the tray will rise and check for paper.
(3) If any of the PFP paper-stop switches (S27), (S31) or (S35) are ON when the power is switched ON
(meaning that there is paper in the transprot mechanism), the copier goes into a jam state and does
not operate until the paper removed.
[B] Ready state
(1) After the trays are checked for paper by the above tray movements, the copier goes into the ready
state. In the ready state, the trays are left in the lowered position.
(2) If the cassette is removed and inserted while in the ready state, the tray movements are performed to
check for paper.
[C] From copy start to copy completion
(1) When the PRINT key is pressed, the copier sets the CRUN (copier running) signal “H” and turns ON
the developer motor (M16), drum motor (M12), heat roller motor (M18), etc. When the CRUN signal
goes to “H”, the PFP turns ON the selected PFP tray motor (M27), (M28) or (M29) in the CCW
direction and starts to raise the tray. 0.3 seconds after the CRUN signal goes to “H”, the pedestal
motor (M31) is turned ON.
(2) When the rising tray turns ON the PFP tray-up switch (S30), (S34) or (S38), the tray stops. At this
point the paper-ready signal PRDY is returned to the copier (L→H).
(3) The copier outputs the RQF (paper feed request) signal (L→H).
(4) When the PFP receives the RQF signal, it sets the PRDY signal to “L” (BUSY) and starts to feed
paper.
(5) When the copier detects the PRDY signal state changing to Low, it assumes that the RQF signal was
received, and resets RQF to Low.
(6) The paper is aligned initially by the PFP aligning roller and then is aligned again by the copier’s
aligning roller.
(7) When the trailing edge of the paper passes the PFP paper-start switch (S28), (S32) or (S36), the next
sheet of paper is ready to be fed so the PRDY signal is set to “H”.
If subsequent paper feeding is required, the copier sets the RQF signal to High. This is repeated for
the required number of copies.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 31
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
(8) For multiple copying, paper is fed so as to keep the distance between the sheets of paper constant.
Consequently when the previous sheet of paper is being aligned by the copier’s aligning roller, the
next sheet is being fed into the transport mechanism by the PFP. When the preceding sheet is
stopped, the next one is also stopped. When the preceding sheet restarts, the next one also restarts.
This maintains a constant spacing between the sheets of paper.
(9) When copying is complete, the copier sets the CRUN signal to “L”. When the CRUN signal goes to
“L”, the PFP turns OFF the pedestal motor (M31) and starts the PFP tray motor (M27), (M28) or
(M29) in the CW direction to lower the tray.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 32
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Signals at the copier side
Signals at the PFD
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 33
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
Internal signals
H
L
L
H
H
L
H
PURGC
PURGT
PMRGC
PMRGT
PMFED
PMFDC
PFP
PMTOP
PMTRM
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PSTP-SW ON
(PRDY)
(RSTART)
(RQF)
(CRUN)
L
0
0.31
1.04
0.89
0.88
tray-up
0.88
brake
1.62 1.63
1.62 1.63
1.98
2.13
1.32
1.32
1.59
1.61
1.98
1.86
1.79
1.72
3.18
3.11
tray-down
2.81 3.05
2.68
2.61
2.43
2.80
3.05
3.58
3.65
4.20
stop
5.48
Timing chart for feeding two A4 sheets of paper from the middle cassette
2.27
2.13
2.73
2.67
2.41
2.41
2.14
2.20
1.95
2.26
2.20
1.79 2.14 2.15
1.32 1.62
1.30 1.33 1.76 2.02
1.24
0.89 0.90
0.89 0.90
5.47
Signals at the copier side
Signals at the PFD
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 34
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Internal signals
H
L
L
H
L
H
PURGC
PURGT
PMRGC
PMRGT
PMFED
PMFDC
PFP
PMTOP
PMTRM
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PSTP-SW ON
(PRDY)
(RSTART)
(RQF)
(CRUN)
L
0
0.33
1.07
1.07
0.90
tray-up
0.90
brake
1.66 1.67
1.66 1.67
2.01
2.16
2.35
1.35
1.35
1.62
1.65
2.49
2.46
2.86
2.74
2.67
3.08
3.23
3.16
3.69
3.62
tray-down
3.08
4.30
stop
5.53
Timing chart for feeding two LT sheets of paper from the middle cassette
2.16
2.31
2.18
2.24
1.99
2.02
1.91
1.83
1.74
1.84
2.85
2.77
2.70
2.45
2.30
1.35 1.36 1.67 1.79
2.18 2.19
1.33
2.06
1.27
0.91 0.92
0.91 0.92
5.52
■ Abnormality detection
[A] Jam detection
(1) A paper misfeed in PFP is detected under the following conditions:
1 When the PFP paper-start switch (S28), (S32) or (S36) does not come ON within 1.6 seconds of
the shart of paper feeding.
2 When the leading edge of the paper does not pass the PFP paper-stop switch within a constant
time.
(2) To clear a jam, slide the LCF unit, remove all paper from the transport mechanism and then close the
front cover. If any of the PFP paper-stop switches (S27), (S31) or (S35) are ON when the door is
closed, it is assumed that there is still paper in the transport mechanism and the jam is not cleared.
(3) When a jam occurs in the PFP during multiple copying, paper fed prior to the jammed paper will be
copied normally.
[B] Service call
(1) If the PFP tray-up switch (S30), (S34) or (S38) does not come ON within two seconds of the tray’s
starting to rise at the following times: when the power is turned on, removing and inserting the cassette or starting to copy; then that cassette can no longer be used and “Add paper” will appear on the
message display.
(2) In order to clear the above condition, the cassette must be removed and installed or the power must
be switched OFF and ON (It will not be cleared by opening closing the door.).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 35
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
*: Branch according to each
level's PFP paper-empty switch
(paper-empty detection).
Only when a
cassette with no
NO
paper is selected
C1
*
C2
All motors and
clutches OFF
PFP paper-empty
switch ON?
"ADD PAPER" flashing
YES
Is the copier's CRUN
signal "H"?
"ADD PAPER"
symbol flashes
NO
YES
PFP tray motor CW ON
7
Two-second delay
13
NO
Lower
tray
Have two
seconds passed since tray
stopped?
YES
PFP tray motor CW ON Tray lowers
Two-second delay
13
PFP tray motor OFF
Tray stops
PFP tray motor OFF
Cassette switch OFF?
Tray
stop
NO
YES
Cassette switch ON?
NO
YES
5
"ADD PAPER" no
longer flashing
6
In the copier's
CRUN signal "H"?
Standby
Paper feed standby
NO
Door open?
YES
10
1
NO
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
YES
9 - 36
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10
3
Paper feed standby
PFP tray motor
CCW ON
PFP tray-up
switch ON?
Tray rises
YES
PFP tray motor OFF
NO
Have two
seconds passed since the tray
started to rise?
YES
All motors and
clutches OFF
Tray stops
7
NO
"ADD PAPER" display
Pedestal motor ON?
13
YES
NO
NO
Have 0.3 seconds
passed since the copier's CRUN
signal become "H"?
Have 0.3 seconds
passed since pedestal motor
came ON?
NO
YES
Pedestal motor ON
YES
NO
3
PFP tray motor OFF?
3
4
YES
PRDY signal goes
to "H" (READY)
C3
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 37
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
C3
Was there a paper
feed request? (Copier's RQF
signal="H")
Waiting for
paper
feeding
NO
Copying
completed?
(CRUN="L")
PRDY signal goes to "L"
(BUSY)
YES
Paper feeding
completed
Paper feeding
Feed clutch ON
PFP paper-start
switch ON?
Paper
feeding starts
Have 1.6 seconds
passed since feed clutch
came ON?
NO
YES
Jam
NO
12
NO
YES
Leading-edge
check time over?
NO
PFP paper-stop
switch ON?
NO
YES
Jam
Delay for the
aligning period
9
Feed clutch OFF
9
Aligning clutch ON
Copier's paper-stop
switch ON?
YES
NO
Leading edge
check time over?
Delay for
aligning period
Aligning clutch OFF
C4
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 38
NO
YES
Jam
9
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
C4
(The ON/OFF signal for the
copier's aligning motor)
NO
Is the copier's
RSTART signal "L"?
YES
Aligning clutch ON
PFP paper-stop
switch OFF?
NO
YES
Delay from the trailing
edge of paper passing
PFP paper-stop switch
(PFP paper-stop switch
off) until it has cleared
the aligning roller.
Aligning clutch OFF
4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 39
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
12
Paper feeding
completed
Aligning clutch ON
Pedestal motor OFF
PFP tray motor CW ON Tray lowers
Copying started?
(Copier's CRUN="H")
YES
PFP tray motor OFF
Tray stops
NO
NO
50 msec. delay
Have two seconds
passed since PFP tray motor
CW came ON?
Paper feeding
standby
YES
PFP tray motor OFF
Tray stops
10
5
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 40
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9
Jam
All motors and
clutches OFF
"CLEAR PAPER"
flashing
NO
Door open?
YES
NO
Door closed?
YES
PFP paper-stop
switch ON?
YES
NO
"CLEAR PAPER"
goes OFF
6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 41
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9.4.4
Configuration and drive system
The paper feed pedestal (PFP) consists of the cassettes, pick-up rollers, feed rollers separation rollers,
aligning rollers and their associated drive mechanisms.
● Feed motor system
The PFP pick-up, PFP feed, PFP separation rollers in the cassettes and PFP aligning rollers are
driven by the pedestal motor.
● Tray-up motor system
Raises and lowers the trays.
PFP upper aligning unit
G : Gear
PFP upper aligning roller
TP : Timing pulley
TB : Timing belt
: Fixed to the shaft
G21
G35
Drive unit
G15
G30
G30
Upper aligning clutch
PFP upper feed unit
G25
TP25/Z28
PFP upper feed roller
PFP middle aligning roller
r
le
PFP upper
rol
up
separation
cki
p
roller
er
pp
Pu
PF
TP20
G22
G21
TB
G20
G35
TP25/G28
G30
G15
G30
Middle aligning clutch
G30
G25
G30
G25
Upper feed
clutch
G25
TP20
TB
G25
G25
TB
TP20
G20
PFP middle feed roller
PFP middle feed roller
TP25/G28
G22
PFP lower aligning roller
G20
G21
TB
TB
G25
G25
G35
G15
G25
G25
Lower aligning clutch
TP20
TB
G22
G20
TB
G10
G25G25
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
G25
G30
Lower feed clutch
9 - 42
TP20
G30
G25
G64/TP28/
TP25/G28
ler
rol
PFP lower
-up
separation
ick
p
roller
er
ow
Pl
PF
TP20
TB
PFP lower feed roller
PFP lower feed roller
TP25/G28
Pedestal motor
TB
G25
G30 G20
Middle feed
clutch
G30
TP20
G30
TP25/G2R
G30
ller
o
PFP middle
pr
k-u
separation
pic
e
l
roller
idd
Pm
PF
TP20
G20
TB
TP20
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.4.5
Explanation of operation
■ Cassette tray up-and down operation
The previous paper feeding method was for the pick-up roller to lower itself on to the paper and feed at
forward. With the paper feed pedestal, the paper-feed elevator mechanism raises the tray at the base of
the cassette to the pick-up roller’s paper feed position to feed paper.
Gear15
Gear20
Gear35
Spring
Gear144
Wheel 28/gear14
Elevator
B
Gear25
Cassette protrusion
Pusher
Tray motor
A
Elevator lever
Spring
Raising the tray
• The tray motor rotates in the direction of the arrow (
).
• Worm wheel 28 rotates in the direction of the arrow (
). Gear 14 is connected so it also rotates in
the same direction.
• When gear 35 rotates in the direction of the arrow (
) the spring tightens and gear 15 and 20
rotate in the same direction.
• Gear 144 rotates in the direction of the arrow (
) raising the elevator via the shaft and pushing up
the cassette tray.
Lowering the tray
• The tray motor rotates in the direction of the arrow (
).
• Worm wheel 28 and gear 14 rotate in the direction of the arrow (
).
• Gears 35, 15 and 20 rotate in the direction of the arrow (
).
• Gear 144 rotates in the direction of the arrow (
), lowering the elevator via the shaft and lowering
the cassette tray.
Lowering the tray when the cassette is removed
The tray is lowered as follows when the cassette is removed with the tray in the raised position:
• The protrusion on the front side of the cassette lowers the elevator lever pusher as the cassette is
removed (arrow A).
• The gear at the tip of the elevator lever moves in a CCW direction (arrow B), engaging gear 25 which
rotates in a CW direction.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 43
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
• When gear 20 rotates in a CCW direction (
), the spring loosens and gear 15 becomes free.
• As gear 15 becomes free, gear 144 is pulled in a CCW direction (
) by its spring, lowering the
elevator.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 44
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
■ PFP feed roller and PFP separation roller release operation
The PFP feed roller and PFP separation roller have a releasing mechanism to enable jams to be cleared
if a paper misfeed occurs with the leading edge of the paper not clear of the PFP feed roller. This releasing mechanism prevents the paper from ripping inside the copier which would otherwise happen if the
cassette was removed to clear a jam with the paper held between the PFP feed roller and PFP separation roller.
Spring B
PFP feed roller
PFP separation
roller
Spring A
Pressure lever
Cassette rib
D
C
Cassette
Set lever
C
D
Set lever
Cassette rail
Pressure lever
Spring A
With the cassette installed
When the cassette is inserted, the PFP separation roller is pushed up against the PFP feed roller by the
pressure lever connected to spring A . At this time, the set lever is pushed by the cassette rib, and
rotates in the
direction and is not in contact with the pressure lever.
Spring B
PFP feed roller
PFP separation
roller
Pressure lever
Set lever
Spring A
Pressure lever
Set lever
Spring A
With the cassette removed
When the cassette is removed, the set lever is rotated in the (
) direction by spring B . Position D
of the set lever pushes up at position C of the pressure lever, causing it to rotate in a CCW direction
(
), separating the PFP separation roller from the PFP feed roller.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 45
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
■ Cassette insertion operation
When the cassette is inserted into the paper feed
pedestal, the cassette latch pushes up the lever
arm, lowering the PFP pick-up roller.
(The roller does not lower itself onto the paper in
the cassette.)
Rear side
PFP tray-up switch
(S30)
PFP paper-empty switch
(S34)
(S29)
(S38)
(S33)
(S37)
Pick-up arm
Actuators
Pick-up roller
Cassette latch
Lever arm
Front side
The cassette switches on the rear side detect
whether a cassette is inserted or not.
Cassette switch
Cassette
Actuator
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 46
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
The PFP tray motor (M27), (M28) or (M29) turns
ON and raises the cassette tray when the cassette
switch detects that a cassette is installed. The paper on the tray contacts with the PFP pick-up roller,
which pushes up the roller. When the pick-up arm
is detected by the tray-up switch (S30), (S34) or
(S38), the tray motor turns OFF and the tray stops.
This position becomes the paper-feed position.
If there is paper on the tray, the actuator at the
center of the PFP pick-up roller is also detected by
the PFP paper-empty switch (S29), (S33) or (S37).
If there is no paper on the tray, then the actuator
enters the hole in the tray (only at the position of
the actuator) and does not reach the PFP paperempty switch detection position, indicating that there
is no paper.
If no copy is started, the tray is lowered two seconds after the tray reaches the paper feed position.
PFP tray-up switch
PFP paper-empty switch
Actuator
Pick-up roller
Pick-up arm
Cassette tray
Paper
Cassette base
Fig 9.4-1 In the case where there is paper
(the actuator is detected)
PFP tray-up switch
PFP paper-empty switch
PFP pick-up roller
Pick-up arm
Tray hole in the
actuator position
Cassette tray
Actuator
Cassette base
Fig 9.4-2 In the case where there isn't paper
(the acutuator isn't detected)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 47
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
■ Paper feed operation
When the PRINT key is pressed on the control panel:
• The PFP tray motor (M27), (M28) or (M29) corresponding to the selected cassette rotates to CCW
direction raising the cassette tray until the paper on the tray contacts the PFP pick-up roller. At this
point the tray stops.
• The pedestal motor (M31) rotates, the feed clutch corresponding to the selected cassette comes ON
and the pedestal motor (M31) drives the PFP pick-up, PFP feed and PFP separation rollers which start
to feed paper from the cassette.
• The leading edge of the paper is detected by the PFP paper-start switch (S28), (S32) or (S36). If the
PFP paper-stop switch (S27), (S31) or (S35) is ON, then the paper stops at this point. If the switch is
OFF, the paper continues.
• When the leading edge of the paper is detected by the PFP paper-stop switch (S27), (S31) or (S35),
it is aligned by the stationary PFP aligning roller.
• A fixed period of time after the PFP paper-stop switch (S27), (S31) or (S35) detects the leading edge
of the paper, the feed clutch goes OFF and the PFP pick-up, PFP feed and PFP separation rollers
stop. Aligning is complete.
• Next, the aligning clutch (CL7), (CL8) or (CL9) comes ON and the pedestal motor (M31) drives the
PFP aligning roller to transport the paper to the copier.
• The paper is aligned again by the copier’s aligning roller and transported to the copy process.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 48
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9.4.6
Disassembly and replacement
[A] Cassettes (upper, middle, and lower)
(1) Pull out the cassette, take out the 2 stopper
screws, and then remove the cassette.
* Repeat the procedure for the upper, middle and lower cassettes.
Cassette
[B] PFP feed unit (upper, middle, and lower)
(1) Pull out the LCF unit.
(2) Slightly draw out the cassettes corresponding
to the feed units of each of the top, middle and
lower cassettes from a loaded state.
(3) Remove the 2 screws.
(4) Pull out the PFP feed unit.
Note: When installing, after installing the feed unit,
put in the cassette.
*
There are three PFP feed units (upper, middle
and lower), with identical units used for the
upper and middle units.
The PFP aligning roller and PFP paper stop
switch are not attached to the lower unit.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 49
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[C] PFP pick-up roller (upper, middle, and
lower)
(1) Remove the PFP feed unit.
(2) Press the arm in the direction of allow ( ) to
remove the PFP pick-up roller from the arm and
then take off the PFP pick-up roller from the
timing belt.
PFP pick-up roller
Preseparation
roller guide
Arms
PFP pick-up roller
PFP pick-up roller
Timing belt
PFP feed unit
Arm
[D] PFP feed roller/PFP separation roller
(upper, middle, and lower)
(1) Remove the pre-separation roller guide (2
screws). See Fig. [C].
(2) Take out the clips and then remove the rollers
from the shafts.
PFP separation roller
PFP feed roller
PFP feed roller
Guide
Clips
With built-in
spring joint
[E] PFP aligning roller (metallic roller) (upper,
and middle)
(1) Remove the 3 E-rings, and the gear, pin, collar, and bushing.
(2) Remove the opposite E-ring and bushing.
Note: When assembling, be sure to keep to the
mounting direction of the gear and collar as
shown below.
PFP separation roller
Bushing
Collar
Pin
Gear
Bushing
E-ring
PFP aligning rollers
E-ring
E-rings
Collar
Gear
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 50
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Slide the whole roller in the direction of arrow
A, lift out one shaft and then remove the metalic
roller.
(4) When replacing the roller, remove the E-ring,
gear, and pin.
Note: When assembling, be sure to keep to the
mounting direction of the gear as shown
below.
PFP aligning roller
(metallic roller)
Gear
E-ring
Pin
Rubber roller
Gear
[F]
E-ring
PFP aligning roller (rubber roller) (upper
Gear
and middle)
(1) Remove the metal roller.
(2) Remove the spring, E-ring, and bushing on
each end.
(3) Remove the rubber roller.
(4) When replacing the rubber roller, remove the
E-ring, gear and pin.
Notes: Precaution for assembling
1. Spring
Front : Yellow, Rear : black
2. Gear mounting direction
E-ring
E-ring
Pin
Spring, E-ring,
and bushing
E-ring
Spring
Bushing
PFP aligning roller
(rubber roller)
Gear
[G] PFP paper-stop switch (upper and middle)
(1) Remove the pre-separation roller guide. See
Fig. [C].
(2) Take off the 2 E-rings, gear pin and bushing at
the rear of the separation roller shaft.
(3) Pull out the separation roller with its shaft toward the front.
E-ring
Gear
Stay guide
fixing screws
Pin,E-ring,bushing
Separation roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 51
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
(4) Take out the 4 screws each at the front and
rear and remove the stay guide.
Note: When removing the stay guide, pay attention to the harness fastening the guide.
Stay guide
(5) Take out the screw, disconnect the connector
and then remove the PFP paper-stop switch.
PFP paper-stop switch
Connector
PFP paper-stop switch
[H] PFP paper-start switch (upper, middle, and
lower)
(1) Remove the stay guide.
(2) Disconnect the connector, take out the 2 screws
and then remove the switch bracket.
(3) Release the 4 hooks from the bracket and then
remove the PFP paper-start switch.
PFP paper-start switch
Connector
Clips
PFP paper-start switch
[I]
PFP tray-up switch/PFP paper-empty
switch (PWA-F-PEM-700) (upper, middle
and lower)
(1) Remove the PFP feed unit.
(2) Take out the E-ring and bushing, then slide the
PFP pick-up roller unit in the direction of arrow
A , extract the bushing, take off the timing belt
from the pulley and then remove the PFP pickup roller unit.
E-ring
Bushing
PFP pick-up
roller unit
A
Timing belt
Bushing
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 52
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Remove the switch cover (1 screw).
Switch cover
(4) Take out the screw, disconnect the connector
and then remove PWA-F-PEM-700.
PFP tray-up switch
Connector
PFP paper empty switch
Note: When installing the PFP pick-up roller unit,
remember to fit the spring in position.
Spring
[J] PFP upper aligning unit
(1) Pull out the LCF unit.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and pull the PFP upper
aligning unit out to the paper feed side.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 53
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[K] PFP upper aligning roller (metallic roller)
(1) Remove the PFP upper aligning unit.
(2) Remove the 3 E-rings, gear, pin, collar and
bush.
(3) Remove the E-ring and bush on the opposite
end.
Note: When assembling, pay attention to the
mounting direction of the gear and collar.
PFP upper aligning roller
(metal roller)
PFP upper aligning roller
(rubber roller)
Pin
Collar
Gear
Bushing
PFP upper aligning roller
(metallic roller)
Gear
Pin
E-ring
Gear
Gear
Collar
E-ring
E-ring
E-ring
[L] PFP upper aligning roller (rubber roller)
(1) Remove the PFP upper aligning unit.
(2) Take out the spring, E-ring, and bushing on
each end and then remove the rubber roller.
(3) When replacing the rubber roller, remove the
E-ring, gear and pin.
Notes: Precaution for assembling
1. Spring
Front : Yellow, Rear : Black
2. Gear mounting direction
PFP upper aligning roller
(rubber roller)
Gear
Pin
Gear
E-ring
E-ring
[M] PFP tray motor (upper, middle, and lower)
(1) Remove the PFP inner cover.
(2) Remove the harness from the harness clamp
(unnecessary for the upper tray).
(3) Disconnect the connector.
(4) Remove the motor bracket (3 screws).
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 54
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Remove the 2 gear units (2 screws).
(6) Remove the PFP tray motor (3 screws).
Tray motor
Motor fixing screws
Gear units
[N] Feed clutch/aligning clutch (upper, middle
and lower)
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector.
(3) Loosen the setscrew holding the clutch.
[O] Pedestal motor
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector and then remove the
2 screws.
Spring
PC board
Bracket
Aligning
clutch
Pedestal
motor
Feed clutch
Cassette
switch
connector
[P] Cassette switch (upper, middle, and lower)
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Unhook the 2 switch claws from the cassette
rail, disconnect the connector, and then remove
the cassette switch.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 55
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
[Q] PFP drive unit
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the harness from the 2 harness clamps
and then the bracket (2 screws).
(3) Remove the board (2 screws and 1 locking
support).
(4) Remove the spring from the waste toner transport pipe.
(5) Disconnect the feed clutch, aligning clutch and
cassette switch connectors (9 connectors).
(6) Disconnect the pedestal motor connector.
(7) Remove the harness from the 3 harness
clamps.
(8) Remove the 8 screws, and draw out the PFP
drive unit towards you to remove.
6570/5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM
9 - 56
PC board
Spring
Bracket
Aligning
clutch
Feed clutch
Pedestal
motor
Cassette
switch
connector
(Outside)
(Inside)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10. DRUM-RELATED SECTION
10.1 Construction
Main charger
Discharge LED
Main charger wire cleaner
Drum
Transfer belt drive roller
Transfer belt
Recovery auger
Transfer belt follower roller
Lower damp heater
Transfer belt cleaning brush
Lower damp heater cover
Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller
In this section, the drum-related parts including the drum are described. Construction of the parts is as
follows:
•
•
•
•
Drum
Main charger
Ozone filter unit—Slot exhaust, exhaust fan motor
Discharge LED
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 1
6570/5570 DRUM
10.2 Functions
(1) Drum
The drum comprises a drum-shaped, Aluminum base coated with an organic photosensitive element
(photoconductor) film. The principle of “Photoconductivity” indicates that insulating properties of the
material are evidenced in the dark. Likewise, its conductive properties are evidenced in the presence
of light.
(2) Main Charger
The main charger is configured by stretching a special wire between two insulation blocks provided
at both ends of a u-shaped metal bracket. When high voltage is applied to this charger wire, the air
around the wire is ionized (electrostatically charged). The ionized air is attracted to the drum’s surface. This phenomenon is referred to as “corona discharge.” In the dark, the surface of the drum is
negatively (minus) charged using the principle of corona discharge.
(3) Charger wire cleaner
The charger wire cleaner moves backwards and forwards to clean the charger wire after the power is
turned ON and after more than 2000 continuous copies have been made since the door switch is
turned ON or from the previous cleaning operation.
(4) Discharge LED
“Discharge” refers to the process of reducing or eliminating the electrostatic charge left on the photosensitive element after the charging and the transfer processes. The function of the discharge LED is
to lower the electrical resistance of the photosensitive surface that was left over after the exposure
and transfer processes. The LED device is a light source. The LED has two effects, a cleaning effect
and “pre-exposure” effect. The cleaning effect neutralizes and eliminates the residual charge on the
surface of the photosensitive element while the pre-exposure effect maintains a fixed photosensitive
surface potential before the charging process is again initiated.
6570/5570 DRUM
10 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10.3 Disassembly and Replacement
Thermistor bracket
[A] Drum
(1) Remove the cleaner unit (Refer to 13.3 [A].).
(2) Disconnect the connector from the drum thermistor.
(3) Remove the thermistor bracket (1 screw).
(4) Rotate the cam until it locks.
(5) Remove the 2 drum shaft fixing screws.
(6) Draw out the drum shaft from the front side.
Connector
Drum thermistor
Cam
(7) Remove the drum by lifting it up.
Drum
[B] How to replace the drum
(1) Remove the drum.
(2) Remove the 3 screws.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 3
6570/5570 DRUM
(3) Remove the front flange.
Front flange
(4) Draw out the drum upwards.
Drum
[C] Main charger
(1) Remove the middle inner cover.
(2) Remove the screw, and draw out the main
charger to the front side.
6570/5570 DRUM
10 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[D] Charger wire
• Main charger: 398mm long, 0.06mm dia., tungsten oxide wire
Grid
Grid cover
Remove the
grid cover
Main charger
Wire terminal (Small)
Terminal
(main charger)
Charge wire
Wire terminal
(Large)
Wire cleaner
V-groove
Charge wire
Spring
V-groove
Terminal
(1) Remove the grid cover, grid and terminal cover,
and then remove the charger wire from the main
charger.
Installation Precautions
1. The charger wire must be inserted into the V
grooves at both the front and the rear.
2. Do not allow the charger wire to be twisted.
Charge wire
V-groove
3. Do not touch the charger wire directly with your
hands or fingers.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 5
6570/5570 DRUM
[E] Transfer charger wire cleaner
(1) Remove the main charger wire.
(2) Remove the wire cleaner (1 screw).
Note: During assembly, make sure that the
charger wire passes through the pads.
Pad
Wire cleaner
Charger
wire
Wire cleaner
[F] Main charger timing belt
(1) Loosen the screw securing the tension pulley
to remove the timing belt.
Notes: 1. When assembling the timing belt, secure
the timing belt with the end faces of the
main charger wire cleaner base and
switch pusher aligned with the center of
the mark.
Tension pulley
Switch pusher
Mark
Timing belt
Main charge wire
cleaner base
2. During assembly, the tension of the timing belt must be adjusted as follows:
• Tighten the screw securing the tension
pulley so that the timing belt is pulled
by 4 to 5 mm when a force of 200g is
applied at the mark.
Screw
Main charger wire cleaner base
200g
Mark
Spring balance
Mark
S
Timing belt
6570/5570 DRUM
200g
S = 4 to 5mm
Rear side of belt from
outside of plate bending
outer side
10 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[G] Main charger guide unit
(1) Remove the center inner cover and the right
inner cover.
(2) Remove the main charger and cleaner.
(3) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw
and remove the main charger guide unit.
Connector
[H] Main charger cleaning motor
(1) Remove the main charger guide unit.
(2) Remove the connector, and remove the charger
cleaning motor unit (2 screws).
Main charger cleaning motor
Connector
(3) Remove the motor (2 screws).
[I] Main charger cleaning switch
(1) Disconnect the 2 connectors, and remove the
screw.
Note: When installing the switch, press in the direction of arrow A and secure.
Also insert the harness into the terminals
paying attention to the color, and bend the
terminals to an angle of 45°.
Black
White
Connector
45°
A
Switch fixing screw
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 7
6570/5570 DRUM
[J] Discharge LED
(1) Remove the stopper bracket (1 screw), and disconnect the connector.
(2) Draw out the discharge LED.
Connector
[K] Ozone filter
(1) Remove the upper exit cover.
(2) Unlock the claw lock, turn the knob and draw
out the ozone filter.
Ozone filter
(3) Remove the ozone filter from its holder.
Ozone filter
[L] Ozone filter unit
(1) Disconnect the 2 connectors, remove the 2
screws, and remove the ozone filter unit.
6570/5570 DRUM
10 - 8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[M] Slot exhaust fan motor/exit fan motor
(1) Remove the exhaust fan duct (2 screws).
(2) Remove the slot exhaust fan duct (2 screws).
(3) Remove each of the 2 screws.
Note: When installing the slot exhaust fan motor
and the exit fan motor, install in the direction shown in the figure.
[N] Reversal Fan Motor
(1) Open the exit door and draw out the ADU unit.
(2) Remove the reversal fan motor bracket (2
screws, connector).
Connector
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 9
6570/5570 DRUM
(3) Remove the reversal fan motor from the bracket
(2 screws).
Note: Attach the reversal fan motor in the direction shown in the figure.
6570/5570 DRUM
10 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11. TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11.1 Construction
This section describes the belt transport unit excluding the fuser unit.
Belt transport unit
Transfer belt unit Transfer belt support/power supply mechanism
Transport guide
Transfer belt cleaning mechanism
Belt transport unit lock/unlock mechanism
Lower damp heater unit
High-voltage transformer
Copier rear frame
Transfer belt drive mechanism
Transfer belt contact/release mechanism
Belt transport unit simple lock mechanism
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11 - 1
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11.2 Description of Operation
1 While the copier is ready, the transfer belt stands by at a position separated from the photosensitive
2
3
4
5
drum.
When printing is started, the transfer belt is controlled to rise, and is held in contact against the
photosensitive drum.
Voltage from the high-voltage transformer unit is applied to the transfer belt via the power supply
roller.
As the surface of the transfer belt is electrified by a plus voltage by dielectric polarization, the paper
is held in contact by static electricity, and the processes of transfer, separation, and paper transport
can be carried out continuously.
After printing ends, the transfer belt is separated from the photosensitive drum and stands by again.
Figure 1 shows a sectional view of the belt transport unit.
Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller
Transfer belt power supply roller
Transfer belt follower roller
Drum
Transfer belt drive roller
Transfer belt
cleaning brush
Transfer belt
Transport guide
Recovery auger
Lower damp heater cover
Transfer belt cleaning blade
Lower damp heater
Fig. 1 Belt transport unit sectional view
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11.3 Functions
(1) Transfer belt unit
The transfer belt is coated with a high-precision flat rubber belt and has electrical resistance. The
transfer belt unit is divided into a belt support/power supply section and a cleaning mechanism. The
belt support/power supply section supports the belt and rotates to supply power, and the cleaning
mechanism scrapes of toner from the belt surface.
(2) Transfer belt support/power supply mechanism
As shown in Figure 1, the transfer belt is supported by four rollers. Voltage having a polarity opposite
to that of the toner on the photosensitive drum is applied to the power supply roller. The current
flowing to the transfer belt is controlled to a constant current of 50 µA. (Though the applied voltage
changes as current is constant, the voltage change is normally within the range +3 to +5 kV.) A
voltage probe is required for measurement. To prevent danger, do not use a digital voltmeter.
(3) Transfer belt cleaning mechanism
The cleaning mechanism has two functions, a function for scraping off residual toner from the belt
surface by the cleaning blade, cleaning brush and recovery auger, and a function for bringing the
transfer belt into contact with and separating it from the drum.
(4) Cleaning blade
After the paper is separated, remove any paper scraps and foreign objects remaining on the belt
surface.
(5) Cleaning brush
Removes residual paper scraps and foreign matter from the belt surface after the paper is separated.
The brush is made to electroconductive for electrostatically cleaning the toner. A voltage opposite to
that of the toner is applied to the toner. The current flowing to the brush is controlled to a constant
current of 5 µA. (Though the applied voltage changes as current is constant, the voltage change is
normally within the range +300 to +700V.) A voltage probe is required for measurement. To prevent
danger, do not use a digital voltmeter.
(6) Recovery auger
Feeds scraped off residual toner to the waste toner transport auger section.
(7) Transport guide
Guides paper that is held in contact by static electricity to the fuser unit. This guide is made of
material that prevents electrification caused by friction with the paper.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11 - 3
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
(8) Belt transport unit lock/unlock mechanism
The belt transport unit is locked inside the copier. It is structured in such a way that it is locked when
a paper jam is cleared, and can be drawn out towards you.
The belt transport unit has a function for separating the transfer belt from the drum and a function for
preventing erroneous operation of the handle when it is drawn out.
• When the handle is rotated left when viewed from the front, the belt transport unit can be drawn out
horizontally.
• When the belt transport unit is inserted into the copier, and the handle is rotated right when viewed
from the front, the unit is located to the vertical position.
• If the belt transport unit is not completely inserted into the copier, the handle cannot be rotated
from the horizontal position.
(9) Lower damp heater (for preventing condensation)
The damp heater is located under the transfer belt, and is powered when the main power switch is
turned OFF.
Standard accessories: TWD, SAD, ASD, AUD
Options: Other than the above
(10) Transfer belt drive unit
Drive is transferred from the transfer belt motor, travels via the timing belt and the relay gears, and is
transmitted to the transfer belt drive gear to rotate the drive roller. Drive is transmitted to the belt
transport unit via a gear having a planetary joint.
(11) Transfer belt contact/release mechanism
This mechanism has a function for separating the transfer belt from the drum when a jam occurs, and
a function for bringing the transfer belt into contact with the photosensitive drum when copying is
started.
• Rotation of the cam by drive transmitted by gear from the cam motor moves the lever on the rear
side inside the transfer belt up and down.
• The transfer belt is brought into contact with and separated from the photosensitive drum by
vertically operating this lever.
• The cam phases are controlled by two sensors.
(12) Belt transport unit simple lock mechanism
When the belt transport unit is inserted into the copier, this mechanism simply holds the belt transport unit before it is locked by rotation of the handle.
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11.4 Display and Replacement
[A] Belt transport unit
(1) Rotate the handle to the left, and draw out the
belt transport unit.
(2) Remove the fuser unit (1 screw) (When the
lower damp heater is attached, disconnect the
rear connector.).
(3) Remove the 2 stepped screws (blue).
(4) Lift up the belt transport unit holding it by both
grips.
Note: When installing the belt transport unit on the
slide rail, firmly insert the stepped pin on
the slide rail into the notch on the belt transport unit.
Grip
[Right side]
Grip
[Left side]
[B] Transfer belt unit
(1) Remove the inner cover (2 screws).
(2) Disconnect the transfer belt power supply connector, the cleaning brush power supply connector and the earth (2 screw).
(3) Remove the front clip, and slide the bearing.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11 - 5
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
(4) Remove the 2 rear bearing bracket fastening
screws and the 2 casing fastening screws.
(5) Draw out the transfer belt unit upwards on the
front side.
Notes: 1. During assembly, fasten the screws in order 1 , 2 and 3 .
1
3
2
2. When assembling the transfer belt unit,
make sure that the front lever of the transfer belt unit fits under the cam on the front
frame.
Front frame side cam
Front side lever
[C] Transfer belt
(1) Rotate the transfer belt support/power supply
mechanism inside the transfer belt unit by 90°,
and then draw out upwards.
(2) Remove the 2 fastening screws from the drive
roller support bracket.
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Rotate the drive roller in the direction of the arrow in the diagram.
(4) Draw out the transfer belt.
Notes: 1. Attach the belt so that the belt travels along
the center of the inside of the housing.
2. Do not touch the belt surface directly with
your hands.
3. The drive roller support bracket fastening screw on the front side is also used
for connecting the earth lead. Pay attention to the direction of the terminal.
4. When installing the transfer belt support/
power supply section onto the cleaning
section, take care to prevent the recovery mylar on the cleaning section from
being turned over.
[D] Transfer belt power supply roller
(1) Remove the transfer belt.
(2) Remove the 2 stop rings on the power supply
drive roller shaft.
(3) Remove the 2 holders and 2 springs.
(4) Draw out the power supply roller temporarily to
the front, remove the rear side shaft, and replace the power supply roller.
Notes: 1. When replacing the power supply roller,
take care not to scratch or leave any
knock marks on the roller surface.
2. Make sure that the two stop rings are
firmly fitted in the groove.
3. Make sure that the spring is firmly fitted
on the upper and lower projections.
4. After assembly, make sure that the power
supply roller rotates smoothly, and moves
vertically smoothly by the spring.
5. Do not touch the surface of the power
supply roller directly with your hands.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11 - 7
2
1
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
[E] Brush
(1) Remove the transfer belt support/power supply mechanism from the transfer belt unit.
(2) Remove the short transport guide fastening
screw, and slide the transport guide. Then, draw
out the transport guide upwards.
(3) Remove the front stop ring and the 3 gears.
Note: a and c have claws. Remove in order a, b
and then c.
2
1
c
b
a
(4) Remove the stop ring on the rear brush axis
and pull out the bushing.
(5) Press the brush temporarily to the rear, rotate
the shaft on the front side, and draw out the
brush upwards to the front.
Notes: 1. When installing the gear, install so that
the projection on the inner diameter of
the gear shaft fits firmly into the groove
on the shaft.
2. When the bush in the nozzle side comes
off, securely install it with care of the direction.
3. Do not directly touch the surface of the
brush with your hands.
2
1
[F] Cleaning blade
(1) Remove the transfer belt support and power
supply mechanisms from the transfer belt unit.
(2) Remove the 3 screws, the reinforcing plate
and remove the cleaning blade upwards.
Notes: 1. When assembling the cleaning blade,
assemble so that the bosses on both side
fit properly into the blade plate holes, and
fasten by screws.
2. Do not directly touch the blade edge by
hand. Also, do not allow hard objects to
bump against the blade edge.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11 - 8
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[G] Transfer belt drive unit
(1) Remove the main unit rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector from the transfer belt
motor.
(3) Remove the 2 screws, and transfer belt drive
unit.
[H] Transfer belt contact/separation cam drive
unit
(1) Remove the main unit rear cover.
(2) Remove the flywheel (3 screws).
(3) Remove the toner transport auger unit (5
screws).
(4) Disconnect the harness connector for the cam
motor and sensor.
(5) Remove the 2 screws, align the cam with the
holes on the copier rear frame, and draw out
the unit towards you.
[I] Transfer belt contact/separation sensor
(1) Remove the transfer belt contact/separation
cam drive unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector from each of the sensors.
(3) Remove the sensor pins from the bracket holes
to remove the sensor.
Notes: 1. When replacing the sensor, pay attention
to the type of sensor (color-coded on the
PC board) and its mounting direction.
2. Make sure that sensor pins are firmly fitted into the bracket holes.
3. Do not forget to re-connect the connectors.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
11 - 9
(Green PCboard)
(Silver PCboard)
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
[J] Mounting the lower damp heater
(1) Remove the transfer belt unit.
(2) Remove the transport guide (1 screw).
(3) Attach the lower damp heater unit on the base
of the belt transport unit (3 screws).
(4) Attach the lower damp heater cover (2 screws).
(5) Pass the damp heater harness through the M
band on the belt transport unit, and attach locking supports (1 pc. to the rear frame and 2 pcs.
to the base frame).
M band
Locking support
(6) Make sure that the damp heater connector is
inserted into the rear side of the fuser unit.
Notes: 1. When installing the damp heater cover,
prevent the harness from becoming
nipped.
2. Before installing the lower damp heater
unit, check the power voltage.
6570/5570 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
11 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12. DEVELOPER UNIT
12.1 General Description
Transport roller
Lower developer sleeve
Leveler
Upper developer sleeve
Drum
Mixer 1
Suction duct
Mixer 2
Auto-toner sensor
Separation auxiliary member
Supply/recovery paddle
When a fine power (toner) that has a charge of the same polarity as the electrostatic latent image and
color black (or other color) comes near the electrostatic latent image formed on the drum surface, the
toner adheres to the image only by electrostatic force, causing the electrostatic latent image to be developed, resulting in a visible image being formed. This is the developing process performed in the developer unit.
Toner cartrige
Toner hopper unit
Developer unit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 1
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.2 Construction
12.2.1 Developer unit
The developer unit consists of the lower and upper developer sleeves (magnetic rollers), leveler, autotoner sensor, supply/recovery paddle, separation auxiliary member, mixing unit, etc. The developer material is poured into the developer unit.
Transport roller
Lower developer sleeve
Drum
Upper developer sleeve
Mixig unit
Leveler
Mixer 1
Mixer 2
Supply/recovery paddle
Separation auxiliary member
Auto-toner sensor
(1) Developer material
The developer material contains carrier and toner. The carrier is made of iron powder of about 65µ m
in diameter, being a conductor. The toner is made of resin particles, about 9µ m in diameter. The
toner has a weight ratio of about 5% of the developer material. Developer material deteriorates with
use and must be replaced periodically.
(2) Mixing unit
When the carrier and toner are mixed, friction is generated, causing the carrier to have a positive (+)
charge and the toner to have a minus (–) charge. The toner adheres to the drum surface as a result
of electrostatic force.
(3) Supply/recovery paddle
This paddle supplies stirred developer material to the feed roller, and recovers developer material
that has been separated by the lower developer sleeve and returns it to the stirring section.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Lower and upper developer sleeves (magnetic rollers)/transport roller (magnetic roller)
These parts are made of aluminum, with magnets positioned inside them. By using the magnetic
force, the developer material is attracted (because the carrier is made of iron powder), forming
magnetic lines of force shaped like a brush. Further, the magnets are secured, and only the sleeves
around them rotate. Through this rotation, the magnetic brush of the lower and upper developer
sleeves sweeps the surface of the photosensitive drum, enabling development.
(5) Leveler
This regulates the amount of developer material transferred by the transport roller so that the magnetic brush correctly comes into contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum.
(6) Separation auxiliary member
This member supports the task of separating the developer material on the lower developer sleeve.
(7) Auto-toner sensor
For making good copies, it is necessary to keep the carrier and toner in the developer unit at a fixed
ratio. The auto-toner sensor monitor the toner density in the developer material by operating a magnetic bridge circuit. When the toner density drops, a fixed amount of toner is added from the toner
hopper.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 3
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.2.2 Toner hopper unit
When there is little toner left in the toner hopper, this status is detected and the “ADD TONER” symbol
flashes. The principle is as follows.
Toner hopper
Sensor lever
Magnetic sensor
(Toner empty switch)
Magnet
1 As shown in the left figure above, there is a sensor lever on the inside of the toner hopper. The lever
is fitted with a magnet.
2 There is a magnetic sensor (toner-empty switch) on the outside of the toner hopper, such as when
the amount of toner in the hopper drops, the sensor lever lowers, which is detected by the magnet
sensor. The copier then requires toner to be added.
Sensor lever
Sensor lever
3 The left figure above shows the sensor lever lifted by the toner.
4 The right figure above shows the sensor lever down due to lack of toner and the magnetic sensor
detecting the toner-empty state.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12.3 Developer Unit Drive
Idle gear (G24)
Mixer 1 gear (G45/G24)
Upper magnetic roller gear (G17)
Idle gear (G20)
Drum
Mixer 2 gear (G45)
Input gear(G27)
Lower magnetic roller gear (G17)
Rear paddle gear (G31)
Rear side
Transport roller gear(G23)
Idle gear (G19)
Drum
Front paddle gear (G18)
Front side
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 5
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
Developer Unit Drive
Motor shaft
G10
Idle gear
G48
P25
Idle gear
P25
G25
Copier rear side drive
Paddle
Developer unit
Drive input gear
G27
Rear side
Mixer 1
G24
Mixer 2
G45
Idle gear
G24
Rear side gear
G31
Idle gear
G20
Lower and upper
magnetic rollers
G17
Idle gear
G19
Transport
roller
G23
G45
Front side gear
G18
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 6
Front side
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12.4 Motors
12.4.1 Developer motor (IC motor) drive
[A] IC motor
Rotor
Motor
winding
Stator
U
S
N
U
Shaft
W
V
1
2
A
V
W
B
C
U
W
N
S
V
Hall element
Hall elements
Equivalent Circuit of Motor
Winding
Structure of IC Motor
0
U
W(30 )
U
V(60 )
30
N
N
S
S
S
S
N
S
N
S
S
S
S
N
N
N
N
S
N
V(90 )
W
N
V
U(120 )
U(150 )
N
N
S
S
N
N
N
30
S
N
W(180 )
N
30
N
N
N
S
N
N
S
S
V
S
S
S
S
S
N
W
30
N
N
S
S
S
S
N
N
S
N
S
S
30
30
0°
Hall element A
30°
60°
120°
0
150° 180°
P
M
M
P
Hall element B
P
P
P
210°
240°
M
M
0
P
P
P
360°
0
P
M M
M
P
0
330°
M
0
0
M
300°
0
M
P
270°
0
0
0
M
Hall element C
90°
P
0
P
M
M
0
Hall voltage
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 7
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
[B] Developer motor drive
FG pulse
+24VA
Wave
shaping
DEVCK
Reference
requency
V-phase
Phase
comparator
Difference
Voltage
detection
circuit
Speed
comparator
Difference
Control
signal
DEVON
Rotation
control
U-phase
Excited
phase
switching
unit
W-phase
A
C
B
Developer motor
(M13)
Roter
position
detector
A, B, C: Hall element
(1) The LGC transmits control signals for the developer motor rotation (DEVON: motor rotation command).
(2) The excitation phase switching unit excites each phase on the developer motor. →Developer motor
rotates.
(3) Hall elements A to C are used to detect the rotational position of the motor (or rotor).
(4) The excitation phase switching unit switches the excitation for each phase (By repeating steps (2)
through (4) above, the motor keeps rotating.).
(5) The FG pulse is generated by the rotation of the developer motor.
(6) The phases and velocities of the FG pulse and the reference frequency from the LGC are compared,
and the differences are added. Further to this are added the fluctuations in the power supply voltage
(Signal generation).
(7) Changes the switching timing for the excitation phase switching unit to match the signal amount
obtained in step (6).
That is, the FG pulse and reference frequency are controlled to be equal. →The developer motor
rotates at a constant speed (Locked range state.).
(8) When the DEVON signal changes to “H” level, the developer motor stops.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[C] Control signals
(1) DEVCK signal (LGC→DEV-MOT:input)
This signal is a reference clock signal for the developer motor to rotate at a fixed speed. The frequency of the reference clock is 821.2Hz.
When the cycle of FG pulse deviation from the reference frequency is within ±6.25%, this state is
specified as lock range (normal rotation). Also, at this time, the LED “LP1” light comes ON.
(2) DEVON signal (LGC→DEV-MOT: input)
This signal is the motor ON/OFF control signal. When it becomes “L” level, the motor rotates.
Signal level of motor circuit
Signal
DEVCK
DEVON
“H” level
“L” level
Reference clock (821.2Hz)
Motor OFF
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Motor ON
12 - 9
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.4.2 Brush motor (toner motor (M14)) drive circuit
The toner motor is provided to supply toner for the developer unit.
The toner motor is driven by transistor 2SD1415 (Q1 on the logic PC board), and its circuit is structured
as follows.
+24
VDD
Gate array
PH4
Q29
D1
Toner motor
142 TNRMT
R213
Q1:2SD1415
IC48
R236
The motor winding is connected to the +24V at its (+) side and to the collector of Q40 at its (–) side.
-When PH4 (TNRMT signal) of the gatearray becomes “L” level• Q29 is turned on → Q1 is turned on
• The +24V power supply supplies current to Q1 via the motor winding → the motor rotates
-When TNRMT signal becomes “H” level• Q29 is turned off → Q1 is tuned off
• The current which was flowing in the motor winding flows via the route of diode D1.
~ It decreases at the rate of the time constant determined by the inductance and resistance of the
winding.
• The motor stops.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12.5 Auto-Toner Sensor Circuit
12.5.1 Brief description
• Functions of auto-toner circuit.
 • Detects the density of the toner in the developer material

 ~ Density drops → toner supply.

 • Detects that the toner in the toner hopper has been used up (toner-empty).
• Configuration of auto-toner circuit.
 • Auto-toner sensor: Detects toner density.
 • Control section: Control to maintain the toner in the developer material at a constant specific
 density.
 • Toner motor: Replenishes the toner in the developer material.
 • Display unit: Displays the toner-empty status.
Display
Arithmetic and
control unit
Toner hopper
Toner
PWA-F-LGC-300
Toner
motor
Toner-empty switch
Auto-toner sensor
Developer material
Gate
array
Control voltage signal
Toner density signal
DA converter
IC15
MB88347
(A04)
Main
CPU
IC48
IC49
Developer unit
BC-RAM
IC23
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 11
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.5.2 Operation of auto-toner sensor
(1) Functions of auto-toner sensor.
1 Initialization function:
-When the copier is set up or when the developer material is replacedAutomatic or semi-automatic adjustment is made so that the output of the auto-toner sensor
(input value of the main CPU) will be 2.45 to 2.55V for the toner density of new developer material.
2 Toner the density stabilization function:
-During the copying operation• Toner consumption→toner density decreases→detection that the auto-toner sensor output
changes→toner motor drive→supply of toner to the developer unit from the toner hopper.
∼ Maintains toner density at a constant level.
3 Toner-empty detection, release function:
• Detects toner-empty situation inside toner hopper
~ Drives toner motor→auto-toner sensor output is not changed→the toner density does not
change→judges that there is no toner (toner empty).
• Release of toner-empty situation.
~ Toner supply→driving the toner motor→auto-toner sensor output changes→returning of toner
density of normal value→toner-empty release.





(2) Mechanism of auto-toner sensor.
The auto-toner sensor is composed of the following circuits.
• Drive winding: Magnetic head with a high-frequency magnetic field (primary side).
Placed in developer material and forms magnetic circuit.
• Detection winding: Receives the changes in magnetic resistance of the developer material via a
magnetic circuit (Secondary side).
• DC conversion circuit: Converts the high-frequency output from the detection winding to a
DC signal.
↓
Auto-toner output VATS





Magnetic
resistance
Drive winding
Detection
winding
Auto-toner
DC
output
To
conversion
main LGC
ATS
V
circuit
(Developer
material)
Magnetic circuit
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
-When the toner density is low
 Iron powder (carrier) in the developer material ..... much


 Toner in the developer material ............................ little
→Magnetic resistance: small→detection output: large→auto-toner output VATS: large
-When the toner density is high
 Iron powder (carrier) in the developer material ..... little


 Toner in the developer material ............................ much
→Magnetic resistance: large→detection output: small→auto-toner output VATS: small
• DC voltage corresponding to toner density in the developer material = auto-toner output VATS
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 13
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.6 Disassembly and Replacement
Connector
[A] Developer unit
(1) Remove the upper inner cover.
(2) Turn the developer unit slide lever
counterclockwise.
(3) Disconnect the 1 connector.
Developer unit
(4) Pull the developer unit toward the front.
Developer unit
[B] Developer material
(1) Remove the developer unit.
(2) Remove the top cover (2 screws).
Top cover
(3) Completely remove the old developer material
while rotating the gear on the rear side plate.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Fill with new developer material.
Developer material
(5) Rotate the gear several times to distribute the
developer material evenly.
(6) Install the top cover.
Note: When installing the top cover, position it
securely on its hooks and be sure not catch
the urethane seal.
Top cover
Seat of topcover
Urethan seal
Mylar of sideframe
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 15
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
[C] Guide roller
(1) Remove the developer unit.
(2) Remove the developer unit handles (2 screws).
Handle
Guide roller
(3) Remove the E-ring and then the spring.
(4) Remove the 2 E-rings and both the front guide
rollers from the magnetic roller shaft.
Note: Pay attention to the color of the rollers when
assembling the upper and lower guide rollers.
Upper guide roller (Gray)
E-ring
E-ring
Lower guide roller
(Blue)
Spring
(5) Remove the E-ring and then the gear.
(6) Remove the rear side plate (4 screws) and then
disconnect the bias connector.
Bias connector
E-ring
(7) Remove the 2 E-rings and bias plate.
(8) Remove the spring and the 2 rear guide rollers
from the magnetic roller shaft.
Note: Pay attention to the color of the rollers when
assembling the upper and lower guide rollers.
Gear
Upper guide roller (White)
Bias plate
Lower guide
roller (Black)
E-ring
8070/6570/5570/4580 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 16
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[D]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Developer magnetic roller
Remove the developer material.
Remove the E-ring and then the spring.
Remove the front guide rollers.
Remove the front side plate (3 screws).
Front side plate
(5) Remove the 2 fixing screws on the front magnetic roller holder.
(6) Remove the rear side plate (4 screws).
Magnetic roller holder
Magnetic roller
(7) Remove the 2 fixing screws on the rear magnetic roller holder.
(8) Remove the entire upper and lower roller sub
unit from the developer.
(9) Remove the 2 pole fixing holders and the 2 Erings on the inside.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 17
Magnetic roller holder
Magnetic roller
Pole fixing holder
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
(10) Remove the 2 pushers.
Pusher
E-ring
(11) Remove the 2 E-rings and 2 gears.
(12) Remove the magnetic roller holders from the
front and the rear sides.
Magnet roller holder
Gear
E-ring
(13) Remove the 2 seals the 4 shield bushes on both
ends of the developer roller, scraper, and the
upper and lower magnetic rollers.
Shield bush
Seal
Scraper
Seal
[E] Transport magnetic roller
(1) Remove the upper and lower developer roller
sub unit.
(2) Remove the front gear and the E-ring.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
Transport roller
12 - 18
E-ring
Gear
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Remove rear side screw, and then the transport roller and pole fixing bush.
(4) Remove the front side bearing and transport
roller.
Pole fixing bush
[F] Leveler
(1) Remove the top cover.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and then the leveler.
Leveler
Note: When installing the leveler, both ends of the
leveller must be contacting the protrusions
on the front and rear side frames (2 screws).
[G] Auto-toner sensor
(1) Remove developer material.
(2) Remove the auto-toner sensor (2 screws).
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Transport roller
Leveler
Convex part of sideframe
Auto-toner sensor
12 - 19
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
[H] Oil seal (mixer section)
(1) Remove the rear side plate.
(2) Remove the 2 E-rings and 2 gears.
Gear
E-ring
(3) Remove the 2 screws and draw out the nozzle
mixer.
(4) Remove the 2 E-rings and 2 bushes.
Nozzle mixer
Bush
E-ring
(5) Remove the 2 oil seals from the nozzle mixer
with the C-ring pliers.
Nozzle mixer
Oil seal
(6) After removing the 2 bearings with the C-ring
pliers, remove the 2 oil seals.
Oil seal
Bearing
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 20
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Notes: Assembling the oil seal
1. Push the new oil seal in parallel to the
mounting holes of the developer frame
(or the nozzle mixer).
* Pay attention to the direction that the
oil seal is assembled (See figure on
right).
2. Apply a uniform coating of grease to the
inside surface of the oil seal.
Developer unit frame
(Nozzle mixer)
Outside
Grease
Inside
Oilseal
• Amount: 2 large drops
• Grease: Alvania No.2
3. Wipe off any surplus grease that oozes
out from inside.
Note: Assembling the bearing
Coat the entire periphery of the mixer shaft
with grease (Alvania No.2) and assemble
the bearing.
Mixer shaft
Bearing
[I] Oil seal (paddle section)
(1) Remove the front side plate, rear side plate and
nozzle mixer.
(2) Remove the E-ring, and then the gear and parallel pin.
Gear
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 21
E-ring
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
(3) Remove the E-ring and then the rear paddle
bush.
(4) Remove the gear and then the E-ring.
Paddle bush
(rear side)
(5) Remove the front paddle bush.
E-ring
Paddle bush (front side)
E-ring
(6) Remove each of the oil seals pressure-fitted
into the paddle bushes on the front and rear
sides.
Note: The oil seal installation follows the description in previous item [H].
Oil seal
Rear paddle bush
Front paddle bush
[J]
Oil seal (upper/lower developer rollers and
transport roller)
(1) Remove the 2 sealed bushes on the rear side
from the upper and lower developer rollers.
(2) Remove each of the oil seals pressure-fitted
into the sealed bushes on the front and rear
sides.
(3) Remove the transport roller.
Top
Bottom
Oil seal
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 22
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Remove the oil pressure-fitted into the front side
frame.
Note: The oil seal installation follows the description in previous item [H].
[K] Toner hopper unit
(1) Remove the rear cover and right top cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector.
Connector
(3) Remove the 3 screws.
Toner hopper unit
(4) Press the toner hopper unit towards the rear
side to release the hooks, and then lift the rear
side up at an angle to remove.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Oil seal
12 - 23
Toner hopper unit
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
[L]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Toner motor
Remove the toner hopper unit.
Disconnect the toner motor connector.
Remove the motor bracket (3 screws).
Connector
Toner motor
Motor bracket
(4) Remove the toner motor (2 screws).
Toner motor
[M] Toner-empty switch
(1) Remove the toner hopper unit.
(2) Take out the screw, disconnect the connector,
and remove the toner-empty switch.
Toner empty switch
Connector
[N] Toner-supply cover switch
(1) Remove the switch cover (1 screw).
Switch cover
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 24
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the
toner-supply cover switch.
Toner-supply cover switch
Connector
[O] Toner-transport auger unit
(1) Remove the upper feed cover.
(2) Remove the developer unit.
(3) Remove the toner hopper unit.
(4) Draw out the large capacity feeder.
(5) Remove the 2 screws.
Toner transport auger unit
[P] Developer motor
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the developer bias connector and
remove the duct (2 screws).
(3) Remove the motor unit (3 screws).
Connector
Motor unit
Developer bias
connector
Duct
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 25
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
(4) Remove the developer motor (2 screws).
Developer motor
[Q] Developer switch
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the developer unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector and take off the harness from the harness clamp.
(3) Remove the switch bracket (1 screw).
(4) Disconnect the 2 connectors, and unscrew the
screw and then remove the switch.
Connector
Connector
[R] Toner filter unit
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the 2 screws, and disconnect the connector, and then remove the toner filter unit.
Developer switch
Connector
Toner filter unit
(3) Remove the 3 screws, the harness from the
harness clamp, and then the toner filter fan.
Note: After installing the toner filter unit, make sure
that the duct is properly overlapping the
toner filter unit seal. (If there is a clearance
between the duct and seals, toner may be
blown out and dirty the inside of the copier.)
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 26
Harness clamp
Toner filter fan
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[S] Laser fan unit
(1) Remove the cover behind the hopper (2
screws).
(2) Remove the 3 screws and disconnect the connector.
Connector
(3) Remove the 2 screws and the panel cover.
(4) Draw out the fan.
[T] Replacing toner filter
(1) Remove the feed cover.
(2) Remove the screw and the filter cover.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12 - 27
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
(3) Draw out the toner filter.
6570/5570 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 28
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13. CLEANER UNIT
13.1 Construction
The cleaner unit consists of a driver section, cleaning section, waste toner carry section, fur brush, toner
adhesion amount sensor, separation claw, toner full switch and toner bag.
Recovery blade
Main blade
Drum thermistor
Drum
Weight
Fur brush
Toner recovery auger
Toner adhesion amount sensor
Separation claw
G16
G17/30
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
G15
G25
13 - 1
6570/5570 CLEANER
Fur brush
Main blade
Toner adhesion amount sensor
Drum thermistor
Separation claw
Recovery blade
13.2 Description of Functions
(1) Main blade
Scrapes off residual toner on the drum surface. The blade is pushed against the drum at a constant
pressure by a weight. The main blade is separated from the drum by manually turning the lever.
(2) Recovery blade
Catches the toner after it is scraped off by the main blade.
(3) Toner recovery auger
Carries scraped residual toner to the toner bag via the waste toner carry auger unit.
(4) Toner bag
Toner scraped off by the main blade is carried by the toner recovery auger, and recovered to the
toner bag via the waste toner carry auger unit.
(5) Toner full switch
When the toner bag becomes full of recovered toner, its weight causes both the toner bag and
actuator to drop, and the toggle switch to be turned OFF.
(6) Separation claw
To separate paper that could not be separated by the transport belt, the separation claw is pressed
against the drum by the separation claw solenoid only when the leading edge of the paper passes
through.
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Toner transport auger
Toner-full switch
Spring
Drum
1
2
Toner bag
The weight of the toner pulls the
toner bag down against the spring
in direction of arrow 1 .
Separation claw
Paper
When the toner bag drops the
actuator also lowers in the
direction of arrow 2 , turning the
toner-full switch OFF.
(7) Toner adhesion amount sensor
Measures the relative reflectivity of the toner image on the drum to maintain the image density at an
appropriate value.
(8) Drum thermistor
The charge on the drum surface varies greatly depending on the drum surface temperature. For this
reason, the temperature of the drum surface is detected to control the drum surface charge to a
constant value.
(9) Fur brush
Removes paper dust and foreign matter remaining on the drum surface after separation of the transfer paper, reduces blade wear, lengths the blade life, and improves image reliability.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 3
6570/5570 CLEANER
13.3 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit
C5
+15
+15
R12
J60-1
TH
(Thermistor)
R13
R14
C10
R16
6–
IC2
5+
7
B
R3
R11
E
R2
R4
R5
2 –
3 +IC2
C2
1
J59-B1
DRM-TMP
C9
R1
J60-2
Drum Temperature Detection Circuit
(1) Temperature sensor
In this detection circuit, the voltage obtained by R12, thermistor, R13 and R14 passes through the
operation amplifier IC2 to be taken as input voltage B . Input voltage B is applied to pin No.2 of
operation amplifier IC2, and is output as the temperature signal to the microcomputer and as the
main charger control signal.
(2) High-voltage transformer for the main charger control output unit
Input voltage B connected to pin No.2 of operation amplifier IC2 via R11 is compared with reference
voltage E that is applied by the divided voltage of R3, R2 and R1, amplified and is output from
output terminal pin No.8. This output voltage is input to the A/D converter of the microcomputer to
control the temperature of the high-voltage transformer for the main charger.
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13.4 Control for Maintaining Image Quality Using a Toner Adhesion Amount Sensor
13.4.1 Outline
The toner adhesion amount sensor performs the following functions:
• Controls the image formation conditions to an optimum state so that image density and line width can
be maintained under varying environments and throughout the service life of the machine.
• Detects the density of the test pattern developed on the drum.
• Changes the image formation conditions based upon the detection results to minimize changes in
density caused by changes in the operating environment.
13.4.2 Principle of sensor operation
• Toner adhesion amount sensor: This sensor emits light onto the drum and onto the toner image (test
pattern) developed on the drum, and outputs a voltage corresponding to the reflected light intensity.
• Toner adhesion amount: The relative reflectivity is calculated from the reflected light intensity obtained by the toner adhesion amount sensor. This is referred to here as the “toner adhesion amount.”
Toner adhesion amount sensor
Light source intensity signal
Reflected light intensity signal
Light emitting element
Light sensing element
Test pattern (toner image)
Photosensitive drum
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 5
6570/5570 CLEANER
13.4.3
Outline of control
Start of Control (Control is executed during the pre-run after the power is turned ON.)
[1] The reference image formation conditions are set.
[2] The sensor light source is adjusted.
[6]
[3] The test pattern is exposed.
[4] The value of the toner adhesion amount sensor is read.
[5] The result is judged.
(Control judges whether or not the toner adhesion amount of the test pattern is within the
permissible range.)
When the result is judged as GOOD.
[7] End of Control
(The determined image formation conditions are reflected in subsequent
copies.)
When the result is judged as NG (No Good).
[6] The image formation conditions are changed.
Return to [3]
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13.4.4 Configuration
• Toner adhesion amount sensor
Emits light corresponding to the light intensity control voltage onto the drum,
and outputs a voltage corresponding to the reflected light intensity of the drum
or the toner image on the drum.
• D/A converter
Outputs the light source intensity control voltage.
• Laser optical system
Exposes the test pattern for forming the toner image.
• A/D converter
Converts the voltage values output from the sensor to digital values before they
are read.
• Image formation system
Executes the charging, exposure and developing processes.
• MCPU
Executes steps [1] to [7] described in 13.4.3.
Image Formation Process
Photosensitive
drum
Toner adhesion
amount sensor
Test pattern
Reflected light
intensity signal
A/D
Light source
intensity signal
Various image
formation conditions
D/A
MCPU
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 7
6570/5570 CLEANER
13.5 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Cleaner unit
(1) Remove the main charger and the developer
unit.
(2) Disconnect the 2 connectors, and remove the
2 screws.
(3) Draw out the cleaner unit by holding the handle.
Notes: 1. The cleaner unit is heavy. Take care not
to drop it.
2. When installing the cleaner unit, make
sure that the cleaning unit gear is engaged with the gear on the rear of the
toner auger motor pulley before you secure it.
[B] Main blade
(1) Remove the drum.
(2) Remove the top cover (4 screws).
Handle
Gear
Cleaner unit
Top cover
(3) Holding the bracket turn the main blade over.
(4) Remove the screw.
(5) Hold the ends of the 2 screws, remove the main
blade.
Screw ends
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[C] Recovery blade
(1) Remove the recovery blade.
Recovery blade
Notes: 1. The recovery blade is secured by double-sided adhesive tape. Make sure that
the tape is completely removed before
securing the new blade.
2. When installing the recovery blade, press
the edge of the recovery blade against
the stepped section of the cleaner frame,
and fix at point A making sure that there
is no gap.
Recovery
blade
A
Cleaner casing
Drum surface
[D] Fur brush
(1) Draw out the support shaft knob of the fur brush
in the direction of the arrow to set the fur brush
to a free state.
(2) Remove the fur brush from the cleaner body.
Fur brush
[E] Toner adhesion amount sensor
(1) Remove the sensor mounting bracket (2
screws).
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 9
8070/6570/5570/4580 CLEANER UNIT
(2) Disconnect the sensor connector, and remove
the 2 mounting screws.
[F] Separation claw
(1) Remove the cover (2 screws).
Cover
(2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the cam.
Cam
(3) Slide the separation claw unit to the front side
to draw it out from the bushing on the rear side,
and draw out the unit to the rear.
1
2
Separation claw unit
8070/6570/5570/4580 CLEANER UNIT
13 - 10
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Remove the 3 screws, and draw out the 2 separation claws from the shaft together with the
stopper and paper guide.
Separation claw
Stopper
Paper guide
[G] Drum thermistor
(1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the
screw.
(2) Cut the bundling band.
[H]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Thermistor bracket
Connector
Drum thermistor
Toner auger motor
Remove the cleaner unit.
Remove the left inner cover.
Remove the 4 screws securing the bracket and
the reinforcement plate, disconnect the connector and bundling band. The motor can be removed as an individual unit.
Reinforcement plate
Bracket
(4) Remove the toner auger motor (2 screws and
bundling band).
Toner auger motor
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 11
8070/6570/5570/4580 CLEANER UNIT
[I] Scraper solenoid unit
(1) Remove the rear cover, and disconnect the connector.
(2) Remove the carry belt unit.
Note: Take care not to scratch the transfer belt.
(3) Remove the toner auger motor.
(4) The solenoid unit can be removed when the 2
unit mounting screws on the rear frame are removed from the front side.
(5) Remove the separation claw solenoid (2
screws, connect, bundling band).
Note: During assembly, move the separation claw
solenoid in the direction of the arrow, and
secure.
Solenoid
Connector
Bunding band
[J] Drum motor
(1) Remove the flywheel (3 screws).
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Remove the motor bracket (3 screws, connector) and remove the harness from the clamp.
Note: When installing the motor bracket, press in
clockwise (direction of arrow A ) and secure.
A
(3) When replacing the motor, remove the 3 screws
and remove the harness from the edge saddle.
Note: When installing the motor, pay attention to
the position of the harness with respect to
the metal plate.
[K] Toner bag
(1) Remove the 2 coin screws and open the toner
bag.
(2) Draw out the toner bag.
Toner bag cover
Toner bag
[L] Toner-full detector
(1) Remove the toner bag.
(2) Disconnect the toner-full detector connector.
(3) Remove the screw on the bracket securing the
toner-full detector.
Toner-full detector
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
13 - 13
6570/5570 CLEANER
[M] Toner transport auger unit
(1) Remove the 5 screws securing the toner transport auger unit.
(2) Disconnect the transport auger motor.
[N] Toner transport motor
(1) Remove the toner transport motor (2 screws).
Note: Adjustment of the main blade, recovery blade and fur brush cleaner unit is not necessary.
6570/5570 CLEANER
13 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14. FUSER UNIT
14.1 General Description
Cleaning roller 1
Cleaning roller 2
Upper heat roller
Upper thermistor
Upper separation claw
Thermostat
Heater lamp
Heat roller guide
Exit roller
Exit switch
Discharge brush
Lower separation claw
Lower thermistor
Cleaning roller 3
Cleaning roller 4
Lower heat roller
Fig. 14.1-1
Heat and pressure are applied to fuse the toner to the paper, which is separated from the drum after the
transfer process. After fusing, the paper exits onto the copy receiving tray through the paper-exit unit.
The fuser unit comprises the heater lamps, upper heat roller, lower heat roller separation claws, cleaning roller 1, 2, 3, 4, thermistor, thermostat, exit rollers, and exit switch, etc.
14.2 Description of Operation
(1) Fuser
Heat and pressure are applied to the transfer paper that is separated and transported on top of the
drum to fuse the toner.
The upper and lower heat rollers are rotated by drive from the heat roller motor at a constant pressure applied by spring force. The upper heat roller has two built-in heater lamps and rotates by
motor drive. The built-in heater lamps do not rotate. The upper and lower heat rollers are pressurized by spring force at all times.
After fusing is completed, the transfer paper is separated smoothly from the upper and lower heat
rollers by the separation claw. In the temperature sensing section, the temperature of the upper and
lower heat rollers is controlled by a thermistor. If the temperature becomes abnormally hot, the
power to the heater lamps is cut by a thermostat.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 1
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14.3 Functions
(1) Heater lamp
Two halogen lamps are provided inside the upper heat roller to heat the upper heat roller. The heater
lamp stays fixed even when the upper heat roller is rotating.
(2) Upper heat roller
The upper heat roller is made of aluminum having comparatively good heat conducting properties. It
is heated by the heater lamps. The upper heat roller is held in contact with the above-mentioned
lower heat roller. Fusing is carried out by passing the transfer paper through the section where these
two heat rollers contact each other so that the toner image on the paper faces the upper heat roller.
In other words, the toner is melted by the heat of the upper and lower heat rollers, and the heat
transfer efficiency is improved by the pressure of the lower heat roller so that the toner soaks in
between the fibers of the paper.
To prevent adhesion of toner onto the rollers (phenomenon called “offset”) and to facilitate separation
of toner from the upper heat roller, the surface of the upper heat roller is coated with Teflon.
(3) Lower heat roller
The lower heat roller is made of rubber to facilitate pressurization of the upper heat roller. The lower
heat roller is pressed against the upper heat roller by springs.
(4) Separation claw
The upper and lower separation claws separate paper affixed to the upper and lower heat rollers.
(5) Cleaning roller 2
A cleaning roller 2 is attached so as to contact the upper heat roller to clean the toner that has stuck
to the upper heat roller during the fusing process. This roller contains silicon oil that transfer to the
surface of the heat roller by the heat of the heat roller and so on. This makes it easier to clean the
toner on the heat roller.
(6) Cleaning roller 1
A cleaning roller 1 for the upper heat roller is attached so as to contact the upper heat roller to remove
toner and paper scraps that have stuck to the upper heat roller during the fusing process. This
cleaning roller 1 does not contain silicon oil.
(7) Cleaning roller 3
A cleaning roller 3 is attached so as to contact the press roller to remove the toner and paper scraps
that have stuck to the press roller during the fusing process. This roller contains silicon oil that transfer to the surface of the press roller by the heat of the press roller and so on. This makes it easier to
clean the toner and paper scraps on the press roller.
(8) Cleaning roller 4
A cleaning roller 4 is attached so as to contact the lower heat roller to remove the toner and paper
scraps that have stuck to the lower heat roller during the fusing process.
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(9) Exit roller
After the paper is separated by the separation claw, the paper is output to the copy tray by the exit
roller of the fuser and the exit roller of the reversal unit.
(10) Exit switch
This switch detects arrival of the leading edge or trailing edge of the transfer paper at the exit roller of
the fuser. It is used for detecting paper jams in the fuser output section.
(11) Upper heat roller No.1 thermistor (center section)
The thermistor detects the temperature of the heat rollers so that it is maintained within a fixed
temperature width (actually, about 190°C) higher than the lower limit (defective fusing temperature)
and the upper limit (toner burning temperature). In other words, the thermistor controls the temperature so that the heater lamps turn ON when the heat rollers are lower than the temperature setting,
and turn OFF when they are above the temperature setting.
(12) Upper heat roller No.2 thermistor (end section)
The temperature distribution of the upper heat roller sometimes differs greatly at the center section
and end section in the lengthwise direction depending on the printing conditions. The No.2 thermistor
detects the temperature at the end section. This thermistor controls the temperature so that the
heater lamp turns OFF when either of the values detected by the No.1 or No.2 thermistor exceeds
the temperature setting.
(13) Lower heat roller thermistor
The thermistor detects the temperature so that the lower heat roller stays at around 115°C while the
copier is standing by for printing. If the lower heat roller falls below the temperature setting limit, the
upper and lower heat rollers are rotated at a speed of about 25% of high speed.
(14) Thermostat
The thermostat cuts power to the heater lamps if the upper heat roller become abnormally hot as a
result of thermistor malfunction, for example. The thermostat on this copier is for preventing abnormal operation. When the thermostat detects an abnormality, the thermostat must be replaced together with the other damaged parts in the fuser.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 3
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14.4 Heater Control Circuit
14.4.1 Temperature detection unit
To maintain the heat roller temperature, this unit detects the heat-roller temperature by thermistor-1, and
then performs heater lamp ON/OFF control.
• The thermistor is an electrical element whose resistance decreases as its detected temperature
increases. If the thermistor is open-circuited, the control circuit erroneously determines that the fuser
temperature is extremely low and continues to energize the heater lamp. As a result, the fuser temperature rises abnormally high, possibly activating the thermostat provided for safety purposes. The
CPU works to detect the breakage of the thermistor and prevents the condition mentioned above.
The following abnormalities are detected:
(1) Abnormal detection during warming up
25 sec. after the power has been turned ON, if the thermistor output voltage does not exceed 0.078
V, CALL SERVICE (C41) is displayed.
(2) Abnormal detection during stand-by/copying
If the thermistor output voltage decreases to and remains at 0.078 V or lower for 500 msec. or more,
CALL SERVICE (C43) is displayed.
(3) Thermistor status counter control
• For improved fuser-unit safety, the CPU works as follows: After a C41 error occurs two times in
succession, even when the power is turned ON, the heater will not come ON and the C41 error will
be immediately displayed.
However, with “1” or less stored in the Thermistor status counter, if the copier becomes ready
correctly, the Thermistor status counter clears to “0”.
• After CALL SERVICE (C41 – C45) has occurred and the thermistor, heater lamp, etc. have been
repaired (or replaced), if turning ON the power switch does not cause the heater to energize
resulting in an error, check the Thermistor status counter (08-code 400) and reset it to “0”.
Surface temperature of heat roller: 200°C (Thermistor resistance value: about 0.8 kΩ)
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Reference
1.
A value other than 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 is never written in the Thermistor status counter.
• At the power on, if the heater is not turned ON and the copier goes into C41 CALL SERVICE, check the
Thermistor status counter to see if it is 2 or more. If it is 2 or more, be sure to check the thermistor and
heater lamp, and after repair, reset the Thermistor status counter (08-code 400) to 0 and then turn ON
the power switch.
• If the value of the Thermistor status counter is more than 10 (11, for example), it may be possible that
BC-RAM or the data in it have been destroyed by charger leaking, etc. In this case, check the guide
bias, high-voltage transformers, charger wires, etc. for any defects. Also, all the data inside BC-RAM
need to be rechecked.
2.
Relationship between the output voltage and the fusing temperature.
• 200°C corresponds to approx. 2.5V and 0.25 V corresponds to approx. 40°C.
3.
Relationship between heat roller surface temperature and thermistor-1 resistance.
Temperature
Thermistor resistance
Heater lamp state
Less than 200°C
More than 0.8 kΩ
ON
200°C
0.8 kΩ
Maintains previous status
More than 200°C
Less than 0.8 kΩ
OFF
°C
Warm-up
Standby (200°C)
Copying (200°C)
200
Heat roller
temperature
distribution
Heater lamp OFF ON
ON
4.
OFF ON OFF ON OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Temperature control at heat roller ends
During multicopying, the temperature at each end (no paper-contact area) of the heat roller normally tends
to rise higher than the controlled temperature of the paper-contact area. Therefore, the circuit is so devised that if the temperature in the no paper-contact area rises to 240°C, the second thermistor detects
this, causing the heater to be turned OFF immediately regardless of the temperature in the paper-contact
area.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 5
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
Reference (supplement)
The following fusing control mode is available only for 8070.
• Relationship between the upper heat roller surface temperature and the fusing control mode.
Temperature
Fusing control status
More than 200°C
Heater lamp OFF
From 170°C to 200°C
Lamp ON, normal copying speed
From 160°C to 170°C
Copying speed is slower and the
copying is continuous.
Less than 160°C
Copying discontinues and waiting
for standby to resume copying.
Waiting for
standby
Standby
°C
Warm up
Standby(200°C)
Copying
Copying
200
170
Heat roller
temperature
distribution 160
Heater lamp
ON
Copying speed
(A4/LT)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
OFF
ON
OFF
0
0
0
14 - 5-1A
ON ON ON ON
80
65
80 65
ON ON
0
80
ON
ON
65
0
8070/6570/5570/4580 FUSER UNIT
8070/6570/5570/4580 FUSER UNIT
14 - 6A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14.4.2 Detection of thermistor burnout
* Since thermistor burnout detection circuits of the thermistor-1 and -2 are common, it is explained with
the thermistor-1.
+5
R165
Thermistor-1
HTRTHR170
C125
Main
Processor
• The input voltage is obtained by voltage dividing
R165, thermistor, R170 and R174.
• The surface temperature of the heat roller
changes.
→ The thermistor resistance value changes
→ The input voltage also changes
• The main processor detects an abnormality
→ thermistor broken
R174
14.4.3 Control for abnormal heater condition
When something abnormal occurs in the heater turn-ON circuit, such as a shorted triac, it may become
incapable of ON/OFF control. In this case, the microcomputer detects abnormal temperatures through
the first and second thermistors, determines the corresponding error codes and counter values, and
causes the main power to switch OFF to protect the fuser unit.
(1) Temperature detection
The following abnormal temperatures are detected by the respective thermistors:
First thermistor:
230°C
Second thermistor: 270°C
(2) Error codes
“C44”
: Displayed when keys C + 8 are pressed simultaneously at the time of Call
Service.
Counter value “9”: Displayed when you input “400” in the setting mode.
(3) Machine condition
After de-energizing all outputs (heater lamp, exposure lamp, control-panel displays, motors, etc.),
the microcomputer causes the main power to switch OFF.
(4) Corrective action
After the error code and counter value in (2) have been determined, abnormal temperature detection
in (1) continues. So, if the main switch is turned ON immediately, it will be turned OFF again as long
as the temperature on the heater surface remains above the abnormal detection temperatures of
thermistors. Thereafter, this will be repeated. So, after waiting for the heater surface temperature to
drop, turn ON the main switch and you can check the counter value before the main switch is turned
OFF again. After confirming that an abnormal heater condition has occurred, repair the problem and
then clear code 400 of the setting mode with “0”. After that, you can bring the copier into its normal
operating condition.
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14.5 Heat-Roller Motor Drive
14.5.1
Outline of operation
FG pulse
+36A
Wave
shaping
Phase
comparator
Difference
V
Reference
requency
(H-MOT-REF)
Control
signal
Voltage
detection
circuit
Speed
comparator
Difference
HTR MOT
HTR MOTL
Rotation
control
Excited
phase
switching
unit
U
W
A
B
C
Roter
position
detector
Heat roller motor
M/DC-HTR-300N
U, V, W: Phase
A, B, C: Hall element
Fig. 14.5-1
(1) The LGC transmits control signals for the heat-roller motor rotation (HTRMOT:Motor rotation command).
(2) The excited phase switching unit excites each phase on the heat roller motor → Heat roller motor
rotates.
(3) Hall elements A to C are used to detect the rotation position of the motor (or rotor).
(4) The excited phase switching unit switches the excitation for each phase (By repeating steps (2)
through (4) above, the motor keeps rotating.).
(5) An FG pulse is generated by the rotation of the heat roller motor.
(6) The phases and velocities of the FG pulse and the reference frequency from the SUB are compared,
and the differences are added up. In addition to this are added the fluctuations in the supply voltage
(Signal generation).
(7) The switching timing for the excited phase switching unit is changed to match the signal obtained in
step (6).
That is, control ensures that the FG pulse and reference frequency are equal. → The heat roller
motor runs at a constant speed (Locked range state.).
(8) When the HTRMOT signal changes to “H” level, the heat roller motor stops.
(9) During standby, the HTRMOTL level changes to “L” if the temperature of the lower heat roller drops
below the reference temperature, and the heat roller motor rotates at low speed.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 7
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14.5.2 Control signals
(1) HMOT-REF signal (LGC → MOT:Input)
This signal is a reference clock signal for the heat roller motor to rotate at a fixed speed.
The frequency of the reference clock is 1247.6Hz.
(2) HTRMOTL signal (LGC → MOT:Input)
This signal switches low-speed heat-roller motor rotation ON/OFF. When the signal is “L”, the heat
roller rotates at a low speed.
(3) HTRMOT-ON signal (LGC → MOT:Input)
This signal is the heat-roller motor ON/OFF control signal. When the signal changes to “L”, the heat
roller motor is turned ON.
Signal level of motor circuit
Signal
“H” level
“L” level
HMOT-REF
Reference clock (1247.6Hz)
HTRMOTL
Motor OFF
Motor low-speed ON
HTRMOT
Motor OFF
Motor ON
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14.6 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Fuser unit
(1) Draw out the belt transport unit.
(2) Remove the screw.
Belt transport unit
(3) Disconnect the connector from the rear side of
the fuser unit (115V/230V).
(4) Draw out the fuser unit to the front by about 6
mm, and lift up horizontally to remove.
Note: The fuser unit must be held by holding the
handles on the front and rear sides.
* Replacement of parts on the fuser section
is described assuming that the fuser unit
has been removed.
[B] Cleaning roller 1, 2
(1) Remove the fuser front cover and the rear cover
(2 screws).
(2) Remove the fuser unit guard (3 screws).
Fuser unit guard
Front cover
Rear cover
(3) Remove one rear E-ring each.
Cleaning roller 1
E-ring
Cleaning roller 2
Spring (black)
Rear side
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 9
Spring (silver)
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
(4) Remove the shaft and 3-stage gear.
(5) Remove the cleaning roller 1 and the cleaning
roller 2.
Front side
Shaft
Bush
Cleaning roller 2
Bush E-ring
Gear 22
E-ring
E-ring
Pin
Bush
Bush
Rear side
Cleaning roller 1
[C] Upper thermistor and thermostat
(1) Remove the front cover, rear cover and fuser
unit guard.
(2) Remove the drawer connector bracket (1
screw).
(3) Disconnect the thermistor connector, and remove the 3 harness clamps.
(4) Remove the 2 upper thermistor brackets (1
screw for each).
(5) Remove the thermostat bracket (1 screw).
(6) Remove the thermostat (2 screws).
E-ring
Gear 27
Front side
Clamp
Thermostat
bracket
Drawer
connector
Thermistor connector
Notes: 1. When assembling, make sure that the
thermostat is attached as shown in the
figure on the right.
1mm~1.5mm
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2. When removing the 2 upper thermistors
and thermostats, prevent the heat rollers from becoming scratched (Wind paper onto the heat rollers as shown in the
figure on the right.).
Paper
[D] Lower thermistor
(1) Remove the harness cover (1 screw).
(2) Remove the lower thermistor (1 screw).
Lower thermistor
Harness cover
[E] Upper separation claw
(1) Remove the jam release unit (1 screw on the
front side).
Jam release unit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 11
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
(2) Remove the upper separation claw unit (1
screw on the front side).
Notes: 1. When fixing screws onto the shaft, make
sure that the D cut section of the shaft
fits into the D cut hole on the bracket.
2. The separation claw positions can be
moved 3 mm each to the front and rear
by the position of the E-ring on the shaft
(Before the copier is shipped from the
factory, the E-ring is at the center
groove.).
Before the copier is shipped from the factory,
the E-ring is at the center groove.
Rear side
Front side
(3) Remove the spring and upper separation claw.
Note: The spring is attached in the direction shown
in the following figure.
Spring
Spring
Separation claw
Separation claw
[F] Lower separation claw/cleaning roller 4
(1) Remove 1 screw for each from the front and
rear sides, and open the lower separation claw
unit.
Lower separation claw unit
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Remove the spring and lower separation claw.
(3) Cleaning roller 4 opens together with the lower
separation claw unit. Cleaning roller 4 is attached to the lower separation claw unit via
bushes and springs.
Cleaning roller4
Lower separation
claw
Spring
[G] 2 heater lamps
(1) Remove the front lamp bracket (1 screw).
(2) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the front
heater lamp.
Connector
Lamp bracket
(3) Remove the drawer connector bracket (1
screw).
(4) Remove the rear lamp bracket (1 screw).
(5) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the rear
heater lamp.
(6) Draw out the 2 heater lamps.
Lamp bracket
Drawer
connector
bracket
Notes: 1. When attaching the 2 heater lamps, make
sure that they are attached with the
TOSHIBA marks facing the front.
Connector
Upper hearter lamp
TOSHIBA mark
Lower hearter lamp
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 13
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
2. The wattage of the 2 lamps is different.
Make sure that the lamp having the correct wattage is attached by aligning the
lamp with the holes on the heater lamp
bracket.
3. Do not directly touch the glass sections
of the lamps, and leave fingerprints or
other marks.
6
7
6
7
[H] Upper/lower heat roller and cleaning roller 3
(1) Remove the fuser unit guard and jam processing unit.
(2) Draw out the 2 heater lamps.
(3) Completely loosen the 2 screws fixing the pressure springs.
(4) Remove the front handle bracket (1 screw).
(5) Remove the front stop ring and gear.
(6) Remove the 2 front screws and take out the
bearing.
Bearing
Stop ring
(6)
(6)
(4)
Handle bracket
(7) Remove the timing belt.
(8) Remove the rear stop ring and take out the
pulley.
Stop ring
Timing belt
Pulley
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(9) Remove the rear handle bracket (2 screws).
(10) Remove the 2 rear screws and take out the
bearing.
Rear handle bracket
(9)
(9)
(10)
(10)
Bearing
(11) Slide the upper heat roller to remove as shown
the arrow A .
Notes: 1. Take care not to deform the lead spring
on the upper thermistor.
2. Wind paper onto the heat roller taking
care not to scratch the heat roller.
Paper
A
Upper heat
roller
(12) Open the lower separation claw unit (2 screws).
(13) Open the lower inlet guide unit (2 screws).
(14) The cleaning roller 3 opens together with the
lower inlet guide. The cleaning roller 3 is attached to the lower inlet guide unit via the
spring.
Lower inlet guide unit
Cleaning roller 3
(15) Remove the lower heat roller with the bearing.
Note: Wind paper onto the lower heat roller taking care not to scratch the lower heat roller.
Wind paper onto the lower heat roller in the
same way when installing the lower heat
roller.
Bearing
Lower heat roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 15
Paper
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
Notes: Precautions during Replacement
1. Make sure on the front and rear sides
that the bearing of the lower heat roller
fits into the pressure lever.
2. Take care not to bump and scratch the
surface of the heat roller against the
bracket or other parts.
3. Take care not to scratch the thermistor.
4. Make sure that the screws of the pressure springs are firmly fastened (2 locations). When thin paper is frequently
used, and paper frequently wrinkles,
loosen these screws to adjust.
5. If paper jams occur frequently in the fuser
or paper frequently wrinkles, make adjustments referenced to the markings
lower inlet guide on the 2 screws.
Bearing
Pressure lever
Lower heat roller
Lower inlet guide
Stamped mark
[I] Exit roller
(1) Remove the front and rear stop ring, then remove the exit roller.
Stop ring
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 16
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Remove the 2 stop rings, screw, handle, gear
and 2 pins. Then draw out the shaft to replace
the exit roller.
Gear
Stop ring
Gear
Handle
Stop ring
Screw,spring
Pin
Handle
Stop ring
Stop ring
Bush
Pin Bush
Pin
Spring Screw
Rear side
Front side
[J] Exit switch
(1) Remove the front cover (2 screws).
(2) Disconnect the connector.
(3) Release the claw from the bracket, and remove
the exit switch.
Claw
Connector
[K]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Heat roller motor
Remove the rear cover.
Remove the rear side cover.
Remove the connector cable bracket (2
screws).
Connector cable bracket
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 17
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
(4) Disconnect the connector from the heat roller
motor PC board.
(5) Remove the motor (3 screws).
Heat roller motor
PC board
Connector
Heat roller
motor
[L] Heater fan motor
(1) Remove the system electronics unit.
(2) Remove the screw and disconnect the 2 connectors, and then remove the heater fan duct
in the direction of the arrow.
Connector
(3) Remove the rear side cover.
(4) Remove the connector cable bracket (2
screws).
Connector cable bracket
(5) Disconnect the motor connector.
Connector
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
14 - 18
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(6) Remove the motor bracket (1 screw).
Heater fan
(7) Remove the heater fan motor from the bracket
(2 screws).
Note: When assembling, the direction of the arrow on the blow out side of the heater fan
motor must be as shown in the figure on
the right.
[M] SSR for the upper heater lamp
(1) Remove the protective cover (3 screws).
(2) Disconnect the 4 connectors, and remove each
of the 2 screws to remove the SSR.
Note: Wiring is as follows.
Thin wire
Blue
Yellow
Black
Yellow
connector
16A
8A
Blue
Blue
White
Transparent
connector
White
White
Thick wire
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14 - 19
6570/5570 FUSER UNIT
15. AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU)
15.1 Introduction
The Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) is a device for automatically making copies on both the front and
rear sides of paper. The ADU also has a stack function that allows up to 60 copies to be made on both
sides of the paper in a single operation. In other words, the stack function operates to make copies on the
rear side for the number of sets specified when making multiple sets of copies, and stacking these sets.
Up to 60 sheets can be stacked. Double-sided copying is completed by making the next copy on the rear
side of the paper by re-feeding the stacked copies for the specified number of copies.
As the ADU uses the FIFO (First In First Out) system, it is structured to re-feed copy paper from the
bottom side. The exit section is provided with a reversal mechanism for offsetting the order of doublesided copying depending on the double-sided copy mode (for example, when the one-sided and doublesided mode are selected for odd-numbered originals without the number of originals specified) using the
ADF.
The ADU comprises the following mechanisms:
(1) ADU/exit switching gate
This gate is for guiding paper output from the fuser to the ADU.
During one-sided copying, and after double-sided copying is completed, the movement of this gate
guides copy paper to the copy tray.
(2) ADU inlet/reversal roller
This roller is for guiding the paper to the stack section from the gate. During the reversal exit operation, it guides the copy paper again to the stack section. Reversal of this roller turns the paper over,
and guides the paper to the copy tray from the exit section.
(3) Stack section
This is where paper is stacked. This section is provided with guides for aligning the leading and
trailing edges, and left and right sides of the paper.
(4) Holding gate section
This section functions to hold stacked paper for re-feeding, and to receive paper to be stacked.
Rotation of this gate re-feeds paper while simultaneously stacking paper.
(5) Re-feed section
This feed mechanism is for guiding paper on the stack section again to the copier. It comprises a
pick-up roller, feed roller, separation belt, aligning roller and other parts.
(6) Transport section
This section comprises a transport roller and transport guide for guiding re-fed paper to the feed
section on this copier.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15
15--1A
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
Drum
ADU/exit switching gate
Aligning roller
Fuser
Exit roller
ADU inlet/reversal roller
Separation belt
Stack section
Holding gate
Aligning roller
Pick-up roller
Transport roller
Transport guide
Feed roller
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 2A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15.2 Drive
Holding gate
Inlet/reversal roller
Reverse rotation clutch
Forward rotation clutch
Drive motor
Transport roller
A
Feed clutch
Transport clutch
Aligning clutch
A
Aligning roller
Pick-up roller
Separation belt
Feed roller
15.2.1 ADU/exit switching gate drive
When the gate solenoid turns ON, the link
is pulled (arrow 1 ), the arm rotates (arrow 2 ), the gate opens, and the copied
paper is transported to the ADU stack section.
When the gate solenoid turns OFF, the arm
returns to its original position (arrow 3 )
by spring force, and the copied paper is output.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
3
2
1
15
15--3A
3
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15.2.2 Stack guide drive
(1) Paper side guide
The width guide motor operates in accordance
with the size of the selected paper to move the
paper side guide to the specified position. With
each five sheets of paper stacked on the stack
section, the width guide motor moves the side
guide to the left and right to align the paper.
(2) Paper trailing edge guide
The length guide motor operates in accordance
with the size of the selected paper to move the
paper trailing edge guide to the specified position.
Paper side guide
Paper trailing edge guide
Width guide motor
15.2.3 ADU inlet/reversal roller drive
When the forward rotation clutch turns ON, the inlet roller rotates in the direction (forward rotation)
for feeding paper to the stack section of the ADU.
When the reverse rotation clutch turns ON, the inlet roller rotates in the direction (reverse direction)
for turning the paper over.
Length guide motor
Reverse rotation clutch
Inlet/reversal roller
Forward rotation clutch
Inlet roller
Input gear
Forward rotation
clutch
Reverse rotation clutch
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 4A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15.2.4 Holding gate drive
When the flapper solenoid turns ON, the projection
on the spring clutch becomes disconnected and
rotates. When the flapper solenoid turns OFF, the
projection on the spring clutch stopped by the flapper solenoid to stop rotation.
Holding gate
Spring clutch
Flapper solenoid
15.2.5
ADU pick-up roller, ADU feed roller and
ADU separation belt drive
• When the ADU feed clutch turns ON, the ADU
feed roller and ADU pick-up roller rotates.
• The ADU separation belt rotates by the gear
on the ADU feed roller in the direction opposite
(reverse direction) to that of the ADU feed roller.
Feed clutch
Pick-up roller
Separation belt
Feed roller
15.2.6 ADU aligning roller drive
When the ADU aligning clutch turns ON, the ADU
aligning roller rotates.
Aligning clutch
Aligning roller
15.2.7 ADU transport roller drive
When the ADU transport clutch is turn ON, the ADU
transport roller rotates.
Trasport roller
Trasport clutch
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15
15--5A
5
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15.3 Description of Operation
15.3.1
Paper stack operation
ADU/exit switching gate
Reversal sensor
ADU inlet guide
ADU inlet roller
Pick-up roller
Holding gate
Side guide
Stack section
Empty switch
When the double-sided copy mode is selected on the copier’s control panel, and the COPY button is
pressed, the paper side guides and paper trailing end guide on the ADU stack section move to the
positions corresponding to the selected paper size by respective motor drive. At the same time, the ADU/
exit switching gate moves to the paper stack position by the gate solenoid.
The copied paper is fed inside the ADU inlet guide by the ADU/exit switching gate. During this operation,
the paper is detected by the reversal sensor, and ADU drive motor operates, the inlet roller rotates by the
ADU inlet roller forward rotation clutch, and the paper is fed further into the stack section.
When the paper enters the stack section, it is temporarily stacked on the holding gate receiving section,
and the paper is stacked between the pick-up roller and the holding gate as the holding gate rotates. At
the stack section, the paper is stacked with the copied side facing down. This operation is repeated until
the specified number of sheets of paper are stacked.
When paper stacking is started, the paper side guides open to make a gap of 1 mm on both sides of the
paper and are set at this position. Each time that five sheets of paper are stacked continuously during
stacking, the side guides align the sides of the paper.
The ADU empty switch is for detecting whether or not paper is on the stack section.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 6A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15.3.2
Duplex copy (re-feed) operation
ADU/exit switching gate
Exit roller
Aligning roller
Separation belt
Holding gate
ADU feed switch
ADU aligning
switch
Position detection switch 1
Pick-up roller
ADU aligning roller
Position detection switch 2
ADU feed roller
When the first sheet of paper is stacked, the pick-up roller located on the bottom side of the stack section
rotates by the ADU feed clutch to feed paper out to the ADU feed roller section. If two or more sheets are
fed out during this operation, the ADU separation belt rotates in the reverse direction to draw the upper
sheet(s) back onto the stack section. The ADU feed roller and ADU separation belt are driven by the ADU
feed clutch.
The holding gate also rotates at the same time as the pick-up roller, and functions to hold the paper on
the stack section. After the paper is fed out, it passes through the ADU aligning roller, is detected by the
position detector switch located in the transport section, and stops temporarily at the transport section
(initial alignment operation).
When paper stacking ends, the paper that has been initially aligned is fed to and aligned by the aligning
roller of the copier, and copies are made on the side opposite to the initially copied side. Paper that has
been copied on both sides passes over the ADU/exit switching gate that is already positioned in the exit
direction, and is output to the copy tray by the exit roller.
The paper on the stack section is fed successively from the bottom side. This operation is repeated until
all stacked paper is copied.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 7A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
1) The ADU feed switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the ADU
feed roller. It is also used for detecting paper jams.
2) The ADU aligning switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the ADU
aligning roller. It is also used for detecting paper jams.
3) The ADU position detection switch 1 and ADU position detection switch 2 switch detect the leading
and trailing edges of the paper passing through the ADU transport roller. They are also used for
detecting paper jams.
8070/6570/5570/4580
Mar.
1999 © TOSHIBAADU
TEC
15
15--8A
8
Mar.
8070/6570/5570/4580
1999 © TOSHIBA ADU
TEC
15.3.3
Reversal exit operation
Reverse guide
ADU/exit switching gate
Exit roller
Reversal gate
Aligning roller
Reversal switch
Inlet/reversal roller
Solenoid
Reverse direction clutch
ADU feed guide
In the double-sided copy mode, the reversal exit operation is carried out when the second side is output
if the following conditions are met:
Conditions: The 1st of several copies of two or more odd-numbered originals made in the one-sided and
double-sided modes using the ADF. Or, when one copy is made.
By the reversal exit operation, the double-sided copy sheets are detected by the body aligning switch
when the sheets arrive at the aligning roller on the copier, and the ADU/exit switching gate are positioned
in the direction of the paper stack section by solenoid. Next, the double-sided copy sheets are fed inside
the ADU inlet guide by During this operation, the leading edge of the paper is detected by the reversal
switch, and the inlet/reversal roller rotates in the forward direction to transfer the paper to the ADU stack
section.
When the paper passes through the reversal gate, and the trailing edge of the paper passes the reversal
switch, the inlet/reversal roller rotates in the reverse direction by the reverse direction clutch, and the
paper is guided to the reversal guide section by the reversal gate. After the paper is guided to the
reversal guide section, it is output to the copy tray by the exit roller.
1) The reversal switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the reversal
gate. It is also used for detecting paper jams.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 9A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15.4 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Removing the ADU covers
[A-1] Removing the ADU front cover
(1) Draw out the ADU from the copier.
(2) Remove the screw fixing the rotation knob, and
then remove the rotation knob.
(3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the ADU front cover.
(4) Remove the upper guide cover fastened by the
stop ring.
[A-2] Removing the ADU feed cover
(1) Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU feed cover.
Stop ring
Upper guide cover
[A-2]
[A-2]
(3)
(3)
(2)
(3)
[B] Stack guide unit
(1) Remove the 6 screws fixing the stack guide unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector.
(3) Remove the stack guide unit.
Connector
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 10A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[C] Width guide motor and width guide switch
(1) Remove the stack guide unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the 2
screws.
(3) Remove the 2 screws fixing the width guide
motor to remove the width guide motor.
(4) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the
width guide switch.
Note: The position of the width guide switch is
adjusted before the copier is shipped from
the factory. Do not remove the adjustment
screw.
Length guide switch
Width guide switch
Position detection switch1
Width guide motor
Length guide motor
Stack empty switch
[D] Length guide motor and length guide
switch
(1) Remove the stack guide unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the 2
screws.
(3) Remove the 2 screws fixing the length guide
motor and then remove the length guide motor.
(4) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the
length guide switch.
[E] Stack empty switch, position detection
switch 1
(1) Remove the stack guide unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the
stack empty switch.
(3) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the
position detection switch 1.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15
15--11A
11
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
[F] Pick-up roller guide unit
(1) Remove the stack guide unit.
(2) Remove the 4 screws fixing the pick-up roller
guide to remove the pick-up roller guide.
[G] Pick-up roller
(1) Remove the pick-up roller guide unit.
(2) Remove the 3 clips fixing the pick-up roller,
clutch and pick-up roller.
[H]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Transport clutch
Remove the ADU front cover.
Remove the stack guide unit.
Remove the pick-up roller guide unit.
Remove the 2 screws fixing the clutch guide
and then the clutch guide.
Note: When returning the clutch guide to its original position, make sure that the protrusion
on the clutch is fitted into the notch on the
clutch guide.
(5) Remove the set screw fixing the transport clutch
and disconnect the connector. Then remove the
transport clutch.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 12A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[I] Transport roller 2, 3, 4
(1) Remove the PC board.
(2) Remove the front E-ring and bush.
2
3
4
(3) Remove the rear E-ring, pulley pin and belt.
(4) Remove the E-ring and bush and then the transport roller. The transport roller 2 and 3 are same
parts.
[J] Transport roller 1
(1) Remove the front clutch guide and the transport clutch.
(2) Remove the front E-ring and bush.
(3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the rear connector
bracket, and then remove the connector
bracket.
(4) Remove the rear E-ring, pulley pin and belt.
(5) Remove the E-ring and bush, and then the
transport roller. The transport roller 1 and 4 are
same parts.
[K] Transport switch 2
(1) Turn the ADU unit cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove transport switch 2.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 13A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
[L] ADU drive unit
(1) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
(2) Remove the 5 screws fixing the ADU drive unit
and then the ADU drive unit.
[M] Feed clutch and aligning clutch
(1) Remove the ADU drive unit.
(2) Remove the bracket (2 screws).
(3) Remove the 4 bushes.
(4) Remove the E-ring, gear and pin.
(5) Remove the feed clutch and the 2 set screws
fixing the aligning clutch. Then, remove the feed
clutch and aligning clutch.
Note: The gear on the feed clutch side is Z32, and
the hear on the aligning clutch side is Z22.
[N]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Feed roller
Remove the ADU front cover.
Remove the stack guide unit.
Remove the pick-up roller guide unit.
Remove the ADU drive unit.
Remove the transport clutch guide.
Remove the front E-ring and bush.
8070/6570/5570/4580
Mar.
1999 © TOSHIBAADU
TEC
15
15--14A
14
Mar.
8070/6570/5570/4580
1999 © TOSHIBA ADU
TEC
(7) Remove the rear E-ring, gear (black) and pin.
(8) Remove the E-ring and bearing.
(9) Remove the spring from the transport guide.
(10) Slide the feed roller to the rear to remove.
(11) Remove the spring and separation belt gear
drive unit.
(12) Remove the E-ring, pick-up gear drive unit and
pin.
[O] Aligning roller
(1) Remove the ADU front cover.
(2) Remove the stack guide unit.
(3) Remove the pick-up roller guide unit.
(4) Remove the ADU drive unit.
(5) Remove the transport clutch guide.
(6) Remove the front E-ring and bearing.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 15
6570/5570 ADU
(7) Remove the rear E-ring, gear (white) and pin.
(8) Remove the E-ring and bearing.
(9) Slide the aligning roller to the rear to remove.
[P] Feed switch
(1) Remove the ADU feed cover.
(2) Remove the screw fixing the feed switch
bracket.
(3) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the feed
switch.
Feed switch
[Q] Aligning switch
(1) Remove the ADU feed cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector, and release the
switch claw from the bracket to remove the
aligning switch.
6570/5570 ADU
15 - 16
Aligning switch
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[R]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ADU feed unit
Remove the ADU front cover.
Remove the ADU feed cover.
Remove the transport clutch holder.
Disconnect the 5 connectors, and release the
harness from the feed unit.
(5) Remove the 2 E-ring from the front side of the
fulcrum shaft fixing the ADU feed unit.
Color (black-black)
(white-white)
(white-black)
(6) Remove the rear E-ring.
(7) Remove the rear spring.
(8) Draw out the fulcrum shaft to the front.
(9) Remove the feeder unit by lifting it upwards.
[S] Forward rotation clutch and reverse
rotation clutch
(1) Remove the ADU feed unit.
(2) Remove the 2 E-rings, 2 screws and then the
feed drive unit.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 17A
15A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
(3) Remove the 2 E-rings, 2 screws and bracket.
(4) Remove the 2 E-rings and bush.
(5) Remove each of the 2 set screws fixing the forward rotation clutch and reverse rotation clutch,
and then remove forward rotation clutch and
reverse rotation clutch.
E-ring
[T]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Holding gate solenoid
Remove the ADU feed unit.
Remove the feed drive unit.
Remove the screw fixing the holding gate solenoid to remove the holding gate solenoid.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15
15--16A
18
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[U] inlet/reversal roller (rubber roller, plastic
roller)
(1) Remove the ADU feed unit.
(2) Remove the feed drive unit.
(3) Remove the E-ring, gear and pin.
(4) Remove 2 screws for the transport guide-u.
Transport guide-u
E-ring
Pin
(5) Remove the rear E-ring, and take out the bush.
(6) Remove the transport guide-u (2 screws).
E-ring
Bush
(7) Slide the inlet/reversal roller (rubber roller) to
the front to remove.
2
1
(8) Remove the front springs and rear springs (2
each).
(9) Remove the front E-ring, and take out the bush.
(10) Remove the rear E-ring, and take out the bush.
Spring
E-ring
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 19A
17A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
(11) Slide the inlet/reversal roller (plastic roller) to
the front, and take it out.
2
1
[V]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Separation belt
Remove the ADU unit.
Remove the feed drive unit.
Remove the 4 screws fixing separation mounting bracket, and then the separation mounting
bracket.
Separation
mounting bracket
(4) Remove the E-ring, collar, gear, pin and bush.
(5) Remove the 2 E-rings, bush and bracket.
E-ring,collar,gear & pin
(4)
Bush
(4)
(6) Remove the E-ring, slide the bush from the
bracket and then remove the separation belt
roller. Remove the 2 E-rings, and remove the
drop roller.
Bush
(5)
E-ring
(5)
E-ring
(5)
Drop roller
E-ring
E-ring
Separation belt roller
E-ring
Bush
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBAADU
8070/6570/5570/4580
TEC
15 - 20A
18A
19A
Mar.
8070/6570/5570/4580
1999 © TOSHIBA ADU
TEC
(7) Remove the 3 E-rings and collar.
(8) Draw out the shaft to the rear side.
(9) Replace the 4 separation belts.
Collar
[W] Pre-stack discharge brush
(1) Remove the ADU feed cover.
(2) Remove the 2 screws fixing the pre-stack discharge brush and then the pre-stack discharge
brush.
Discharge brush
Sheet
[X]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Holding gate
Remove the ADU feed unit.
Remove the feed drive unit.
Remove the E-ring and clutch unit.
Remove the 2 front E-rings, each of the 2 gears
and pins.
(5) Draw out arm F to the front side.
E-ring
Arm F
(6) Remove the 2 rear E-rings, each of the 2 gears
and pins.
(7) Draw out arm R to the rear side.
Note: For reassembling, refer to the service handbook 1.15.2 “Holding gate position adjustment”.
Arm R
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 21A
19A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
(8) Slide the holding gate to the front and remove
it.
Holding gate
[Y] ADU/exit switching gate
(1) Open the exit unit.
(2) Remove the spring from the arm, and the screw
fixing the link to the arm.
Note: When assembling, take care not to tighten
the screw fixing the link to the arm too tight.
(3) Remove the rear clip and bush.
Clip
(4) Slide the ADU/exit switching gate to the front
and remove it.
Gate
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 22A
20A
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Remove the E-ring, arm, pin and bush from the
removed ADU/exit switching gate, and replace
the gate.
E-ring
Arm
Bush
[Z] Gate solenoid
(1) Remove the 4 screws fixing the exit cover, and
then remove the exit cover.
(2) Remove the screw fixing the link to the gate
arm.
(3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the 2
screws fixing the gate solenoid. Then remove
the gate solenoid.
Gate solenoid
[AA] Reversal gate
(1) Open the exit unit.
(2) Remove the E-ring fixing the reversal gate.
Then remove the arm, spring and bush.
(3) Slide the reversal gate to the rear and remove
it.
Reversal
gate
Arm
Spring
[AB] Exit roller
(1) Remove the exit cover.
(2) Remove the rear E-ring, and slide the bearing
to the inside of the frame.
(3) Slide the exit roller to the rear and remove the
bearing from the frame, and then take out the
exit roller.
E-ring
Exit roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15
15--21A
23
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
[AC] Transport (reversal) roller
(1) Open the exit unit.
(2) Remove the rear E-ring, gear, pin and bush.
(3) Remove the E-ring, slide the transport (reversal)
roller to the front, remove the bush from the
frame, and then take out the transport (reversal)
roller.
(4) Remove the E-ring from the transport (reversal)
roller and bush, and replace the transport (reversal) roller.
Transport / reverse
roller
[AD] ADU drive motor
(1) Remove the main unit rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector.
(3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the drive motor
bracket and then the drive motor bracket.
(4) Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU drive
motor and then the ADU drive motor.
Assembly of clutch and solenoid connector
As the clutch and solenoid connector have the same
shape, it is possible that they may contact with each
other. Using the following figure and list, carry out
the assembly after checking the color of each connector and harness.
A
C
B
Connected Point
Connector Color
Harness Color
Connector Color
Harness Color
A
Black
Black
Black
Black
Harness for reverse clutch
B
White
White
Black
Black
Harness for forward clutch
C
White
Brown
White
Black
Harness for solenoid
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADU
15 - 24
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[AC] Transport (reversal) roller
(1) Open the exit unit.
(2) Remove the rear E-ring, gear, pin and bush.
(3) Remove the E-ring, slide the transport (reversal)
roller to the front, remove the bush from the
frame, and then take out the transport (reversal)
roller.
(4) Remove the E-ring from the transport (reversal)
roller and bush, and replace the transport (reversal) roller.
Transport / reverse
roller
[AD] ADU drive motor
(1) Remove the main unit rear cover.
(2) Disconnect the connector.
(3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the drive motor
bracket and then the drive motor bracket.
(4) Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU drive
motor and then the ADU drive motor.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
15 - 25
6570/5570 ADU
16. AUTOMATING DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
16.1 Outline
The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds sheet originals onto the original glass, and
outputs them to the tray after they have been copied. The figure below shows the configuration of the
ADF.
1 Original feed section ................. This mechanism feeds originals one at a time onto the original glass.
It comprises a pickup roller, feed roller, separation pad, aligning
roller and other parts.
2 Original transport section .......... This section transports originals after they exit the original glass. It
comprises a transport belt and rollers for driving the transport belt.
3 Original exit/reversal section ..... This section outputs originals onto the exit tray after copying is completed. When making copies in the double-sided mode, the original
is guided to the reversal section where it is turned over. The original
is then fed to the original glass again. The original exit/reversal section comprises an exit roller, flapper, reversal roller and other parts.
Original (face-up)
Pick-up roller
Transport belt
Original feeding
tray
Exit roller
Separation pad
Exit from ADF
Flapper
Reverse roller
Aligning roller
Original stopper
Original glass
Feed roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 1
Sent onto the original glass for
duplex copying
6570/5570 ADF
16.2 Construction
16.2.1
ADF construction
Control section
Original receiving tray
Exit / Reverse section
Transport section
Original feeding tray
Jam release cover
Feeding section
Document feeder unit consists of feeding section (includes the original feeding tray), transport section,
reverse (includes exit) section and control section.
Mechanical part
Feeding section
Transport section
Reverse section
• Jam release cover
• ADF pick up roller
• ADF feed motor
• ADF aligning sensor
• ADF feed roller
• ADF separation pad
• ADF timing sensor
• ADF empty sensor
• ADF aligning roller
• ADF size sensor
• ADF feed cover switch
• Belt drive roller
• Transport belt
• ADF transport motor
• ADF open switch
• Belt retainer roller
• ADF fan motor
• Jam release cover
• ADF reverse motor
• ADF reverse roller
• ADF reverse flapper
• ADF reverse solenoide
• Exit sensor
• ADF exit roller
• ADF exit cover sensor
Control section
6570/5570 ADF
Electrical part
• PC board
16 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.2.2 Drive mechanism
(1) Drive motor rotates CW (Front view)
8
7
6
Front side
5
Reverse motor
Rear side
1
Transport motor
4
Lock
2
Stop
3
Feed motor
Free
1 Pick-up roller rotates CCW.
2 Feed roller rotates CCW.
3 Aligning roller stops.
4 Weight goes down.
5 Transport belt rotates CW.
6 Exit roller rotates CW.
7 Reverse roller rotates CW.
*
8 Flapper goes up at the duplexing mode and the following conditions.
I. The solenoid turns ON when trailing edge of the first original is passed the timing sensor.
II. The solenoid turns ON when transport of the original is restarted after reversal of the original
is stopped.
III. The solenoid turns ON when transport of the second original is restarted after the first original
is exited and transport of the second original is stopped on the glass.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 3
6570/5570 ADF
(2) Drive motor rotates CCW (Front view)
8
7
6
Front side
5
Reverse motor
Rear side
1
Free
Transport motor
4
Stop
Stop
2
3
Feed motor
Lock
1 Pick-up roller stops.
2 Feed roller stops.
3 Aligning roller rotates CCW.
4 Weight goes up.
5 Transport belt rotates CCW.
6 Exit roller rotates CCW.
7 Reverse roller rotates CCW.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.3 Description of Operations
16.3.1 Description of operation
(1) Setting the original
The original is set on the tray, and the empty sensor turns ON.
The empty sensor detects that the original is set, and the original set signal is set.
(2) Start of feed to aligning
When the feed signal is received from the copier, the DF operation in progress signal is set. Then, the
feed motor starts operating in the reverse direction, the feed roller is rotated, the weight plate is
lowered, and initial alignment is started.
At the same time, the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction, the
transport belt and reversal roller rotate, and the dummy exit operation is started.
After the alignment sensor detects the leading edge of the original, the original is transported for a
specified number of pulses, and the leading edge of the original arrives and is aligned at the aligning
roller. The feed motor then stops.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 5
6570/5570 ADF
(3) Restart to end of initial alignment
The feed motor starts to operate in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller, transport of the
original is started, and the initial alignment operation is restarted.
After the timing sensor detects the leading edge of the original, the original is transported by a specified number of pulses. At the point that the original arrives at the initial alignment standby position,
the feed motor stops, and the initial alignment operation is completed.
At this time, forward rotation of the feed motor causes the weight plate to rise. At the point that initial
alignment operation is completed, the status of the width sensor is checked and stored to memory.
The transport motor and reversal motor stop at the point when they have been driven by a specified
number of pulses, and exit operation is completed. However, note, that if the original exit operation
was in progress at this time, dummy exit operation is completed at the point when the exit operation
of this original is completed.
(4) Start of original transport to aligning sensor OFF (detection of scan size)
After completion of dummy exit, the feed motor and transport motor start to operate in the forward
direction, and the aligning roller and transport belt rotate to start transport of the original standing by
at the initial alignment position to the exposure position. At this time, detection of the scan size is
started. From the second original onwards, the reversal motor also starts to rotate in the forward
direction at the same time to start exit operation.
The number of pulses from start of transport of the original at the initial alignment position to when
the trailing edge of the original passes the aligning sensor is counted to detect the length of the
original.
The stop notice signal is set at the set timing of the stop notice signal.
At the point that the aligning sensor detects the trailing edge of the original, the DF operation in
progress signal is reset, detection of the scan size is completed, and the original size is determined
also by the state of the width sensor that was stored to memory at completion of initial alignment. If
the original is a non-standard size, or the original size differs from that of the previously fed original,
the original size data is sent to the copier.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF
At the point when the timing sensor turns OFF and the trailing edge of the original is detected, the
feed motor stops.
The number of drive pulses until the feed motor stops is set.
(6) Setting the original at the exposure position (completion of feed)
The original stops signal is set by the set timing of the original stop signal.
After the timing sensor detects the trailing edge of the original, the original is transported for a specified number of pulses. At the point when the original arrives at the exposure position, the feed motor
stops, the original is set at the exposure position, and feed is completed.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 7
6570/5570 ADF
(7) Start of initial alignment of next original to completion of initial alignment
When there is an original on the tray at the point when feed is completed, the initial alignment signal
is set, the feed motor starts to operate in the reverse direction, and initial alignment of the next
original is started.
If there is no original on the tray, operation from (8) is started.
The same processes as (2) and (3) are carried out, initial alignment of the next original is completed,
and the original stands by.
* When initial alignment is carried out on the 2nd original onwards, the dummy exit operation is not
carried out.
If an original is in the process of being output, the next original waits for completion of the exit
operation.
(8) Start of feed to setting the original at the exposure position (completion of feed)
When the feed signal is received, the initial alignment signal is reset, feed of the original standing by
at the initial alignment position is started, the same processes from (4) to (8) are carried out, and the
original is set at the exposure position. When the exit signal is received during feed of the 2nd original
onwards, the DF operation in progress signal is set. Then, the reversal motor starts to operate in the
forward direction to rotate the reversal roller, and the exit operation is started to output the original.
Exposed originals are transported to the exit section side. If the original transported to the exit section can be drawn out and output, they are drawn out and output from the platen top during exposure
of the original.
If there is an original on the tray when feed is completed, initial alignment of the next original is
started.
* This operation is repeated until all originals on the tray are fed.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 8
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(9) Start of original feed and exit to exit sensor ON
When the original is output, the number of drive pulses up start of exit deceleration is set at the point
when the exit sensor turns ON. When the output original is nipped by the exit roller by a specified
amount or more when setting of the original to be fed is completed, the original is drawn out and
output as it is. If the output original has not been nipped by the specified amount or more, the original
is not drawn out and output. In this case, output of this original is carried out when the next original is
fed.
(10) Start of exit deceleration
At the point when the number of drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration set in (9) has been
counted, deceleration of the reversal motor is started, and the original is output at low speed.
(11) Turn guide sensor OFF
At the point when the exit sensor turns OFF, the number of pulses up to reversal motor stop is set.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 9
6570/5570 ADF
(12) Completion of exit
At the point when the original is completely output onto the exit tray, the reversal motor stops, and
exit is completed.
(13) Start of exit of final original to completion of exit
When the exit signal is received during exit of the final original, the DF operation in progress signal is
set. Then, the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction, the transport belt and reversal roller rotate to start exit operation, and the original on the original glass is
transported to the exit section. At the point when the exit sensor turns ON, the number of drive pulses
up to start of exit deceleration is set. At the point when the number of pulses is counted up, deceleration of the transport motor and reversal motor is started, and the original is output at low speed. At the
point when all originals in the DF have been output, the transport motor and reversal motor stop, exit
is completed, the DF operation in progress signal is reset, and feed operation is completed.
* During step feed, 2 originals are output continuously.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 10
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.3.2 Double-sided feed operation
(1) Setting the original
The original is set on the tray, the empty sensor turns ON, setting of the original is detected, and the
original set signal is set.
(2) Start of feed to aligning
When the feed signal is received from the copier, the DF operation in progress signal is set. Then, the
feed motor rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the feed roller, lower the weight plate and start
initial alignment operation. After the aligning sensor turns ON and the leading edge of the original is
detected, the original is transported for a specified number of pulses, and the leading edge of the
original arrives and is aligned at the aligning roller. The feed motor then stops. At the same time, the
transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt
and reversal roller and start the dummy exit operation.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 11
6570/5570 ADF
(3) Restart of initial alignment to completion of initial alignment
The feed motor starts to operate in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller. Transport of the
original starts, and the initial alignment operation is restarted. After the timing sensor turns ON, and
the leading edge of the original is detected, the original is transport for a specified number of pulses,
and the feed motor stops and the initial alignment operation is completed at the point when the
original arrives at the initial alignment standby position. At this time, forward rotation of the feed motor
causes the weight plate to lower. At the point that initial alignment operation is completed, the status
of the width sensor is checked and stored to memory. After initial alignment operation is completed,
the transport motor and reversal motor stop at the point when they have been driven by a specified
number of pulses, and exit operation is completed. However, note, that if the original exit operation
was in progress at this time, dummy exit operation is completed at the point when the exit operation
of this original is completed.
(4) Start of original transport to aligning sensor OFF (detection of scan size)
After completion of dummy exit, the feed motor and transport motor start to operate in the forward
direction, and the aligning roller and transport belt rotate to start transport of the original standing by
at the initial alignment position to the exposure position. From the 2nd original onwards, the reversal
motor also starts to rotate in the forward direction at the same time to start exit operation. The number
of pulses from start of transport of the original at the initial alignment position to when the trailing
edge of the original passes the aligning sensor is counted to detect the length of the original. At the
same time, the original size is determined also by the state of the width sensor that was stored to
memory at completion of initial alignment. If the original is a non-standard size, or the original size
differs from that of the previously fed original, the original size data is sent to the copier.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 12
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF
The feed motor stops at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF and the trailing edge of the
original is detected. If exit operation is not carried out simultaneously or has already completed at this
time, the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction simultaneously to rotate the reversal
roller. At the same time, the flapper solenoid turns ON to switch the reversal flapper over to the
reversal side.
When the exit operation is in progress, the transport stops after being driven for a specified number
of pulses. The original being feed pauses before the reversal section, and stands by for exit operation to complete.
After the exit sensor turns ON and the leading edge of the original is detected, the original is transported for a specified number of pulses.
(6) Completion of forward rotation transport
At the point where the leading edge of the original is nipped by the reversal roller lower passage roller
by a specified amount or more, the transport motor and the reversal motor stop.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 13
6570/5570 ADF
(7) Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF
After forward rotation transport is completed, the transport motor starts to rotate in the reverse direction and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and
reversal roller to start reversal of the original. The original passes along the reversal path and is
transported onto the original glass. The DF operation in progress signal is reset at the reset timing of
the DF operation in progress signal. The stop notice signal is set at the set timing of the stop notice
signal. The original top side/rear side signal is set or reset at the point when the exit sensor detects
the trailing edge of the original. The original stop signal is set at the set timing of the original stop
signal.
At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the reversal flapper, the flapper solenoid turns OFF, and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side.
(8) Setting the original at the exposure position (completion of No.1 side feed)
The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts. At the point where
the original arrives at the exposure position, the transport motor and reversal motor stop, and feed is
completed. The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper, and the rear side of the original is set.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 14
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(9) Start of feed to completion of forward rotation transport
When the feed signal is received, and the DF operation in progress signal is set, the reversal feed of
the original that is set at the exposure position is started. First of all, the transport motor and reversal
motor start operating in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller. At the
same time, the flapper solenoid turns ON to switch the reversal flapper to the reversal side, and the
original is transported to the reversal section. After the exit sensor turns ON, the original is transported for a specified number of pulses. At the point where the leading edge of the original is nipped
by the reversal roller lower passage roller by a specified amount or more, the transport motor and the
reversal motor stop.
(10) Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF
After forward rotation transport is completed, the transport motor starts to rotate in the reverse direction, and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and
reversal roller to start reversal of the original. The original passes along the reversal path and is
transported onto the original glass. At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the
reversal flapper, the flapper solenoid turns OFF, and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 15
6570/5570 ADF
(11) Setting the original at the exposure position (completion of No.2 side feed)
The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts. At the point where
the original arrives at the exposure position, the transport motor and reversal motor stop, and feed is
completed. The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper, and the rear side of the
original is set.
(12) Start of initial alignment to completion of initial alignment
When there is an original on the tray at the point when feed is completed, the initial alignment signal
is set, and initial alignment of the next original is started. The same processes as (2) and (3) are
carried out, initial alignment of the next original is completed, and the original stands by.
* When initial alignment is carried out on the 2nd original onwards, the dummy exit operation is not
carried out.
If there is no original on the tray, operation from (21) is started.
(13) Start of feed to aligning sensor OFF
When the feed signal is received, the feed motor, transport motor and reversal motor start to operate
in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller, transport belt and reversal roller. Feed of the
original standing by at the initial alignment position and exit of the original set at the exposure position are carried out simultaneously. In the same way as (4), the original size is detected at the point
when the trailing edge of the original has passed the aligning sensor.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 16
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(14) Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF
The feed motor stops at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF. When the 2nd original onwards
is being fed, exit of exposed originals is carried out at the same time, and the original being fed must
be made to stand by before the reversal section until exit is completed. For this reason, the number
of drive pulses up to feed motor stop is set at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF to stop the
original being fed before the reversal section.
(15) Timing sensor OFF to pause of forward rotation transport
After the timing sensor turns OFF, the original is transport for a specified number of pulses, and the
feed motor stops at the point when the original being fed arrives at the specified position before the
reversal section. The original stands by until exit of the output original is completed. The number of
drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration is set at the point when the turn guide sensor turns ON by
the leading edge of the output original, deceleration of the reversal motor is started at the point when
the timer has counted the number of pulses, and the original is output at low speed.
(16) Completion of exit
At the point when the original is completely output onto the exit tray, the reversal motor stops, and
exit is completed.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 17
6570/5570 ADF
(17) Restart of forward rotation transport to completion of forward rotation transport
After exit of the output original is completed, forward rotation transport of the original standing by
before the reversal section is restarted. The transport motor and reversal motor start to rotate in the
forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller. At the same time, the flapper solenoid
turns ON to switch the reversal flapper to the reversal side. After the exit sensor turns ON, the original
is transported for a specified number of pulses. At the point where the leading edge of the original is
nipped by the reversal roller lower passage roller by a specified amount or more, the transport motor
and the reversal motor stop.
(18) Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF
After forward rotation transport is completed, the transport motor starts to rotate in the reverse direction, and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and
reversal roller to start reversal of the original. The original passes along the reversal path and is
transported onto the original glass. At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the
reversal flapper, the flapper solenoid turns OFF, and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side.
(19) Setting the original at the exposure position (completion of No.1 side feed)
The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts. At the point where the
original arrives at the exposure position, the transport motor and reversal motor stop, and feed is completed. The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper, and the rear side of the original is set.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 18
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(20) Setting the original at the exposure position (completion of No.2 side feed)
The same processes from (9) to (11) are carried out, and the top side of the original is set at the
exposure position. If there is an original on the tray when feed is completed, initial alignment of the
next original is started.
* From here on, operation is repeated until all of the originals on the tray are fed.
(21) Start of exit of final original to completion of exit
When the exit signal is received during exit of the final original, the DF operation in progress signal is
set. Then, the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction, the transport belt and reversal roller rotate to start exit operation, and the original on the original glass is
transported to the exit section. At the point when the exit sensor turns ON, the number of drive pulses
up to start of exit deceleration is set. At the point when the number of pulses is counted up, deceleration of the transport motor and reversal motor is started, and the original is output at low speed. At the
point when all originals in the DF have been output, the transport motor and reversal motor stop, exit
is completed, the DF operation in progress signal is reset, and feed operation is completed.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 19
6570/5570 ADF
16.4 Description of Interface Signals
The following 6 lines are used for sending and receiving signals between the copier and the ADF:
REQ ......................... Communications request signal (copier to ADF)
DF-REQ ................... Communications request signal (ADF to copier)
DF-ACK .................... Communications request answer signal (copier to ADF)
ACK .......................... Communications request answer signal (ADF to copier)
TXD .......................... Data sent from the copier to the ADF
RXD ......................... Data sent from the ADF to the copier
Data communications (RXD, TXD) between the copier and the ADF is carried out by serial communications. So, you cannot check whether or not signals are being sent or received correctly in the field using
a multimeter.
ADF
COPIER
REQ
DF-ACK
TXD
DF-REQ
ACK
RXD
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 20
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.5 Detection of Paper Jam
16.5.1 Feed section jams
[1] Aligning sensor non-arrival jam
1) Up to aligning sensor ON from start of feed from the tray in the one-sided and double-sided modes
The number of pulses equivalent to 15X the distance from the original set position to the aligning
sensor ON position is set as the jam pulse.
This is set when feed from the tray is started.
[2] Timing sensor non-arrival jam
1) Up to timing sensor from start of transport after aligning in the one-sided and double-sided modes
The number of pulses equivalent to 4X the distance from the aligning roller nip position to the timing
sensor ON position is set as the jam pulse.
This is set when transport by the aligning roller after original aligning is started.
[3] Aligning sensor accumulation jam
1) Up to aligning sensor OFF after start of transport from the initial alignment position in the one-sided
and double-sided modes
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the aligning sensor to the trailing edge of
the original when the longest original (LD) is standing by at the initial alignment position is set as the
jam pulse.
This is set when transport from the initial alignment position is started.
[4] Timing sensor accumulation jam
1) Up to timing sensor OFF from aligning sensor OFF
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the aligning OFF position to the timing
sensor OFF position is set as the jam pulse.
16.5.2 Transport section jams
[1] Turn guide sensor non-arrival jam
1) From timing sensor OFF to exit sensor ON when making the first copy (in all modes)
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the leading edge position of the original
at the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the timing sensor to the exit sensor ON
position when the shortest original (personal check) has been fed is set as the jam pulse.
This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the timing sensor when the
first copy is made.
2) From exit sensor OFF for the output original to exit sensor ON for the next original in the one-sided
mode
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the interval between originals when the shortest original
(personal check) is being fed by normal feed in the one-sided mode is set as the jam pulse.
This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the output original has passed the exit sensor in the
one-sided mode.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 21
6570/5570 ADF
3) From restart of No.1 side transport to exit sensor ON in the double-sided mode
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the leading edge position of the original
being fed when the original being fed is paused on the original glass and standing by for exit of the
output original to be completed during No.1 side transport in the double-sided mode is set as the jam
pulse.
This is set when transport of the original being fed is restarted after exit of the output original is
completed during transport of the No.1 side.
4) From start of No.2 side transport to exit sensor ON in the double-sided mode
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the trailing edge position of the original to
the exit sensor ON position when the shortest original (personal check) is set at the exposure position is set as the jam pulse.
This is set when transport of the No.2 side is started.
16.5.3 Exit/Reversal jams
[1] Exit sensor accumulation jam
1) From exit sensor ON to exit sensor OFF at original exit
The number of pulses equivalent to twice the length of the longest original (LD) is set as the jam
pulse.
This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the output original has arrived at the exit sensor
during original exit.
2) From start of reversal operation to exit sensor OFF in the double-sided mode
The number of pulses from start of reversal operation (reverse rotation of the transport belt) to completion of feed in the double-sided mode is set as the jam pulse.
When the exit sensor turns ON at completion of feed in the double-sided mode, this is judged to be
the exit sensor accumulation jam.
In the double-sided mode, the motor is driven and is stopped by a specified number of pulses (number
of feed pulses up to the original stopper position) after start of reversal operation (reverse rotation of
the transport belt). Accordingly, in the same way as detection of other accumulation jams, the exit
sensor accumulation jam pulse is set at the start of reversal operation (reverse rotation of the transport belt), and occurrence of an accumulation jam is judged by the timer counting up the jam pulse.
If this method is adopted, the feed pulse count is counted and the motor stops before the jam pulse
count is counted. So, the exit sensor accumulation jam does not occur even if originals accumulate at
the exit sensor section.
For this reason, when the exit sensor turns ON at completion of double-sided feed, the exit sensor
accumulation jam is judged. This method is adopted to detect jams.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 22
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.6 Detection of Original Size
16.6.1 Original size detection method
The number of drive pulses of the feed motor from start of transport of the original standing by at the
initial alignment position up to when the trailing edge of the original being fed passes the aligning sensor
is counted to detect the original size in the feed direction. At the same time, the original size in the width
direction is judged by the size width sensor.
As it is difficult to judge A4 horizontal and letter size horizontal (and also A3 and LD) by detection in the
feed direction and width direction alone as described above, two sensors are provided to detect A4
horizontal and letter size horizontal.
1
Start of transport of original standing by at the initial alignment position
2
Passage of the trailing edge of the fed original through the aligning sensor
The number drive pulses output by the feed motor between 1 and 2 is counted to detect the size of the
original in the feed direction.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 23
6570/5570 ADF
16.7 Flow Charts
16.7.1
Main routine processing
Main routine START
5 msec passed?
Parsing of port input
General-purpose timer
count processing
No
Sensor adjustment
E2PROM control
Initialization over?
Status change
monitoring
No
Initialization processing
Operating status
monitoring
Operation control
Jam processing
Communications
control
ADF unit test mode?
No
ADF unit test mode
control
General-purpose timer
set processing
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 24
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.7.2
Operation control
Operation control
Initial alignment
One-side feed control
No.1 double-sided
transport control
No.2 double-sided
transport control
Double-sided reversal
control
Eject control
Dummy exit control
Weight plate
initialization control
RETURN
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 25
6570/5570 ADF
16.7.3
Initial alignment control
Initial alignment
START
Original on tray?
No
Aligning sensor
non-arrival jam
Aligning sensor
OFF?
No
Timing sensor
OFF?
No
Setting of jam pulse from
start of initial alignment
to aligning sensor ON
Timing sensor
accumulation jam
Feed motor reverse
rotation started
Timing sensor OFF?
Aligning ON?
Setting of jam pulse from
start of feed motor forward
rotation to timing sensor ON
No
Jam pulse cleared
Setting of feed motor deceleration request by aligning
sensor ON interrupt (deceleration started after specified
pulse drive)
Feed motor reverse
rotation started
No
Timing sensor
ON?
No
Jam pulse cleared
No
Feed motor OFF?
Setting of feed motor deceleration request by aligning
sensor ON interrupt (deceleration started after specified
pulse drive)
No
Feed motor OFF?
Initial alignment END
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 26
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.7.4
One-sided feed control
One-sided feed
control START
Aligning sensor
ON?
No
Timing sensor
ON?
No
Aligning sensor
non-arrival jam
Setting of feed delay
pulse
Timing sensor
non-arrival jam
Transport motor forward
rotation started
No
Feed delay pulse
count up?
Setting of jam pulse from
start of one-sided feed to
aligning sensor OFF
Feed motor forward
rotation started
Jam pulse cleared
2 originals on
glass?
No
No
Setting of jam pulse from
aligning sensor OFF
to timing sensor OFF
Number of
originals > number of output
originals
No
Timing sensor OFF?
Deceleration of all
motors started
Jam pulse cleared
Aligning sensor
OFF?
No
Feed motor
deceleration started
Setting of transport motor
deceleration request by
timing sensor OFF interrupt
(deceleration started after
specified pulse drive)
No
Feed
motor and transport
motor stopped?
One-sided feed
control END
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 27
6570/5570 ADF
16.7.5
No.1 double-sided transport control (double-sided transport of initially aligned original)
No.1 double-sided
transport started
(double-sided transport
of initially aligned original)
Aligning sensor
ON?
No
Original exiting?
Aligning
sensor nonarrival jam
Timing sensor
ON?
No
Timing
sensor nonarrival jam
No
Setting of transport motor
deceleration request by
timing sensor OFF
(deceleration started after
specified pulse drive)
Setting of jam pulse from start
of No.1 double-sided transport
to aligning sensor OFF
Feed motor forward
rotation started
No
Transport motor forward
rotation started
Transport motor
stopped?
No
Exit completed?
No output original?
No
Flapper solenoid ON
(switchover to reversal
direction)
Turn guide motor forward
rotation started
Setting of jam pulse from
restart of No.1 double-sided
transport to exit sensor ON
No
Aligning sensor
OFF?
Jam pulse cleared
Transport motor forward
rotation started
Setting of jam pulse from
aligning sensor OFF
to timing sensor OFF
Turn guide motor
forward rotation started
No No
Timing sensor OFF?
Flapper solenoid ON
(switchover to reversal
direction)
Setting of jam pulse from
timing sensor OFF to
exit sensor ON
Exit sensor ON?
Jam pulse cleared
Jam pulse cleared
Setting of transport motor/
reversal motor deceleration
request by exit sensor
ON interrupt
Feed motor
deceleration started
No
Transport motor
and reversal motor
stopped?
No.1 double-sided
transport END
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 28
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.7.6
No.2 double-sided transport control (double-sided transport of original on platen)
No.2 double-sided
transport START
(double-sided transport
of original on platen)
Exit sensor OFF?
Flapper solenoid ON
(switchover to reversal
direction)
No
Exit sensor
accumulation jam
Setting of jam pulse from
start of No.2 double-sided
transport to exit sensor ON
Transport motor
forward rotation started
Reversal motor forward
rotation started
No
Exit sensor ON?
Jam pulse cleared
Setting of transport motor/
reversal motor deceleration
start request by exit sensor ON
interrupt (deceleration started
after specified pulse drive)
No
Transport
motor and reversal motor
stopped?
No.2 double-sided
transport END
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 29
6570/5570 ADF
16.7.7
Double-sided reversal control
Double-sided reversal
control START
No
Exit sensor ON?
Setting of double-sided
reversal pulse (after
specified pulse drive)
(motor stopped)
Exit sensor
non-arrival jam
Transport motor
reverse rotation started
Reversal motor forward
rotation started
Exit sensor OFF?
Setting of pulse up to
flapper solenoid OFF
by exit sensor OFF
No
Transport
motor and reversal
motor stopped?
No
Exit sensor
accumulation jam
Flapper solenoid OFF at
pulse count up (switchover
to exit direction)
No
Transport
motor and reversal
motor stopped?
No
All motors stopped?
Double-sided reversal
control END
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 30
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.7.8
Exit control
Exit control START
Reversal motor forward
rotation started
No
Exit sensor ON?
Setting of jam pulse from
exit sensor ON to exit
sensor OFF
Setting of exit deceleration
start pulse at exit sensor ON
No
Pulse count up?
Reversal motor
deceleration started to
exit deceleration speed
No
Exit sensor OFF?
Jam pulse cleared
Output
original present?
No
No
Exit sensor ON?
Setting of jam pulse from
exit sensor ON to reversal
sensor OFF
Setting of reversal motor
deceleration request at exit
sensor OFF (deceleration
started after specified
pulse drive)
Reversal
motor stopped?
No
Exit control END
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 31
6570/5570 ADF
16.7.9
Operating status monitoring
No (The second original onwards)
Back side
setting in progress?
No (Front side setting progress)
Double-sided
mode?
No (One-sided mode)
No.2 double-sided transport
started (double-sided
transport of original on platen)
No
Double-sided mode?
Initial alignment started
No.2 double-sided transport
started (double-sided
transport of original on platen)
Doublesided transport
completed?
B
Exit started
2 originals on
platen?
1
No
No
Double-sided reversal
started
No
A
No
Doublesided transport
ompleted?
Exit completed?
No.1 double-sided transport
started (double-sided
transport of original on platen)
Double-sided reversal
started
Doublesided reversal
completed?
No
Initial alignment
completed? Double-sided
reversal completed?
No
Double-sided
transport completed? (exit
completed?)
Next original on tray?
One-sided feed started
Initial alignment started
Exit started
No
No
Initial alignment
completed?
Double-sided reversal
started
No
No
One-sided
feed completed?
Doublesided reversal
completed?
No
Exit completed?
C
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 32
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Operating status
monitoring
Feed
signal received?
A
B
No
First copy?
Back side
setting in progress?
Initial alignment started
No.2 double-sided transport
started (double-sided
transport of original on platen)
Dummy exit started
No (One-sided mode)
No
No
Initial alignment
completed and dummy
exit completed?
Doublesided transport
completed?
Double-sided mode?
Double-sided reversal
started
Exit started
2 originals on platen
and normal
feed?
2
No
No
Exit signal received?
1
No
No
Doublesided reversal
completed?
No
Exit completed?
No
Exit started
One-sided feed
started
2
No
Exit completed?
No
One-sided
feed completed?
Next original on tray?
Initial alignment started
No
No
Initial alignment
completed?
No
Exit completed ?
C
RETURN
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 33
6570/5570 ADF
6570/5570 ADF
CW
CCW
OFF
CW
16 - 34
Empty sensor
Exit sensor
Timing sensor
Aligning sensor
Reverse motor
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CCW
Transport motor OFF
Feed motor
PRE-FED
ORG-STP
DF-ACT
0
0
0
0
0
1.14
1.27
Exposure time
1.21
0.72 1.09
0.54
0.54 0.82
0.83
0.38 0.75
0.26
0.31
0.54
0.44
0.83
0.75
0.75
0
0
0
0
0
0.67
0.21
0.19
0.45
0.83 1.00
1.18
Exposure time differents with the machine type or the feed original mode.
Exposure
time
0.10 0.27
1.42
1.08 1.42
0.66 0.94
0.45
0.35
0 0.22
0
0
0
0.35 0.69 0
0.28
0.11 0.28
0
Exposure
time
0.21
0.19 0.55
0.35
0.60
0.28
0
0
0.29
0 0.21
0 0.20
0
0.29 0.73
0.29
0 0.22
0 0.20
0
16.8.1
ORG-OUT
ORG-IN
16.8 Timing Charts
A4, 3 sheets, one-sided mode
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
CW
CCW
OFF
CW
16 - 35
Empty sensor
Exit sensor
Timing sensor
Aligning sensor
Reverse motor
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CCW
Transport motor OFF
Feed motor
PRE-FED
ORG-STP
DF-ACT
ORG-OUT
ORG-IN
0
0
0
0
0
0.54
0.54
0.54
0.37
0.26
0.31
0.44
0.92
1.44
1.31
1.38
0.89 1.26
0.99
0.99
1.00
0.92
0.92
Exposure time
0.34
0.14
0.97
Exposure time
0.69
0.55
0.38
0.36
0.45
0.45
0.46
0.37
0.37
0
0
0
0
0.97
0.97
0.69
0.55
0.45
0.25
0.14
0
Exposure time differents with the machine type or the feed original mode.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16.8.2
A3, 2 sheets, one-sided mode
6570/5570 ADF
6570/5570 ADF
CW
OFF
CCW
16 - 36
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
ON
OFF
Exit sensor
Timing sensor
ON
Reverse motor
OFF
OFF
Flapper solenoid
ON
ON
Aligning sensor
OFF
CW
Transport motor OFF
CCW
Feed motor
PRE-FED
ORG-STP
DF-ACT
ORG-OUT
ORG-IN
0
0
0
0
0
0.82
1.29
1.73
1.46
Exposure time
1.64
1.66
1.40
1.03
0.43 0.74
0.31 0.72
0.75
0.75
1.59
0.54
0.54
0.36
0.54 1.16
0.49
1.23
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.56
0.30
0.67
0.43
0.18
0 0.55
0.16
0
0
0
0
1.14
Exposure
time
0.55
0.30
0.66
0.43
0.91
0.47
0.30
0.89
0.89
0.64
0.41
0 0.55
0
0
0
Exposure
time
0.73
1.00
0.93
0.43
0.86
0.50
0
Exposure time differents with the machine type or the feed original mode.
1.27
1.01
0
0.64 1.44 1.62 0
1.71
1.64
0.89 1.34
0.47
0.30
1.35 0.20
1.26
0.91
0 0.28
1.21
0 0.45 0.89 1.14
1.57
0
0
0
Exposure
time
0.73
1.00
1.31
1.00
1.44
1.00
0.93
0.43
0.86
0.50
0
16.8.3
A4, 2 sheets, double-sided mode
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
CW
OFF
CCW
16 - 37
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Timing sensor
Exit sensor
Empty sensor
Reverse motor
ON
OFF
OFF
Flapper solenoid
ON
ON
Aligning sensor
OFF
CW
Transport motor OFF
CCW
Feed motor
PRE-FED
ORG-STP
DF-ACT
ORG-OUT
ORG-IN
0
0
0
0
1.04 1.46
Exposure time
0.45
0.45
1.22
1.80
1.72
1.29
Exposure
time
0.68
0.33
0.14
0.37
0.35
1.10 1.52
0.97 1.59
0.62
0.73
0.74
0.69
0
0.97
0.68
0.45 0.55
0.97
0.14
0
0 0.25
0
0
Exposure
time
0.14 0.56
0
0
0.83
0.76
0 0.26
0
0 0.33
0
Exposure
time
0.97
0.45 0.54
1.70
0
0.97 1.69 1.95
0
0
0
0
0
0
Exposure time differents with the machine type or the feed original mode.
0.14 0.56
1.21
0.37 0.91
0.66
0.74
0.69
1.10
0
0 0.26
1.28
0.83
0.83
1.15
0.83
0.76
0 0.26
0
0 0.33
0
0.89
0.26
1.64
1.60
1.63
0.92 1.53
0.92
0.54 1.16
0.31
0.54 1.16
1.73
1.66
1.24
0.44 0.54
0.99
0
16.8.4
A3, 2 sheets, double-sided mode
6570/5570 ADF
16.9 Descriptions of Symbols, Layout of Electrical Parts and Signal Block Diagrams
16.9.1 Symbols
1 Motors
Symbol
Code name
Function
Remarks
FMOT
FMOT (feed motor)
Drives pick-up roller, feed roller and aligning roller
Pulse motor
TMOT
TMOT (transport motor)
Drives transport belt
Pulse motor
RMOT
RMOT (reversal motor)
Drives reversal roller and exit roller
Pulse motor
FAN
ADF-FAN-MOT (ADF fan motor) ADF PC board cooling
IC motor
2 Solenoid
Symbol
RSOL
Code name
RSOL (reversal solenoid)
Function
Remarks
Drives reversal flapper
DC solenoid
3 Sensors
Symbol
EMPS
Code name
Function
Remarks
EMP-SNS (empty sensor) Detects the original on the original tray
Semiconductor
optical sensor
REGS
REG-SNS (aligning sensor) Detects the original for aligning
Semiconductor
optical sensor
TIM
TIM-SNS (timing sensor)
Semiconductor
optical sensor
SIZES1
SIZE-SNS1 (size sensor 1) Original width sensor 1
Semiconductor
optical sensor
SIZES2
SIZE-SNS2 (size sensor 2) Original width sensor 2
Semiconductor
optical sensor
EXITS
EXIT-SNS (exit sensor)
Detects the initial alignment position of the original
Detects originals in the exit/reversal section
Semiconductor
optical sensor
OPN
DF-OPN-SW
Detects open/close of the ADF unit
Reed switch
Detects open/close of the feed section
Reed switch
RCOVER RCOVER-SW
(exit cover switch)
Detects open/close in the exit/reversal section
Reed switch
APSSW
APS start switch
Microswitch
(ADF open/close switch)
FCOVER FCOVER-SW
(paper feed cover switch)
APS-STR-SW
(APS start switch)
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 38
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.9.2
Electrical parts layout
RCOVER
TMOT
FAN
FMOT
RMOT
APSSW
RSOL
EXITS
FCOVER
EMPS
SIZES2
SIZES1
REGS
OPN
TIM
16.9.3
Signal block diagram
PPC
ADF
EMP-SNS
EMPS
REG-SNS
REGS
TIM-SNS
TIM
SIZE-SNS1
SIZES1
SIZE-SNS2
SIZES2
EXIT-SNS
EXITS
Control board
Sensor
input
circuit
ROM
FCOVER-SW FCOVER
RCOVER-SW RCOVER
DF-OPN-SW
OPN
CPU
EEPROM
APS-STR-SW APSSW
DF-ACK
DF-REO
REO
CNT
RXD
SGND
TXD
SGND
ACK
D/A
converter
Communications
circuit
Driver
Driver
FAN
RSOL
FMOT
+5V
+24V
+5V power
circuit
DC+24V
Rush current
limiting circuit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 39
Driver
TMOT
RMOT
6570/5570 ADF
16.10 Description of Circuits
16.10.1 Aligning sensor, timing sensor and exit sensor circuit diagrams
This item describes the aligning sensor circuit. A description of the timing sensor and exit sensor circuits
is omitted in this item as the aligning sensor, timing sensor and exit sensor share the same circuit configuration.
+5V
1
Aligning sensor
A 2
C 1
PT1
LED1
K 1
CN6.1
CN6.2
CN6.3
+5V
1
R43
2
+5V
2
*REGS
3
REGLED
1 NF2 3
2
C30
2
E 2
SGND
E 3
1
B
1
24
R16
C31
R81
2
2
R84
7
+
6 IC5.2
_
2
1
+5V
1
R45
2
1
TP25
1
REG
TP45
R44
2
SGND SGND
SGND
12
+
1
IC4.4
_ 13
C17
1 R36 2
2
SGND
C 2
Q7
1 R15 2
1
1
1
1
1
REG-AD
TP35
1
1
2
REGS-DA
R55
SGND
This aligning sensor circuit comprises two circuits, a voltage-current conversion circuit for adjusting the
intensity of light emitted from the infra-red LEDs, and a voltage comparison circuit for comparing the
output voltage of phototransistor (PTr) with the reference voltage and converting the output voltage to
digital signals.
The aligning sensor is a mirror reflection-type sensor, and comprises a light-emitting sensor (infra-red
LED) and light-receiving sensor (PTr) pair each having the same optical axis. A mirror is placed along an
imaginary line extending from the optical axis of these sensors. When there is no original between the
sensors and the mirror, the infra-red rays radiated from the LED are reflected into the PTr at high reflectance. Alternatively, when there is an original, the light radiated on the mirror and the light reflected from
the mirror is broken by the original, markedly reducing the infra-red incident to the PTr.
When there is a large amount of light incident to the PTr (that is, there is no original), the photo-current
flowing through the PTr increases, and the voltage of pin 6 of IC5 rises at the voltage drop by R81. The
comparator on IC5 compares the signal voltage of pin 6 (reversal input terminal) with the reference
voltage input to pin 7 (no reversal input terminal). If the voltage of pin 6 is higher, output (pin 1 of IC5)
turns Low. Alternatively, if there is little amount of light incident to the PTr (that is, there is an original), the
voltage of pin 6 of IC5 becomes low, and as a result, pin 1 of IC5 turns High. R15, C30 and C31 (NF2) in
the circuit diagram are noise filters.
This circuit has an automatic sensitivity adjusting function for suppressing unevenness in sensor sensitivity. This function keeps the PTr voltage when there is no original at a constant level in all sensors , and
absorbs unevenness in sensor sensitivity caused by the physical differences of the sensor elements.
The PTr voltage is adjusted by varying the intensity of the infra-red light radiated from the LED.
Automatic adjustment is executed when the sensor sensitivity adjustment is selected and when power is
turned ON. By this adjustment, the PTr output voltage (analog value) is measured on the A/D input
terminal of the CPU, and the output voltage of the D/A converter is varied to adjust the LED current in the
voltage-current conversion circuit comprising IC4, R16 and Q7 so that the output voltage of PTr is the
required voltage. The D/A output voltage values at this time are values unique to each of the sensor
elements, and are stored to non-volatile memory EEPROM (IC11).
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 40
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.10.2 +5V power circuit diagram
D3
+24V
CN2.1
CN2.2
DC24V
PGND
1
1
R6
IC15
2
4
Vin
Vo
C43
1
+ 1
CP1
1
GND
2
2
TP44
PGND
1
2
A
K
1
+ 1
K 1
C38
PGND
1
ZD2
2
2
TP26
+5V
1
+5V
2
C27
2
A 2
PGND SGND
TP43
SGND
1
SGND
This circuit generates the +5VDC voltage to be supplied to the CPU, logic IC and other components.
+24VDC input from CN2 is converted to +5V by switching regulator IC15. ZD2, CP1 and D3 are used to
protect IC15. Resistor R6 limits the input rush current to C43 when the power is turned ON.
16.10.3 Rush current limiting circuit diagram
ADF open SW
7
CN6.7 DF SW
8
CN6.8 DF SW1
Exit cover SW
D2
2
R34
2
1
CN7.1 DF SW2
2
CN7.2 PGND
2
3
2
1 R35 2
1
4
CN5.4 DF SW1
5
CN5.5 DF SW2
C36
2
1
C37
1
PGND
1
1 R8 2
OPNSW
C 2
Q1
E 3
SGND
PGND
1 R38 2
1
R68
1
R7
2
R101 ZD1
22 11
1 1
B
A
1
PM+24V
K
5
2
TP16
2
Q3
ZD3
1 R71 2 2 1 1
C 2
B
1
Q13
+ 1
B
C45
E 3
2
2
K
Feed cover SW
A 2
4
PTH1
D
K 1
1
S
3
1
+24V
TP15
+24V
1
C 2
Q2
A
DC24V
RY1
C
TP17
+5V
1 TP27
R56
2
1
E 3
PGND
R67
PGND
This circuit suppresses to a fixed value the inrush current flowing to current-generating capacitors C39,
C40 and C41 that are included in the drive motor drive circuit. It comprises a posistor (PTH1) for limiting
the current, and a FET (Q3) for allowing a current to flow during constant operation.
From the time that the ADF open/close switch, feed cover switch and exit cover switch up to the cathode
voltage of ZD3 reaches the Zener voltage by the time constants of R38 and C45, base current is not
supplied to Q2 to set Q2 to an OFF state, and Q3 turns OFF so that current flows through PTH1.
When the cathode voltage of ZD3 exceeds the Zener voltage after a delay provided by the time constants of R38 and C45, base current is supplied to Q2 to set Q2 to an ON state, and Q3 turns. This allows
the current that was flowing through PTH1 to flow through Q3, and cancels the current limitation.
Discharge resistor R7 immediately extracts the load that accumulates in C39, C40 and C41 when one of
the ADF open/close switch, feed cover switch and exit cover switch becomes open. The circuit comprising R67, R68, R71 and Q13 immediately extracts the load that accumulates in C45 when one of the ADF
open/close switch, feed cover switch and exit cover switch becomes open, and limits the inrush current
that flows when the cover is opened or closed momentarily.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 41
6570/5570 ADF
16.10.4 Pulse motor drive circuit
This item describes the feed motor drive circuit. As the feed motor, transport motor and reversal motor
share the same circuit configuration, a description of the transport motor and reversal motor circuits is
omitted in this item.
TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5
1
1 R65 2
1 R97 2
MODE
CLOCK
1
1
TP6
1
1
GND
1 R98 2
1 R99 2
10
VDD
MODE
9
CLOCK
6
1
D/A
2
12
C8
R73
1
2
2
C9
1
C7
1
C11
1
2
1
1
2
2
11
C21
RESETB
8
7
R59
CWB
+5V
C24
2
1
1
C69
1
2
+
1
2
C68
A
AB
CWB
RESETB
Vref
SP
B
BB
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
PM+24V
5
ICB
GND
1
1
1
1
+ 1
C81 C80 C79 C78
C39
2
2
2
2
6
A
CN8.4
*A
CN8.3
B
CN8.2
*B
CN8.1
PM+24
CN8.5
PM+24
CN8.6
Feed motor
2
2
PGND
This circuit controls start/stop, direction of rotation and motor current of drive motor operation.
2 phase excitation/1-2 phase excitation can be selected by inputting the D/A converter output voltage
(either of two values 00H or FFH) to pin 8 (MODE) of IC8. (On this document feeder, the feed and
reversal motors are fixed to 1-2 phase excitation, and the transport motor is fixed to 2 phase excitation.)
The rotating speed of the motor and direction of rotation can be controlled by inputting the drive clock
signal (CLOCK) and rotation direction signal (CWB). When the CPU sets the enable signal to Low, pin 6
(RESETB) of IC8 turns Low, all outputs of the drive IC are turned OFF regardless of the state of other
signals.
The motor current value is set by dividing the D/A converter output voltage by R73 and R59 and inputting
the resultant voltage to pin 12 (Vref) of IC8. The motor current value can be set to any value by varying
the D/A converter output value.
16.10.5 Solenoid drive circuit
D4
1
TP6
CPU
1
D 2
R105
2
IC3.2
3
A
Y
4
1
1
2
R100
K
A
+5V
+24V
1
2
3
4
+24V
CN7.3
*RSOL
CN7.4
Reverse solenoid
D12
1
G
S 3
R104
PGND
2
SGND
This circuit limits actuation and release of the reversal solenoid. When the CPU output port is Low level,
pin 3 of IC3 turns Low and pin4 of IC3 turns High. Q12 then turns ON to actuate the solenoid. The
solenoid drive signal is a PWM signal. When the solenoid starts to actuate, the solenoid actuates at its
maximum torque at 100% duty. After actuation is completed, the duty ratio is reduced to hold actuation
while heating of the solenoid is held in check.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 42
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.10.6 Reset circuit
A 2
2
2
5
1
VCC
C20
C71
+ 1
D1
RES
+5V
24
CK
*RES
IC1
GND
CT
3 K 1
1
8
1
2
CK
*RES
1
2
R27
VREF
R103
1
C70
6
2
VS
7
1
C5
2
+ 1
SGND
C4
2
SGND
This circuit generates the CPU reset signal when the power is turned ON, and when the power voltage is
momentarily interrupted or low. It has a watchdog timer for diagnosing CPU system operation.
After the power is turned ON, pin 8 (*RES) of IC3 is normally High. However, when the power is turned
OFF, or an error causes the +5V voltage to fall below 4.2V, pin 8 of IC3 turns Low to reset the CPU and
stop system operation.
During normal operation, a fixed cycle clock is input to pin 3 (CK) of IC3 and IC3’s built-in watchdog timer
is cleared. If a system error prevents the clock from being input from the CPU, pin 8 of IC3 turns Low, to
reset the CPU and stop system operation.
Resistor R27 is for stopping the watchdog timer, and is normally not mounted.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 43
6570/5570 ADF
16.10.7 EEPROM circuit diagram
This circuit comprises an EEPROM for storing ADF data and other peripheral circuits.
+5V
E2PROM+5V
A 1
+5V
D11
1
K
2
R75
D10
D0
8
RA2.4
A
7
1
1
7
CS
5
CLK
3
DI
2
RA1.1
RA1.4
RA1.3
RA1.2
IC11
2
2
R74
4
DO
2
1
+
8
1
6
2
CLK
NC1
4
3
DI
NC2 7
5
CS
6
C42
2
SGND
RA2.3
3
RA2.2
RA2.1
1
K 2
1
4
6
SGND
IC11 is memory for storing the adjustment values of reflection-type sensors. Data transactions with the
CPU are performed on a 4-lead type serial interface. Once data is stored, it is held in memory and does
not disappear even when the power is turned OFF.
Pin 1 (CS) of IC11 is the chip select terminal, and is High when data transactions are in progress.
Pin 2 (CLK) of IC11 is the serial clock terminal, and is sent synchronized with the clock that is input to this
terminal.
Pin 3 (DI) of IC11 is the serial data input terminal, and pin 4 (DO) is the serial data output terminal.
IC11 is powered by +5V from E2PROM. IC11 power is held by D11, R74 and C42 until writing of data is
completed even if something causes the power voltage to fall during writing of data.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 44
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.11 Description of I/O signals
16.11.1 REQ, ACK and TXD signals
+5V
1
CN1.3
REQ
DA3 K 3
2
3
TP23
IC2.1
R90
2
1
1
2
1 C46
R30
A 1
IC3.5
2
A Y
11
10
A Y
REQ1
1
REQ1
2
SGND
+5V
1
DA1 K 3
2
9
CN1.9
IC2.3
R92
2
1
ACK
1 C48
R32
A 1
5
2
6
A Y
TP19
IC3.4
8
9
A Y
1
ACK2
ACK2
2
+5V
SGND
1
CN1.7
TxD
DA2 K 3
2
7
R91
TP21
IC2.2
2
1
2
R31
A 1
3
1 C47
IC3.1
2
1
A Y
4
A Y
1
DF-RxD
2
SGND
This input circuit is for communicating with the copier body. It is “1” at 5V and “0” at 0V. Logic at connector
sections and the CPU input port is the same.
16.11.2 DF-ACK, DF-REQ and RXD signals
+5V
CN1.1
DF-ACK
1
1
1
04
DF-REQ
1
12
1 R52 2
Y
A
13
IC2.6
1
R88
2
10
B
E 3
1 R53 2
SGND 1 R9 2
Y
A
11
IC2.5
+5V
1
ACK1
+5V
1
TP22
2
1
REQ2
+5V
1
TP20
R22
C 2
1
05
ACK1
R21
1
5
2
SGND
06
RxD
2
2
C 2
CN1.5
R87
B
E 3
CN1.2
TP18
R20
C 2
1
R89
B
E 3
1 R54 2
2
8
Y
A
9
2
1
DF-TxD
IC2.4
SGND
This output circuit is for communicating with the copier body. It is “1” at 5V and “0” at 0V. Logic at
connector sections and the CPU output port is the same.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 45
6570/5570 ADF
16.11.3 Sensor input circuits
+5V
1
1
CN6.1
+5V
CN6.2
#REGS
REGLED
2
1
NF2
1 R15 2
1
1
3
1
3
C30
2
SGND
1
B
1
R16
E 3
Timing sensor
+5V
#DTS
CN6.6
DTSLED
1
NF4
1 R36 2
1
6
C32
2
SGND
1
B
1
10
+
IC4.3
- 9
28
R18
E 3
CN7.6
CN7.7
NF2
+5V
SGND
1 R64 2
C 2
1
010
B
E 3
APS start SW
CN3.1
#APS
CN3.2
SGND
1
R29
2
2
+
IC5.1
-
2
TP34
2
1
DTS
TP33
1
1
DTS-AD
2
1
R86
1
2
R51
TP36
2
11 +
10 IC5.4
-
2
13
13
IC3.6
12 1
Y
A
R50
1
EXIT-AD
2
SGND
TP31
SGND
1
1
2
EXIT-DA
R61
1
C19
1 R66 2
1
2
TP47
1
APS
+5V
C63
2
R24
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
R11
2
1
R12
2
2
TP29
SGND
CN4.1 SIZE2+5V
Size sensor 2
SGND
CN4.3
SIZES2
CN4.4 SIZE1+5V
Size sensor 1
1
1
2
2
CN4.2
EXIT
TP24
1
C35
DTS-DA
+5V
R60
SGND
R77
1
R48
R49
2
SGND
+5V
2
2
1
+5V
1
1
3
+
IC4.1
2
-
21
1 R5
1
C18
2
2
SGND
R85
TP32
SGND
R70
2
REGS-DA
+5V
2
1
C34
2
7
2
R47
1 R19 2
1
1
1
1
3
6
EXITSLED
5
SGND
SGND
R25
Exit sensor
1
1
4
SGND
5
REG-AD
R55
2
C33
+5V
#EXITS
REG
1
R46
2
2
SGND
C 2
08
CN7.5
2
R82
2
1
TP35
+5V
1
1 R17 2
1
1
3
TP25
2
TP45
1
C17
SGND
5
1
SGND
1
4
CN6.5
1
R45
R44
2
+5V
CN6.4
+5V
2
+
IC5.2
-
SGND
SGND
12
+
IC4.4
- 13
24
C31
2
2
SGND
C 2
07
R84
1
R81
2
7
6
R10
CN6.3
2
R26
Aliging sensor
1
R43
+5V
1
R3
SIZE1
TP9
3
1
2
4
1
SIZE2
R2
TP30
5
CN4.5
SGND
CN4.6
SIZES1
1
2
6
1
EMP
R1
Empty sensor
CN5.1
EMP+5V
CN5.2
SGND
CN5.3
EMP
1
1
C3
2
SGND
1
2
2
C2
2
3
1
C1
SGND
This is the input circuit from the optical sensors. The following table shows the signal logic.
Sensor name
Connector section level 5V (“1”)
Connector section level 0V (“0”)
EMPS (empty sensor)
No original
With original
REGS (aligning sensor)
No original
With original (connection section
(connector section voltage 2.5V or more) voltage 2.5V or less)
SIZES1 (size sensor 1)
With original
No original
SIZES2 (size sensor 2)
With original
No original
TIM (timing sensor)
No original
With original (connection section
(connector section voltage 2.5V or more) voltage 2.5V or less)
EXITS (exit sensor)
No original
With original (connection section
(connector section voltage 2.5V or more) voltage 2.5V or less)
APSSW (APS start switch) ADF open
6570/5570 ADF
ADF closed
16 - 46
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.11.4 Pulse motor drive circuit diagram
1
+5V
C24
TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5
2
TP6
1
1 R65 2
RESETB
1
1
SGND
8
9
1 R98 2
1 R99 2
7
6
1
1
2
1
C9
C8
C11
1
C7
1
2
R73
B/A
2
12
1
2
1
11
C21
CWB
1
R55
CLOCK
1
1 R97 2
1
2
1
1
10
MODE
C69
2
+
VDD
MODE
C68
A 5
4
CLOCK
4
3
3
2
2
1
AB
CWB
B
RESETB
BB
Vref
PM+24V
SP
ICB
1
1
1
1
C81 C80 C79 C78
GND
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
6
+ 1
2
A
CN8.4
#A
CN8.3
B
CN8.2
#B
CN8.1
PM+24V
CN8.5
PM+24V
CN8.6
Feed motor
C39
2
PGND
2 phase excitation/1-2 phase excitation can be selected by the excitation mode setting signal (MODE).
(On this document feeder, the feed and reversal motors are fixed to 1-2 phase excitation, and the transport motor is fixed to 2 phase excitation.) The rotating speed of the motor and direction of rotation can be
controlled by the drive clock signal (CLOCK) and rotation direction signal (CWB). When the reset signal
(RESETB) turns Low, all outputs of the drive IC are turned OFF regardless of the state of other signals.
The motor current value can be set by inputting the analog voltage to the current setting terminal (Vref).
16.11.5 Solenoid drive circuit diagram
D4
1
+5V
TP41
1
1
2
+24V
3
4
+24V
CN7.3
*RSOL
CN7.4
Reverse solenoid
D 2
R105
CPU
K
A
2
IC3.2
3
A
Y
4
1
1
2
R100
D12
1
G
R104
2
S 3
PGND
SGND
When the CPU output port is Low level, Q12 turns ON to actuate the solenoid. The solenoid drive signal
is a PWM signal. When the solenoid starts to actuate, the solenoid actuates at its maximum torque at
100% duty After actuation is completed, the duty ratio is reduced to hold actuation while heating of the
solenoid is held in check.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 47
6570/5570 ADF
16.11.6 Open switch input circuit diagram
TP17
DC24V
RY1
3
1
1
5
K
1
4
+24V
2
D2
ADF open SW
CN6.7
DFSW
CN6.8
DFSW1
7
A 2
8
1
R34
Feed cover SW
CN5.4
DFSW1
CN5.5
DFSW2
2
4
5
1
C37
Exit cover SW
CN7.1
DFSW2
CN7.2
PGND
2
1
2
PGND
When all three reed switches turn ON, the relay coil is excited to supply +24V power to the drive circuit.
The voltage of CN6 and CN7 becomes 0V when all three switches are ON. When one of the switches
turns OFF, the voltage of CN6 and CN7 becomes 24V.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 48
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16.12 Disassembly and Replacement
[A] Transport unit
(1) Remove the 2 clips fastening the transport unit.
(2) Push down the top of the transport unit (front
side), and remove the rear side from the belt
drive section.
Belt
Transportt unit
Note: During assembly, insert the clips and fix the
transport unit at the position shown in the
figure.
Clip
[B] Transport belt
(1) Remove the transport unit.
(2) Loosen the screw (front) fastening the belt tension plate.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 49
6570/5570 ADF
(3) Rotate the belt tension plate to provide the
transport belt with slack.
(4) Remove the transport belt from the front side
(Magnet catch side).
Transport belt
Notes: 1. During assembly, make sure that the
edges of the transport belt are at the inside of the transport unit side frame.
2. After assembly is completed, make sure
that the belt is carried in the center and
does not drift to either side.
Belt tension plate
Frame
Transport belt
[C] Belt tension roller/brush
(1) Remove the transport belt.
Belt tension roller
(feed side)
Belt tension roller
(exit side)
Belt tension roller
(1) Replace the feed-side belt tension roller after
removing the feed-side drop roller.
Replace the exit-side belt tension roller with the
belt tension plate brought down. (The drop roller
need not be removed.)
Notes: 1. When the belt tension roller is replaced
is replaced, do not remove the transport
unit side frame. (Do not remove the side
frame fixing screws except when replacing the side frame.)
2. The belt tension roller in the feed and exit
side is different in the shape of the leaf
spring at the central one and the end.
So, pay attention the shape difference at
installation.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 50
Idle roller
Idle roller
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Brush
(1) Remove the 2 screws and brush fastening
bracket.
Brush
[D] Original feeding tray
(1) Loosen the two M4 screws, and slide the original feeding tray to the front to remove.
Original feeding tray
[E]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Feed unit
Remove the original feeding tray.
Remove the rear cover.
Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the
earth lead (1 screw) and harness band.
Connector
(4) Remove the 2 screws, and slide the ADF unit
to the rear side and light up to remove.
ADF unit
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 51
6570/5570 ADF
(5) Turn the entire unit over, and remove the cover
(3 screws: M4 x 8).
Cover
(6) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the PC board.
(7) Open the jam release cover, and loosen the
screw.
Jam release cover
(8) Remove the 6 screws and the feed unit.
Note: M4 x 12 ..... 4 pcs.
M4 x 8 ....... 1 pc. A
M3 x 6 ....... 1 pc. B (harness guide)





6570/5570 ADF
16 - 52
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Front side
Rear side
Feed unit
[F] Feed motor
(1) Loosen the tensioner fixing screw from the timing belt.
Note: Do not remove the springs hanging on the
belt tensioner.
Spring
(2) Remove the motor connector, and 2 motor fixing screws.
Note: During assembly, be sure to fasten the belt
tensioner last of all.
[G] Jam release cover
(1) Remove the feed unit.
(2) Remove the jam release cover by removing the
2 screws (front and rear sides).
Note: To assemble, be sure to insert spring washers to fasten the jam release cover.
Jam release cover
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 53
6570/5570 ADF
[H] Separation unit
(1) Open the jam release cover.
(2) Remove the 2 screws and leaf spring, then, remove the unit.
(3) Draw out the bracket holder making sure that
the pressurizing springs do not become loose.
[I] Front aligning plate
(1) Remove the feed unit.
(2) Open the jam release cover.
(3) Remove the 2 screws.
Spring
Separation unit
Leaf spring
Adjustment screw
Front aligning plate
[J] Aligning roller (L)
(1) Remove the feed unit.
(2) Open the jam release cover.
(3) Remove each of the E-rings, bushes and coil
springs from the front and rear sides.
(4) Slide the aligning roller (L) to draw out the roller.
Aligning roller (L)
[K] Timing sensor and size sensor
(1) Remove the feed unit.
(2) Remove the 4 screws.
Inlet guide
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
16 - 54
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Draw out the inlet guide while pushing the
empty sensor upwards.
Empty guide
(4) Remove the 2 bracket fixing screws from the
timing sensor and the bracket fixing screw from
the size sensor, and disconnect the connectors from the sensors.
Size sensor
Timing sensor
[L] Feed roller
(1) Remove the feed unit.
(2) Remove the inlet guide.
(3) Remove the E-ring, bush and spring from the
front side.
(4) Remove the front-side plastic ring fastening the
feed roller, and draw out the roller from the front
frame opening.
Feed roller
Gear
[M] Pick-up roller/aligning roller (R)
(1) Remove the feed unit.
Feed roller
Pick-up roller
(2) Remove the inlet guide.
(3) Remove the front-side E-ring and bush.
(4) Remove the plastic ring fastening the roller, and
draw out the roller.
Pick-up roller
Plastic ring
Aligning roller(R)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 55
6570/5570 ADF
Aligning roller (R)
(2) Remove the inlet guide, and remove the timing
sensor and size sensor.
(3) Remove the pulley from the drive section (1 Ering).
(4) Remove the 2 E-rings from the frame inside,
and draw out the roller.
Pulley
[N] Transport motor
(1) Remove the 2 screws and 1 connector.
[O] Reversal unit
(1) Remove the ADF unit.
(2) Remove the transport unit and cover.
(3) Disconnect the 2 connectors from PC board.
(4) Remove the earth lead fastened to the hinge
section.
(5) Remove the screw from the harness guide.
(6) Remove the 5 screws and the reversal unit.
Reverse unit
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 56
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[P] Exit cover
(1) Remove the reversal unit.
(2) Remove the screws from the front and rear
sides, and remove the cover.
Exit cover
[Q] Reversal motor
Disconnect the connector and remove the 2 screws.
[R] Reversal roller
(1) Remove the reversal unit.
(2) Remove the stay (2 screws).
(3) Remove the E-rings from the front side.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 57
6570/5570 ADF
(4) Slide the reversal roller to the rear side, and
remove the parallel pin.
(5) Draw out the reversal roller while tilting it on its
side from beneath the unit.
Reverse roller
[S] Exit sensor
(1) Remove the stay (4 screws).
Stay
(2) Remove the sensor from the guide (1 screw).
Exit sensor
[T]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PC board
Remove the ADF unit.
Remove the cover.
Disconnect the 11 connectors.
Remove the 2 screws, and slide the PC board
from the hooking section on the rear side to
remove.
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 58
(4)
(4)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
[U] ADF fan motor
(1) Remove the PC board.
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the
screw.
Connector
(3) Remove the 2 screws.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 59
6570/5570 ADF
[V] Mylar sheet, etc.
When replacing damaged mylar sheets, fix the new mylar sheet according to the reference positions
shown below. Before you fix a new mylar sheet, first clean the fixing position with alcohol. After fixing the
mylar sheet make sure that it is not rising up and the ends of the sheet are not peeling up.
1. Jump mylar sheet (feed guide)
Feed guide
A
A
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed up against this line)
Jump mylar sheet
0
ce
an
lear
e: c
enc
efer
e)
ng r
Fixi -0.5mm ferenc
e
0 to face r
(end
A-A cross-section
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 60
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
2. Mirror seal, feed cover mylar sheet
* When fixing the mirror seal, do not scratch the mirror surface.
a
b
Mirror seal
a
Feed cover mylar sheet
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed up against this rib)
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed up against this rib)
Cle
e:
)
nc
ce
ere
ren
ref
efe
ing
er
Fix .5mm fac
± 0 b end
(ri
Fi
0 xing
to
(w 0. ref
he 5m ere
n
pu m nce
:C
sh
ed
lea
up
ra
nc
ag
e
ain
st
th
is
rib
)
b-b cross-section
ara
e
nc
a-a cross-section
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
b
16 - 61
6570/5570 ADF
3. Feed sheets 1, 2, 4, 5
Fixing reference
0 to -1
Feed sheet 2
0
Fixing reference (when pushed up
against this indented section)
Feed sheet 5
Fixing reference
0 to -1
0
Feed sheet 4
Sheets 4 and 5 must be fixed according to the rib contact
reference in the direction of the arrows shown
in the figure on the left.
(Overlapping of ribs is not allowed. Clearance must be
0 to 2mm.)
Feed sheet 1
Feed sheet 5
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 62
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
4. Guide mylar sheets, mirror seals, mirror mylar sheets
* When fixing the mirror seal, do not scratch the mirror surface.
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
* The opposite side must be fixed
at the same Fixing reference.
C
C
eet)
r sh ±0.5mm
a
l
y
:
)
de m ference erence
(gui
e
ef
r
r
g
e
n
c
Fixi end fa
p
(ste
C-C cross-section
0
Mirror mylar sheet
Guide mylar sheet
(2 locations)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
B
(mirror mylar sheet)
Fixing reference: Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed against end face)
B
(mirror seal)
Fixing reference: Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed against end face)
Mirror seal
16 - 63
e
anc
lear
al)
C
e
:
s
)
nce
ror
face
(mir g refere
end
t
s
n
i
n
ai
Fix .5mm
d ag
0
0 to n pushe
e
heet)
(wh
mylar s : Clearance
r
o
r
ir
m
(
ce
referen
Fixing
ce)
m
m
t end fa
0 to 0.5 shed agains
pu
(when
B-B cross-section
6570/5570 ADF
5. Aligning mylar sheet (aligning plate)
Aligning mylar Sheet
Fix
i
0 to ng re
f
(wh 0.5m erenc
e: C
e
m
n
the
p
lea
cut ushe
ran
-of
d
ce
f se aga
ctio ins
t
n)
0
)
(A l
i
pro gning
t ru
s my
(1
.2 +0ion) lar sh
.5
ee
t
Aligning plate
Fixing reference: Deviation 0 to -0.5mm
(protrusion not allowed)
(protrusion also not allowed on opposite face)
0
6. Weight mylar Sheet
(weight holder)
ce
a
le
C
e:
ef
m d
r
g .5m she
n
xi 0 u
Fi to n p
0 he
(w
t
ns
d
fa
en
ai
ag
Weight mylar sheet
Fixing reference: Deviation
0 to -0.5mm
(protrusion not allowed)
(protrusion also not allowed
on opposite face)
nc
e
er
)
ce
n
ra
Weight holder
0
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 64
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
A
A
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(overlapping not allowed)
7. Guide mylar sheet (2)
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(overlapping not allowed)
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.5mm
(overlapping not allowed)
Guide mylar sheet (2)
(3 locations)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 65
nce
nce: Cleara
Fixing refere
0 to 0.5mm
ed against
(when push
indentation)
Overlapping
not allowed
A-A cross-section
6570/5570 ADF
0.5mm
8. Guide mylar sheet (3)
Fixing reference:
Arrow view
Fix in order 1 , 2 and 3 so that mylar
does not sag.
1
2
0
3
Arrow View
0
Guide mylar
sheet (3)
Fixing reference:
0 to 1
Sagging not
allowed
Make sure that
edges of mylar
guide do not deviate.
Fixing reference:
0 to 1
0
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 66
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
9. Separation pad, separation mylar sheet
Pad holder
Separation pad, Separation mylar sheet
Fixing reference: Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(overlapping not allowed)
Separation pad
A
Separation pad
Fixing reference: Clearance
0 to 0.3mm
(overlapping not allowed)
Paper path
direction
Separation pad
Separation mylar sheet
A
Separation mylar sheet
Fixing reference: Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(when pushed up against this line)
* The paper path direction in the figure must be free
from steps that may catch the paper.
A-A cross-section
10. Flapper rubber skirt
Fixing re
ference:
0 to -0.5
(end face
mm
referenc
e)
0
Flapper rubber skirt
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Arrow vie
w
Fixing re
ference:
0 to -0.5m
(end face
m
reference
)
0
Arrow view
16 - 67
6570/5570 ADF
11. Reversal mirror seal
* When fixing the reversal mirror seal, do not scratch the mirror surface.
A
A
Fixing reference:
(when pushed
against indentation)
Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(Overlapping not allowed)
Reversal mirror seal
ce:
ren d
e
f
re he
on)
ing us tati
m
Fix hen p nden 0.5m ed)
(w nst i
o
low
t
l
0
i
ta
a
e
o
g
c
n
a
n
ara ping
Cle erlap
(Ov
Reversal mirror seal
A-A cross-section
6570/5570 ADF
16 - 68
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
12. Cushions
Fixing reference:
Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(end face reference)
Fixing reference: Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(end face reference)
Fixing reference:
Clearance 0 to 0.5mm
(end face reference)
Cushions
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 69
6570/5570 ADF
Reversal roller mylar sheets
(3 locations)
6570/5570 ADF
Reversal roller cushions
(3 locations)
16 - 70
(Fix these cushions between
the ribs so that they do not
overlap the ribs.)
(3 locations)
(reversal roller
mylar sheet)
Fixing reference
(when pushed
against this line)
(reversal roller cushion)
Fixing reference:
± 0.5mm
(Fix these cushions between the ribs
so that they do not overlap the ribs.)
(3 locations)
(reversal roller cushion)
Fixing reference (when pushed against this line)
13. Reversion roller cushions, reversal roller mylar sheets
(reversal roller mylar sheet)
Fixing reference: 0 to -0.5mm
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
14. Discharge brush
Fixing reference: 0 to -0.5mm
(hold end reference (line w/out crimp))
Hole
A
A
0
a
m
5m )
ce
to ren
0
e
e:
ef
nc p r
e
r
rim
fe
re ut c
g
o
xin w/
Fi ine
(l
.
-0
(0.5)
Discharge brush
The tip must be firmly
pressed against the DF cover.
(The tip must not protrude
from the DF cover.)
Section a:
Insert into hole, and fix to rib.
A-A cross-section
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16 - 71
6570/5570 ADF
15. DF cover sheets 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 8
Each of the DF cover sheets must be fixed according to the rib contact reference in the direction of
the arrows shown in the figure below.
(Overlapping of ribs is not allowed. Clearance must be 0 to 2mm.)
Firmly fix the DF cover sheets so that they do not rise up along the curve of the DF cover.
DF cover sheet 2
(2 locations)
(Overlapping of the gate
not allowed.)
6570/5570 ADF
DF cover sheet 5
DF cover sheet 4
DF cover sheet 8
(2 locations)
DF cover sheet 1
(2 locations)
(Overlapping of the gate
not allowed.)
16 - 72
Fixing reference:
Deviation ±0.5mm
(slide tool line)
DF cover sheet 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
16. Tray sheet guides
0
0
Fixing reference: 0 to -0.5mm
(end face rounded corner end
reference)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Fixing reference:
0 0.5mm
(indentation end
face reference)
(indentation end
face reference)
Tray sheet guide
Fixing reference:
0 0.5mm
Fixing reference: 0 to -0.5mm
(end face rounded corner end
reference)
16 - 73
Tray sheet guide
6570/5570 ADF
17. Gasket (transfer belt unit)
FRAME-BELT-F
Gasket
Gasket
Window
Aligning
Gap:0~1mm
-0~1mm
-0~1mm
Must not protrude
beyond the window
Must not protrude beyond
the edge of the frame
18. Discharge (Paper feeder area)
[Attaching Position]
Attach it to the two edge positions in GUIDE-ALGN-IN (A and B below).
Note1. Insert the discharge brush between the FRM-FEED-794 and the GUIDE-ALGN-IN (rear side only).
Note2. To perform correctly Note 1, be sure to make the discharge brush rise up from the
GUIDE-ALGN-IN.
FRM-FEED-794-R
Note 1
Note 2
A
GUIDE-ALGN-IN
Note 2
Rear side
B
Discharge brush
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
Ch_16b.p65
74
16 - 74
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
19. Shield mylar (DF cover)
0~1mm
(2.4 ~ 2.5)
Aligning with rib
0 ~ 1mm
Aligning with rib
Shield mylar
COV-DF-794
20. Pad cushion
Pad cushion
0~1mm
Must not protrude beyond the bracket
BKT-PAD-SPT-794
Pad cushion
0~1mm
Must not protrude beyond the bracket
Align and then attach
(Gap = 0~0.5mm)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Ch_16b.p65
75
16 - 75
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
21. Reverse section entrance mylar
Unit: mm
SHEET-RVS-M
BELT
+0.5
1 –0.5
0~0.5
MYLAR-RVS-M
Not to protrude
0~1
0~1
MYLAR-RVS-M
SHEET-RVS-M
22. Reverse section side mylar
Rounded corner end
+1
0 ~ 0.5
Not to become stuck on the rib
0 –1
MYLAR-RVS-U-R
View
MYLAR-RVS-U-F
0 ~ 0.5
Not to become stuck on the rib
Unit: mm
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
Ch_16b.p65
76
16 - 76
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
23. Paper-feed mylar (1)
A
Gap: up to 0.5mm
(Aligning with rib)
Gap: up to 0.5mm
(Aligning with rib)
A-A' Sectional view
A'
Paper-feed Mylar (1)
24. Paper-feed mylar (2)
0~+0.5mm
for bent area
0~+0.5mm
for end face
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Ch_16b.p65
77
Paper-feed Mylar (2)
Paper-feed Mylar (2)
0~+0.5mm
for end face
0~+0.5mm
for bent area
16 - 77
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
16.13 PC Board
(1)
PWA-F-LGC-794
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
Ch_16b.p65
78
16 - 78
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
(2)
PWA-F-SEN-794
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Ch_16b.p65
79
16 - 79
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADF
01.6.19, 8:39 AM
17. POWER SUPPLY UNIT
17.1 Configuration
The power supply unit comprises an AC filter and isolated DC output circuit.
(1) AC filter
This filter removes external electrical noise, and prevents leakage of electrical noise generated within
the machine to the outside.
(2) DC output circuit
DC output is divided into the following two lines:
: This power supply is used by the entire machine during image formation. 4
1 Main line
voltages (+3.35V, +5.1V, +12V, +24V) are output when the machine is started
up by turning the power switch ON.
2 Door switch line: This power supply passes via the door switch and is used by the entire machine during image formation. 3 voltages (+5.1V, +24V, +36V) are output when
the machine is started up by turning the power switch ON and operation of the
door switches (2 locations).
17.2 Operation of DC Output Circuit
(1) Start
When the main switch on the main unit is turned ON, the power on all lines starts up if the door is
closed.
(2) Stop
When the main switch on the main unit is turned OFF, the power OFF signal (PWR-DN) signal is
output after the momentary power failure guarantee time (20 ms or more) passes. The power voltage
is dropped after the rated voltage is held for the minimum hold time (10 ms or more) after the power
OFF signal is output.
(3) Output protection
Each of the output lines has a built-in overcurrent protection circuit (fuse, internal protection circuit)
and overvoltage protection. This prevents trouble such as damage to the secondary circuit or erroneous operation caused by overcurrent (e.g. shorting of the load) or overvoltage (e.g. shorting between
different voltages) from occurring.
When the protection circuit has operated, remove the cause of circuit operation (e.g. short), and
reset the circuit by turning the power OFF then ON again.
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
17 - 1
6570/5570 POWER SUPPPLY
Exposure
lamp load
5VA
Heater lamp load
F3
GNDA
24VA
DGA
24VB
Frequecy
reactor
F4
Breaker
Main switch
Live
F5
F1
N.F
Neutral
N.F
DGB
24VC
DGC
24VD
DGD
Reg.
Door switch
F6
DGE
36VA
DGA
36VB
F7
DGB
Switching power supply
F8
DGC
36VD
DGD
Frequecy
reactor
3.3VA~C
GNDA~C(3.3V)
5.1VB,D,E,H,I
F2
GNDB,D,E,H,I(5.1V)
N.F
12VA~C
Reg.
F9
DGA~C(12V)
24VF
DGF
24VG
F10
DGG
24VH
DGH
6570/5570 POWER SUPPLY
17 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
Power supply sequence
ON
OFF
AC input
700 ms or less
Within 10 ms
3.2V or more
+3.3V(MAIN)
3.2V or more
4.95V or more
+5.1V(MAIN)
4.95V or more
10 ms~120 ms
20 ms
or
more
10 ms
or
more
20 ms
or
more
50 ms
or
more
PWR-DN
0~200 ms 5 ms or more
0 ms or more
11.4V or more
0~200 ms
21.6V or more
+12V(MAIN)
11.4V or more
+24V(MAIN)
21.6V or more
4.95V or more
+5.1V(DOOR)
4.95V or more
21.6V or more
+24V(DOOR)
21.6V or more
34.2V or more
+36V(DOOR)
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
34.2V or more
17 - 3
6570/5570 POWER SUPPPLY
18. PC BOARD
(1) PWA-F-SYS-300
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
18 - 1
6570/5570 PC BOARD
(2) PWA-F-MTB-300
6570/5570 PC BOARD
18 - 2
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(3) PWA-F-LGC-300
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
18 - 3
6570/5570 PC BOARD
(4) PWA-F-ADU-300
(5) PWA-F-MOT-300
6570/5570 PC BOARD
18 - 4
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
(6) PWA-F-SLG-300
(7) PWA-F-SDV-300
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
18 - 5
6570/5570 PC BOARD
(8) PWA-F-PLG-300
6570/5570 PC BOARD
18 - 6
Mar. 1999 © TOSHIBA TEC
SD-D-102, 00-03 AB
File No. 31110001
1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8442, JAPAN
Copyright 2000
TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE FOR THE COPIER 8070/6570/5570/(***)4580
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.
1.
Transportation/Installation
• When transporting/installing the copier, move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers.
The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 250 kg (551 lb), therefore pay full attention
when handling it.
• Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V/20A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) or more for
its power source.
• The copier must be grounded for safety.
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.
• Select a suitable place for installation.
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.
• Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone.
• To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of
80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.
2.
Service of Machines
• Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.
• Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the
damp heater and their periphery.
• Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, the transfer belt and the highvoltage transformer.
• Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.
• When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections
and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.
• Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.
• Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.
− Avoid direct exposure to beam.
− Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.
− Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.
3.
Main Service Parts for Safety
• The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
4.
Cautionary Labels
• During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the copier.
(***) Model 4580 is only for NAD, ASD and MJD.
5.
Disposition of Consumable Parts/Packing Materials
• Regarding the recovery and disposal of the copier, supplies, consumable parts and packing
materials, it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6.
When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless
otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble
small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, toothed washers in the wrong places.
7.
Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
8.
Precautions Against Static Electricity
• The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wrist band, pull out the power cord plug of the copier and make
sure that there is no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
Caution
:
Vorsicht
:
Dispose of used RAM-IC’s (including lithium battery)
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Entsorgung des gebrauchten RAM-IC’s (inklusive
der Lithium Batterie) nach Angaben des Herstellers.
1. ADJUSTMENT
2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING
& HANDLING SUPPLIES
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
5. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE
THROUGH PC
6. MANUAL FOR FIRMWARE
DOWNLOAD
7. HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
1.
ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1
Error Codes............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
Self-Diagnostic Modes ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.1
Input signal check (test mode 03) ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2
Output signal check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.3
Test print mode (test mode 04) ......................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.4
Adjustment mode (05) ...................................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.5
Setting mode (08) ............................................................................................................. 1-25
1.2.6
How to register/change ID codes (access control mode) ................................................. 1-33
1.3
Formatting the Hard Disk ....................................................................................................... 1-34
1.4
Auto-Toner Sensor Adjustment .............................................................................................. 1-35
1.5
Print Image Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 1-37
1.5.1
Adjustment of paper aligning value ................................................................................... 1-39
1.5.2
Adjusting the printer section ............................................................................................. 1-40
1.5.3
Adjusting the scanner section ........................................................................................... 1-46
1.6
Image Density ........................................................................................................................ 1-52
1.7
Automatic Adjustment of Gamma correction ......................................................................... 1-53
1.8
Sharpness (HPF) Adjustment ................................................................................................ 1-55
1.9
Data Correction ...................................................................................................................... 1-56
1.10 High-Voltage Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 1-57
1.11 Installation of Carriage Drive Wire ......................................................................................... 1-62
1.11.1 Wire tension adjustment ................................................................................................... 1-62
1.11.2 Adjustment of carriage 1 and carriage 2 ........................................................................... 1-62
1.11.3 Carriage drive wire assembling......................................................................................... 1-63
1.12 Lens Unit ................................................................................................................................ 1-65
1.12.1 Adjusting the lens magnification ....................................................................................... 1-66
1.13 Adjusting Horizontal Deviation Caused by Paper Feed ......................................................... 1-68
1.14 Changing the Paper Size ....................................................................................................... 1-69
1.14.1 LCF paper sizes ................................................................................................................ 1-69
1.14.2 PFP paper sizes ............................................................................................................... 1-70
1.15 Adjustment of Duplexer .......................................................................................................... 1-71
1.15.1 Adjustment of the Stack Guide Unit .................................................................................. 1-71
1.15.2 Holding gate position adjustment ...................................................................................... 1-73
1.16 Adjusting the Thickness of the Magnetic Brush (leveler) ....................................................... 1-75
1.17 Adjusting the Gap between the Drum and Sleeve ................................................................. 1-75
1.18 Adjustment of Developer Polarity Position ............................................................................. 1-75
1.19 Adjusting the Heat Roller Pressure ........................................................................................ 1-75
1.20 Setting the Heat Roller Temperature and Heat Roller Pressure ............................................ 1-76
1.21 Adjusting the Fuser Inlet Guide.............................................................................................. 1-78
8070/6570/5570/4580 CONTENTS
I
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.22 Adjustment of ADF ................................................................................................................. 1-79
1.22.1 Adjustment of skew with ADF ........................................................................................... 1-79
1.22.2 Adjustment of ADF horizontal deviation caused for ADF .................................................. 1-80
1.22.3 Adjustment of ADF leading-edge position ........................................................................ 1-81
1.22.4 Adjustment of leading-edge position for ADF (at the Time of Reversing) ......................... 1-81
1.22.5 Adjustment of magnetic catches installation ..................................................................... 1-82
1.22.6 Adjustment of the separation area .................................................................................... 1-83
1.22.7 EEPROM Initialization, Sensor Adjustment and Test Mode .............................................. 1-84
1.23 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) ......................................................................................... 1-85
1.24 Fine Adjustment of Binding Position/Folding Position ............................................................ 1-87
1.25 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................................... 1-88
1.26 Flapper Solenoid Adjustment ................................................................................................. 1-89
2.
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1
Inspection every 440,000 Copies (8070), every 400,000 Copies (6570),
every 340,000 Copies (5570), every 280,000 Copies (4580) ................................................ 2-1
2.2
Inspection and Overhaul every 880,000 Copies (8070), every 800,000 Copies (6570/5570/4580) ...... 2-1
2.3
Periodic Inspection Check List ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.4
Periodical Maintenance Kit (For 400k) ................................................................................... 2-16
2.5
Jig List .................................................................................................................................... 2-17
3.
PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING AND HANDLING SUPPLIES ........................................... 3-1
3.1
Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies ........................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum ................................................................................. 3-1
3.3
Checking and Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Blade, Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade ................. 3-2
3.4
Checking and Cleaning the Heat Roller Cleaning Roller 1, 2, 3, 4 ........................................ 3-3
3.5
Checking and Cleaning the Upper and Lower Heat Rollers .................................................. 3-3
3.6
Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt ................................................................................... 3-4
3.7
Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Power Supply Roller .................................................. 3-4
3.8
Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush ......................................................... 3-4
4.
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1
Scanner System Related Service Call ................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
Process System Related Service Call ................................................................................... 4-3
4.3
Fuser Related Service Call .................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4
Communication Related Service Call .................................................................................... 4-6
4.5
ADF Related Service Call ...................................................................................................... 4-7
4.6
Other Troubles on the ADF System ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.7
Other Service Calls ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.8
Laser Optical system Related Service Call ............................................................................ 4-13
4.9
Finisher Related Service Call ................................................................................................. 4-15
4.10 Image Quality Maintenance Control Related Troubleshooting ............................................... 4-30
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
II
8070/6570/5570/4580 CONTENTS
5.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE THROUGH PC .................... 5-1
5.1
Outline .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2
System Configuration ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3
Preparation of PC to use a network ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.1 Setting Virtual Modem ......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Using Dial-Up Networking ................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.3 Using New Connection ........................................................................................................ 5-8
5.4
Installation of FTP Server ...................................................................................................... 5-12
6.
MANUAL FOR FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD ............................................................................ 6-1
6.1
Outline .................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2
Preparation of PC .................................................................................................................. 6-1
[ 3 ] [ 9 ] Mode operation ........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2.1 Software Installation ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2.2 Preparation of Updated Files ............................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Connection between Copier and PC ................................................................................... 6-3
6.3
Download Operation .............................................................................................................. 6-4
6.4
Screen Details ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
7.
HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
AC Wire Harness ................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2
DC Wire Harness ........................................................................................................... Appendix
8070/6570/5570/4580 CONTENTS
III
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.
ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Error Codes
When either the CLEAR PAPER ( ) or CALL FOR SERVICE ( ) symbol appears, press the CLEAR/STOP
and [8] keys simultaneously and the corresponding error code will be displayed.
/ → [C] + [8] (error code)
Group
Error code
Paper transport jam inside the copier 1
E01
Paper leading edge not reaching the fuser exit switch
E02
Paper trailing edge not passing the fuser exit switch
E03
Paper remaining inside the machine at power ON
E09
HDD malfunction
E0A
Image transport ready timeout
E12
Manual feeding jam
E15
PFP Feeding jam from the upper PFP
E16
PFP Feeding jam from the middle PFP
E17
PFP Feeding jam from the lower PFP
E19
Feeding jam from LCF
Transport jam to aligning section
E31
after feeding
E32
PFP transport jam
(not reaching the
paper stop switch)
Paper feeding jam
Machine status
E33: Feeding from the lower PFP
E33
E34
E35
Not reaching the PFP E34: Feeding from the upper PFP
transport path
E35: Feeding from the middle PFP
E36: Feeding from the lower PFP
E36
Cover open jam
E31: Feeding from the upper PFP
E32: Feeding from the middle PFP
E41
Copier front cover is opened during copying
E47
Exit cover is opened during copying
Transport jam in ADU and reversal
E50
Paper not reaching the ADU aligning switch
section
E51
Paper not reaching the ADU transport switch 1
E52
Paper not reaching the ADU transport switch 2
E53
Paper not reaching the PFP upper paper stop switch
E54
Paper not reaching the ADU feed switch
E55
Paper remaining on transport path when copy finished
E56
Paper remaining on PFP transport path after door open/close
E57
Paper not reaching the reversal switch
E58
Paper not passing the reversal switch
E59
Paper not passing the exit switch
E5A
Paper not reaching the exit switch
E5B
ADU transport start timeout jam
Original transporting jam at the
E71
Original feeding jam at the feed section of the ADF
ADF
E72
Original transporting jam at the transport section of the ADF
E73
Original exiting jam at the exit section of the ADF
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Group
Error code
Machine status
Finisher jam
E9F
Punch jam
Paper jam at the finisher
EA1
Transporting delay jam
EA2
Transporting stationary jam
EA3
Paper remaining in the finisher at power ON
EA4
Finisher front door opened during copying
EA5
Staple jam
EA6
Early arrival jam
EA8
Finisher saddle stitcher staple jam
EA9
Finisher saddle stitcher front door open jam
EAA
Paper remaining in the finisher at power ON
EAB
Finisher saddle stitcher transport stationary jam
EAC
Finisher saddle stitcher transport delay jam
EAD
Print end command time-out jam
EAE
Finisher receive time-out jam
Paper transport jam inside the
EB3
Finisher ready time-out error
copier 2
EB5
PSTPR-L standby time-out error
EB6
PSTPR-H standby time-out error
Paper feeding error
C11
Duplexer side guide is abnormal
(Refer to page 1-4)
C12
Duplexer stopper guide is abnormal
C15
PFP upper tray is abnormal
C16
PFP middle tray is abnormal
C17
PFP lower tray is abnormal
C18
LCF tray is abnormal
C26
Peak detection error
C27
(Home switch does not turn OFF within a fixed time) Carriage
Scanner system related service call
initialization error
C28
(Home switch does not turn ON within a fixed time) Carriage
initialization error
C29
Exposure lamp disconnection detected
Process system related service
C36
Main charger wire cleaning operation abnormal
call 1
C37
Transfer belt operation abnormal
Process system related service
CD1
Brush motor lock error
call 2
CD2
Auger motor lock error
Fuser related service call
C41
Thermistor abnormal or heater disconnection at power ON
C43
Thermistor abnormal during warming-up or at standby after
disconnection judgement
C44
Heater abnormal during warming-up or at standby after
disconnection judgement
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
C45
Upper heat roller end thermistor abnormal
C46
Lower heat roller thermistor abnormal at standby
1-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Group
Error code
Communication related service call
C56
Communication error between PFC and M-CPU
C57
Communication error between M-CPU and IPC
C58
Communication error between IPC and the finisher
C59
Communication error between M-CPU and L-CPU
System communications related
F07
Communication error between SYS and LGC boards
service call
F11
Communication error between SYS and SLG boards
ADF related service call
C72
Error of aligning sensor adjustment
C73
EEPROM initializing error
C74
Error of exit sensor adjustment
C76
Transmission time-out error
C77
Transmission buffer full
C78
ADF power ON I/F error
C79
Reception time-out error
C80
Error of timing sensor adjustment
C94
M-CPU is abnormal
C99
PFC microcomputer is abnormal
Laser optical system related
CA1
Polygonal mirror motor is abnormal
service call
CA2
H-SYNC is abnormal
CA3
Secondary scanning rough adjustment error
CA4
Primary scanning counter load error
CA5
Laser power adjustment error
CA6
Laser PWM calibration error
CA9
Image data transmission error from SYS board
CAA
Secondary scanning fine adjustment error
CAB
Secondary scanning inter-page compensation error
CAC
Primary scanning dot adjustment error
CAD
Primary scanning tap adjustment error
CAE
Primary scanning tap amount measurement error
CAF
Primary scanning inter-page compensation error
CD0
Laser initializing time-out error
CB1
Feed motor is abnormal
CB2
Delivery motor is abnormal
CB3
Tray lift motor is abnormal
CB4
Alignment motor is abnormal
CB5
Staple motor is abnormal
CB6
Stapler shift motor is abnormal
CB7
Height sensor is abnormal
CB8
Backup RAM data is abnormal
CB9
Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor is abnormal
Other service calls
Finisher related service call
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Machine status
1-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Group
Finisher related service call
Option units related service call
Error code
Machine status
CBA
Saddle stitcher front stitcher motor is abnormal
CBB
Saddle stitcher rear stitcher motor is abnormal
CBC
Saddle stitcher alignment motor is abnormal
CBD
Saddle stitcher guide motor is abnormal
CBE
Saddle stitcher folding motor is abnormal
CBF
Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate motor is abnormal
CC0
Sensor connector connection error
CC1
Microswitch error
CC2
Communications error between finisher saddle
CC4
Swing motor is abnormal
CC5
Horizontal registration motor is abnormal
CC6
Punch motor is abnormal
F10
HDD formatting error
Addition to the explanation
(1) When a paper feeding error occurs:
: Error has occurred in the unit
→Disabled
: No error has occurred in the unit
→Enabled
: To operate continuously, error code ([C]+[8]) is not displayed.
(2) During C11 and C12 error codes
* If the mode which Duplexer is used is selected as “single-sided → duplex” or “two-sided → duplex”,
the “install the Duplexer” message is displayed and printing is not possible.
* If the mode other than the above (the Duplexer is not used) is selected, the operation can be
normally accepted.
(3) During C15, 16, 17 error codes
* If a cassette in which an error has occurred is selected:
The “Add Paper” message is displayed even if the sheet is set, and copying can be performed
when another paper cassette is selected.
* If a cassette other than the above is selected, the operation can be normally accepted.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error history (08-253)
(Display example)
EA1
Error code
3 digit
990326175732
YYMMDDHHMMSS
12 digit (Date, time)
64
64
MMM
NNN
3 digit
3 digit
(Reproduction ratio)
236210000000
ABCDEFGHIJKL
12 digit
(Copy mode)
Copy mode
A
Paper feed cassette
0: Non-select 1: Bypass 2: LCF 3: PFP(U) 4: PFP(M) 5: PFP(L) 6: ADU
B
Paper size code
0: Non-select 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOL/COM B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13'LG G: 8.5*8.5
C
Sort mode/Staple mode
0: Non-select 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Staple (Front) 8: Staple (2 places) 9: Staple (Rear) A: Saddle stetch
D
DF mode
0: Not used 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
E
APS/AMS mode
0: Non-select 1: APS 2: AMS
F
Duplex mode
0: Non-select 1: Book 2: Two-sided/Single-sided 4: Two-sided/Duplexed
8: Single-sided/Duplexed
G
Not used
0: Not used
H
Image shift
0: Not used 1: Book 2: LEFT 3: RIGHT
I
Editing
0: Not used 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirroring 4: Negative/Positive
J
Edge-erase/Dual-page
0: Not used 1: Edge-erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge-erase & Dual-page
K
Not used
0: Not used
L
Function
0: Not used 1: PPC 2: Not used 3: Not used 4: GDI 5: DSS
Reproduction ratio
MMM
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Y direction)
NNN
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (X direction)
Hexadecimal
Hexadecimal
Setting mode, code "253" displays latest 8 error data
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-5
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.2 Self-Diagnostic Modes
This copier is a multi-function copier (net work printer, DSS). So, compared with conventional copiers:
1) It has more setting items in the self-diagnostic mode.
2) Setting items are related to each other.
For this reason, if normal operations are continued on the control panel (by [0] + [9] or [C] keys) when
adjustments are completed, operation trouble (e.g. machine lock) may occur due to the internal structure
of the program.
So, when the self-diagnostic mode in adjustments after unpacking, servicing or preventative maintenance, first turn the power OFF before handing the copier over to the user.
Mode
All-LEDs-lit
Test mode
Input
code
Definition
Clearing
method
[0]+[1]+
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all
[PWR]
pixels on the LCD light and go out.
[0]+[9]
[0]+[3]+
Input/output signals are checked.
[0]+[9]
Display
[C]or
100%
Test print
[0]+[4]+
mode
[PWR]
Adjustment
[0]+[5]+
mode
[PWR]
Setting mode
[0]+[8]+
System switchover and setting of each
[PWR]
priority mode, PM counter, etc.
List print
mode
Test print
[0]+[9]
mode
100%
Adjustment of items
[0]+[9]
100%
+[PWR]
P
A4
A
A4
TEST MODE
Printing of 05, 08 code data lists
[0]+[9]
100%
Mode for executing auto-toner adjustment
and drum counter clear
D
A4
TEST MODE
[PWR]
100%
P
A4
LIST PRINT
OFF
[6]+[START]
A4
TEST PRINT
+[PWR]
Unit replace
Note:
[9]+[START]
C
TEST MODE
[PWR]
[PWR]
100%
K
A4
TEST MODE
OFF
To access the desired self-diagnostic mode, turn on the power switch while pressing the appropriate keys
(e.g. [0]+[5]).
<Procedure>
• All-LEDs-lit mode (01):
[C] or [0] [9] Exit
[0] [1]
[PWR]
( All LEDs light )
[START]
(Key check)
[C] Exit
[START]
Notes: 1. The mode cannot be cleared by [0]+[9] during the key check; it can be cleared only by [C].
It can be cleared by both [0]+[9] and [C] when all LEDs on the control panel are lit.
2. Key Check With LED
(Press to turn LED out.)
Without LED (Press to display this in message area.)
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1-6
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
• Test mode (03): Refer to 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.
• Test print mode (04): Refer to “1.2.3 Test print mode”.
• Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “1.2.4 Adjustment mode”.
• List print mode
[9] [START]
[PWR]
(code)
[START]
101: 05 adjustment code
(Start of operation)
102: 08 setting code
103: 08 setting code (For tandem)
201: Job access code
[PWR] OFF
(code)
1: Auto-toner adjustment
2: Drum counter reset
[PWR] OFF
• Unit replace mode
[6] [START]
[PWR]
[START]
(Start of operation)
• Setting mode (08): Refer to “1.2.5 Setting mode”.
[Power] ON
Normal
[0][1]
[0][3]
[0][5]
*2
[0][8]
[0][4]
[9][S]
[6][S]
[C]
Warming up
All the displays on
the control panel lit
Test mode
[0][9]
Adjustment mode Setting mode
[0][9]
[0][9]
Test print mode
[0][9]
List print mode Unit replace mode
Standby
*1
[0][5]
[Power] OFF
[S]: START key ON.
[C]: CLEAR key ON.
*3
Hand over to user
Quick reference chart for self-diagnostic mode
*1
When the copier is in the adjustment mode which you entered by turning the power switch ON while
pressing keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, pressing keys [0] and [9] simultaneously will set the copier
to the standby mode. In this standby mode only can the adjustment mode be accessed repeatedly
by simply entering [0] and [5].
*2
While all the displays on the control panel are lit, copying is not available. When the copier enters the
standby mode by pressing the [0] [9] or [C], copying is enabled.
*3
When the self-diagnostic mode was used, turn the power OFF, then hand over to the user.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-7
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.2.1
Input signal check (Test mode 03)
In the [0] [3] test mode, the following input signal states can be checked by pressing the corresponding
keys.
[A] When the ENERGY SAVER key is OFF (LED indicating the energy saver mode is out)
Icon
Key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
A
B
LCF bottom LCF door
SW
SW
(Bottom)
(Open)
ADU
transport
switch 2
(ON)
LCF paper
start switch
(OFF)
–
–
PFP-U paper
start SW
(OFF)
PFP-M paper
start SW
(OFF)
PFP-L paper
start SW
(OFF)
PFP-U paper
stop SW
(OFF)
PFP-M paper
stop SW
(OFF)
PFP-L paper
stop SW
(OFF)
–
–
Front cover
SW
(OFF)
Reversal
switch
(ON)
C
D
E
LCF tray up LCF empty Manual feed
SW
paper width
SW
(Not empty) switch 3
(Top)
(OFF)
ADU
LCF switch
ADU feed
(Disconnection)
transport
switch
switch 1
(ON)
(ON)
ADU end
switch
–
–
(ON)
PFP-U
tray up SW
(ON)
PFP-M
tray up SW
(ON)
PFP-L
tray up SW
(ON)
–
PFP-U
empty SW
(OFF)
PFP-M
empty SW
(OFF)
PFP-L empty
SW
(OFF)
–
–
–
(ON)
[9]
–
–
–
IPC
connection
(Disconnection)
[0]
–
–
–
–
G
H
Manual feed Manual feed
paper width paper width
switch 0
switch 1
(OFF)
(OFF)
Manual feed
switch
–
(OFF)
ADU
aligning
switch
(ON)
PFP upper
cassette SW
(ON)
ADU side
switch
(ON)
ADU empty
switch
(Not empty)
PFP middle PFP lower
cassette SW cassette SW
(ON)
(ON)
Remarks
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Toner-full
switch
(ON)
Exit switch
F
Manual feed
paper width
switch 2
(OFF)
LCF tray
down key
(OFF)
–
–
–
–
–
Copier
ADU
connection paper stop
(Disconnection) switch
(ON)
Fuser exit
switch
–
(OFF)
Developer
–
unit not
mounted SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
Icons on the control panel in the table states are displayed as white on a black background (ON state).
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1-8
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[B] When the ENERGY SAVER key is ON (LED indicating the energy saver mode is lit)
Icon
Key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Remarks
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Total
counter
connection
(Disconnection)
Auto toner
sensor
connection
(Disconnection)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Platen
switch
(Close)
–
ADF size
switch 1
(ON)
–
APS
sensor 3
(OFF)
ADF size
switch 2
(ON)
–
APS
sensor 2
(OFF)
ADF empty
switch
(OFF)
–
APS
sensor 1
(OFF)
ADF cover
(Open)
Main charger
Cleaner
connection cleaning
(Disconnection) switch
(OFF)
Key counter Toner supply
connection cover switch
(Disconnection)
(Open)
–
–
–
APS
sensor 6
(OFF)
ADF APS
start SW
(ON)
APS
sensor 5
(OFF)
ADF exit
sensor
(ON)
Exit cover
switch
(Open)
Toner empty
switch
(OFF)
Transfer belt
contact
switch
(OFF)
ADF
connection
(Disconnection)
APS
sensor 4
(OFF)
ADF timing
sensor
(ON)
Transfer belt
separation
switch
(OFF)
Scanner
home SW
(OFF)
–
ADF
aligning
sensor
(ON)
–
–
–
–
–
–
[8]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[9]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[0]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Icons on the control panel in the table states are displayed as white on a black background (ON state).
<Procedure>
[0] [3]
[PWR]
[START]
[ENERGY SAVER]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
Note: Initialization is executed before test mode is entered.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-9
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.2.2
Output signal check (test mode 03)
In the [0] [3] test mode, the following output signal states can be checked by entering the corresponding codes.
Code
101
Function
Code
Function
Operation
procedure
group
Drum motor
ON
151
OFF
1
102
Toner motor
ON
152
OFF
1
103
Polygonal motor mirror (600 dpi)
ON
153
OFF
1
108
Aligning motor
ON
158
OFF
1
109
Pedestal motor
ON
159
OFF
1
110
ADU motor
ON
160
OFF
1
111
Scraper solenoid
ON
161
OFF
1
112
Developer motor
ON
162
OFF
1
113
Heat roller motor
ON
163
OFF
1
114
Transfer belt motor
ON
164
OFF
1
115
Fur brush motor
ON
165
OFF
1
116
Auger motor
ON
166
OFF
1
117
Laser bias
ON
167
OFF
1
118
Laser
ON
168
OFF
1
119
Fuser unit motor rotating slowly
ON
169
OFF
1
218
Total counter counts
219
Reversal fan
ON/OFF
3
220
ADU transport clutch
ON/OFF
3
221
ADU aligning clutch
ON/OFF
3
222
ADU feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
223
ADU stack clutch
ON/OFF
3
226
PFP upper feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
227
PFP middle feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
228
PFP lower feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
229
PFP upper aligning feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
230
PFP middle aligning feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
231
PFP lower aligning feed clutch
ON/OFF
3
233
Manual feed motor
ON/OFF
3
234
Manual feed pick-up solenoid
ON/OFF
3
235
Discharge LED lamp
ON/OFF
3
236
Exit fan, low speed
ON/OFF
3
237
Exit fan, high speed
ON/OFF
3
239
Main charger fan
ON/OFF
3
240
Developer fan
ON/OFF
3
241
Heater fan low-speed
ON/OFF
3
242
Heater fan high-speed
ON/OFF
3
243
Main charger wire cleaner
ON (reset)
2
244
Transfer belt cam motor
UP/DOWN
3
249
Developer bias -DC1
ON/OFF
3
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
2
1 - 10
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Operation
procedure
group
Function
250
Developer bias -DC2
ON/OFF
3
251
Developer bias -DC3
ON/OFF
3
252
Main Charger
ON/OFF
3
255
Transfer belt cleaning brush bias
ON/OFF
3
257
Duct (in/out) fan, low speed
ON/OFF
3
259
Duct (in/out) fan, high speed
ON/OFF
3
261
Scanning motor
ON
2
(Automatically stops at the limit position, its speed is variable using the ZOOM keys.)
262
Document (indicator) motor
ON
2
(Automatically stops at the limit position)
263
Exposure lamp
ON
3
(Automatically goes OFF after 6 seconds, and the fan motors rotate at low speed.)
264
Scanning optical system cooling fan motor 1 ON/OFF
3
265
Scanning optical system cooling fan motor 2 ON/OFF
3
266
SLG PC board cooling fan motor 3
ON/OFF
3
270
LCF feed motor
ON/OFF
3
271
LCF tray motor
UP/DOWN
2
272
ADU side guide motor
ON (reciprocating)
2
273
ADU end guide motor
ON (reciprocating)
2
274
ADU/exit switching gate solenoid
ON/OFF
3
275
ADU paper holding gate solenoid
ON/OFF
2
277
ADU reverse clutch
ON/OFF
3
278
PFP upper tray motor
UP/DOWN
2
279
PFP middle tray motor
UP/DOWN
2
280
PFP lower tray motor
UP/DOWN
2
281
ADF pick-up roller rotation
ON/OFF
3
282
ADF aligning roller rotation
ON/OFF
3
283
ADF transport belt CW rotation
ON/OFF
3
284
ADF transport belt CCW rotation
ON/OFF
3
285
ADF reverse roller rotation
ON/OFF
3
288
ADF reverse solenoid
ON/OFF
3
292
Laser unit fan
ON/OFF
3
295
Power off mode
4
List of System Output Check Functions
Code
Function
Operation
procedure
group
401
Get mounted PM (page memory) size
2
402
PM (page memory) read/write check
2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 11
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
<Procedure>
Group (1)
[0] [3]
[PWR]
(Code)
[START]
Stop
code
Operation
(ON)
[START]
Operation
(OFF)
[0] [9]
Warm-up
[0] [9]
Warm-up
Group (2)
[0] [3]
[PWR]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
(One-way)
[C]
Test mode standby
Group (3)
[0] [3]
[PWR]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
(ON)
[START]
Operation
(OFF)
[C]
Test mode
standby
[0] [9]
Warm-up
Group (4)
[0] [3]
[PWR]
(Code)
[START]
[PWR] OFF
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 12
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.2.3
Test print mode (test mode 04)
In test mode “04”, you can print the test pattern generated by the following ASIC codes.
Code
ASIC
111
SH
Primary scanning. 33 gradations, error diffusion
Test pattern type
Remarks
113
SH
Secondary scanning. 33 gradations, error diffusion
142
POPS
2 dots grid pattern (10mm Pitch)
<Operation procedure>
[0] [4]
[PWR]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
(Test print)
[C]
[0] [9]
Warm-up
Note: Though errors are displayed when it occurs, recovery is not carried out. This is recovered by
turning the power OFF then ON again.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 13
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.2.4
Adjustment mode (05)
In this mode, the following adjustment items can be corrected or changed. To access this mode, turn
the power ON while pressing the [0] and [5] keys.
05 MODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
200
Automatic adjustment of the Auto-toner circuit.
All
—
—
201
Manual adjustment of the Auto-toner circuit.
All
128
0-255
Printer
104
0-255
Copier
(Text/
Photo)
Copier
(Text)
104
0-255
104
0-255
6
Copier
(Photo)
104
0-255
6
All
104
0-255
♦203
Developer High 1 adjustment
Out put is NOT available for measurement.
Enter the value set in code 205-0.
♦205-0 Developer High 1 adjustment
Output IS available for measurement.
Adjust by measuring the output.
♦205-1 Developer High 1 adjustment
Output is NOT available for measurement.
Enter the value set in code 205-0.
♦205-2 Developer High 1 adjustment
Output is NOT available for measurement.
Enter the value set in code 205-0.
♦207
Developer High 2 adjustment
Out put IS available for measurement.
Adjust by measuring the output.
DEFAULT RANGE
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
GROUP
CODE
Increasing the value increases
the sensor out put.
Output is automatically set in
the range of 2.45 - 2.55V.
Refer to the complete autotoner adjustment.
The current value of the autotoner circuit is displayed and
can be manually set.
The developer power supply
output is increased when the
value is increased.
Before performing this
adjustment refer to the
complete adjustment.
2
1
7
2
The developer bias power
supply output is increased
when the value is increased.
Before performing this
adjustment refer to the
complete adjustment.
♦216 Developer High 3 adjustment
All
133
0-255 The developer bias power
2
Output IS available for measurement.
supply output is increased
when the value is increased.
Before performing this
adjustment refer to the
complete adjustment.
♦Key in Code 205 press the START key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. For 205-0, 207 and 216 use the UP
or DOWN key to change the value, press the SET key to store or the RESET key. For codes 203, 205-1 and 205-2 key in the
value set in code 205-0, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
♣210-0 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment. The
Copier
93
0-255 The charge corona power
7
developer unit must be removed.
(Text/
supply output is increased
Output IS available for measurement. Adjust
Photo)
when the value is increased.
by measuring the grid voltage output.
Before performing this
♣210-1 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment.
Copier
93
0-255 adjustment refer to the
6
Output is NOT available for measurement. Set
(Text)
complete adjustment.
to the value set in code 210-0.
Check or adjust the output
♣210-2 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment.
Copier
93
0-255 voltage using code 210-0 first,
6
Output is NOT available for measurement. Set (Photo)
then set the remaining codes
to the value set in code 210-0.
210-1, 210-2 and 212 to the
♣212 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment.
Printer
93
0-255 value set in 210-0.
1
Output is NOT available for measurement. Set
to the value set in code 210-0.
♣Key in Code 210 press the START key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. For 210-0 use the UP or DOWN key
to change the value, press the SET key to store or the RESET key. For codes 210-1, 210-2 and 212 key in the value set in
code 210-0, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 14
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
291
Image Quality Control circuit check value, not
adjustable.
Value indicates Status: Good or Error.
All
0
0-255
292
Image Density Sensor output check value
When the LED (light source) is turned OFF.
(This is the current value stored in memory
from the last time the machine performed the
Image Quality Control compensation
adjustment). It is not adjustable.
Normal value is 102 - 307.
Image Density Sensor output check value
When the LED (light source) is turned ON.
(This is the current value stored in memory
from the last time the machine performed the
Image Quality Control compensation
adjustment) not adjustable.
Normal value is 388-819.
Service Automatic adjustment of image
Density Sensor LED intensity. The value
displayed is the output check value after the
light source is adjusted.
All
0
0-1023
All
0
0-1023
All
0
0-255
293
296
DEFAULT RANGE
DESCRIPTION
A value of 2 or 4 indicates an
error in the image Quality
Control circuit. All other values
0-255 indicate that the Image
Quality Control circuit is
working correctly. For additional information refer to the
Image Quality Control
Troubleshooting section.
Use this code only when
checking or troubleshooting
Image Quality Control
problems. See Image Quality
Control Troubleshooting
section.
Use this code only when
checking or troubleshooting
Image Quality Control
problems. See Image Quality
Control troubleshooting
section.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
3
3
3
3
Use this code only when
checking or troubleshooting
Image Quality Control problems.
The higher the number the
dirtier the sensor or the greater
the amount of drum wear.
255 = sensor is too dirty or
drum is too worn for compensation. See Image Quality Control
Troubleshooting section.
305 Leading to trailing edge image shift. Scanner
All
128
0-255 When the value is increased
1
(secondary scanning) start position deviation).
by 1, the image shift
Key in the value, press SET key to store or
approximately 0.1213mm
CLEAR key to reset.
towards the trailing edge of the
paper(machine).
306 CCD primary scanning start position deviation.
All
45
0-90
1
When the value is increased
Key in the value, press SET key to store or
by 1, the image shifts
CLEAR to key to reset.
approximately 0.0423mm
towards the front side of the
paper (machine).
310 Exposure lamp intensity. Set to default value.
All
55
30-70 The exposure lamp voltage
1
Key in the value, press SET key to store or
increases or decreases
0.25V/step.
CLEAR key to reset.
0: Acceleration ratio (1)
•335-0 Scanner acceleration curve setting (50-59%).
All
2
0-2
6
1: Acceleration ratio (2)
•335-1 Scanner acceleration curve setting (60-79%).
All
0
0-2
6
2: Acceleration ratio (3)
Adjustment corrects for blurs
•335-2 Scanner acceleration curve setting (80-95%).
All
1
0-2
6
in the leading 2 inches of the
•335-3 Scanner acceleration curve setting (96-103%).
All
1
0-2
6
copy. Set to the default values
when memory has been
•335-4 Scanner acceleration curve setting (104-190%).
All
1
0-2
6
corrupted. Adjust only when
•335-5 Scanner acceleration curve setting (191-400%).
All
1
0-2
6
replacing the scan drive motor.
• Key in code 335 press the START key, key in the Sub code, then press the START key. Key in the value, press the SET key to
store or the CELAR key to reset.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 15
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
♥340
Scanner copy length reproduction ratio
adjustment.
♥350
♥351
MODE
DEFAULT RANGE
Copier
128
0-255
RADF single sided original stop position.
All
8
0-15
RADF double sided original side 2 stop
position.
All
8
0-15
All
—
—
♥401
RADF sensor automatic adjustment and
EEPROM initialization.
Press the START key, WAIT is displayed while
the automatic adjustment is performed.
Polygonal motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
128
0-255
♥405
Polygonal motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
120
0-255
356
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 16
DESCRIPTION
Adjust the length of the copy
image to 1:1 so that it is not
stretched or compressed. Use
a millimeter scale and ledger/
A3 paper to adjust. Increasing
the value decreases the length
0.05% step(or 0.1mm/step).
The higher the value, the more
the original is fed towards the
paper feed side of the
machine.
1 step is equal to approximately 1mm change.
Test copy can be made in 05
test mode.
The higher the value, the more
the original is fed towards the
exit side of the machine.
1 step is equal to approximately 1mm change.
Test copy cannot be made in
05 test mode. Press 09 to
enter normal copy mode and
toggle back to 05 mode to
adjust.
Perform RADF EEPROM
Initialization when EEPROM,
RADF logic PWA or sensors
are replaced.
Adjust the width of the printed
image (front to rear of
machine) to 1:1, so that it is
not stretched or compressed.
When the value is increased
by 1, the width reproduction
ratio is enlarged by approximately 0.05% step (or 0.1mm/
step). After setting the value,
select LT/A4 paper, then press
the ENERGY SAVER key to
make a test print.
Adjust the width of the copied
image (front to rear) to 1:1 so
that it is not stretched or
compressed. When the value
is increased by 1, the width
reproduction ratio is enlarged
by approximately 0.05%/step
(or 0.1mm/step). After setting
the value, select LT/A4 paper,
then press the ENERGY
SAVER key to make a test
copy.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
1
4
1
1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
05 MODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
410
Laser write position(front to rear of machine
image registration).
After adjusting code 411, key in the value set
in code 411, press the SET key to store in
memory or the CLEAR key to reset.
Copier
140
0-255
♥411
Laser write position (front to rear of machine
image registration).
Printer
140
0-255
♥415
First beam laser power.
Copier
103
0-255
♥416
First beam laser power.
Printer
103
0-255
♥430
Copy leading edge void adjustment.
Copier
24
0-255
♥431
Copier
0
0-255
Copier
0
0-255
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by approximately 0.04233mm.
1
♥433
Copy top edge void adjustment (rear of
machine). Top of copy LT/A4 or right side edge
of ST-R/A5-R, LT-R/A4-R, Legal/B4 and
Ledger/A3.
Copy bottom edge void adjustment (front of
Machine). Bottom of copy LT/A4 or left side
edge of ST-R/A5-R, LT-R/A4-R, Legal/B4 and
Ledger/A3.
Copy trailing edge void adjustment.
Copier
30
0-255
1
♥435
Printed page leading edge void adjustment.
Printer
24
0-255
♥436
Printed page top edge void adjustment (rear
of machine). Top of printed page LT/A4 or
right side of ST-R/A5-R, LT-R/A4-R, Legal/B4
and Ledger/A3.
Printed page bottom edge void adjustment
(front of machine). Top of printed page LT/A4
or left side edge of ST-R/A5-R, LT-R/A4-R,
Legal/B4 and Ledger/A3.
Printed page trailing edge void adjustment.
Printer
0
0-255
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by approximately 0.04233mm.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by
approximately 0.04233mm.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by
approximately 0.04233mm.
Printer
0
0-255
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by
approximately 0.04233mm.
1
Printer
0
0-255
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by approximately 0.04233mm.
Increasing the value by 1
shifts the image on the paper
by approximately 0.5mm
towards the paper’s leading
edge. Increasing the value
makes the paper arrive later.
Increasing the value by 1
shifts the image on the paper
by approximately 0.5mm
towards the papers’ leading
edge. Increasing the value
makes the paper arrive later.
1
♥432
♥437
♥438
DEFAULT RANGE
♥442
Bypass registration adjustment. Image on the
drum to the paper’s leading edge.
All
8
0-15
♥443
LCC registration adjustment. Image on the
drum to the paper’s leading edge.
Test copy available while in the 05 Mode.
All
15
0-40
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 17
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
CODE
Always perform code 411 first,
then set the value of code 410
to the value set in code 411.
When the value is increased
by 1, the image on the drum is
shifted by 0.0423mm to the
rear of the copier(primary
scanning direction). Refer to
the complete adjustment
procedure before performing
this adjustment.
Laser power increases
2.34É W/step.
Set to 103 do not change from
the setting.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by
approximately 0.04233mm.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the void by
approximately 0.04233mm.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
DEFAULT RANGE
♥444
PFP registration adjustment. Image on the
drum to the paper’s leading edge.
Test copy available while in the 05 mode.
All
8
0-15
♥445
Duplexer registration adjustment. Image on
the drum to the papers’ leading edge.
Toggle between 09 and 05 Mode to make a
test copy.
All
8
0-15
DESCRIPTION
Increasing the value by 1
shifts the image on the paper
by approximately 0.5mm
towards the papers’ leading
edge. Increasing the value
makes the paper arrive later.
Increasing he value by 1 shifts
the image on the paper by
approximately 0.5mm towards
the papers’ leading edge.
Increasing the value makes
the paper arrive later.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
♥Key in the value, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Increasing the value by 1
♠450-0 PFP upper paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
14
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
330mm and longer.
Increasing the value by 1
♠450-1 PFP upper paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
8
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
220mm to 329mm.
Increasing the value by 1
♠450-2 PFP upper paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
5
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
219mm and less.
Increasing the value by 1
♠452-0 PFP middle paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
2
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
330mm and longer.
Increasing the value by 1
♠452-1 PFP middle paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
8
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
220mm to 329mm.
Increasing the value by 1
♠452-2 PFP middle paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
5
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
219mm and less.
♠Key in Code 450 or 452 press the START key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. Key in the value, press SET
key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Increasing the value by 1
455 Duplexer paper alignment (paper buckle) at
All
10
0-31
1
increases the aligning (paper
the main registration roller.
buckle) by 0.9mm.
Increasing the value by 1
■456-0 PFP lower paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
2
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
330mm and longer.
Increasing the value by 1
■456-1 PFP lower paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
8
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
220mm to 329mm.
Increasing the value by 1
■456-2 PFP lower paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
5
0-31
6
increases the aligning (paper
at the main registration roller. Paper length
buckle) by 0.9mm.
229mm and less.
■Key in Code 456 press the START key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. Key in the value, press SET key to
store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Increasing the value by 1
#457 LCF paper alignment (paper buckle) at the
All
16
0-31
1
increases the aligning (paper
main registration roller.
buckle) by 0.9mm.
Increasing the value by 1
#458 Manual feed paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
14
0-31
1
increases the aligning (paper
amount at he main registration roller.
buckle) by 0.9mm.
Increasing the value by 1
#459 PFP upper paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
4
0-15
1
increases the aligning (paper
at the PFP upper registration roller.
buckle) by 0.9mm.
Increasing the value by 1
#460 PFP middle paper alignment (paper buckle)
All
7
0-15
1
increases the aligning (paper
at the PFP middle registration roller.
buckle) by 0.9mm.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 18
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
DEFAULT RANGE
#461
PFP lower paper alignment (paper buckle)
at the PFP lower registration roller.
All
7
0-15
#462
Duplexer registration roller paper alignment
(paper buckle)
All
4
0-15
464
Duplexer end guide shifting amount
All
2
0-3
*
# Key in the value, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
▲468-0 Binding position/folding position fine adjustment
All
0
(A4-R/LT-R)
▲468-1 Binding position/folding position fine
All
0
adjustment (B4).
▲468-2 Binding position/folding position fine adjustment
All
0
(A3/LD)
469 Finisher aligning speed adjustment
All
0
-14-14
DESCRIPTION
Increasing the value by 1
increases the aligning (paper
buckle) by 0.9mm.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the aligning (paper
buckle) by 0.9mm.
In stacking of only a few sheets
in the case of the following
values only, the end guide is
moved towards the pickup
roller compared with the
standard pickup roller position.
If the paper is a large size than
the standard one or it has
much curing or the edges are
turned, then if a jam occurs,
the position of the end guide is
lowered. This will help to
decrease the possibility of
future jams.
0: A3/LD 0~2mm, other. 0~2mm
1: A3/LD 0~2mm, other. 0~0mm
2: A3/LD 0~4mm, other. 0~2mm
3: A3/LD 0~4mm, other. 0~0mm
Position shifts to the right page
0.25mm/step.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
1
6
-14-14
-14-14
0: High
1
1: Middle-high
2: Middle
3: Middle-low
4: Low
If the adjustment value is made
larger, the finisher aligning
speed becomes slower.
If the paper exiting to the
finisher becomes misaligned or
there are staple jams, then
only on these occasions these
codes should be used.
▲ Key in Code 468 press the Start key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. Key in the value, press SET key to
store or the CLEAR key to reset.
470 Paper remaining indicator. Automatic
All
—
0-31
8
Remove all of the paper from
adjustment for EMPTY condition. LCF and
the LCF and PFP, then
Drawers.
perform the automatic
adjustment.
0-4
*
(*) These new codes (464,469) are available from the 8070.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 19
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
471
Paper remaining indicator. LCF manual
adjustment for LESS than 1/2 the capacity.
Key in the value, press the START key to store
or the CLEAR key to reset.
Paper remaining indicator. PFP upper manual
adjustment for LESS than 1/2 the capacity.
Key in the value, press the START key to
store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Paper remaining indicator. PFP middle
manual adjustment for LESS than 1/2 the
capacity. Key in the value, press the START
key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Paper remaining indicator. PFP lower manual
adjustment for LESS than 1/2 the capacity.
Key in the value, press the START key to
store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Paper remaining indicator. Automatic
adjustment for FULL condition. LCF and
PFP.
All
4
0-31
All
10
0-31
All
10
0-31
All
10
0-31
All
—
—
476 Paper remaining indicator. LCF manual
adjustment for MORE than 1/2 the capacity.
All
2
0-31
477 Paper remaining indicator. PFP upper manual
adjustment for MORE than 1/2 the capacity.
All
2
0-31
478 Paper remaining indicator. PFP middle manual
adjustment for MORE than 1/2 the capacity.
All
0-31
479 Paper remaining indicator. PFP lower manual
adjustment for MORE than 1/2 the capacity.
All
0-255
472
473
474
475
DEFAULT RANGE
481 Drum motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
LT
size: 4
A/B
size: 8
LT
size: 7
A/B
size: 3
128
482 Drum motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
120
0-255
483 Registration motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
484 Registration motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
128
0-255
485 Fuser drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
486 Fuser drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
128
0-255
487 Transfer belt drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
488 Transfer belt drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
132
0-255
489 Pedestal drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
490 Pedestal drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
128
0-255
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 20
0-31
DESCRIPTION
Perform the manual adjustment when the remaining
amount of paper is less than
1/2. Perform adjustment code
470 first. Then adjust as
necessary.
Decrease the value in these
codes when the remaining
amount of paper indication is
slower than the actual amount
of paper.
Example: When the paper
remaining
indicator shows "
"
then changes suddenly to "
"
Load 4,000 sheets of paper in
the LCC and 500 sheets in the
Drawers, then perform the
automatic adjustment.
Perform the manual adjustment when the remaining
amount of paper is greater
than 1/2. Perform adjustment
code 475 first. Then adjust as
necessary.
Increase the value in these
codes when the remaining
amount of paper indication is
greater than the actual amount
of paper.
Example: When the paper
remaining
indicator shows "
"
then changes suddenly to "
"
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.067%. Set value to 128 for
the copier and 120 for the
printer.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.097%. Set value to 128 for
the copier and printer.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.061%. Set value to 128 for
the copier and printer.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.127%/step (or 0.254mm/
step). Refer to the complete
adjustment procedure before
performing this adjustment.
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.061%. Set value to 128 for
the copier and printer.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
05 MODE
CODE
ADJUSMENT
MODE
DEFAULT RANGE
491 Duplexer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
492 Duplexer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
128
0-255
DESCRIPTION
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
0.148%. Set value to 128 for
the copier and the printer.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
Key in the value, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
▼493-0 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
6
0-15
1
Increasing the value by 1
increases the motor speed by
Set to the default value.
(Text/Photo)
▼493-1 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
6
0-15
3.85%. Set value to 6.
Set to the default value.
(Text)
▼493-2 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Copier
6
0-15
Set to the default value.
(Photo)
▼ Key in code 493 press the START key, key in the Sub Code, then press the START key. Key in the value, press the SET key
to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Increasing the value by 1
★495 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment.
Printer
6
0-15
1
increases the motor speed by
3.85%. set value to 6.
★501 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
128
0-255 Increasing the value darkens
1
the copy at the center setting
center setting.
(Photo)
★503 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
128
0-255 of manual exposure.
1
center setting.
(Text/Photo)
★504 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
128
0-255
1
center setting.
(Text)
★505 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
20
0-255 Increasing the value lightens
1
the copy at the lighter setting
lighter setting.
(Text/ Photo)
★506 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
10
0-255 of manual exposure.
1
lighter setting.
(Photo)
★507 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
30
0-255
1
lighter setting.
(Text)
★508 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
13
0-255 Increasing the value darkens
1
the copy at the darker setting
darker setting.
(Text/Photo)
★509 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
20
0-255 of manual exposure.
1
darker setting.
(Photo)
★510 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the
Copier
12
0-255
1
darker setting.
(Text)
★512 Automatic exposure fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255 Increasing the value darkens
1
(Photo)
the copy at the automatic
★514 Automatic exposure fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255 exposure setting.
1
(Text/Photo)
★515 Automatic exposure fine adjustment.
Copier
128
0-255
1
(Text)
★ Key in the value, press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Automatically corrects the
580 Image mode automatic gamma adjustment for Copier None None
5
image quality after reading the
error diffusion. The TEST PRINT must be on
test print pattern.
the exposure glass or ERROR will occur.
Before performing this
adjustment refer to the
complete adjustment.
Increasing the value darkens
593 Image mode gamma data slope correction.
Copier
0
0-9
1
Data adjustment for gamma correction.
(Text/Photo)
the image.
0: Default value is the
594 Image mode gamma data slope correction.
Copier
0
0-9
center value 5
(Same as set value 5).
Data adjustment for gamma correction.
(Photo)
595
Image mode gamma data slope correction.
Data adjustment for gamma correction.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Copier
(Text)
1 - 21
0
0-9
1-9: Slope correction (the
higher the value, the
darker the image
becomes).
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
05 MODE
CODE
620
621
ADJUSMENT
HPF(High Pass Filter) strength setting.
Normally set it to 1 this places the filtering in
the optimum range for the Text/Photo mode.
HPF(High Pass Filter) strength setting.
Normally set it to 2 this places the filtering in
the optimum range for the Photo mode.
MODE
Copier
(Text/Photo)
Copier
(Photo)
DEFAULT RANGE
1
2
Right hand digit (2nd digit
entered):
1: Text/Photo (fixed at the
optimum level) do not
enter values other than 1
for the right hand digit.
0-9 Left
digit
Left hand digit (1st digit
entered):
0: Default value is used
1-9: Increasing the value
setting enhances the
image sharpness
2 Right
digit
0-9 Left
digit
622
HPF(High Pass Filter) strength setting.
Normally set it to 3 this places the filtering in
the optimum range for the Text mode.
Copier
(Text)
3
DESCRIPTION
1 Right
digit
3 Right
digit
0-9 Left
digit
Do not set to values other than
these: 1, 11, 21, 31, 41, 51,
61, 71, 81, 91.
Right hand digit (2nd digit
entered):
2: Photo (fixed at the
optimum level) do not
enter values other than
2 for the right hand digit.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
Left hand digit (1st digit
entered):
0: Default value is used
1-9: Increasing the value
setting enhances the
image sharpness
Do not set to values other than
these: 2, 12, 22, 32, 42, 52,
62, 72, 82, 92.
Right hand digit (2nd digit
entered):
3: Text (fixed at the
optimum level) do not
enter values other than
3 for the right hand digit.
1
Left hand digit (1st digit
entered):
0: Default value is used
1-9: Increasing the value
setting enhances the
image sharpness
Do not set to values other than
these: 3, 13, 23, 33, 43, 53,
63, 73, 83, 93.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 22
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
<Procedure>
Group 1
[0] [5]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[SET]
or
[E/S]
[INT]
(Test copy)
(Set to memory)
[Digital keys]
*[FC] key
(Adjust)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
[CANCEL]
[C]
(To correct)
* [FC] key is used for
"–" input
Group 2
[0] [5]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[SET]
or
[0] [9]
[INT]
(Exit)
(Set to memory)
[UP] or [DOWN]
(Adjust)
[C] or [CANCEL]
[RESET]
(To correct)
Group 3
[0] [5]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[SET]
or
[INT]
Setting cannot
be changed
[0] [9]
(Exit)
Group 4
[0] [5]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
(Automatic Adjustment)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
Group 5
[0] [5]
[PWR]
Cassette
keys
Cassette
selection
Digital
keys
Outoput
pattern
selection
[E/S]
Test
print
Digital
keys
(Code)
[START]
When the output pattern
selection is "1"
[SET]
or
[Digital keys]
[INT]
(Adjust)
(Memorize)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
1: Code 401, 411, 442, 443, 444, 488
2: Code 580
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 23
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Group 6
[CANCEL]
[0] [5]
[PWR]
Digital
keys
(Code)
Digital
keys
Enter
setting
item value
[START]
[SET]
or
[INT]
Set to
memory
[Digital keys]
*[FC] key
(Adjust)
[START]
[E/S]
Test
copy
[0] [9]
(Exit)
[C]
(To correct)
[C]
(To correct)
(When there are multiple setting items for a single item)
*[FC] key is used for "–" input
Group 7
[CANCEL] or [C]
[CANCEL]
[0] [5]
[PWR]
Digital
keys
(Code)
[START]
Digital
keys
Enter
setting
item value
[START]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust)
[C]
(To correct)
[SET]
or
[INT]
Set to
memory
[E/S]
Test
copy
[0] [9]
(Exit)
[RESET]
(To correct)
(When there are multiple setting items for a single item)
Group 8
[0] [5]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
Code: 470,
475
[START]
[START]
[SET]
or
[INT]
(Memorize)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
[C]
(Stop)
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 24
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.2.5
Setting mode (08)
In this mode, the various special modes listed in the Setting Code List can be set or changed.
<Procedure>
Group 1
[CANCEL]
[0] [8]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital keys]
or
[Selectable icons]
Set or change
a value.
[SET]
or
[INT]
(Set to memory)
[0] [9]
(Exit)
[C]
(To correct)
Group 2
[0] [8]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[SET]
or
[INT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed.
[0] [9]
(Exit)
Group 3
[CANCEL]
[0] [8]
[PWR]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital keys]
(1st setting)
[START]
[SET]
or
[0] [9]
[Digital keys]
[INT]
(Exit)
(2nd setting)
(Set to memory)
[C]
(To correct)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 25
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CODE
NAME
MODE
200 Date and time setting
All
201 Country paper size change.
All
202 Externally installed copy
counter/control device
All
203 Line adjustment mode
All
204 Clear control panel settings All
and return to default settings
time out
205 Timer for switching from
All
Readymode to Energy Saver
mode.
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
DEFAULT
INPUT
CONTENTS
MODE
VALUES
13 digits Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/second
Example: 99:08:07:5:11:30:48
0/1
0-2
0: Europe (A4/A3/Follio)
1: USA/Canada (Letter/Ledger)
2: Japan (A4/B4)
0
0-3
Function Clear
0: No external copy
Not applied
0: counter/control device
1: Coin controller
Not applied
2: Copy key card
Applied
3: Key counter
Applied
* Condition for Function Clear
2: when card is pulled out
3: when key copy counter is pulled out
0
0-1
0: factory shipment
1: for line
*Field: Indispensable "0"
*When exchanging K-SRAM:
needed check
3
0-10
0: Disabled
1 to 10: Set number X 15 seconds
206 Timer for switching from
All
Ready mode to Auto-Power
Shut OFF.
US Energy Star Compliance.
11: JPN
11: UC
11: EUR
0: Others
0-15
12: JPN
12: UC
12: EUR
0-20
20: Others
0: Disabled
6: 3 min.
1: 30 sec.
7: 4 min.
2: 60 sec.
8: 5 min.
3: 90 sec.
9: 7 min.
4: 120 sec.
10: 10 min.
5: 150 sec.
11: 15 min.
0: 3 min.
7: 40 min.
1: 5 min..
8: 50 min.
2: 10 min.
9: 60 min.
3: 15 min.
10: 70 min.
4: 20 min.
11: 80 min.
5: 25 min..
12: 90 min.
6: 30 min.
13: 100 min.
1 to 10 Set number X 15 seconds
1
1
1-10
All
0
0-2
223 Copy or Printer priority
mode.
All
0
224 Bypass paper size selection.
225 LCF upper paper size selection.
226 PFP upper paper size
selection.
227 PFP middle paper size
selection.
228 PFP lower paper size
selection.
229 Paper size A3 length/width
All
All
All
0-255
0-255
0-255
All
0-255
0: English
1: French
2: Spanish
After setting the desired language turn the
machine power OFF then ON to change the
current language in the display.
Note: the customer can change the language from
the display using the ADJUST icon key.
0-1
0: Copy Mode can interrupt the Print mode during
a print job.
1: Copy Mode cannot interrupt the Print Mode
during a print job.
Undefined Select a paper size from the display ICON list of
Letter paper sizes. The range changes with the paper
Letter-R size selected.
/A4-R
Legal/A3
All
0-255
Ledger/A4
230 Paper size A4-R length/width
All
231 Paper size A5-R length/width
All
232 Paper size B4 length/width
All
233 Paper size B5-R length/width
All
1 - 26
1
14: 110 min.
15: 120 min.
16: 150 min.
17: 180 min.
18: 210 min.
19: 240 min.
20: Disabled
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1
1
All
420 X 297 182~432 X
140~297
297 X 210 182~432 X
140~297
210 X 148 182~432 X
140~297
364 X 257 182~432 X
140~297
257 X 182 182~432 X
140~297
1
12: 20 min.
13: 30 min.
14: 45 min.
15: 60 min.
209 Timer for Print job start up
time from copy mode
220 Message display language
priority.
All
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
1
1
1
420 X 297mm
3
297 X 210mm
3
210 X 148mm
3
364 X 257mm
3
257 X 182mm
3
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CODE
NAME
MODE
IMAGE
DEFAULT
MODE
234 Paper size Letter-R length/width All
279 X 216
235 Paper size Ledger length/width
All
432 X 279
236 Paper size Legal length/width All
356 X 216
237 Paper size ST-R length/width All
216 X 140
238 Paper size Computer length/
width
239 Paper size Folio length/width
All
356 X 257
All
330 X 210
240 Paper size 13 inch Legal
(Officio) length/width
241 Paper size 8.5 X 8.5 inch
square length/width
242 Paper size Universal length/
width
All
330 X 216
All
216 X 216
All
432 X 279
250 Telephone number for
“CALL FOR SERVICE”
251 PM (Preventative Maintenance)
counter setting value.
All
0
All
400000
All
0
All
—
252 PM (Preventative Maintenance)
counter Current value.
253 Error code history display.
300 Maximum number of copies Copier
allowed.
302 Resettable Copy and Original All
counter display.
0
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
PROCEINPUT
CONTENTS
DURE
VALUES
GROUP
182~432 X 279 X 216mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 432 X 279mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 356 X 216mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 216 X 140mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 356 X 257mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 330 X 210mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 330 X 216mm
3
140~297
182~432 X 216 X 216mm
3
140~297
182~432 X When setting the Universal paper size, remember
3
140~297 that the size entered here will limit the maximum size
paper the customer can load in a drawer when the
Universal paper size is selected from the display.
14 digits A telephone number up to 14 digits can be
1
entered. Use the HELP key to enter hyphens (-).
0-99999999 Set the counter to the amount of copies/prints that
1
the customer wants to have preventative maintenance performed at.
Note: When this counter is set to 0 the counter in
code 252 will not count up, it remains at 0.
0-99999999 Set to 0 after the PM is performed.
1
When code 251 is set to 0, this counter will remain at 0.
See page from 1-1 to 1-4 for complete error code
—
2
history information.
0: 999
1: 99
2: 9
0-2
1
0
3:EUR
0-3
351 Electronic total copy/print
counter.
All
0
0-99999999
352 Ledger/A3 double count.
All
0-1
353
354
358
359
360
370
371
372
374
375
376
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
0:6570
5570
4580
1:8070
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Short size counter
Long size counter
Bypass counter
LCF counter
PFP upper counter
PFP middle counter
PFP lower counter
Duplexer counter
RADF original counter
Copy job counter
Pint job counter
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
1 - 27
0: off
1: Resettable Copy counter
2: Resettable Original counter
3: Resettable Copy and Original counters
Electronic counter counts all copies and prints
including all test mode copies.
Note: The mechanical counter only counts the
customers’ copies and prints not test mode
copies or prints.
0: Single count (count LD or A3 copies and prints
as a 1 page)
1: Double count (count LD or A3 copies and prints
as 2 pages)
Each counter can be set to 0 (zero) or any other
value.
When set to 0 this will accurately record the
number of pages from each area from the last PM
or service call. The counter information can also
be supplied to the customer for tracking the usage
of an area of the machine.
1
1
1
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CODE
NAME
382 LCF tray lockout counter.
Note: For tray lockout
clearing to take effect
set to 0, then turn the
machinepower switch
x machine ON.
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
MODE
VALUES
All
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CH01-01.P65
28
0
0-1
1 1- 27
- 28- 1
CONTENTS
The LCF tray operation is displayed when there is a
problem detected with the tray raising or lowering.
The machine logic disables the LCF tray movement
by placing a 1 in the memory at code 382. To
enable the LCF set code 382 to 0 and determine
the cause of the LCF tray movement problem.
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
00.11.14, 1:57 PM
CODE
390
393
400
401
404
407
410
411
412
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
PROCEIMAGE
NAME
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
CONTENTS
DURE
MODE
VALUES
GROUP
HDD (Hard Disk Drive) error Copier
0
0-32767 When an internal problem with the HDD occurs,
2
counter
an error is recorded in the memory at code 390.
Note: Only the counter value
When too many errors occur, it is then necessary
can be displayed. A
to replace the HDD.
value cannot be entered
or changed.
HDD (Hard Disk Drive) machine Copier/
0
0-32767 When there is a problem communicating to the
2
HDD through the machine interfaces an error is
(system) error counter
Printer
Note: Only the counter value (system)
recorded in memory in code. When this occurs
can be displayed. A
often, the machine interface cables and PWA’s
value cannot be
that provide communications to the HDD must be
entered or changed.
checked and replaced as necessary.
Thermistor status counter
All
All
0
0-9
0: No error
1
To clear enter 0 then press
1: C41 occurred once
SET or INTERRUPT.
2: C41 occurs continuously
Note: Entering a value other
3: C46 error
than 0 will create a
4: C43 error
“CALL FOR SERVICE”
5: C44 error
condition.
6: C43 error
7: C44 error
8: C45 error
9: C44 error
See the trouble shooting section for additional
information.
Drum counter
All
All
0
0-99999999 Set this counter to 0 anytime the drum is replaced.
1
The count is determined by the amount of time the
drum drive motor runs.
Developer counter
All
All
0
0-99999999 Set this counter to 0 anytime the material is
1
replaced. The count is the total of all copies and
prints, including all test mode copies and prints.
Fuser pre-running time. The All
—
8
0-14
0: 120 sec.
5: 195 sec.
10: 270 sec.
1
time allowed for the fuser to
1: 135 sec.
6: 210sec.
11: 285 sec.
rotate during the warm up
2: 150 sec.
7: 225 sec.
12: 300 sec.
mode.
3: 165 sec.
8: 240 sec.
13: 315 sec.
4: 180 sec.
9: 255 sec.
14: 330 sec.
Fuser temperature in the
Printer —
8
0-15
1
0: 173°C
6: 195°C
12: 212°C
Print mode.
1: 180°C
7: 198°C
13: 215°C
2: 183°C
8: 200°C
14: 218°C
3: 186°C
9: 203°C
15: 221°C
4: 189°C
10: 206°C
5: 192°C
11: 209°C
Fuser temperature when the All
All
8
0-15
1
0: 173°C
6: 195°C
12: 212°C
copier is Ready.
1: 180°C
7: 198°C
13: 215°C
2: 183°C
8: 200°C
14: 218°C
3: 186°C
9: 203°C
15: 221°C
4: 189°C
10: 206°C
5: 192°C
11: 209°C
Fuser temperature in the
All
—
3
0-15
1
0: 160°C
6: 183°C
12: 200°C
ENERGY SAVER mode
1: 164°C
7: 186°C
13: 203°C
2: 167°C
8: 189°C
14: 206°C
3: 170°C
9: 192°C
15: 210°C
4: 173°C
10: 195°C
5: 180°C
11: 198°C
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CH01-01.P65
30
1 - 30
28
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
00.11.14, 1:57 PM
CODE
NAME
414 Developer powder life control
switching
All
0
0-4
418 Charge corona wire
cleaning
All
0
0-1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CH01-01.P65
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
MODE
VALUES
31
1 1- 28
- 31- 1
CONTENTS
0:X-10bit
1:X-14bit
2:X-20bit
3:X-30bit
4:X
X: Correction control value before the following
versions
PRA-300M-09
PRA-302M-03
PRA-304M-01
0: Enabled (cleans every 2,000 copies/prints)
1: Disabled (no cleaning)
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
00.11.14, 1:57 PM
NAME
CODE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
MODE
449 Temporary laser running service All
mode when the laser beam
position adjustment fails. Key in
the value, press the SET key to
store or the CLEAR key to reset.
Set to 1 until copier laser unit
can be replaced. Service call
Error Codes CA3, CA4, CA5,
CA6, CAA, CAB, CAC, CAD,
CAE, CAF, or CD0.
See troubleshooting section
for additional information.
460 RADF reversing of transfer belt
All
during original feed to align
originals against the original stop.
461 RADF automatic detection
All
of the original size.
0
464 Correspondence for
Exposure fluetuations
480 Paper source priority
selection
481 Automatic paper source
change.
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
PROCEINPUT
CONTENTS
DURE
VALUES
GROUP
0-1
0: Normal Mode
1
the laser unit operates in this mode unless a
service call is indicated when the beam position
adjustment fails.
1: Continuous Mode
Set to this mode when the laser beam adjustment has failed. The results of this setting
places the laser beam close to target even
though the beam position adjustment has failed.
0
0-1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
0
0-1
1
All
1
0-1
0: Non-standard(Machine will not stop and prompt
operator to select copy size when non-standard
originals are used).
1: Standard(Machine will stop and prompt
operator to select copy size when non-standard
originals are used).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
All
1
0-4
1
All
1
0-2
482 Paper feed retry.
All
0
0-1
483 Polygonal motor pre-running.
All
All
0
0-2
484 Polygonal motor stops at an
auto clear (time out) of
control panel settings.
485 Polygonal motor rotation or
stop mode.
All
All
0
0-1
All
All
0
0-1
486 Polygonal motor stop time
All
All
487 Duplexer initial alignment
All
0: LT/A4
1: LCC
2: Upper drawer
3: Middle drawer 4: Lower drawer
0: OFF
1: Normal
3: Extended
when 1 is set, a paper source becomes empty and
the same size paper is present in another source
the machine will automatically switch to that
source of paper.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
when set to 0 the machine will only attempt to feed
the paper 1 time before display a misfeed condition.
When set to 1 the machine will attempt to feed the
paper 2 times before displaying a misfeed condition.
0: Enabled - RADF (when originals are placed in the
tray) and Exposure Glass (when RADF is lifted).
1: Disabled - Motor starts running when the
START key is pressed. This will delay the start
of copying by 30 seconds.
2: Enabled - RADF only (when originals are
placed in the tray)
Note: This code is effective only when 08-485 is set to 1.
0: Enabled - RADF and exposure glass.
1: Disabled
Note: This code is effective only when 08-485 is set to 1.
0: Rotation
1: Stop
When Code 485 is set to 1 the polygonal motor
runs all the time.
When Code 485 is to 1 the polygonal motor runs
according to the settings of Codes 483 and 486.
0: 1 minute
1: 3 minutes
2: 5 minutes
Effective when 08-484 is set to 0.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Correct the side skew and the paper corner
folding within three copies. If default 1 is selected,
the copying speed is a little lower than normal.
*
0-2
0
0-1
operation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(*) These new codes (487, 488) are available from the 8070.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 29
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CODE
488
*
503
550
600
602
603
604
607
611
613
618
625
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
PROCEIMAGE
NAME
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
CONTENTS
DURE
MODE
VALUES
GROUP
Alignment of the system
All
0
0-1
1
When the alignment between the FROM on the SYS
ROM and the printer ROM
Board and MROM on the LGC Board is wrong, this
code should be used for preventing operation error.
(Note) Production before March, 2000
Default: 0 Old version
Production after April, 2000
Default: 1 New version
Exposure priority power on. Copier All
0
0-1
1
0: Automatic exposure
1: Manual exposure
Image mode priority
Copier All
0
0-2
1
0: Text/Photo
1: Photo
2: Text
Electronic access code.
Copier All
0
0-1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note: When this is enabled it
How to set the Electronic Access Codes is
does not provide
provided in the separate operators manual that is
Electronic Access control
included with the copier at the time of shipping. The
for the Print mode.
information is also provided in this service manual.
Automatic Energy Saver Icon All
All
0:
0-1
1
0:OFF - Icons are NOT in the display.
Automatic Power OFF Icon
Australia
The customer cannot adjust the Energy Saver
Taiwan
and Auto Power Off times. They can only be set
Saudi
by a service technician using 08-205 and 08-206.
Arabia
Asian
1: ON - Icons are in the display.
Region
The customer can adjust the Energy Saver and
Power OFF times.
1:
JPN, UC,
EUR
0
0-3
1
Automatic duplexing mode Copier All
0: Displayed
1: Single sided to Double sided
2: Double sided to Double sided
3: User selection
APS (Auto Paper Size)
Copier All
0
0-2
1
0: APS mode
1: AMS mode
3: None
AMS (Auto Magnification
Selection)
Mode priority at power on.
RADF priority mode at
Copier All
0
0-1
1
0: START key (place originals in the tray then
power on.
press the START key).
1: Auto Start (machine automatically starts
copying when originals are placed 1 at a time in
the RADF).
Book double-sided original Copier All
0
0-1
1
0: Opening book (copying ) from front
selection
1: Opening book (copying)) from back
User paper size selection
Copier All EUR: FOLIO 0-255 Select the Icon of the paper size requested.
1
for the OTHER key.
UC :
Note : The customer can
COMPUTER
change the paper size
using the adjust
selections.
Mixed size originals priority Copier All
0
0-1
1
0: Same size originals
selection.
1: Mixed originals
Note: For USA only Letter-R
and Legal size originals
can be mixed.
For Europe only A4 and
A3 size originals can be
mixed.
Non-printed sheet
Copier
0
0-1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
prevention mode
(*) These new codes (487, 488) are available from the 8070.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 30
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CODE
NAME
626 Bypass feed paper size
recognition
636 Image shift copying width
setting singly (linkage of
front side and back side)
638 Paper size change in
drawer or LCC enable
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
MODE
VALUES
0:
Copier All
1
0-1
1:
All
0
0-1
0:
1:
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
CONTENTS
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
1
Copier All
2
0-2
Copier All
Copier All
0
0: Japan
1: Europe
2: UC,
Others
2
0-1
0-2
0-3
0: OFF
1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: STACK
1
0
0-3
0: NON SORT 1: STAPLE
2: SORT
3: STACK
1
10
0-10
646 2 on 1 and 4 on 1 placement Copier All
of images.
648 Finisher tray reset
All
0
0-1
0
0-1
649 Magazine sort
Copier All
0
0-1
650 2 on 1 and 4 on 1 order of
image placement.
651 Page Numbering
Copier All
0
0-1
Copier All
0
0-3
652 Cascade operation setting
653 Cascade operation setting
657 Annotation default direction
when the power is turned on.
658 Restart setting when
supplying paper during the
bypass feeding job.
680 SCSI ID setting.
681 Tandem copy setting
682 Language
supported by SC-2
Copier
Printer
Copier All
0
0
0
0-1
0-1
0-1
Printer
0
0-1
0: 90%
3: 93%
6: 96%
9: 99%
1: 91%
4: 94%
7: 97%
10: 100%
2: 92%
5: 95%
8: 98%
0: Horizontally centers the 2 on 1 images.
1: Vertically centers 4 on 1 images.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Opening from the front of the book.
1: Opening from the rear of the book.
0: Forward image placement
1: Reverse image placement
Hyphen
White area provided on black
Solids for number
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
OFF
2: OFF
ON
3: ON
ON
hyphen = -1Example of Hyphen and White area
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
DSS
DSS
DSS
—
0
0
0
0-15
0-1
0-1
—
—
2-4
—
—
0-3
639 Date and Time display
640 Date format
641 Automatic sorting mode from Copier All
the RADF.
642 Finisher mode priority
Copier All
selection at power on.
Copier All
645 Reproduction ratio in the
editing mode.
690 HDD formatting (Hard Disk
All
Drive).
Perform the formatting when
the HDD is replaced or the
data has been corrupted.
691 HDD Type display
All
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 31
1
0: All menu operations allowed
1: All menu operations prohibited
2: Sheet cassette selectable
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 1999.10.16
1: 16.10.1999
2: 10.16.1999
1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(English fixing)
2: DSI Type formatted.
The power switch must be turned OFF/ON after
the “WAIT” message is no longer displayed.
3: Tandem type formatted.
4: Only Tamdem area formatted.
0 : Not formatted.
1 : Not used.
2 : DSI Type formatted.
3 : Tandem type formatted.
This item is added from the 8070.
Power must be turned OFF after "WAIT" is cleared.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
CODE
NAME
692 HDD size display
800 Toner adhesion amount
sensor error count/clear
802 Image quality maintenance
control ON/OFF
803 Image quality maintenance
control startup count setting
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
MODE
VALUES
All
—
—
X.X GB
All
0
0-16
CONTENTS
All
0
0-1
0: ON
All
2
0-30
unit : X1,000 sheets
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
111--31
-31-1
36- 1
1: OFF
PROCEDURE
GROUP
2
1
1
1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CODE
NAME
08 MODE
ALLOWABLE
IMAGE
MODE
DEFAULT
INPUT
MODE
VALUES
All
88
0-255
All
97
0-255
805 Test pattern data-1 setting
814 Toner adhesion amount
sensor abnormal value
900 Displays the System FLASH All
ROM version for all 6
programs data.
903 Displays the Main Logic
EPROM version
904 Displays the Laser Logic
EPROM version
905 Displays the Scanner Logic
EPROM version
921 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM program data
version.
922 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM Fixed UI (User
interface) data fixed area
version.
923 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM
Common UI (User interface)
data common area version.
924 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM 1st language UI
(User interface) data version.
925 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM 2nd language UI
(User interface) data version.
926 Displays the System Logic
FLASH ROM 3rd language UI
(User interface) data version.
CONTENTS
PROCEDURE
GROUP
1
1
—
JPN : T300SJXXXX
UC : T300SUXXXX
EU : T300SEXXXX
Others: T300SXXXX
30*M-XXX
2
—
—
300L-XXX
2
—
—
—
300S-XXX
2
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V006.148 U
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V006.000 0
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V005.000 0
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V010.001 3
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V006.000 0
All
—
—
—
VXXX.XXX
Example : V004.001 11
—
—
—
All
—
—
All
—
All
2
Supplementary:
(1) Mode "08-203"
When the K-SRAM as a service part is installed, the setting mode "08-203" must be changed at "0".
When it is set at "1" the copier may not be able to operate.
(2) Mode "08-449"
Due to the error of an optical component such as the galvanomirror or an error caused by the passing
time of the housing, if the beam positioning adjustment is not finished correctly, an temporary countermeasure will be brought about and a mode in which printing can continue to operate be applied. (if
the HSYNK is not taken, printing is impossible).
If there is an error in the galvanomirror, then correction control is not performed and "Service Call" is
displayed so the copier stops. When image deterioration is allowable, copier can be used without any
judgement as to whether adjustment has been finished or not. This can continue until a replacement
unit is available and service technician can use this mode for that purpose.
(3) Mode "08-658"
If paper runs out during printing with the bypass, "automatic start or not" is set after paper has been
added to the bypass.
(4) Mode "08-653, 658, 680"
To use these codes, each function should be mounted in advance.
(5) Mode "08-202"
Function clear when there is no key copy counter. When the key copy counter or the card is pulled
out, all the setting contents will be cleared. Only when the setting value of 08/202 is 2 or 3, this
funcion is effective.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 37
32
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.2.6
How to register/change ID codes (Access control mode)
When ID codes are registered, copies made will be classified according to each ID code. The copier
will not start unless one of the ID codes registered is keyed in.
<Preparation to enter the access control mode>
[0] [8]
[PWR]
[6] [0] [0]
[START]
[SET]
[PWR OFF]
or
[INT]
(Memorizing)
[1]
(Enabled)
ID code Counter value (7 digits)
Procedure to register ID codes:
R
C1
“– – – –”
displayed
Input an ID code
of four figures
ex: 0525
[8] [START]
[PWR]
[HELP]
R
“– – – –”
displayed
Input next ID
“0525
”
displayed
[E/S]
(Memorizing)
C1
[C] (To correct)
Up to 120 ID codes
can be registered
[E/S]
(Memorizing)
[START]
Warm-up
[C]
Procedure to change ID codes:
R
“0525 1960”
displayed
[8] [START]
[PWR]
“– – – –”
displayed
[C]
(To cancel)
C2
[“0525
[COPY]
Correct the
number of copies
1960”]
Input the
number
of copies
C2
[E/S]
(Memorizing)
[E/S]
(Memorizing)
[START]
Warm up
[START]
Warm-up
Key in XXXXXX
Next ID code
displayed
[HELP]
(To skip)
“– – – –”
displayed
(Add ID)
[START]
(Input ID)
[START]
[E/S]
Warm-up
[START]
Warm-up
Warm up
8070/6570/5570/4580
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
11 -- 38
33
Mar.
Mar.2000
2000 ©
© TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA TEC
TEC
1.3 Formatting the Hard Disk
<Procedure>
(1) Turn the power switch ON while pressing [0] and [8] keys simultaneously.
(2) Make sure that the display indicates the system mode, enter the code [690] and press the [START]
key.
(3) Next, input [2] and press the [INT] key.
(4) “Wait” appears on the display.
(5) When “wait” disappears, turn the power switch OFF.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 34
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.4 Auto-Toner Sensor Adjustment
Note: Before performing this adjustment, make sure that the main blade is pressed against the
drum.
<Procedure> (Use code “200” in the “05” mode.)
(1) Install the process unit to the copier (main blade contacts with drum).
(2) Press the keys [0] and [5] at the same time and turn on the power switch.
The following display appears indicating that the adjustment mode has been entered.
100%
[0][5]
[PWR]
A3
A
TEST MODE
(3) Enter [200] using the digital keys and press the [START] key.
The following display will appear.
B
230%
[2] [0] [0]
[START]
200
A3
TEST MODE
128
128
C
A
Note: A : Indicates the control data value of the auto-toner sensor output. Use the Up, Down
icon to change the numerical values.
B : The above display indicates an output voltage of 2.30V.
C : Indicates the latest adjustment value.
The drum, developer unit, etc., are operating at this time.
(4) After approximately two minutes, the B on the message display will automatically start changing.
230%
200
A3
TEST MODE
WAIT
128
128
(5) After a short time, the B on the message display will automatically stop changing and, at the same
time, the message will also change as shown below, indicating that the auto-toner adjustment has
finished completely.
B
250%
200
A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
128
128
A
(6) In this status, check if the numerical value in B is within the range of 245 ~ 255 (auto-toner sensor
output range of 2.45 V ~ 2.55 V).
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 35
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(7) If the numerical value in B is not within the range of 245 ~ 255, use the Up, Down icon to adjust the
numerical values manually to within the range of 245 ~ 255.
Note: The relationship between the icon and the numerical values in A and B is as shown
below.
Key used
A value
B value
Up icon
Increase
Increase
Down icon
Decrease
Decrease
(8) Press the [SET] icon or the [INTERRUPT] key.
The drum, developer unit, etc., will stop operating and the following will be displayed.
[SET]
or
[INT]
100%
A
TEST MODE
A3
100%
[0] [9]
1
A4
READY
(9) Simultaneously press [0] and [9] to exit the adjustment mode.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 36
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.5
Print Image Adjustment
As for the print image adjustment, the adjustment items are listed below.
The adjustment should be performed in the following order.
Adjustment Item
Code
(1) Aligning value
(450) ~ (458)
(2) Printer unit adjustment
a) Primary scanning reproduction ratio
Polygonal motor 600 dpi/Printer
(401)
b) Primary scanning position
Laser write start position
(411) (410)
c) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio
Transfer belt speed adjustment/Printer
(488)
d) Secondary scanning position
Laser write start position
(443) (444) (442)
(3) Scanner unit adjustment
a) Image distortion
–
b) Primary scanning reproduction ratio
Polygonal motor 600 dpi/PPC
(405)
c) Primary scanning position
CCD primary scanning deviation
(306)
d) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio
Scanner secondary scanning reproduction ratio
(340)
e) Secondary scanning position
Scanner secondary scanning deviation
(305)
f) Top margin
(430)
g) Right margin
(432)
h) Bottom margin
(433)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 37
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
[How to Enter Adjustment Values]
Follow the procedure below to adjust each of the adjustment values so that the measurement values
obtained from the test copy satisfy specification values. After starting up in adjustment mode “05”,
only single-sided test copies (in the regular copy mode) can be made with the [ENERGY SAVER]
key.
<Keys used in operation>
<Display message>
Code becomes “xxx” according
to the entered code.
A3
A
100%
TEST MODE
[0] [5]
[PWR]
1
Code No.
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
XXX
100%
[START]
[Digital Keys] : Enter adjustment
value.
used to
[C] correct value
Values “ZZZ” are
[SET]
stored in BC-RAM in
or
place of “YYY”.
[INTERRUPT]
[ENERGY SAVER]: Test copy
A3
TEST MODE
YYY
ZZZ
Entered adjustment value
(If no enter, YYY)
Current entered adjustment value
100%
A
A3
A
A3
TEST MODE
100%
WAIT WARMING UP
If the test print does
not satisfy the specifications, return to 1 ,
and repeat the
adjustment.
A
100%
A3
COPYING
[0] [9] : Adjustment mode
canceled.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 38
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.5.1
Adjustment of paper aligning value
If necessary, you can extend the feed roller life slightly by increasing the paper aligning value as a temporary
measure.
<Procedure> (Use code 450~458 in the test mode “05”.)
Copier cassette (PFP)
(1)
Upper
Middle
(Long)
(Long)
(450)
(452)
[0] [5]
[PWR]
Lower
Manual
Duplexer
LCF
(455)
(457)
(456)
[4] [5] [0]
Cassette
code
[START]
[SET]
or
[1] [5]
[INT]
New value
(Memory set)
input
feed
(458)
(About No.450, 452, 456)
[START]
[0] [8]
[Digital keys]
Current value
(Setting item value)
display
[Cassette]
[E/S]
(Test copy)
[0] [9]
(2) Check the copy for image void and if there is
any, reduce the new value to “31” → “30” →
“29”… until no void occurs. Check for paper
misfeeding.
When the aligning value is increased, noise
caused by the paper scraping against the mylar
may possibly be increased.
(3) The same procedure can be used for the
Duplexer, LCF and manual feed.
Void
50~
100
mm
Note: When frequent paper jams occur near the aligning roller caused by using special thin paper other
than that specified, the aligning value can be changed (reduced) as a measure. However, when
the aligning value is reduced excessively, this may cause the deviation of leading edge registration. Therefore, make sure that no deviation occurs while adjusting the value.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 39
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.5.2
Adjusting the printer section
(a) Polygonal motor 600 dpi (Primary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer unit)
Follow the procedure below to make a test print (Paper source: LCF, Paper size: A4/LT).
(1) [0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [1] → [E/S] → 1
(Digital keys)
(2) Measure the distance “A” the distance between the 1st line and 21st line.
(3) In order to set the distance “A” to 200 mm ± 0.5 mm, adjust using the following steps:
1 → [401] → [START] → Set the value → [INT] key or LCD [SET] icon (Carry out the same in
the following.) → [1] → [E/S] → 1
* An increase in the value makes the reproduction scale (distance “A”) longer (0.05mm/STEP).
Notes: 1. Before making a test print, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
print.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 86 to 168. The default adjustment
value is 128.
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
A
11
10
9
8
7
6
Print movement
direction
5
4
3
2
1
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 40
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(b) Laser write start position (primary scanning)
Follow the procedure below to make a test print (Paper source: LCF, size: A4/LT).
(1) [0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [1] → [E/S] → 1
(Digital keys)
(2) Measure the distance “B” the distance from the edge of the test print paper to the 6th line.
(3) In order to set the distance “B” to 52 mm ± 0.5 mm, adjust using the following steps:
1 → [411] → [START] → Set the value → [SET]/[INT] → [1] → [E/S] → 1
* An increase in the value makes the distance “B” longer (in increments of 0.0423 mm/step).
2 [0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [410] → [START] → Value set in 1 → [SET]/[INT] → [PWR] OFF
Notes: 1. Before making a test print, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
print or turn [PWR] OFF.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 128.
3. Take notice that the first line may be illegible or invisible in some cases.
Print movement direction
B
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 41
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(c) Transfer belt speed adjustment/printer (Secondary scanning reproduction ratio)
Follow the procedure below to make a test print (PFP middle or lower cassette, A3/LD).
(1) [0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [1] → [E/S] → 1
(Digital keys)
(2) Measure the distance “A” the distance between the 5th line and 25th line.
(3) In order to set the distance “A” to 200 mm ± 0.5 mm, use following steps to make the adjustment:
1 → [488] → [START] → Set the value → [SET] or [INT] → [1] → [E/S] → 1
*An increase in the value makes the reproduction scale (distance “A”) longer (in increments
of 0.25mm/step).
Notes: 1. Before making a test print, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
print.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 1 to 255.
The default adjustment value is 128.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Print
movement
direction
A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 42
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(d) Laser write start position (secondary scanning)
<Adjustment Order>
(Code) (Paper size)
LCF
↓
PFP middle/lower
↓
Manual feed
(443)
A4/LT
(444)
A3/LD
(442)
A3/LD
<Procedure>
Follow the procedure below to make a test print.
(1) [0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [1] → [E/S] → 1
(Digital keys)
(2) Measure the distance “B” the distance from the edge of the test print paper to the 6th line.
(3) In order to set the distance “B” to 52 mm ± 0.5 mm, use the following steps:
1 → [Code] → [START] → Set the value → [SET]/[INT] → [1] → [E/S] → 1
*An increase in the value makes the blank space (distance “B”) shorter (in increments of 0.5
mm/STEP).
Print movement direction
B
Notes: 1. Before making a test print, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
print.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 1 to 15. The default adjustment
value is 8.
The adjustment range is 0 to 40 for code 443 only, and the default is 20.
3. LCF (443) values become the reference for all adjustment values. So, be sure to
execute the adjustment in the order described above.
4. The first line in the primary scanning direction may not be printed depending on the
initial setting for the leading edge margin.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 43
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(e) Image distortion adjustment
Direction of the copy paper movement
Step 1
A
B
Image
Direction of the copy paper movement
Step 2
C
D
(1) Make an A3-size copy.
(2) Remove the original glass.
(Adjustment order: step 1 → step 2)
Step 1
In case of A:
Loosen the mirror-2 adjustment
screw (CCW).
In case of B:
Tighten the mirror-2 adjustment
screw (CW).
Step 2
In case of C:
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment
screw (CCW).
In case of D:
Thighten the mirror-1 adjustment
screw (CW).
(3) Coat with screw lock after the image distortion adjustment.
Step-1
Step-2
Coat so that screw periphery rises up slightly
Detailed View of Screw Lock Section
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 44
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Note: Each can contains 1kg agent, so you should divide up the amount into smaller containers
for easy operation.
Part No.
Part Name
4406361350
BOND-1401E
Screw locking agent
(f) Image inclination adjustment
Direction of the copy paper
movement
Direction of the copy paper
movement
Image
Paper
A
B
(1) If inclination of the image occurs even the edges of the original are properly aligned with the
scale, adjust it by moving the stopper holder on the front side.
(2) In case of A:
Move the stopper holder in the direction indicated by
In case of B:
Move the stopper holder in the direction indicated by
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 45
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.5.3
Adjusting the scanner section
(a) Polygonal motor 600 dpi/PPC (Primary scanning reproduction ratio)
(1) Place the scale on the original glass as shown in the illustration below, and make an A4/LT 100%
test copy from LCF.
(2) Measure the copy and compare its size with the actual scale.
(3) Follow the procedure below to adjust value so that the interval between 10 mm and 210 mm on
the scale is 200 ± 0.5 mm.
1 → [405] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET]/[INT] →[E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
* An increase in the value corresponds to an increase in the division of the reproduction scale
(in increments of 0.1mm/step)
Notes: 1. Before making a test print, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message dispaly after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 86 to 168. The default adjustment
value is 128.
0mm
10mm
0mm
50mm
50mm
100mm
100mm
Copy movement direction
150mm
150mm
200mm
210mm
200mm
Copied scale
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 46
Actual scale
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(b) CCD primary scanning deviation
(1) Place the scale on the original glass as shown in the illustration below and make an A4/LT 100%
test copy from LCF.
* Place the scale with its leading edge aligned with the line (on the rear side) indicating A3/
Ledger size on the left-side original scale, and the scale side face pushed up against the leftside original scale.
(2) Adjust the distance “A”, which should be 100 ± 1 mm from the position copied to the edge of the
paper, using the following steps:
1 → [306] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET]/[INT] →[E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
* When the value increases, the image moves toward front side of the paper. (in increments of
0.169 mm/step)
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 90. The default adjustment
value is 45.
Copy movement direction
20
10
A
Copied scale
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 47
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(c) Secondary scanning reproduction ratio
(1) Place the scale on the original glass and make an A3/LD 100% test copy from PFP middle or
lower cassette.
(2) Compare the copy with the actual scale.
(3) Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the interval between 10 mm and 210 mm on the
scale is adjusted at 200 ± 0.5 mm.
1 → [340] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET]/[INT] → [E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
*When the value increases, reproduction ratio decreases: intervals of the scale become narrower. (in increments of 0.1mm/step).
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
print.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 128.
Copied scale
10mm
50mm
100mm
150mm
200mm
210mm
Copy movement direction
0mm
50mm
100mm
150mm
200mm
Actual scale
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 48
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(d) Scanner secondary scanning deviation
(1) Set the top margin adjustment value to 0 (zero).
1 → [430] → [START] → Enter 0 by digital keys → [SET] or [INT] → 1
(2) Place the scale on the original glass and make an A4/LT 400% test copy from LCF.
* Press the leading edge of the scale against the original scale on the leading edge side.
(3) Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the scale on the copied paper starts from the 2 mm
± 0.5 mm position.
1 → [305] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET] or [INT] → [E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
*When the value increases, the image moves to the leading edge (in increments of 0.22 mm/
STEP).
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display unit after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make
a test copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 128.
Copy movement direction
Copied scale
2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
10
20
1 - 49
30
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(e) Top margin
Follow the procedure below to make a test copy.
([0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [C] → [E/S])
(1) Make an A4/LT 100% test copy from LCF with the ADF open.
(2) Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the blank space at the leading edge of the copy is
adjusted exactly at 3 ± 0.5 mm.
1 → [430] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET] or [INT] → [E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
*When the value increases, the image moves to the leading edge (0.0423 mm/STEP).
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 24.
Copy movement direction
3mm
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 50
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(f) Right margin
(1) Make an A4/LT 100% test copy from LCF with the ADF open.
(2) Follow the procedure below so that the blank space at the right edge of the copy is adjusted at
2mm ± 0.5 mm.
Note: The combination of the right edge blank space and the left edge blank space should be
4mm ± 1mm.
1 → [432] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET] or [INT] → [E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
*When the value increases, margin becomes wider (0.0423 mm/STEP).
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 0.
Copy movement direction
2mm
(g) Bottom margin
Follow the procedure below to make a test copy.
([0] [5] + [PWR] ON → [C] → [E/S])
(1) Make an A4/LT 100% test copy from LCF with the ADF open.
(2) Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the blank space at the trailing edge of the copy is
adjusted exactly to 2 mm ± 0.5 mm.
1 → [433] → [START] → Adjust by digital keys → [SET]/[INT] → [E/S] → 1
(Test copy)
*When the value increases, margin becomes wider (0.0423 mm/STEP).
Notes: 1. Before making a test copy, make sure that [100% A] is appeared on the top of the
message display after the [SET] icon or the [INT] key is pressed, and then make a test
copy.
2. The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255. The default adjustment
value is 0.
Copy movement direction
2mm
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 51
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.6 Image Density
If the user wants to change the image density, adjust the image density in adjustment mode “05.”
Image mode
Code
Adjustment item
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
503
501
504
PPC
505
506
507
Light side
508
509
510
Dark side
514
512
515
PPC
Remarks
Manual exposure center value The larger the value, the darker the image
Manual exposure step value
The larger the value, the lighter the light range
The larger the value, the darker the dark range
Automatic exposure
The larger the value, the darker the image
Follow the procedure below to adjust the image density to suit the user’s preferences while comparing
the image obtained in the test copy with the currently entered allowable values.
<Keys used in operation>
<Display messages>
The code “XXX” entered with
digital keys is displayed.
A3
A
100%
TEST MODE
[0] [5]
[PWR]
1
Code No.
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
XXX
100%
[START]
A3
TEST MODE
[Digital Keys] : Enter adjustment
value.
to
[C] use
correct value
YYY
ZZZ
Entered adjustment value
(If no enter, YYY)
Current entered adjustment value
Values “ZZZ” are
[SET]
stored in BC-RAM in
or
place of “YYY”.
[INTERRUPT]
[ENERGY SAVER]: Test copy
100%
A
A3
A
A3
TEST MODE
100%
WAIT WARMING UP
Return to 1 and repeat
adjustment procedure.
A
100%
A3
COPYING
[0] [9] : Exit the adjustment
mode.
Notes: 1. Only one copy of single-sided originals can be made.
2. Duplex copying cannot be carried out.
Make test copies in these modes after exiting the adjustment mode.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 52
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.7
Automatic Adjustment of Gamma correction
(1) At the time of unpacking
When the gradation reproduction deviation is too large, it can be corrected by the automatic adjustment of gamma correction.
This adjustment shall be done upon user’s request when the gradation reproduction is too high or too
low.
(2) When any of the following parts are replaced, check the image and judge whether adjustment is
necessary or not.
• Exposure lamp
• Indicator unit with shading board
• Lens unit
• Laser optical system unit
(3) When any of the following parts is replaced or adjusted, check the copy image and determine the
necessity of this adjustment.
• Optical system position (CRG1, CRG2 position)
• Mirror 1, 2, 3
• Reflector
• Main charger
• Drum
• Development bias
• Developer
• Transfer/bias
Note: This adjustment must be done only after the image adjustment described in 1.5.
After this adjustment, the image density adjustment described in 1.6 must be done.
Code
Adjustment item
580
Automatic adjustment
of gamma correction
Procedure
[Procedure]
(1) Turn on the power switch with [0] [5].
(2) Select A3 or LD paper for the output paper size.
(3) Press the [2] key and then [ENERGY SAVER] key.
(One copy of the 33-gradation pattern is outputted.)
(4) Confirm that there is no blank or line on the gradation pattern outputted in
the above step (3) and the density changes gradually.
If there is any problem in the gradation pattern, repeat the step (3) to output
a gradation pattern again.
(5) Face the darker side of the output gradation pattern to the original scale at
the exit side and put it on the original glass with the printed face down.
(6) Input the code [580] through the control panel and press the [START] key.
(The scanner automatically reads the original and the operation for the
automatic adjustment of gamma correction will be done. About 10 seconds)
(7) When the operation completes normally, the machine returns to the standby status. If the operation ends abnormally, “TEST MODE ERROR” will be
displayed. (See the indication on the next page.)
For the abnormal ending, press the [C] key to release the error indication.
When released, the display on the control panel returns to the stand-by
status. Check the position, direction and skew of the gradation pattern on
the original glass, and repeat the steps from (5).
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 53
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
<Keys used in operation>
<Display messages>
A
100%
[0] [5]
[PWR]
TEST MODE
[A3]: Select the casette
A
100%
[2]
WAIT WARMING UP
[ENERGY SAVER]: Prints out the 33
1
gradation pattern
Place the original
A
100%
COPYING
[Digital Keys]: Input the code
580
100%
[START]: Starts the adjustment
TEST MODE
WAIT
Normal: (Warming up)
: Ends the adjustment
[C] : Clear the adjustment
error Return to 1 to
repeat adjustment
A
100%
TEST MODE
Abnormal: (Clear using C key)
580
100%
[0] [9] : Exit the adjustment mode
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
TEST MODE
1 - 54
ERROR
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.8 Sharpness (HPF) Adjustment
If the user wants to change the image sharpness to softer or harder, adjust the HPF intensity in
adjustment mode “05”.
Image mode
Adjustment item
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
620
621
622
Sharpness setting
Remarks
1st digit : 1 (fixed): Text/Photo
(HPF intensity)
Code
2 (fixed): Photo
3 (fixed): Text
2nd digit :
0: Use default value
1~9: Change the intensity
(If the value is increased, the sharpness is increased)
<Keys used in operation>
<Display messages>
A
A3
XXX
A3
100%
The code “XXX”
entered with digital
keys is displayed.
TEST MODE
[0] [5]
[PWR]
1
Code No.
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
100%
[START]
[Digital Keys] : Enter adjustment
value.
to
[C] use
correct value
Values “ZZZ” are
[SET]
stored in BC-RAM in
or
place of “YYY”.
[INTERRUPT]
[ENERGY SAVER]: Test copy
TEST MODE
YYY
ZZZ
Entered adjustment
value
(If no enter, YYY)
Current entered adjustment value
100%
A
A3
A
A3
TEST MODE
100%
COPYING
Notes: 1. Only one copy of single-sided originals can be made.
2. Duplex copying cannot be carried out.
Make test copies in these modes after exiting the adjustment mode.
3. Test copies can be made immediately after the power is turned ON.
Return to 1 and repeat
adjustment procedure
[0] [9] : Exit the adjustment
mode.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 55
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.9 Data Correction
If the user wants to change the gamma curve, adjust the gamma slope correction in adjustment
mode “05.”
Image mode
Adjustment item
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
593
594
595
PPC
Code
Gamma data slope
correction
Remarks
0: Default used (same as set
value 5)
1 to 9: Slope correction (The larger
the setting, the darker the
image becomes.)
Input procedure of the adjustment value is same as the 1.6 image density adjustment.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 56
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.10 High-Voltage Adjustment
The charger and developer bias outputs must be checked and adjusted when the high-voltage transformer is
replaced.
Charger output
Item
Main charger
grid voltage
Adjustment Adjustment Method
Value
TEXT/PHOTO 720 ± 5V Change the output by
changing the bit
states.
Text
Input the BIT value of
↑ *4
210-0
↑ *4
Photo
↑
↑ *4
↑ *5
-----------Image Mode
Code
Mode
210-0 *2
PPC
210-1 *3
PPC
210-2 *3
212 *1
PPC
PRINT
Code
Mode
Image Mode
205-0 *2
PPC
TEXT/PHOTO
205-1 *3
PPC
Text
205-2 *3
203 *1
PPC
PRINT
Developer bias output
Item
Developer bias
value Hi1
Developer bias
value Hi2
Developer bias
value Hi3
207
*1
ALL
Photo
-----------------------
216
*1
ALL
------------
Adjustment Adjustment Method
Value
387 ± 5V Change the output by
changing the bit
states.
Input the BIT value of
↑ *4
205-0
↑ *4
↑
↑ *4
↑ *5
↑ *4
↑
452 ± 5V
Change the output by
changing the bit
states.
Note 1: *1, *2 and *3 indicate sequence of operation patterns 1, 2 and 3, respectively.
Note 2: BIT of *4 can be changed, however voltage is not output.
Note 3: The BIT value of *5 must be entered by the digital keys.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 57
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Preparing for measurement
1 Main charger grid
1. Remove the developer unit.
2. Connect the digital tester as follows. However, that a digital tester with input resistance of 10 MΩ
must be used.
• Setting range 1000 VDC
• (+) terminal
Connect to the rail for the main charger.
• (–) terminal
Fix to frame earth.
3. Start up the power supply using the door switch jig and then, make adjustment.
Main charger rail
Frame (ground)
terminal
terminal
2 Developer bias
1. Set the developer unit.
2. Connect the digital tester as follows. However, a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 MΩ
must be used.
• Setting range 1000 VDC
• (+) terminal
Connect to upper magnet roller shaft on developer unit front side.
• (–) terminal
Fix to frame earth.
3. Start up the power supply using the door switch jig and make adjustment.
Developer upper magnet roller shaft
Frame (ground)
terminal
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 58
terminal
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(2) Operation procedure
• Be sure to set the drum counter (08-401) to “0” when you have replaced the drum with a new one.
• Regarding the main charger grid and developer bias output values from the high-voltage transformer, connect a digital tester following (1) and then, make adjustment using the following procedure.
Sequence of Operation, Pattern 1
<Display Messages>
A
100%
[0] [5]
[PWR]
A4
TEST MODE
1
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
[START]
Current
adjustment value
YYY
Code No.
XXX
A4
TEST MODE
ZZZ
[Up] [Down] icon: Adjust the “YYY” value so that the adjustment value of the digital tester satisfies
the value indicated in the table.
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]: The “YYY” value after adjustment is recorded to NVM.
If you switch to
another adjustment
mode, go to 1 .
100%
A
A4
TEST MODE
[0] [9] : Exit adjustment mode.
Note: The “adjustment value” indicates the output voltage of the DA converters (IC47, 148)
on the logic PC board, and conforms to the following relationship:
output voltage = ( adjustment value + 1) ÷ 256 × 5V
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 59
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Sequence of Operation, Pattern 2
<Display messages>
A
A4
XXX
A4
XXX
A4
100%
[0] [5]
[PWR]
TEST MODE
1
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
Code No.
0%
[START]
TEST MODE
[Digital Keys]: Enter code
(value after hyphen).
[START]
Value after
hyphen (0, 1, 2)
YYY
Current
adjustment value
ZZZ
TEST MODE
Z'Z'Z'
[Up] [Down] icon: Adjust the “Z'Z'Z'” value so that the adjustment value of the digital tester satisfies
the value indicated in the table.
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]: The “Z'Z'Z'” value after adjustment is recorded to NVM.
If you switch to
another adjustment
mode, go to 1 .
100%
A
A4
TEST MODE
[0] [9] : Exit adjustment mode.
Note: The “adjustment value” indicates the output voltage of the DA converters (IC47, 148)
on the logic PC board, and conforms to the following relationship:
output voltage = ( adjustment value + 1) ÷ 256 × 5V
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 60
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Sequence of Operation, Pattern 3
<Display messages>
A
A4
XXX
A4
XXX
A4
100%
[0] [5]
[PWR]
TEST MODE
1
[Digital Keys]: Enter code.
Code No.
0%
[START]
TEST MODE
[Digital Keys]: Enter code
(value after hyphen).
[START]
Value after
hyphen (0, 1, 2)
YYY
Current
adjustment value
ZZZ
TEST MODE
Z'Z'Z'
[Digital Keys]: Enter adjustment value “Z'Z'Z'”.
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]: The “Z'Z'Z'” value after adjustment is recorded to NVM.
If you switch to
another adjustment
mode, go to 1 .
100%
A
A4
TEST MODE
[0] [9] : Exit adjustment mode.
Note: The “adjustment value” indicates the output voltage of the DA converters (IC47, 148)
on the logic PC board, and conforms to the following relationship:
output voltage = ( adjustment value + 1) ÷ 256 × 5V
Precautions During Developer Bias Adjustment
If the entire image is foggy in spite of appropriate main charger grid voltage or toner density, adjust
the developer bias on the control panel (lower the BIT). If the developer bias is lowered too much,
however, the following problems may occur:
• The image contrast drops (tend to produce faint images).
• The carrier in the developer adheres to the photosensitive drum, and scratches tend to occur
more easily on the cleaning section.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 61
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.11 Installation of Carriage Drive Wire
When the carriage drive wire is replaced, attach the new wire as shown:
CRG-2 pulley
27
CRG-2
Scanner motor
Carriage drive wire
CRG-1
Motor pulley
3GT-Z24
Idle pulley
27
Idle pulley
27
Wire windup pulley/motor deceleration pulley
39.75/3GT-Z28
1.11.1 Wire tension adjustment
(1) For this model, it is unnecessary to adjust the carriage drive wire tension since its tension spring
maintains constant tension.
Note: Make sure that the tension of the wire on both the front and rear sides is equivalent and
hanged properly.
1.11.2
(1)
Adjustment of carriage 1 and carriage 2
Exit side frame
Loosen the screws fixing carriage-1 (2
screws; front, rear, 1 screw each) and -2 (2
screws in front) to the wire.
(2)
While pressing carriage-2 against the feed
Carriage-1
side frame (both A & B), tighten the screws
fixing carriage-2 (front side).
(3)
Also while pressing carriages 1 and 2 against
the feed side frame (C & D), tighten the
screws fixing carriage-1.
C
A
Carriage-2
B
D
Feed-side frame
Front side
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 62
Rear side
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.11.3
Carriage drive wire assembling
• Winding the wire to the wire winding pulley
(1) Fit the φ3 spherical terminal (on the central part
of the wire) into the hole of the wire winding
pulley.
Spherical terminal
Set the wire so that the part of the wire with a
hook on its crimped side be on the upperside.
(2) Wind the wire to the each front and rear side
pulleys.
Winding turns are:
• 2 and 3/4 turns on the opposite to the boss
side (outside) of the pulley.
• 4 and 3/4 turn on the boss side (inside).
After winding, secure the wire with the wire
holder jig.
<Front side>
<Rear side>
ns
ur
3 t
2 4
Hook
Wire winding pulley
Pulley (Rear)
ns
ur
3 t
2 4
Boss
ns
ur
3 t
4 4
Pulley
(Front)
Spherical terminal
Spherical terminal
4 3
4 t
Hook
ur
ns
Boss
(Rear)
Wire winding pulley
Hooks
Wires
Spherical terminals
(Front)
Wire winding pulley
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 63
Wire holder
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Notes: 1. When winding the wires on pulleys, take
the following precautions:
• Never twist the wire when winding.
• Wind the wire tightly to make it come
into close contact with the pulley.
• Wind the wire taking care not to leave
any gap between the wraps.
2. When the wire holder jig is installed, do
not slide or loosen the wound wire.
In full contact
Example) Front side
<Installation phase>
Front side
Rear side
Spherical terminal
Wire holder jig
Wire holder jig
Pulley
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 64
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.12 Lens Unit
It is impossible to adjust the lens unit. Replace the entire unit with a new one.
Notes: 1. Do not touch the fixing screw (arrow in the figure: 8 points) indicated with arrows below when
replacing the lens unit. The screw color is red.
• Pay attention to the two screws (see above figure) on the rear side (see in the figure A.)
(Front side)
A
(Rear side)
2. Take sufficient care when handling the unit not to hold the adjustment area.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CH01-02-1.P65
65
1 - 65
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
01.6.19, 8:40 AM
1.12.1 Adjusting the lens magnification
Notes: 1. This adjustment must be carried out only when the scanner lens unit has been removed
or replaced.
2. Before this adjustment, check that the primary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer is
corrected.
(1) Place the scale on the original glass, and make an A4 100% copy.
(2) Compare the copied scale with the actual scale to measure the error in the reproduction ratio.
Copy movement direction
Actual scale
Copied scale
(3) Follow the procedure below to make adjustment so that the distance between each mark of both
scales becomes equal.
Notes: 3. After adjusting the lens magnification, be sure to adjust the deviation in the CCD primary
scanning direction.
<Procedure>
(1) Remove the original glass, lens cover (11 screws), damp heater unit and lens shield bracket (2
screws).
(2) Screw in the 2 lens magnification adjustment pins into the oblong holes on the lens base.
Notes: 4. When screwing in the pin, take care not to nip the harness under the lens base.
Lens magnification adjustment pins
Exit side
Lens base
Feed side
(3) Loosen the 2 screws fixing lens unit.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 66
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(4) Slide the lens unit either backwards or forwards using the scales on the scanner base as a guide. The
following table shows the estimated lens unit movement to adjust the reproduction ratio error between the copy and the actual scale compared to be measured.
Reproduction
Estimated Amount
Ratio Error
of Adjustment
0.1 %
0.5 mm
0.2 %
1.1 mm
0.3 %
1.6 mm
0.4 %
2.1 mm
0.5 %
2.6 mm
Movement direction
0.6 %
3.2 mm
Large reproduction Small reproduction
ratio
ratio
0.7 %
3.7 mm
0.8 %
4.2 mm
0.9 %
4.8 mm
1.0 %
5.3 mm
Scale
Exit side
Feed side
Lens unit
Notes: 5. If the finer adjustment than that in the above is required, refer to “Polygonal motor 600 dpi/
PPC Adjutment”.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Re-attach the lens cover and original glass, make a copy and check the reproduction ratio.
Tighten the 2 lens unit screws to fix in place.
Remove the pins for adjusting the lens magnification.
Re-attach the lens cover and original glass.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 67
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.13 Adjusting Horizontal Deviation Caused by Paper Feed
<Procedure>
• When the center of the image moves to the rear
side: Move the guide to the rear side (direction
of arrow A ).
Direction of
paper movement
• When the center of the image moves to the front
side: Move the guide to the front side (direction
of arrow B ).
Direction of
paper movement
Center
Center
[Front]
[Front]
• Manual feed
• LCF feed
A
B
B
Front side guide
A
Rear side also shift in the same direction.
• Pedestal cassette feed
Cassette guide
B
A
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 68
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.14 Changing the Paper Size
1.14.1 LCF paper sizes
(1) Draw out the LCF unit, and remove the manual
feed unit.
(2) Attach the stay guides to match the size of the
paper used.
B5 LT A4
A4 LT B5
A4 LT B5
B5 LT A4
Note: In case of B5 size
The bracket must be fastened onto the LCF
door cover by 2 screws only in the case of
B5 size.
Bracket
(3) Change the cassette size on the control panel.
For details, refer to the setting mode (08) item.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 69
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.14.2
PFP paper sizes
Before the copier is shipped from the factory, A4-R, A3 and B4 (LT-R, LG and LD) are set to the
upper, middle and lower cassettes, respectively. The following procedure describes how to change
the paper sizes of the cassettes in accordance with a request from the user.
Note: Since the PFP upper is not usable for B5 size paper, do not change its size to B5.
Mechanical Modifications
(1) Draw out the cassette that you want to modify, remove the stopper screws (one each on feed and exit
side), and draw out the cassette.
Feed side
Stopper screw
Exit side
Stopper screw
(2) Remove the cassette side walls (2 screws for
each) on the front and rear sides, and fix the
cassette side walls with the screws matched to
the paper size marked on the cassette guide.
(3) Remove the back plate (1 screw), and fix the
back plate with the screws matched to the paper size marked on the base frame.
Cassette side walls
Screws
Screws
Cassette
Screw
Back plate
Cassette guide
(4) Slide the cassette size label on the right front
of the cassette to upward to remove it.
(5) The cassette size label should be folded to display the designated paper size, and then inserted into the cassette.
(6) Insert the cassette into the feeder, and tighten
the 2 stopper screws.
Changes on the Control Panel
Change the cassette size on the control panel. For details, refer to the setting mode (08) item.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 70
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.15 Adjustment of Duplexer
1.15.1 Adjustment of the stack guide unit
[A] Stack guide stop position adjustment
When making copies in the double-sided mode
on the Duplexer, make sure that the horizontal
deviation on both sides of the paper is less than
±2 mm.
If the deviation is outside of this range, follow
the procedure below to adjust.
(1) Stack paper on the stack guide, and make sure
that the gap between the paper and the stack
stopper on the stack guide is 1±0.5mm. To adjust the gap, loosen the fixing screw on the rear
Holizontal width adjustment method
Detection switch
Narrower
Eccentric cam
+ 2mm
Wider
–
(Adjustment width)
side of the stack guide unit, and then, make
adjustment with the adjusting screw.
[B] Duplexer horizontal deviation adjustment
When the image on the double-sided copy deviates horizontally even after adjustment [A]
(1) Loosen the 2 screws for fixing the stack guide
unit. If the paper drifts toward either the front or
the rear side, move the stack guide unit toward
the opposite side by the amount of the paper
drift, using the scales on the unit as a guide.
(2) After adjustment, tighten the 4 fixing screws on
the stack guide unit.
Note: The 1mm interval scales are useful in mak-
Holizontal deviation adjustment method
Stack frame
+ 2mm
–
(Adjustment width)
Lower feed guide
Scale (F side)
ing this adjustment.
(3) After adjustment, make a copy to check that
horizontal deviation is corrected.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 71
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
[C] Checking the operation of empty detection lever
(1) Move the empty detection lever up/down by
hand. When the lever goes down, check that
the leading edge of the lever is always in the
concave of the empty sensor (as shown in the
illustration.).
(2) This operation should be repeated several
times, to ensure that no error condition occur.
(as shown in the illustration.)
Empty detection lever
Stack frame
Empty sensor
(Supplementary)
When determining the adjustment amount for the
horizontal deviation, make copies using the following mode. Decide the amount observing the 8th,
9th and 10th copy images.
[Mode]
Original: A4 size (or LT size) manually placed original (2 sheets)
Paper sheet: A4 size (or LT size)
(LCF paper feeding is preferable.)
Expanded sectionl figure of sensor and lever from the paper
feed direction (OK)
Single-sided original → Duplexed copies, Group
mode copy Quantity: 10 sheets
(Supplementary)
Several sheets from the head stacked in the
Duplexer will be fed right after stacked for the purpose of increasing efficiency of duplex copying. At
this time, stacking operation comes as first priority
so the width guide of the Duplexer becomes slightly
wider than that of other feeding operation (2mm
exterior from both edges of the paper). Depending
on the mode, the timing to switch the width guide
position changes.
Thus, make copies using always the above mode
and procedure described in (Supplementary) of [C]
to make precise horizontal deviation adjustment.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Expanded sectionl figure of sensor and lever from the paper
feed direction (No Good)
1 - 72
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.15.2 Holding gate position adjustment 1
When the holding gate is removed for replacement, the holding gate position must be adjusted when it is
installed.
(1) When installing the drive gears of the holding gate, match each of the drive gear positions withe the
positions of the dowels on the gear. Turn only the gear on the holding gate in the direction of the arrow
by 2.5 teeth, and install the drive gears. (The front side gear is installed first, and the dowels on the
rear side should be aligned).
Drive gear
Drive gear
Holding gate
Adjusting gear
Dowel
Front side driving gears
Rear side driving gears (addition)
Note1: This adjustment had been performed based on the condition: the rear side drive gears are adjusted automatically when the front side drive gears are adjusted. But the rear side drive gears
sometimes do not follow the front. Thus, the procedure has been changed: the front side drive
gears are adjusted first, and then, that of the rear side will be adjusted to match the dowel. This
procedure has been performed starting with the following models:.
8070: From the first production
5570: NJ913571
6570: From LJ913007
4580: From ZJ910707
Note2: Adjust the front/rear side gears with the central gear. The spring clutch may lock when the gear is
operated. So, push the projection of the clutch unit to turn the gear.
(2) Align the projection on the clutch unit of the holding gate, and fasten with an E-ring as shown figure.
Note3: When it is fixed by an E-ring, be sure to check that the holding gate position is as in the illustration
(correct position of holding gate).
E-ring
A
Clutch gate
Projection of clutch unit
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 73
Holding gate
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(3) Make sure that drive gear is installed correctly checking the following points. If it not installed correctly,
perform the above (1)~(2)procedures.
Note
When a new arbor is installed, perform the groove for spring installation of 1.15.3 Holding gate position
adjustment 2 SLEEVE-P/U-80 in "B"(center).
0) Open the bypass feed unit (Check below while it is opened).
1) Open the clutch unit. (solenoid not pulled out)
While the solenoid of the clutch unit is attracted (armature is pushed), turn the gear a limited small
amount, release the armature.
2) Turn the gear in the direction "A" in the figure till the holding gate is stopped.
3) When the holding gate is stopped, check that B face and C or D face are roughly parallel.
B face: flat face of holding gate
C face: end face of frame
D face: end face of frame
Bypass feed unit
B
D
C
A
Gear
Clutch unit
1.15.3 Holding gate position adjustment 2
There are two kinds of sleeves, SLEEVE-P/U and SLEEVE-P/U-80.
In the case of SLEEVE-P/U-80, the pushing gate angle can be adjusted as described below.
Adjustment groove "A"
Assembly groove "B"
Adjustment groove "C"
4406344910
SLEEVE-P/U
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
4408843921
SLEEVE-P/U-80
1 - 74
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(1) There are 3 grooves for installing the spring to SLEEVE-P/U-80.
If the installment position of the spring is changed, then the pushing gate angle can be adjusted.
Adjustment groove "A"
Assembly groove "B"
Adjustment groove "C"
Adjustment
groove "A"
20°
°
20
Approx.parallel
Assembly groove "B"
Adjustment
groove "C"
(2) Check that the pushing gate angle is parallel to the frame.
Note1: At the time of shipping, assembly has been performed using assembly groove “B”.
Note2: If after performing adjustment of the pushing gate position as in 1.15.2 and the angle does not
become parallel, then the angle should be adjusted ±20˚ using adjustment groove “A” or “C”.
1.15.4 Operation Check of Holding Gate
(1) Pull out the ADU, after removing the gray cover which is covering the feed unit (two screws). Replace
it inside the copier.
(2) Start Duplex copying with the left front cover of the copier opened by using the door switch jig.
(3) Check the turning of the shaft S shown on the left side (below figure) of the ADU.
¡ When shaft S turns two times e Normal
¡ When shaft S does not turn at all or only once e Poor turning
Note1:
To connect with the shaft S and the holding gate, it is possible to check the movement of the holding gate
by looking at the rotation of shaft S.
Feed Unit
Shaft S
Note2:
Holding gate
If it is not possible to make a visual evaluation,
one can judge by the noise of the rotation of
the holding gate.
8070/6570/5570/4580
Mar.
2000 © TOSHIBA
ADJUSTMENT
TEC
1 1- 74
- 74- 1
8070/6570/5570/4580
Mar. 2000 © ADJUSTMENT
TOSHIBA TEC
1.16 Adjusting the Thickness of the Magnetic Brush (leveler)
Bring both edges of the developer leveler up against
the projections on the front and rear side frames.
Positional adjustment is not needed as the thickness of the transport roller magnetic brush is already fixed.
Projection of sideframe
Leveler
1.17 Adjusting the Gap between the Drum and Sleeve
Since the guide roller of the developer unit is pressed against the drum, no adjustment is necessary.
1.18 Adjustment of Developer Polarity Position
As the developer polarity position is determined by the magnet roller and polarity fixing bush, no adjustment is necessary.
1.19 Adjusting the Heat Roller Pressure
Normally, the heat roller pressure need not be adjusted. However, it must be carried out when wrinkles
frequently appear on copies made on plain paper.
<Procedure>
(1) Make an A3 size copy (entirely black) with the ADF open.
(2) Turn the power switch OFF after copying is finished.
(3) Quickly open the front cover, and draw out the belt transport unit.
(4) Insert the copy made in (1) into the fuser inlet guide with the entirely black side facing down then
turning the jam release lever CCW until the center of the copy paper is nipped by the heat roller.
(5) After approx. 20 seconds, take the copy paper out by quickly turning the jam release lever CCW
again.
(6) Measure the width of the section of the copy paper nipped by the heat rollers at the both front and
rear sides.
Rear
R
Copy paper(solid black)
F
Nipped part
Front
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 75
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(7) If |F-R| >
= 0.5mm, loosen the fixing screw of the
pressure spring on the side that having the
broader nipped section. One half turn corresponds to narrowing the nipped section by
about 0.5mm.
(8) If |F-R|<0.5mm, end the adjustment, and make
five copies of A3 size white paper with the ADF
closed to clean the heat rollers.
1.20 Setting the Heat Roller Temperature and Heat Roller Pressure
The fuser has been set (heat roller surface temperature: 200˚C, pressurizing pressure: 100 kg)
taking the fusing performance, wrinkling, curling and toner transfer deficiency on the leading/trailing
edge of duplexing copy into consideration when our company recommended paper is used. This is
to allow the characteristics of the paper to be demonstrated in a well-balanced manner. However,
various types of paper are used in the field, and factors such as the paper thickness and surface
flatness greatly affect the fusing performance, in particular. If the fusing performance deteriorates
while using a specific type of paper, adopt the following procedures to cope with each case:
<Procedures>
1 Increase the preset temperature of the heat roller surface by keying in the temperature with the
control panel.
2 Increase the pressurizing pressure of the heat rollers by inserting spacers in the pressure springs.
3 Carry out both 1 and 2 .
Perform this procedure in order 1 to 3 while confirming the effect and adverse influence of the adjustment.
<Procedure 1 : Increase the preset temperature of the heat roller surface>
Change the heat roller preset temperature (when the copier is ready) by code 411 in setting mode (08).
The default is “8” (200˚C), and can be changed within the range “8” to “11” ((200˚C to 209˚C).
Notes: 1. When a large value is set (to increase the temperature), the level of wrinkling, curling and toner
transfer deficiency on the leading/trailing edge of duplexing copy tend to worsen.
2. Do not set the temperature to value larger than “12” (210˚C or more). The fuser thermostat
actuates to turn the power OFF, and the thermostat must be replaced.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 76
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
<Procedure 2 : Increase the pressurizing pressure of the heat rollers.>
(Carry this out when procedure 1 does not produce the desired result. If the preset value has been
changed in procedure (1), it must be returned to its original value before this procedure is carried out.)
Insert spacers (4401 903180/WAS-15-105-FUS) under the pressurizing spring as shown in the figure to increase the pressurizing force. (Up to three spacers may be inserted on one side.) Inserting
one spacer on each side increases the pressurizing force by 5kg. This means that the current force
of 100kg can be increased to 115kg (when a total of six spacers, three on each side, are inserted).
Notes: 1. The spacers must be inserted under the spring as shown in the figure below.
2. The same number of spacers must be inserted at the front and rear sides. (Skew occurs
when a different number of spacers are inserted on the front and rear sides.)
3. Do not insert four or more spacers on one side. (The spring may deform.)
4. When the pressure is increased, the level of wrinkling, curling and toner transfer deficiency
on the leading/trailing edge of duplexing copy tend to worsen.
Pressurizing spring
Spacers
<Procedure 3 : Carry out both 1 and 2 >
(Carry this out when procedure 2 does not produce the desired result.)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 77
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.21 Adjusting the Fuser Inlet Guide
Check the gap between the inlet guide and the lower heat roller when the following troubles occur:
• Stain on the back side of the paper
• Fuser inlet jam
• Wrinkled paper
(1) Move the screw fixing position to the oblong
hole to make adjustment using the stamped
mark as a guide.
Inlet guide
Stamped mark
1.7
(2) Adjust the gap between the inlet guide and the
Inlet guide
0.4
Ga
p
lower heat roller. (0.4 <
= gap < 1.7)
Lower heat roller
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 78
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.22 Adjustment of ADF
1.22.1 Adjustment of skew with ADF
(1) Check that the right hinge is installed as shown below figure.
Note: Fix the screw on the center of scale.
RIGHT HINGE
(2) Place the test original face up in the tray, press PRINT to make a copy.
Check that the copy isn’t skew.
(3) If there is a skew, loosen the two screws on right/left hinges and adjust the position of RIGHT HINGE.
Repeat the procedure until the skew is rectified.
Note: After the adjustment, tighten the two screws of LEFT and RIGHT HINGE without fail.
Image Inclination
LEFT HINGE
RIGHT HINGE
Clockwise rotation
(CW)
CCW
Counterclockwise
rotation
(CCW)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 79
CW
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.22.2
Adjustment of ADF horizontal deviation caused for ADF
(1) Make a test original as shown: First draw a
center line on an A4 sized copy paper.
Center line
A4 size
(2) Place the test original on the original feed tray
with the center line side facing up and align the
side guides to the sides of the original.
Test original
(3) Press the START key to make a copy. Fold the
copy in half and check that the center line is in
the center of the copy: If it is not, adjust the
original feed tray until the center line is copied
in the center. After adjustment, tighten the two
screws securely to fasten the original feed tray.
Original feed tray
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 80
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.22.3 Adjustment of ADF leading-edge position
If the original fed from the ADF has not stopped in the preset position, make adjustment using the following procedure:
1 While pressing the “0” and “5” keys on the copier’s control panel simultaneously, turn on the power
switch.
2 After confirming that “TEST MODE” is shown on the display, key in “3”,“5” and “0” and press the
START key.
3 To make the original stop at the feed side of the ADF, key in a number smaller than the one shown
now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key. If you want to stop the original at the exit side of
the ADF, key in a number larger than the one shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT
key.
1 step: Approx. 1mm adjustable
Allowable input values: 0 ~ 15
4 With an original set on the original feed tray, if you press the ENERGY SAVER key, an original is fed
in and copied.
5 After adjustment is completed, press the “0” and “9” keys simultaneously to go into the normal copy
mode.
1.22.4 Adjustment of leading-edge position for ADF (at the Time of Reversing)
If the original fed from the ADF has not stopped in the preset position after reversing, make adjustment
using the following procedure:
1 While pressing the “0” and “5” keys on the copier’s control panel simultaneously, turn on the power
switch.
2 After confirming that “TEST MODE” is shown on the display, key in “3”,“5” and “1” and press the
START key.
3 To make the original stop at the feed side of the ADF, key in a number smaller than the one shown
now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key. If you want to stop the original at the exit side of
the ADF, key in a number larger than the one shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT
key.
1 step: Approx. 2mm adjustable
Allowable input values: 0 ~ 15
4 With an original set on the original feed tray, if you press the ENERGY SAVER key, an original is fed
in and copied.
5 After adjustment is completed, press the “0” and “9” keys simultaneously to go into the normal copy
mode.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 81
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
)*+,-.
1.22.5 Adjustment of magnetic catches installation
Place the belt unit on the glass face, and make magnetic catches adsorb to the metal plate in the state
where the spacers L, R and glass are in contact, and then secure the belt unit with fixing screws.
Space between each spacer and the glass face shall be 0.5mm or less.
Magnetic catches
Fixing screws
Fixing screws
Glass face
Metal plate
Metal plate
Spacer L
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
Spacer R
1 - 82
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.22.6 Adjustment of the separation area
When the separation plate is attached using the thickness gage, there should be a 0.6±0.2mm clearance
between the separation mylar and the rubber of the feed roller (the difference by the side of the front and
rear is 0.2mm or less).
Adjust the gap between the separation mylar and the feed roller in the thrust direction by sliding the
bracket to right and left so that the gap becomes 0.3mm or more (see the view from B).
Bracket
Screw
Screw
Screw
A
Separation plate
Feed roller
0.3 or more
B
0.6 ±0.2
Separation mylar
View from "A"
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
0.3 or more
View from "B"(detailed drawing)
1 - 83
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.22.7 EEPROM Initialization, Sensor Adjustment and Test Mode
(1) EEPROM initialization and sensor adjustment
Whenever the logic PC board, aligning sensor, timing sensor or exit sensor is replaced, it is necessary to initialize the EEPROM and adjust the sensor by adjustment mode (05).
If the initialization and/or adjustment is not performed, errors (paper jam etc.) may occur.
(2) Test mode
The independent test modes below can be performed by test mode (output check: 03). Refer to the
Service Manual for the PPC.
• Pick-up roller rotation
• Aligning roller rotation
• Transport belt rotation CW
• Transport belt rotation CCW
• Reversal roller rotation
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 84
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.23 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)
The following two parts are needed for installing the key copy counter.
• MU-10 counter socket
• MU-8 key copy counter
Key copy counter
MU-8
Counter socket
MU-10
<Installation Procedure>
(1) Remove the rear cover (1 screw).
(2) Remove the right top cover and cut the window
for the counter.
(3) Draw out the harness connector from the frame
hole, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut end of the harness properly
to avoid it causing short-circuit with the frame.)
And then remove the short connector.
Harness connector
Screw hole for attaching the socket
Short connector
(4) Connect the counter socket connector to the
harness connector of the machine.
(5) Install the counter socket onto the frame. (2 M3
Socket connector
Connector of key copy counter
screws)
(6) Reinstall the right top cover and rear cover.
Screw(M3)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 85
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
(7) Insert the key copy counter with its arrow facing up and pointing toward the copier.
(8) In the “08” setting mode, enter “3” under code
202.
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 86
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.24 Fine Adjustment of Binding Position/Folding Position
By moving the paper positioning plate up or down, fine adjustment of the binding position/folding position
can be made.
Adjustment Code "05" - Code "468-0~2
* Increasing the adjustment value shifts the binding position/folding position towards the right-hand
page by 0.25mm for each/step.
* Decreasing the adjustment value shifts the binding position/folding position towards the left-hand
page by 0.25mm for each/step.
Adjustment value=0
Adjustment value (+)
Adjustment value (–)
Right-hand
page
Left-hand
page
Notes: 1. When fine adjustment of the binding positio/folding position is performed, the following result should be obtained.
2. The outermost of the book (“A” in the figure below) will be:
the book opening from the left: A will be the last page
the book opening from the right: A will be the first page.
A
A
Adjustment value (+)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Adjustment value (–)
1 - 87
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1.25 Adjustment of RADF Height
The adjustment screws attached to the hinge are to adjust the height of the gap between the glass and
the RADF.
(1) Adjustment screws:
If they are turned counterclockwise, the gap becomes narrower.
The adjustment screws are on the right hinge and the left hinge (2 places).
(2) The gap (arrow A) of the adjustment value is 0 ~0.5mm.
Adjustment screw
DF spacer
DF spacer
Original glass
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 88
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.26 Flapper Solenoid Adjustment
(1) Push the flapper solenoid plunger by hand.
(This makes the solenoid able to be pulled in electrically.)
(2) Install BRKT-SOL-RVS so that the flapper rubber can contact with the flapper lever.
(3) Fix BRKT-SOL-RVS with the screw.
(4) With the solenoid pulled, confirm that there is no gap between the flapper rubber and the flapper
lever.
Flapper rubber
Flapper lever
Screw
Plunger
BRKT-SOL-RVS
1.27 Developer powder life control switching (“08-414”)
(1) Usually select “0”.
Even if “0” is selected, it can be found that toner scattering does not stop in special cases such as
repeat printing of small quantities.
In this instance, select 1, 2, 3 in steps.
(2) Select “2” in the following case. When “0” is selected and toner scattering soils the image after
200,000 to 300,000 copies. “1” is an intermediate stage between “0” and “2”, whereas “3” is above
this.
However in low humidity conditions, “2” and “3” can reduce the image density.
(3) When the new ROM is applied; If toner scattering occurs on the market, as a countermeasure manually return the machines which have had 10 bits reduced to their previous status by the following
method.
New ROM PRA-300M-10~
PRA-302M-04~
PRA-304M-02~
(Adjustment Method)
1) Write the value of 08/404.
2) With the UP key in 05/200, raise the current control bit value by 10 bits.
3) Press the setting key.
4) n 04/404 once again, input the written value (1) using the digital keys.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
CH01-02-2.P65
89
1 - 89
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
00.11.20, 11:39 AM
1.27 Additional Parts when Installing the Paper Exit Tray
To ensure perfomance of exiting-paper under all conditions, the parts used in the copier exit area for the
installation of the exit tray and the finisher differ as follows.
[Installation Method]
(1) Remove the lower exit cover (4 screws)
Exit cover
(2) Remove the rear E-ring, and slide the bearing
to the inside of the frame.
E-ring
(3) Slide the exit roller to the rear and the bearing
to the inside of the frame, and remove the exit
roller while pulling out the exit roller rear side.
Exit roller
(4) Install RING-EXIT-24-UR (2 pieces) to the exit roller groove from the front side.
Note
*The exit roller has the groove for installation.
Rear
Front
Exit roller
RING-EXIT-24-UR
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
1 - 90
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Remove the following parts of the rear side
(refer to the figure on the right).
*1 pusher
GEAR (WHITE)
: 1 E-ring
*2 gears
PUSHER
: 2 screws
GEAR (BLACK)
: 1 E-ring
(6) Remove the SHAFT-TRAY.
(screws: 1 at the rear, 1 at the front)
COLLER
(7) Install the COLLER-SFT-TRAY (2 pieces).
SHAFT-TRAY
COLLER
Notes
*When attaching the SHAFT-TRAY, Pay attention to whether it is facing the front or the rear (see below).
Rear
A
Front
B
A>B
*When attaching the gear, be careful to the direction of the gears. (See below; both should face in the
same direction)
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1 - 91
8070/6570/5570/4580 ADJUSTMENT
2.
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
2.1 Inspection every 440,000 Copies (8070), every 400,000 Copies (6570), every
340,000 Copies (5570), every 280,000 Coies (4580)
(1) Preparation
1 Ask the copier operator about the present machine conditions and note them down.
2 Before starting the maintenance work, make and retain a few sample copies for comparison
reference purposes.
3 Turn the power switch OFF and disconnect the power cord plug.
(2) The periodic inspection should be conducted in accordance with the Periodic Inspection Check list
shown below.
Perform the inspection by referring to the figures, as well as to the explanation in the Service Manual
when necessary.
(3) After the inspection has been completed, plug in the machine and turn the power switch ON, and
check the general operation of the machine by making a few copies and comparing them to those
made previously.
2.2 Inspection and Overhaul every 880,000 Copies (8070),
every 800,000 Copies (6570/5570/4580)
(1) Replace all the consumables.
(2) Check that if there is any damage to the parts in the driving section (gear, pulley, timing belt, etc.). In
principle, replace those parts at this time.
(3) Check to see if there is any damage or peeling of adhered parts (tape, Mylar sheet, etc.). Replace
any affected parts if necessary.
(4) Check that if all the switches and sensors operate properly. Replace them if they are not operating
properly.
(5) Clean the inside of the machine thoroughly.
Note: Before inspecting and overhauling the feed section of the 3-cassette feed unit, remove the
PFP upper aligning unit and PFP feed unit from the copier.
2.3 Periodic Inspection Check List
Symbols used in the Periodic Inspection Check List
Cleaning
Lubrication
A : Cleaning with alcohol L : Launa 40
: Cleaning with soft
Application
pad, cloth, or cleaner SI : Silicon Oil
(vacuum cleaner)
Replacement
Operation check
100: Every 100,000 copies
: Check for
280: Every 280,000 copies
abnormalities name
340: Every 340,000 copies
after cleaning Machine
W : White grease 400: Every 400,000 copies
(Molycoat)
AV : Alvania No.2
Date
User’s
440: Every 440,000 copies
or
No.
replacement. Inspector
Same from here on
: Replace in event of defor-
Remarks
mation or other damage
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-1
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC INSPECTION CHECK LIST For 6570/5570
Category
Item to check
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
400,000 copies 400,000 copies
x 1,000
(340,000 copies) (340,000 copies)
1. Overall unit
2. Main blade
400
(340)
100
3. Toner bag
Cleaner
4. Recovery blade
5. Separation claw (for Drum)
Drum
Scanner
Charger
Around
laser unit
Developer
400
(340)
400 (340)
6. Fur brush
7. Toner transport auger drive
8. Cleaner lower guide
8-1. Toner adhesion amount sensor
8-2. Drum shaft bearing
9. Discharge LED
10. Drum shaft
11. Drum
12. Ozone filter (for exit fan)
13. Glass
14. Glass holder
15. Mirror 1
16. Mirror 2
17. Mirror 3
18. Reflector
19. Lens
20. Exposure lamp
21. Copy area indicator
21-1. Shading glass
22. Automatic paper-size detector
23. Slide sheet (front, rear)
24. Air filter
25. Case
26. Charger wire
27.
28.
29.
30.
W
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
*1
<P54-I24>
Conducted
by copier
operator
<P57-I29>
*2
*3
<P56-I21>
<P55-I23>
*13
*22
*22
400
(340)
400 (340)
*4
<P47-I1>
<P61-I11>
or A
or A
<P44-I7>
or A
400
(340)
Terminal contact
Charger wire cleaner
Grid
Slit glass on the copier
400 (340)
400 (340)
31. Overall unit
31-1. Duct cover
32. Developer material
33. Front shield
400 (340)
*5
*6
*6
<P46-I16>
<P46-I9>
<P46-I24>
*20
*23
*7
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate the inspection cycle of the 5570.
2. The “Remarks” column indicates page and item numbers in the Parts List for consumable parts.
The consumable replacement cycle on the feeding system is the number of sheets fed on each
feeding source.
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
For 6570/5570
Category
Developer
Paper
feed
section
Item to check
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
42.
43.
44.
46.
Oil seal (9 portions)
Guide roller
Duct filter
Toner filter
Toner hopper drive worm gear
Aligning roller
Paper guide
Brush
Paper feed system drive gears
(tooth faces)
47. Aligning unit support bush
and pressurizing leaf spring
69. Upper heat roller (Teflon roller)
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
400,000 copies 400,000 copies
x 1,000
(340,000 copies) (340,000 copies)
400 (340)
W
W
400
(340)
400
(340)
400
(340)
74. Cleaning roller 2
75. Cleaning roller 3
75-1. Cleaning roller 4
86. Transfer belt drive roller
87. Transfer belt follower roller
88. Transfer belt separation
auxiliary roller
89-1. Transfer belt cleaning blade
400
(340)
400
(340)
400
(340)
*17
<P29-I42>
*18
<P29-I38>
*19
<P29-I8>
400
(340)
*21
<P29-I27>
A
SI
SI
A
A
A
89-2. Flicker periphery
89-3. GCB bush and plastic bush
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
400
(340)
400
(340)
400
(340)
400
(340)
*8
<P31-I17>
*8
<P31-I19>
*9
<P32-I20>
*9
*10
<P33-I7>
*10
<P33-I5>
*10
<P33-I16>
*10
<P32-I37>
A
A
A
84. Transfer belt power supply
roller
85. Transfer belt cleaning brush
Transfer
belt
*11
W
72. Lower separation claw
73. Cleaning roller 1
Upper and lower thermistors
Heat roller entrance guide
Heat roller exit guide
Paper dust recovery bracket
Exit roller
Heat roller/cleaning roller drive
gear
82. Cleaning roller bush
83. Transfer belt
*5
<P48-I12>
A
71. Upper separation claw
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
*16
AV
or A
70. Lower heat roller (rubber roller)
Fuser unit
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
L
2-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
For 6570/5570
Category
Transfer
belt
ADU
Item to check
89-4. Transfer belt separation
auxiliary roller bearing and GCB
90. ADU pick-up roller
91. ADU feed roller
92. ADU separation belt
93. Transport rollers 1 to 4
94. ADU aligning roller
95. GCB bush and plastic bush
96. Drive gear tooth faces
97. Exit/ADU switching gate and Main
unit eixt section/ADU relay roller
48. PFP pick-up roller
49. PFP feed roller
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
400,000 copies 400,000 copies
x 1,000
(340,000 copies) (340,000 copies)
A
L
A
A
A
A
A
L
W
A
100
100
50. PFP separation roller
PFP
ADF
51. PFP aligning roller
52. Paper guide
53. Tray drive worm wheel and
gear (tooth faces)
54. PFP drive gear (tooth faces)
55. GCB bush and plastic bush
98. ADF pick-up roller
99. ADF feed roller
100. ADF separation pad
101. Transport belt
102. ADF aligning roller
103. ADF reversal roller
104. ADF empty sensor
105. ADF aligning sensor
106. ADF size sensor
107. Exit sensor
108. ADF timing sensor
109. Transport belt cleaning brush
56. LCF pick-up roller
57. LCF feed roller
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
AV
<P11-I43>
*24
<P11-I21>
*14
<P12-I21>
100
A
*12
W
W
L
400 (340)
400 (340)
400 (340)
400 (340)
<P81-I18>
<P81-I14>
<P81-I53>
<P84-I22>
400 (340)
400
(340)
400
(340)
100
100
100
<P17-I19>
*24
<P17-I9>
*14, *24
<P17-I40>
<P18-I19>
<P18-I15>
*14
<P16-I32>
A
A
58. LCF separation roller
AV
59. Manual pick-up roller
60. Manual feed roller
61. Manual separation roller
AV
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
W
L
W
W
W
W
LCF
Paper guide
Paper feed system drive gears
GCB bush and plastic bush
Gear
Worm and worm wheel
Worm shaft
Wire pulley shaft
*15
*15
*15
*15
Note: When lubricating, do not allow oil to come in contact the rollers, belts and belt pulleys.
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
PERIODIC INSPECTION CHECK LIST For 8070/4580
Category
Item to check
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
440,000 copies 440,000 copies
x 1,000
(280,000 copies) (280,000 copies)
1. Overall unit
2. Main blade
440
(280)
100
3. Toner bag
Cleaner
Drum
Scanner
Charger
Around
laser unit
Developer
4. Recovery blade
5. Separation claw (for Drum)
440
(280)
440 (280)
6. Fur brush
7. Toner transport auger drive
8. Cleaner lower guide
8-1. Toner adhesion amount sensor
8-2. Drum shaft bearing
9. Discharge LED
10. Drum shaft
11. Drum
12. Ozone filter (for exit fan)
13. Glass
14. Glass holder
15. Mirror 1
16. Mirror 2
17. Mirror 3
18. Reflector
19. Lens
20. Exposure lamp
21. Copy area indicator
21-1. Shading glass
22. Automatic paper-size detector
23. Slide sheet (front, rear)
24. Air filter
25. Case
26. Charger wire
27.
28.
29.
30.
W
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
*1
<P54-I24>
Conducted
by copier
operator
<P57-I29>
*2
*3
<P56-I21>
<P55-I23>
*13
*22
*22
440
(280)
440 (280)
*4
<P47-I1>
<P61-I11>
or A
or A
<P44-I7>
or A
440
(280)
Terminal contact
Charger wire cleaner
Grid
Slit glass on the copier
440 (280)
440 (280)
31. Overall unit
31-1. Duct cover
32. Developer material
33. Front shield
440 (280)
*5
*6
*6
<P46-I16>
<P46-I9>
<P46-I24>
*20
*23
*7
Notes: 1. Figures in parentheses indicate the inspection cycle of the 4580.
2. The “Remarks” column indicates page and item numbers in the Parts List for consumable parts.
The consumable replacement cycle on the feeding system is the number of sheets fed on each
feeding line.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-5
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
For 8070/4580
Category
Developer
Paper
feed
section
Item to check
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
42.
43.
44.
46.
Oil seal (9 portions)
Guide roller
Duct filter
Toner filter
Toner hopper drive worm gear
Aligning roller
Paper guide
Brush
Paper feed system drive gears
(tooth faces)
47. Aligning unit support bush
and pressurizing leaf spring
69. Upper heat roller (Teflon roller)
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
440,000 copies 440,000 copies
x 1,000
(280,000 copies) (280,000 copies)
440 (280)
W
W
440
(280)
440
(280)
440
(280)
74. Cleaning roller 2
75. Cleaning roller 3
75-1. Cleaning roller 4
86. Transfer belt drive roller
87. Transfer belt follower roller
88. Transfer belt separation
auxiliary roller
89-1. Transfer belt cleaning blade
440
(280)
440
(280)
440
(280)
*17
<P29-I42>
*18
<P29-I38>
*19
<P29-I8>
440
(280)
*21
<P29-I27>
A
SI
SI
A
A
A
89-2. Flicker periphery
89-3. GCB bush and plastic bush
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
440
(280)
440
(280)
440
(280)
440
(280)
*8
<P31-I17>
*8
<P31-I19>
*9
<P32-I20>
*9
*10
<P33-I7>
*10
<P33-I5>
*10
<P33-I16>
*10
<P32-I37>
A
A
A
84. Transfer belt power supply
roller
85. Transfer belt cleaning brush
Transfer
belt
*11
W
72. Lower separation claw
73. Cleaning roller 1
Upper and lower thermistors
Heat roller entrance guide
Heat roller exit guide
Paper dust recovery bracket
Exit roller
Heat roller/cleaning roller drive
gear
82. Cleaning roller bush
83. Transfer belt
*5
<P48-I12>
A
71. Upper separation claw
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
*16
AV
or A
70. Lower heat roller (rubber roller)
Fuser unit
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
L
2-6
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
For 8070/4580
Category
Transfer
belt
ADU
Item to check
89-4. Transfer belt separation
auxiliary roller bearing and GCB
90. ADU pick-up roller
91. ADU feed roller
92. ADU separation belt
93. Transport rollers 1 to 4
94. ADU aligning roller
95. GCB bush and plastic bush
96. Drive gear tooth faces
97. Exit/ADU switching gate and Main
unit eixt section/ADU relay roller
48. PFP pick-up roller
49. PFP feed roller
Clean at
Lubricate at
Replace
440,000 copies 440,000 copies
x 1,000
(280,000 copies) (280,000 copies)
A
L
A
A
A
A
A
L
W
A
100
100
50. PFP separation roller
PFP
ADF
51. PFP aligning roller
52. Paper guide
53. Tray drive worm wheel and
gear (tooth faces)
54. PFP drive gear (tooth faces)
55. GCB bush and plastic bush
98. ADF pick-up roller
99. ADF feed roller
100. ADF separation pad
101. Transport belt
102. ADF aligning roller
103. ADF reversal roller
104. ADF empty sensor
105. ADF aligning sensor
106. ADF size sensor
107. Exit sensor
108. ADF timing sensor
109. Transport belt cleaning brush
56. LCF pick-up roller
57. LCF feed roller
Check
Remarks
while on <Page-Item>
AV
100
<P11-I43>
*24
<P11-I21>
*14
<P12-I21>
A
*12
W
W
L
440 (280)
440 (280)
440 (280)
440 (280)
<P81-I18>
<P81-I14>
<P81-I53>
<P84-I22>
440 (280)
440
(280)
440
(280)
100
100
100
<P17-I19>
*24
<P17-I9>
*14, *24
<P17-I40>
<P18-I19>
<P18-I15>
*14
<P16-I32>
A
A
58. LCF separation roller
AV
59. Manual pick-up roller
60. Manual feed roller
61. Manual separation roller
AV
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
W
L
W
W
W
W
LCF
Paper guide
Paper feed system drive gears
GCB bush and plastic bush
Gear
Worm and worm wheel
Worm shaft
Wire pulley shaft
*15
*15
*15
*15
Note: When lubricating, do not allow oil to come in contact the rollers, belts and belt pulleys.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-7
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
21
20 18 15
13
19
6
9
10 8-2
2
16
1 11
17
23
14
22
21-1
22
22
13
60
27 29
80
71
73
79
74
31
28
26 25
82
69
30
59
32 34
33 35
78
61
4
85 86 83
76
57
8-1
89-1
5
97
42
72
92
44 43
75-1
70
77
75
84 87
89-4 88
89-2
8
56
62
58
62
51
93
52
93
94
91
90
93
93
62
49
51
49
50
50
51
48
48
48
49
50
Front sectional view (ec. drive system)
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2-8
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
38
12
81
36
63
37
46
96
63
3
54
54
54
54
54
54
Rear drive system
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2-9
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
107
ADF front sectional view
103
101
109
98
106
105
100
102
108
99
104
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2 - 10
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Explanation of the items in the “Remarks” column of the Periodic Inspection Check List
*1 Main blade and fur brush
If defective cleaning occurs due to the adhesion of paper dust, etc., the edge of the blade might have
been damaged. Replace the blade regardless of the number of the copies made so far. Also replace
the fur brush at this time
*2 Recovery blade
If the edge of the blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of copies made so
far.
*3 Drum separation claw
If the tip of the separation claw has been damaged (e.g. worn coating) or separation claw marks are
apparent in the copied image, replace the claw regardless of the number of copies made so far.
Clean the tip of the claw by lightly wiping with a dry cloth. After cleaning, be sure to remove bits of lint
from the claw. In addition, be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the separation claw after
cleaning the claw and when replacing the claw or drum.
*4 Drum
Refer to section “3.2 Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum”.
*5 Air filter, Duct filter
Replace the air filter if it is heavily dirty.
*6 Charger wire and case
Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung lightly to clean those.
*7 Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to adjust the corresponding auto-toner sensor.
*8 Upper and lower heat rollers
Refer to section “3.5 Checking and Cleaning Upper and Lower Heater Rollers”.
*9 Heat roller separation claw
If the tip of the separation claw is chipped, replace it regardless of the number of copies made so far.
If toner adhering to the separation claw is forcibly scraped off, the claw may be damaged. Therefore,
replace the claw if its tip is heavily coated with toner.
*10 Heat roller cleaning roller 1, 2, 3, 4
Refer to section “3.4 Checking and Replacing Heat roller cleaning roller 1, 2, 3, 4”.
*11 Aligning unit support bush and pressurizing leaf spring
White Molycoat
on inner surface of bush
* Apply one drop.
White Molycoat on surface
of pressurizing leaf spring
* Apply one drop.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Aligning unit
2 - 11
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
*12 Apply white grease to the tray drive worm wheel and to the faces of the gear teeth.
53 :W
*13 Used toner transport auger drive section
Apply white grease to the used toner transport auger drive section (shown by arrow).
*14 PFP/LCF/manual separation rollers
Apply Alvania No.2 to the separation roller boss.
Apply Alvania No.2
(one large drop each)
to the 3 grooves of the metal boss.
Separation roller
Arbor, cover, spring
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2 - 12
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
*15 LCF drive unit
69 W
66 W
69 W
68 W
67 W
*16 Oil seal
Mixer shaft .......................... 4 pcs.
Paddle shaft ........................ 2 pcs.
Developer roller (U) ............. 1 pc.
Developer roller (L) ............. 1 pc.
Transport roller .................... 1 pc.
Replace the 9 oil seals on the developer unit every 800,000 copies (6570), 880,000 copies (8070),
680,000 copies (5570), 560,000 copies (4580).
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2) using the following steps:
Oil Seal
(1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
(2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside
of the oil seal.
• Amount: About two small drops
(3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 13
Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
Out side
Inside
Grease
Oil seal
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
Mixer Shaft
Apply a coating of grease (Alvania No.2) to the
entire periphery of the mixer shaft before attaching the bearing.
Mixer shaft
Bearing
*17 Transfer belt
Refer to section “3.6 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt”.
*18 Transfer belt power supply roller
Refer to section “3.7 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt Power Supply Roller”.
*19 Transport belt cleaning brush
Refer to section “3.8 Checking and Replacing the Transport Belt Cleaning Brush”.
*20 Slit glass on the main unit
Remove the slit glass, and clean the front and
back sides.
1 Press in
2 Bring down
Slit grass
Surface to be cleaned (front/back side)
*21 Transfer belt cleaning blade
Refer to section “3.3 Checking and Cleaning the Drum Blade, the Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade”.
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2 - 14
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
*22 Cleaner Unit
Be sure to connect the ground lead to the aluminum die cast on the rear of the cleaner (exit side)
before you clean the cleaner unit. Then clean the unit with, for example, a vacuum cleaner.
(If the cleaner unit is not grounded, static electricity may damage the toner adhesion amount sensor.)
Also wipe the window of the toner adhesion amount sensor with a cotton wool bud or tissue.
(If the window of the toner adhesion amount sensor is dirty, the sensor may no longer function
properly.)
Toner adhesion amount sensor
Connection to earth
Ground wire
Next, wipe the inner diameter of the drum shaft
bearing with a cloth.
(If toner adheres to the inner diameter, you may
no longer be able to draw out the drum shaft.)
Drum shaft bearing
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 15
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
*23 Duct cover
Clean the duct cover by means of the following procedure immediately after extracting the old
developer material.
2
(1) Turn over the developer unit.
(2) The claws on the right and left shown in
1
figure A on the right are removed from the
developer unit. (see arrow 1), and the
duct is withdrawn towards the front (see
arrow 2).
A
(3) Remove the dirt and toner from the duct.
(4) The new duct cover is attached using the
procedure opposite to that in (3). At this
time, be careful to how you turn the
harness of B. The projecting area of the
duct should be slid into the developer
unit groove (arrow 3).
B
3
B
*24 Paper feeding related rollers
Refer to this illustration when servicing the paper feeding related rollers.
Be especially careful of the roller orientation (elephant skin texture).
(Notes)
P: Pickup roller
F: Feed roller
S: Separation roller
: Paper path direction
: Continuous line arrow, Forward rotation
: Chain line arrow, Backward rotation
F
P
P a p e r
S
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2 2- 15
- 16- 1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.4 Periodical Maintenance Kit (For 400k)
[Layout Inside Copier]
5
3
2
21
11 14 17
1
13
16
18
15
10
19
9
6
8
4
22 23
7
12
20
[Kit Components]
No.
Item
Item name
Q’ty
1
Developer material
D-6570
1
2
Main blade
BL-6570D
1
3
Cleaning roller 2
SR-6570H
1
4
Cleaning roller 3
SR-6570L
1
5
Cleaning roller 1
B-6570H
1
*6
Cleaning roller 4
B-6570L, B-8070L
1
7
Fur brush (cleaner)
B-6570
1
8
Separation roller (LCF)
K-ROL-SPT-CW-S
1
9
Pick-up roller (LCF)
K-ROL-PICK-2
1
10
Feed roller (LCF)
K-ROL-FEED-2
1
11
Charger wire cleaner (for main charger)
K-BASE-PAD-CH-M
1
12
Drum separation claw
K-CLAW-DRUM
2
13
Ozone filter
K-FILTER-OZON
1
14
Charger wire (for main charger)
WIRE-CH-060*398
1
15
Upper heat roller separation claw
SCRAPER-212
6
16
Toner filter (developer unit)
FILTER-DEV-F300
1
17
Grid (for main charger)
GRID-154
1
18
Heat roller (upper)
HR-6570-U
1
19
Heat roller (lower)
HR-6570-L
1
Transfer belt power supply roller
CR-6570TR, CR-8070TR
1
Transfer belt
BT-6570TR
1
22
Fur brush (Transfer belt)
B-6570TR
1
23
Transfer belt cleaning blade
BL-6570TR
1
*20
21
Note: *6.
The B-8070L is available for 8070.
Both the B-6570 and B-8070L are available for 6570/5570/4580.
*20. The CR-8070TR is available for 8070.
Both the CR-6570 and CR-8070TR are available for 6570/5570/4580.
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
2 - 16
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.5 Jig List
Parts List
Name
Page
Item
Door switch jig
201
2
Lens adjustment jig
201
3
Wire holder jig
201
1
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 17
8070/6570/5570/4580 MAINTENANCE
3.
PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES
3.1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies
A. Toner and Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
B. OPC Drum
Like the toner and developer, OPC drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient
temperature is between 10 to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be
subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
C. Drum Blade
This item should be stored “horizontally” on a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10
to 35°C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
D. Heat Roller
Avoid places where the heat rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
E. Cleaning Roller
Avoid places where felt roller may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. It
should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat place.
F. Copy Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
3.2 Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum
(1) Use of Gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the characteristics of the photosensitive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare
hands.
(2) Handling Precautions
As the OPC drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and
removing it so as not to damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum and separation claws
on the cleaner before installing the drum into the machine. When the drum has been replaced with a
new one, the drum counter (setting mode “08”, code “401”) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
Notes: 1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum, cleaning
blade, and separation claws. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum
and cleaning blade may be damaged.
2. When paper fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any
fibers found adhering to the blade.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-1
8070/6570/5570/4580 SUPPLIES
(3) Installation of Copier and Storage of Drum
Avoid installing the copier where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals
and/or their fumes.
Do not leave drums in a brightly lit place for a long time. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not
produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the machine. However, this
effect may decrease as time elapses.
(4) Cleaning the Drum
At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated cleaning
cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface
inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting
cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.
(5) Scratches on OPC Drum Surface
If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, black spots or
streaks will be produced on the copy images. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so
replacement with a new drum will be necessary.
(6) Collecting Used OPC Drums
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used OPC drums, we recommend following the relevant
local regulations or rules.
3.3 Checking and Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Blade, Transfer belt cleaning blade
(1) Handling Precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
1 Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a dry cloth or
soft pad.
2 Do not stain the edge with any oil (or fingerprints, etc.).
3 Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
4 Do not leave any lint or dirt on the blade edge.
5 Do not place the blade near a heat source.
(2) Cleaning Procedure
1 Clean the blade edge lightly with a cloth moistened with water.
8070/6570/5570/4580 SUPPLIES
3-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
3.4 Checking and Cleaning the Heat Roller Cleaning Roller 1, 2, 3, 4
(1) Handling Precautions
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to adhere to the cleaning roller.
(2) Defective Heat-Roller Cleaning and Corrective treatment
Defective heat-roller cleaning should be judged by the toner deposited on the upper heat roller.
If toner is heavily adhered on the heat roller sarface, defective cleaning any occur. If this happens,
replace the cleaning roller.
The cleaning roller will be gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the heat roller over
a long period of time. Replace it preferably after about 440,000 copies (8070), 400,000 copies (6570),
340,000 copies (5570), 280,000 copies (4580) copies have been made.
3.5 Checking and Cleaning the Upper and Lower Heat Rollers
(1) Handling Precautions
A Upper Heat Roller
1 Do not leave oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the upper heat roller.
2 Be extremely careful not to allow a hard object to hit or rub against the roller because the thin
Teflon layer coated on the aluminum substrate is easily damaged and, if damaged, will result
in defective drum cleaning.
B Lower Heat Roller
1 Do not leave oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the lower heat roller.
(2) Checking
1 Check for stain and damage on the heat roller and clean or replace if necessary.
2 Clean the separation claws and check for chipped claws.
3 Check the cleaning condition of the cleaning roller.
4 Check the thermistor for proper contact with the heat roller.
5 Check the fused condition of the toner image.
6 Check the gap between the inlet guide and lower heat roller.
7 Check the heat rollers for proper rotation.
(3) Cleaning Procedure for Heat Rollers
When the heat roller becomes dirty, it will cause paper jamming. If this happens, wipe the roller
surface clean with cotton moistened in alcohol. For a better cleaning effect, clean the roller while it is
still warm.
Note: Be careful not to rub the Teflon-coated surface with your fingernails or hard objects because
it is easily damaged. Do not use silicon oil on the upper heat roller.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 SUPPLIES
3.6 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt
(1) Handling Precautions
1 Do not touch the belt surface with your bare hands.
2 Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the belt surface.
3 Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or other organic solvents.
4 Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.
3.7 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Power Supply Roller
(1) Handling Precautions
1 Do not touch the charger roller surface with your bare hands.
2 Be carefull not to scratch or hit on to the charger roller surface.
3.8 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush
(1) Handling Precautions
1 Do not touch the brush surface with your bare hands.
8070/6570/5570/4580 SUPPLIES
3-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Scanner System Related Service Call
[C27] [C28] Carriage initialization error
Remove the original glass, turn the power switch ON with the carriage moved to the feed side,
and check the following items.
[C27] The carriage moves only slightly in the feed direction, or the carriage stays at a position other
than the home position and does not move.
Yes
Check the circuits on the SLG and SDV boards for troubles.
No
• Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harness for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SDV board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SLG board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Replace the SDV board.
• Replace the SLG board.
[C28] Is a loud sound emitted after the carriage bumps into the home position?
Yes
Cause: The home switch does not turn ON.
• Make sure that the switch connector is connected.
• Check the circuits on the SLG and SDV boards for troubles.
No
Cause: The carriage is located at the home position and does not move.
• Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harness for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SDV board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SLG board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Replace the SDV board.
• Replace the SLG board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-1
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[C26] [C29] Peak detection error exposure lamp disconnection detected
Does the exposure lamp light?
Yes
• Check the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards for disconnection.
• Check the shading plate on the rear of the original scale for dirt.
• Check the CCD board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SLG board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Replace the lens unit.
• Replace the SLG board.
No
• Check the lamp connectors for disconnection.
• Check the thermostat to see if it has blown.
• Check electrical continuity of the lamp.
• Check SLG board connector pins J9-22, 23, 24, 25 and 26 for disconnection and the harness
for breaks and short-circuits.
• Check the SLG board for breaks and short-circuits.
• Replace the SLG board.
• Replace the lamp regulator.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.2 Process System Related Service Call
[C36] Main charger wire cleaning operation abnormal
(1) Check the main charger.
• Is the main charger disconnected?
(2) Check the cleaning motor.
• Is the motor operating?
(3) Replace the LGC board.
[C37] Transfer belt operation abnormal
(1) Check the transfer belt.
• Are the connectors disconnected?
• Are the contact switche and separation switche normal?
(2) Replace the LGC board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.3 Fuser Related Service Call
[C41] Thermistor abnormal or heater disconnection at power ON
Note) Before carrying out checks (1) and (2) below, first disconnect the power cord to prevent the
danger of electric shock.
(1) Check the thermistor.
• Are the connectors disconnected?
• Are the main and sub (end section) thermistors firmly contacting the heat roller?
• Are the harness of the main and sub (end section) thermistors broken?
(2) Check the heater lamp and SSR.
• Is the heater lamp open-circuited?
• Is the heater lamp connector disconnected?
• Is the thermostat blown?
• Is the SSR connector disconnected?
• Are the SSR and switching power supplies damaged?
(3) Check the LGC board.
• Is connector J326 disconnected?
• Check the circuits for open-or, short-circuits, or other troubles.
• Replace the LGC board.
(4) Reset the status counter.
Carry out the following after you have repaired the location where error [C41] occurred:
• Turn the power ON while pressing the [0] and [8] keys simultaneously.
• Enter “400” from the number key pad, and press the START key.
• Overwrite currently displayed status counter 1 or 2 to 0, and press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT]
key to exit error [C41].
• Turn the power OFF then back ON, and check the machine enters a normal standby state.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[C43] Thermistor abnormal during warming-up or at standby after disconnection judgement
[C44] Heater abnormal during warming-up or at standby after disconnection judgement
Carry out the same checks (1) to (3) in error [C41].
(4) Reset the status counter.
• The status counter for error [C43] indicates 4 or 6, and 5, 7 or 9 for error [C44]. Reset these
counters to 0 by following the same procedure for error [C41].
[C45] Upper heat roller end thermistor abnormal
(1) Check the sub (end section) thermistor.
• Are the connectors disconnected?
• Is the sub (end section) thermistor firmly contacting the heat roller?
• Is the sub (end section) thermistor harness broken?
(2) Check the LGC board.
• Is connector J326 disconnected?
• Check the circuits for breaks, short-circuits or other troubles.
• Replace the LGC board.
(3) Reset the status counter.
Reset status counter 8 to 0 by following the same procedure for error [C41].
[C46] Lower heat roller themistor abnormal at standby
(1) Check the thermistor.
• Are the connectors disconnected?
• Is the themistor fimly contacting the pressure roller?
• Is the thermistor harness broken?
(2) Checking of the LGC board is the same as with [C41].
(3) Reset the status counter.
• When [C46] occurs, reset the status counter 3 to 0 by the same procedure as for error [41].
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-5
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.4 Communication Related Service Call
[C56] Communication error between PFC and M-CPU
(1) Check the signal patterns (REQ, ACK, RXD, TXD) between IC11 (G/A) and IC21 (PFC) on the
LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(2) Replace the LGC board.
[C57] Communication error between M-CPU and IPC
(1) Check the circuit patterns mainly on IC50 and IC56 on the LGC board for open-or shortcircuits.
(2) Check the pattern on the IPC board for open-or short-circuits.
(3) Replace the IPC board.
(4) Replace the LGC board.
[C58] Communication error between IPC and the finisher
(1) Make sure that only the specified finisher is attached.
(2) Check the pattern on the IPC board for open-or short-circuits.
(3) Check the harness connected to connector J2 on the IPC board for disconnected pins and
open-circuits.
(4) Check fuse F5 on the power supply unit to see if it is blown.
(5) Check the pattern on the control board inside the finisher for open-or short-circuits.
(6) Check the connectors leading up to the PPC board for disconnected pins and the harness for
open-circuits.
(7) Replace the IPC board.
(8) Replace the LGC board.
[C59] Communication error between M-CPU and L-CPU
(1) Check the harness between the LGC board and the laser unit for disconnection and opencircuits.
(2) Check mainly the IC circuits on the LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
(4) Replace the laser optical unit.
[F07] Communication error between SYS and LGC boards
[F11] Communication error between SYS and SLG boards
(1) Check the connectors J102 and J108 on the SYS board for disconnection.
(2) Check the connector J330 on the LGC for disconnection.
(3) Check the connector J2 on the SLG board for disconnection.
(4) Check the harness between the SYS and the SLG for breaks and disconnected pins.
(5) Check the harness between the SYS and the LGC for breaks and disconnected pins.
(6) CHECK THE FROM version on the SYS board.
(7) Check the MROM (IC36) version on the LGC board.
(8) Check the SROM version on the SLG board.
(9) Replace the SYS board.
(10) Replace the SLG board.
(11) Replace the LGC board.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4-6
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.5 ADF Related Service Call
[C72] Error of aligning sensor adjustment
(1) Check between the aligning sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects, and the reflection mirror for dirt.
(2) Check the harness between the aligning sensor and the LGC board for open-circuit.
(3) Check mainly IC4, IC5 and CN6 on the LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(4) Replace the aligning sensor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Initialize the ADF EEPROM, and perform automatic sensor adjustment.
[C73] EEPROM initializing error
(1) Check mainly IC1 on the LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(2) Replace the LGC board.
(3) Initialize the ADF EEPROM, and perform automatic sensor adjustment.
[C74] Error of exit sensor adjustment
(1) Check between the exit sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects, and the reflection
mirror for dirt.
(2) Check the harness between the exit sensor and the LGC board for open-circuit.
(3) Check mainly IC4, IC5 and CN7 on the LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(4) Replace the exit sensor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Initialize the ADF EEPROM, and perform automatic sensor adjustment.
[C76] Transmission time-out error
[C77] Transmission buffer full
[C78] ADF power ON I/F error
[C79] Reception time-out error
(1) Check the harness between the ADF control PC board and the scanner control PC board for
disconnections or open-circuits.
(2) Check mainly the IC2, IC3, IC14, CN1 on the ADF control PC board for open-or short-circuits.
(3) Check mainly the IC1, IC7, J8 on the scanner control PC board for open-or short-circuits.
(4) Replace the ADF control PC board.
(5) Replace the scanner control PC board (SLG board).
[C80] Error of timing sensor adjustment
(1) Check between the timing sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects, and the reflection
mirror for dirt.
(2) Check the harness between the timing sensor and the LGC board for open-circuit.
(3) Check mainly IC4, IC5 and CN6 on the LGC board for open-or short-circuits.
(4) Replace the timing sensor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Initialize the ADF EEPROM, and perform automatic sensor adjustment.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-7
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.6 Other Troubles on the ADF System
[Originals other than set on the lowest are fed.]
Have too many originals been placed?
Yes
Reset the originals with the recommended number.
No
Is the original curled or folded too much?
Yes
Flatten and reset the original.
No
Are different-size originals placed together?
Yes
Set only same-size originals.
[Two or more originals are fed simultaneously.]
Have too many originals been placed?
Yes
Reset the originals.
No
Is the original curled or folded too much?
Yes
Flatten and reset the original.
No
Are different-size originals placed together?
Yes
Set only same-size originals.
No
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4-8
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
Is the gap between the aligning plate and feed roller too large?
Yes
Adjust the gap.
No
Is the separation pad dirty?
Yes
Clean the separation pad.
[The original is not fed up to the aligning roller.]
Are the pick-up roller and feed rollers dirty?
Yes
Clean the rollers.
No
Is the gap between the aligning plate and feed roller too small?
Yes
Adjust the gap.
No
Is the transporting force of the pick-up roller and feed rollers insufficient?
Yes
Replace the rollers.
[The original stop, skewed on the original glass.]
Is the aligning roller dirty?
Yes
Clean the roller.
No
Is the transport belt dirty?
Yes
Clean the belt.
No
Is the ADF correctly installed?
No
Properly install the ADF in parallel to the main unit.
Make sure that the skew and height are properly adjusted.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-9
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[The side edges of the original are out of alignment with the side edges of the copy.]
Is the slide set too wide in relation to the width of the original?
Yes
Move the slide so that its matches the width of the original.
No
Move the original feeding tray to the left or right to adjust.
[The ADF does not work (excluding paper jams, open cover)]
Is the interface harness correctly connected?
No
Re-connect the harness.
Yes
Is 24V DC being supplied to CN2?
No
Check the main unit.
Yes
Is the voltage across TP26 and TP43 +5V DC?
No
Check or replace the control board.
Yes
Is the voltage measured at EMP-SNS (TP30) +5V when there is no paper?
No
Check or replace the empty sensor.
Yes
Check or replace the control board.
[Motor error]
Is a normal load placed on the motor shaft?
No
Reduce the mechanical load on the motor by adjusting the drive system.
Remove foreign objects.
Yes
Is voltage being supplied to the motor connector?
No
Check or replace the control board.
Yes
Is an excitation pattern signal being supplied to the motor connector?
No
Check or replace the control board.
Yes
Check or replace the motor.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 10
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Communications error]
Is the interface cable normal?
No
Replace the interface cable.
Yes
(1) Check or replace the control board.
(2) Check or replace the main unit PPC board.
[Size detection error]
Is the voltage measured at SIZE-SNS1 (TP9) +5V when there is paper?
No
Check or replace size sensor 1.
Yes
Is the voltage measured at SIZE-SNS2 (TP29) +5V when there is paper?
No
Check or replace size sensor 2.
Yes
Is the original slipping off the aligning roller?
No
Check or replace the control board.
Yes
Clean or replace the aligning roller.
Check and adjust the roller pressure.
[Error of the STOP position of original’s leading edge]
Is the voltage measured at REG-SNS (TP25) +5V when there is paper?
No
Check or replace the aligning sensor.
Yes
Is the reflection mirror at the aligning sensor normal?
No
Clean or replace the reflection mirror.
Yes
Check or replace the control board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 11
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.7 Other Service Calls
[C94] M-CPU is abnormal
Is the service call displayed even after the power switch on the main unit is turned OFF then
ON again?
No
Leave as it is and see what happens.
Yes
• Check the circuit pattern between MCPU (IC32) and MROM (IC31) for open-or short-circuits.
• Replace the LGC board if this trouble occurs frequently.
[C99] PFC microcomputer is abnormal
Is the service call displayed even after the power switch on the main unit is turned OFF then
ON again?
No
Leave as it is and see what happens.
Yes
• Check the circuit pattern around the PFC microcomputer (IC21) for open-or short-circuits.
• Replace the PFC microcomputer or LGC board if this trouble occurs frequently.
[CD1] Fur brush motor lock error
(1) Check whether the fur brush has become locked mechanically.
• Are there any foreign objects?
• Are there any toner clumps in the transport section?
(2) Check whether connectors on the LGC board are come off or the pins disconnected, etc..
(3) Replace the brush motor.
(4) Replace the LGC board.
[CD2] Toner auger motor lock error
(1) Check whether the auger has become locked mechanically.
• Are there any foreign objects?
• Are there any toner clumps in the transport section?
(2) Check whether connectors on the LGC board are come off or the pins disconnected, etc..
(3) Replace the auger motor.
(4) Replace LGC board.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 12
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[F10] HDD formatting error
(1) Perform the "HDD formatting" (Setting Mode: 08-> 690->2).
(2) Make sure that the HDD is mounted.
(3) Make sure that a dedicated HDD is mounted.
(4) Make sure that the HDD connector pins are not bent.
(5) Check HDD connector J106 ont the SYS board for disconnection.
(6) Replace the harness.
(7) Replace the HDD.
(8) Replace the SYS board.
4.8 Laser Optical System Related Service Call
[CA1] Polygon mirror motor is abnormal
Is the polygon motor rotating?
No
• Check connector J206 on the PLG board for disconnection.
• Check connector CN1 on the POL board for disconnection.
• Check the harness for open-circuit or the connector pins for disconnection.
• Check the patterns on the PLG and POL boards for open-or shortcircuits.
• Replace the POL board.
• Replace the PLG board.
Yes
Are pins 2 and 3 of connector CN1 on the POL board always at the level “L”?
No
• Check the patterns on the PLG and POL boards for open-or shortcircuits.
• Replace the POL board.
• Replace the PLG board.
Yes
• Check the pattern on the PLG board for open-or short-circuits.
• Replace the PLG board.
[CA2] HSYNC is abnormal
Is the harness between the PLG and the HSYNC boards open-circuited? Is the connector
between the PLG and HSYNC boards disconnected?
Yes
Replace the harness, and re-connect the connector.
No
• Replace the PLG board.
• Replace the unit.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 13
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[CA3] [CA4] [CA5] [CA6] [CAA] [CAB] [CAC] [CAD] [CAE] [CAF] [CD0] Laser beam adjustment
trouble
Between the PLG board and the galvanomirror, PLG board and laser drive board, and PLG
board and HSYNC board, are the harnesses open-circuited or connectors disconnected?
Yes
Replace the harness(es), and re-connect the connector(s).
No
• Replace the PLG board.
• Replace the unit.
[CA9] Image data transmission error SYS board
Is the harness between the PLG board and the SYS board open-circuited, or connector disconnected?
Yes
Replace the harness, and re-connect the connector.
No
• Replace the PLG board.
• Replace the SYS board.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 14
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4.9 Finisher Related Service Call
[CB1] Feed motor is abnormal
[Procedure 1]
Is feed motor 2 (M8) operating in reverse at the specified timing?
No
Replace the feed motor or finisher controller board.
Yes
Is the shutter correctly coupled to the shutter upper/lower bars?
No
Couple properly.
Yes
Try turning the feed roller 2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and
down?
No
Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper/lower bars up to the gears
of feed roller 2.
Yes
Is the shutter close detection switch (MS4) normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
[Procedure 2]
Is the feed motor 2 (M8) operating in reverse at the specified timing?
No
Replace the transport motor or finisher controller board.
Yes
Is the shutter correctly coupled to the shutter upper/lower bars?
No
Couple properly.
Yes
Try turning the feed roller 2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and
down?
No
Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper/lower bars up to the gears
of transport roller 2.
Yes
Is the shutter open sensor (PI5) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 15
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[Procedure 3]
Check safety area detection switch (MS3). Is the switch normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Is safety area detection switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
No
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Yes
Is shutter close detection switch (MS4) normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Is shutter close detection switch (MS4) correctly pressed?
No
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
[CB2] Delivery motor is abnormal
[Procedure 1]
Try rotating the exit motor by hand. Does it operate smoothly?
No
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Yes
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the voltage across J11-6* and -7* on the finisher controller board 24V when the delivery
motor operates?
* J11-6 & 7 : MJ-1006/1007
* J11-4 & 5 : MJ-1015/1016
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Is the wiring from the motor up to the controller board normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Replace the motor.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 16
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Procedure 2]
Try turning the delivery motor in the reverse by hand. Does the swing guide move up and
down?
No
Correct the swing mechanism.
Yes
Is swing guide close detection switch 2 (MS6) normal?
No
Replace the microswitch.
Yes
Is the delivery motor (M2) operating in reverse at the specified timing?
No
Replace the motor.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
[Procedure 3]
Try turning the delivery motor in the reverse by hand. Does the swing guide move up and
down?
No
Correct the swing mechanism.
Yes
Is swing guide open sensor (PI18) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the delivery motor (M2) operating in reverse at the specified timing?
No
Replace the motor.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 17
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[Procedure 4]
Is the safety area detection switch (MS3) normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Is the safety area detection switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
No
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Yes
Is the swing guide close detection switch 2 (MS6) normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Is the swing guide close detection switch 2 (MS6) correctly pressed?
No
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
[CB3] Tray lift motor is abnormal
[Procedure 1]
Is the tray home position sensor (PI8) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the tray lift mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Is 24V DC being supplied to the tray lift motor (M5) from the finisher controller during tray
drive?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Is the wiring from the finisher controller board up to the tray lift motor (M5) normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Replace the tray lift motor (M5).
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 18
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Procedure 2]
Is the tray arriving at the tray upper limit switch (MS5) position?
Yes
Lower the tray position.
No
Is the tray upper limit switch (MS5) normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Is the wiring from the finisher controller board up to the tray upper limit detection switch normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller board.
[Procedure 3]
Is the tray elevated?
No
Is power being supplied to the motor from the finisher controller board
during tray elevation?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Is there a trouble on the tray elevation mechanism?
No
Replace the tray lift motor (M5).
Yes
Correct the tray elevation mechanism.
Yes
Are tray lift motor clock sensors 1/2 (PI19/PI9) normal?
No
Replace the sensor board.
Yes
Replace the finisher controller.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 19
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[CB4] alignment motor is abnormal
Is the aligning plate home position sensor normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the alignment motor normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Is there a mechanical object caught on the alignment plate movement path?
Yes
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
No
Does replacement of the alignment motor (M3) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
END
[CB5] Stapler motor is abnormal
Is the wiring between the stapler and the finisher controller board normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Does replacement of the stapler rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
END
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 20
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[CB6] Stapler shift motor is abnormal
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI7) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the stapler shift motor normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Is there any mechanical object caught on the stapler stand shift path?
Yes
Correct the mechanical mechanism.
No
Does replacement of the stapler shift motor (M4) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
END
[CB7] Hight sensor is abnormal
[Procedure 1]
Does turning the copier’s power switch OFF then ON again rectify the trouble?
Yes
END
No
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Is the voltage across J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller board 5V DC?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Re-adjust the height sensor. Replace the height sensor if this trouble occurs frequently.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 21
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[Procedure 2]
Is connector J6 on the finisher controller board, J114 on the height sensor or relay connector
J212 disconnected?
Yes
Re-connect the connector(s).
No
Is the voltage across J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller board 5V DC?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Replace the height sensor.
[Procedure 3]
Does re-adjusting by the DIP switches rectify the trouble?
Yes
END
No
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal?
No
Correct the wiring.
Yes
Is the voltage across J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller board 5V DC?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Replace the height sensor.
[CB8] Backup RAM data is abnormal
Is the condition modified by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the copier?
Yes
END
No
Replace the finisher controller board and punch driver board (MJ-1015/1016).
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 22
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[CB9] Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor is abnormal
Is the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the specified timing?
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
No
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Does replacement of the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) rectify the problem?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
[CBA] [CBB] Saddle stitcher front/rear stitcher motor is abnormal
Are the front or rear stitcher and receptacles installed properly?
No
Install them correctly.
Yes
Are the stitching home position switches (PS4S/PS2S*) on the front or rear stitchers normal?
* PS4S/PS2S : MJ-1006/1007
* MS7S/MS5S : MJ-1015/1016
No
Replace the front or rear stitcher.
Yes
Is the front or rear stitcher operating at the predetermined timing?
No
Replace the front or rear stitcher.
Yes
Check the wiring between the stitcher and saddle stitcher controller board. If it is normal,
replace the controller board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 23
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[CBC] Saddle stitcher alignment motor is abnormal
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the alignment motor (M5S) operating at the specified timing?
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
No
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Does replacement of the alignment motor (M5S) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
[CBD] Saddle stitcher guide motor is abnormal
Is the guide plate home position sensor (PI13S) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the guide motor (M3S) operating at the fixed timing?
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
No
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Does replacement of the guide motor (M3S) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 24
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[CBE] Saddle stitcher folding motor is abnormal
Is the folding motor clock sensor (PI4S) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the folding motor (M2S) operating at the specified timing?
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
No
Is the folding roller drive mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Does replacement of the folding motor (M2S) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
[CBF] Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate is abnormal
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) normal?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the paper positioning plate operating at the specified timing?
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
No
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Does replacement of the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) rectify the trouble?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 25
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[CCO] Sensor connector connection error
[Procedure 1]
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13S) or saddle stitcher controller board connector connected?
No
Connect the connector.
Yes
Is there a open-circuit between the sensor and the saddle stitcher?
No
Correct this.
Yes
Is DC5V being supplied from J9-7 on the saddle stitcher control board?
No
Replace the sabble stitcher controller board.
Yes
Is J9-8 of the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) or the connector of
the saddle stich controller board connected?
No
Connect it.
Yes
Is the connector between the sensor and the stitcher open-circuited?
No
Connect it.
Yes
Is DC5V from J9-10 of the saddle stitcher controller board supplied?
No
Replace the sabble stitcher controller board.
Yes
Is J9-11 of the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 26
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Procedure 3]
Is the connector of the paper pressing top position (PI15S) or the saddle stitcher controller board connected?
No
Connect it.
Yes
Is the connection between the sensor and the saddle stitcher disconnected?
No
Connect it.
Yes
Is DC5V from J9-13 of the saddle stitcher controller board supplied?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
Is J9-14 on the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground?
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
Yes
END
[CC1] Microswitch error
[Procedure 1]
Check the switch actuator in the entrance door. Are the switch and the sensor being moved
correctly?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Check the entrance door switch. Is the switch normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Measure J10-8 voltage on the saddle stitcher controller board when the entrance door is open.
Is there 5V being supplied?
Yes
The sensor is broken, so replace it.
No
Measure the voltage across J19-1 (+) and J19-2 (–) on the finisher controller board. Is it 24V?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Check and correct the wiring between J19 of the finisher controller board and J1 of the saddle stitcher
controller board. Replace the saddle stitcher controller board if the wiring is normal.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 27
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[Procedure 2]
Check the switch actuator of the front door. Are the switch and the sensor being working properly?
No
Connect the connector.
Yes
Check the front door switch. Is the switch normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Measure J11-12 voltage of the saddle switcher controller with the front door open. Is 5V being
supplied?
Yes
The sensor is broken, so replace it.
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
[Procedure 3]
Check the switch actuator of the exit door. Are the switch and the sensor being working properly?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Check the exit door switch. Is the switch normal?
No
Replace the switch.
Yes
Measure J11-9 voltage access of the saddle stitcher with the exit door is open. Is it 5V ?
Yes
the sensor is broken, so replace it.
No
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 28
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[CC2] Communication error between finisher saddle
Is the condition recovered by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the copier?
Yes
END
No
Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the saddle stitcher board normal?
No
Correct it.
Yes
Measure the voltage between J3-2 (+) on the finisher controller board and J3-1 (–). Is it DC 24V?
No
Replace the finisher controller board.
Yes
Replace the saddle stitcher controller board
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 29
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
5.3 Preparation of PC to Use a Network
5.3.1
Setting Virtual Modem
The connection between PC and copier is made using PPP(Point-to-Point Protocol). It is
necessary to use a dial-up networking, and use a virtual modem.
First, install the virtual modem. The virtual modem can be downloaded from the following web
site.
URL: http://www.kevin-wells.com/net/mdmcbx4.inf
After download, set up the modem as follows.
Click “Start” button, point at “Settings”, and then click “Control Panel”.
Click on Modems.
5-2
[Procedure 3]
Is the swing guide clock sensor (PI20) working normally?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the voltage between J11-6 and -7 on the finisher controller PC board 24V when the swing
motor is rotating?
No
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Yes
Is the harness connecting the motor and finisher controller PC board (open-or short-circuited?
Yes
Replace the harness.
No
Replace the motor.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 4- 29
- 31- 2
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
[CC5] Horizontal registration motor is abnormal
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) working normally?
No
Replace the sensor
Yes
Is the harness connecting the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) and finisher
controller PC board open-or short-circuited?
Yes
Replace the harness.
No
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Is the problem solved by replacing the horizontal registration motor (M2P)?
Yes
END
No
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor?
Yes
END
No
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board?
Yes
END
No
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 4- 29
- 32- 3
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
[CC6] Punch motor is abnormal
Is the punch home position sensor (PI3P) working normally?
No
Replace the sensor.
Yes
Is the harness connecting the punch home position sensor (PI3P) and finisher controller PC
board open-or short-circuited?
Yes
Replace the harness.
No
Is the punching mechanism normal?
No
Correct the mechanism.
Yes
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor (M1P) ?
Yes
END
No
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board?
Yes
END
No
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 4- 29
- 33- 4
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4.10 Image Quality Maintenance Control Related Troubleshooting
[Corrective action when “Service Recommended for IQC” is flashing]
Check the value of self-diagnostics 05-291 (control completion state).
Self-diagnostics 05-291 value is “2” (pattern trouble; pattern cannot be read correctly.
Check the value of self-diagnostics 08-805 (test pattern data setting).
The value of self-diagnostics 08-805 is not the self-diagnostics code default.
* Set the default, and perform image quality maintenance forced execution/confirmation (described later).
The value of self-diagnostics 08-805 is the self-diagnostics code default.
Execute self-diagnostics 04-113 (test print of secondary scanning 33 gradations).
A correct image is printed out.
* Replace the sensor, and perform image quality maintenance forced execution/
confirmation (described later).
Incorrect image (image no output, uneven, etc.)
Is the developer unit firmly locked?
Yes
No
* Lock the developer unit, and perform image quality maintenance forced
execution/confirmation (described later).
Is the main charger not dirty and firmly locked?
Yes
No
* Clean or replace the main charger/Lock the main charger,
and perform image quality maintenance forced execution/confirmation
(described later).
* Replace the following in order, and perform image quality maintenance forced execution/confirmation (described later).
• Developer unit
• Cleaner unit
• Transfer belt
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 30
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
The value of self-diagnostics 05-291 is 4 (sensor trouble; sensor output is not within the normal
range.).
Is the value of self-diagnostics 05-292 (sensor output value when LED light source is OFF)
within the range 102 to 307?
Yes
No
* Check the connector, replace the sensor, and the LGC board, and then perform image
quality maintenance forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Is the value of self-diagnostics 05-293 (sensor output value with respect to the drum) within the
following range?
([(self-diagnostics 08-814) x4] to 819)
Yes
No
Self-diagnostics 05-293 < [(self-diagnostics 08-814) x4]
Is the value of self-diagnostics 05-296 (sensor light intensity adjustment result)
255?
Yes
No
* Replace the sensor and LGC board, and perform image quality
maintenance forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Is the sensor window dirty?
No
Yes
* Clean the sensor window, and perform image quality maintenance
forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Is the center of the drum scratched or dirty?
No
Yes
* Replace the drum, and perform image quality maintenance forced
execution/confirmation (described later).
* Replace the sensor and LGC board, and perform image quality maintenance
forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Self-diagnostics 05-293>819
* Replace the sensor and LGC board, and perform image quality maintenance
forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Perform image quality maintenance forced execution/confirmation (described later).
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 31
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
<<Image Quality Maintenance Forced Execution/Confirmation >>
START
Value of self-diagnostics 08-800<3 (max. error detection count or less)
(When value of 08-800 >
= 3, clear by entering 0.)
Value of self-diagnostics 08-802=0 (control enabled)
Value of self-diagnostics 08-803=0 (startup number of copies=0)
Self-diagnostics 04-113 (A4 size specification)
Confirmation; After the test print, “READY” is displayed and the engine stops.
Judgment (value of 05-291 is other than 2 or 4, and value of 08-800=0)
Yes
No
GOOD
NO GOOD
Restore self-diagnostics 08-803=2 (startup number of copies=2k).
END
8070/6570/5570/4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING
4 - 32
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
5. Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC
5.1 Outline
These instructions show how to set up your PC to use a system firmware download operation using
FTP(File Transfer Protocol).
5.2 System Configuration
PC
Serial Cable
Copier
System board
Software Requirements for PC.
- Microsoft Windows95.
- Virtual Modem.
- FTP Server tools. (Ex. War FTP Daemon)
Serial Cable.
- PC and System board are connected with the following cross line cable.
DTE-DTE connections (D-SUB 9 PIN/RS-232C)
1 CD
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 CI
1 CD
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 CI
Protocol specifications between PC and system board.
SPEED
DATA BITS
PARITY
STOP BITS
FLOW CONTROL
ECHO
115200bps
8 BITS
NONE
1 BIT
NONE
OFF
5-1
5.3 Preparation of PC to Use a Network
5.3.1 Setting Virtual Modem
The connection between PC and copier is made using PPP(Point-to-Point Protocol). It is necessary
to use a dial-up networking, and use a virtual modem.
First, install the virtual modem. The virtual modem can be downloaded from the following web
site.
http://www.kevin-wells.com/net/mdmcbx4.inf
After download, set up the modem as follows.
Click “Start” button, point at “Settings”, and then click “Control Panel”.
Click on Modems.
5-2
Click “Add” Button, and open “Install New Modem” wizard.
And then, check “Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list”, and click “Next” button.
Click “Have Disk” button, and then select a folder download file is stored in.
5-3
Select “Direct Connection”, and then click “Next” button.
Select “Communications Port(COM1)”,and then click “Next” button.
5-4
Click “Finish” button, then Virtual Modem installation is completed.
5-5
5.3.2 Using Dial-Up Networking
Note; Your computer may be already set up to use a network. If Windows prompts you for a
network password at startup and if Network Neighborhood icon appears on Windows desktop,
your network is already set up. In this case, you can skip this section.
In Network dialog box, click “Configuration” tab.
Confirm that “Dial-Up Adapter” and “TCP/IP” are displayed.
If your PC does not have “Dial-Up Adapter”, then click “Add” button.
5-6
Select “Microsoft” in Manufactures list box, and select “Dial-Up Adapter” in Network Adapters
list box, and then click “OK” button.
When you click “OK” button, Windows automatically set up the TCP/IP Protocol components
with dial-Up Adapter.
5-7
5.3.3 Using New Connection
Double-click “My Computer”. If “Dial-Up Networking” icon is not in the window, click
“Add/Remove Programs” in Control Panel.
Otherwise, skip to the next step to create a connection.
Double-click “Dial-Up Networking”.
5-8
Type something in “Type a name for the computer you are dialing”.
Select “Direct Connection” for “Select a modem”, and click “Configure” button.
Click “General” tab in “Direct Connection Properties” box, select 115200 for “Maximum speed”,
check “Only connect at this speed”.
5-9
Click “Connection” tab, confirm that all check boxes in “Call preferences” are not selected, and
click “Advanced” button.
Confirm that all check boxes in “Advanced Connection Settings” dialog box is not selected, click
“OK” button, and then return to “Make New Connection” dialog box.
After returning to “Make New Connection” dialog box, click “Next” button.
5-10
Type #39 for “Telephone number”.
To change “Country code”, click the arrow next to the country, and select a country you want.
After that, click “Next” button.
Click “Finish” button, then “Make New Connection” is completed.
5-11
5.4 Installation of FTP Server
First, it is necessary to install Free Software “War FTP Daemon Version 1.65” as an FTP server.
War FTP Daemon can be downloaded from the following web site.
URL: http://www.jgaa.com/downloadpage.htm
Download the file “ward165.exe” from the above site, and execute it. Some files are created, and then
execute “Setup.exe”.
Create the C: WEBSHARE FTPROOT folder.
After that, execute “war-ftpd.exe” in “war-ftpd” folder.
Select [Properties]-[Security]-[Edit User]
5-12
Click “Add” button, and key in dppc for “New name”.
Key in dppc for “New Password” and “Verify Password”, and click “OK” button.
Select “dppc” and click “File Access”. Click “Add” button.
5-13
Double-click “Webshare”.
Double-click “Ftproot” and click “OK” button.
Change “Read”, “Write”, Delete”, Execute”, “List”, “Create” and “Remove” from Gray Check to Black
Check.
Check “Root”, “Home” and “Recursive” in “Special” box as follows.
And then, click “Apply” and “OK”.
5-14
To make the connection “ONLINE” mode, click
5-15
button before firmware downloading.
6. Manual for Firmware Download
[ 3 ][ 9 ] Mode Operation
6.1 Outline
Connect copier and PC with serial cable and turn the power on pressing 3 and 9 keys, the copier goes
into “Firmware Version Up Mode”. Then you can update system software data and/or UI data through
the PC.
6.2 Preparation of PC
To update the firmware of copier, the following preparations are necessary.
6.2.1
Software Installation
“Virtual modem” and “War FTP Daemon” have to be installed in your PC.
Please refer to “Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC”
And also, War FTP Daemon has to be “ONLINE” mode.
6-1
6.2.2
Preparation of updated files
New files for update are stored in the following folder of the PC.
And also, the files must be named as follows
Folders :
New files for update :
Kind of date
- Program date
- Fixed UI data
- Common UI data
- 1st language UI data
- 2nd language UI data
- 3rd language UI data
File name
sysfirm.tz
uidataf.tz
uidata0.tz
uidata1.tz
uidata2.tz
uidata3.tz
6-2
6.2.3
Connection between copier and PC
Connect MMF(FSMS) port of the copier and serial communication port of PC specified by the setup
of virtual modem using a crossing cable.
6-3
6.3 Download Operation
1. Turn ON the power switch of the copier on pressing 3 and 9 keys.
2. The following messages are displayed on the copier control panel.
Firmware Version Up Mode
> Make a connection from PC.
3. Serial connection is made by dial-up from PC.
Refer to “Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC” about procedures for dial up
network connection.
Key in "#39" for “Phone number”.
6-4
4. The following screens will be displayed if it succeeds in serial connection.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Established serial connection with PC.
Target area number
> Press START key to install new
firmware.
> Please select a target with DIGITAL
keys.
Depress [HELP], and you can confirm the version number of firmware and UI data, before updating to
new one. (To return to previous screen, depress [HELP] again.)
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Established serial connection with PC.
target
version
code
1
005.101
U
2
004.001
0
3
005.002
0
4
006.001
3
5
006.001
7
6
006.003
11
The number of “target” provides with following information.
1 : Program data
2 : Fixed UI data
3 : Common UI data
4 : 1st language UI data
5 : 2nd language UI data
6 : 3rd language UI data
“version” is displayed like “XXX.YYY”.
“XXX” is major version and “YYY” is minor version.
6-5
“code” provides with following information.
In the case of Program data(“target” is 1), “code” means the destination.
U: for USA and Canada
E: for European countries
X: for Australia and Asian countries
In the case of UI data(“target” is 4-6), ”code” means Language.
Code
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Language
Japanese
American English
English
reserved
French
German
Swedish
Dutch
Italian
Spanish
Danish
Finnish
Norwegian
reserved
reserved
reserved
5. Select the area for update using digital keys.
Using [1] to [6] keys and [INTERRUPT] key, you can select a target area.
A selected number is displayed at target area. Press [INTERRUPT] to input “#”.
The relation of target area number and firmware data is as follows.
1 : Only Program data
2 : Fixed UI data
3 : Common UI data
4 : 1st language UI data
5 : 2nd language UI data
6 : 3rd language UI data
#1: All data (1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)
#2: All UI data (2, 3, 4, 5 and 6)
#3: All language UI data (4, 5 and 6)
6.
Depress START key and copier starts to update the data.
Do not turn off the power to the copier or the computer, or disconnect the
connection between the copier and computer after pressing the Start key.
Interrupting the transmission of a file to the copier will result in
corrupting the file in F-ROM of the copier. If this file is corrupted, you have to re-install the
data again.
6-6
In the case of 1 - 6 :
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Displaying current status as follows.
- reading a file.
- erasing the device.
- writing to the device.
Installing a new firmware.
- reading a file.
In the case of #1 - #3
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Installing a new firmware.
- reading a file.
Target
1
Version
installing
Displaying current data area being loaded
7. The following screen will be displayed after firmware data is updated.
In the case of 1 – 6:
If you want to update other area continuously, press [START] key and repeat the operation from step
5.
After finished, turn off the power or depress [CLEAR] key.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Updated data version number
Firmware version up completed.
Version: 001.003
> Press START key to continue.
6-7
In the case of #1 - #3:
The following screen is displayed after finished.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Firmware version up completed.
Target
Version
1
001.002
2
002.001
3
002.031
4
003.022
5
003.022
6
003.033
Updated data version numbers
8. Press CLEAR key to cancel downloading on the way.
However, it becomes unable to cancel after start of elimination process of flash ROM.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Program canceled.
9. When failing in update, the following error message is displayed.
(If the error occurs, “Recovery Mode” starts automatically when you turns on the power next time.
See 10:Recovery mode)
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
ERROR MESSAGE
- file read error.
- file information error.
Failed to install a new firmware.
- file read error.
- unfit device.
- device erase error.
- device write error.
- verify error.
- cannot set NvRAM flags.
6-8
10. Recovery mode
When you turns on the power after an error occurs, you’ll see following display.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Recovery mode : target 3-6 failed
>make a connection from PC
Connect with dial up network(See procedure 3), and the display changes as follows.
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: #3
Recovery mode : target 3-6 failed
>Press START key to install new firmware
Further procedure is the same as normal sequence.
6-9
6.4 Screen Details
The following screen will be displayed in [ 3 ][ 9 ] mode.
Power On
Firmware Version Up Mode
Firmware Version Up Mode
Cannot connect with PC.
> Make a connection from PC.
Failed to install a new firmware.
Connection
Failure
Connected
Updated data version number
Firmware Version Up Mode
Change the number by pressing key
Target: 1
Target: 1
Established serial connection with PC.
> Press START key to install new
Press
Ten Key
firmware.
Target:#1
Press START
Key
1
1’
Press CLEAR
Key
2
2
Press CLEAR Key
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Program canceled.
Power Off
6-10
Target: 6
In the case of 1 – 6:
1
Press Start Key
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Installing a new firmware.
- reading a file.
Message will change as follows.
- reading a file.
- checking a read file.
Successful
3
Press CLEAR
Key
Failed
4
- checking the device.
- setting NvRAM flags.
2
- erasing the device.
- writing to the device.
- verifying the device.
- cleaning NvRAM flags.
3
Successful
Updated data version number
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Firmware version up completed.
2
Version: 001.003
Press CLEAR
Key
> Press START key to continue.
Press START Key
Change the number by pressing key
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Target: 1
Press
Ten Key
> Press START key to install new
firmware.
Target:#1
> Please select a target with DIGITAL
keys.
Press START
key
1
Press CLEAR
key
2
6-11
Target: 6
In the case of #1- #3:
1’ Press START key
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Installing a new firmware.
- reading a file.
Target
Message will change as follows.
Version
1
- reading a file.
installing
- checking a read file.
Successful
3’
4’
- checking the device.
Press CLEAR
Key
Failed
- setting NvRAM flags.
2’
- erasing the device.
Displaying current
- writing to the device.
data area being
- verifying the device.
- cleaning NvRAM flags.
3’
Successful
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Updated data version numbers
Firmware version up completed.
Target
Version
1
001
2
002
3
002
4
003
5
003
6
003
Press CLEAR key
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Power Off
Canceled Area
Program canceled.
Target
Version
1
001
2
canceled
Power Off
6-12
In the case of 1 – 6:
4
Failed
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target: 1
Failed to install a new firmware.
- file read error.
ERROR MESSAGE
- file read error.
- file information error.
- unfit device.
Power Off
- device erase error.
- device write error.
- verify error.
- cannot set NvRAM flags.
In the case of #1 - #3:
4’
Failed
Firmware Version Up Mode
Target:#1
Failed to install a new firmware.
ERROR MESSAGE
- file read error.
- file read error.
- file information error.
Target
Version
- unfit device.
- device erase error.
Error
- device write error.
Power Off
occurrence
- verify error.
area
- cannot set NvRAM flags.
6-13
7.
HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-1
8070/6570/5570/4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS
7.1 AC Wire Harness
MAIN-SW
100V
WHITE
N
1
Breaker 15A
Noise filter
L
2
BLACK
3
A WHITE
J510-3
A
C
WHITE
WHITE
B BLACK
E
Q J510-5
4
BULE
BROWN
BULE
J600-1
GREEN
BULE
J510-4
J725-1
BULE
A
115V or 120V
HTR-SW
C
TERMINAL BLOCK
WHITE
3
WHITE
N
1
WHITE
WHITE
J501-14
BULE
BLACK
BLACK
Breaker 20A
Noise filter
4
L
GREEN
2
BLACK
Damp heater L
DHTR-L
BROWN
TERMINAL BLOCK
BROWN
OUTLET
BLACK
BLUE
Fuse
BLACK
Thermostat
GREEN
200V series
Fuse
WHITE
WHITE
1
INTLET
3
WHITE
N
BLACK
BROWN
J501-13
Noise filter
GREEN
Breaker 10A
2
BLACK
4
BLACK
BROWN
BROWN
OUTLET
BROWN
HTR-SW
BLUE
BLACK
D
B
Fuse
GREEN
MAIN-SW
BROWN
BLACK
L
BLACK
B
D
BLACK
F
BROWN
8070/6570/5570/4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS
7-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
WHITE
J510-1
WHITE
BULE
WHITE
BULE
RVS-SW
J600-3
J739-3 Q
J511-3 J510-7 J739-1
DOOR-SW
Q
BULE
J511-1
WHITE
WHITE
BULE
WHITE
J725-3
E
WHITE
J50-5
WHITE
BULE
J401-3
J401-6
LRG
SW.REG
HITE
J60-1
Q
Damp heater U
WHITE
DHTR-U1
C
WHITE D
SSR-S
(SUB)
SSR-U
(MAIN)
DHTR-U2
BULE
J501-2
BULE
BLACK
F
J725-5
J725-6
J501-24
WHITE
BULE
J501-12
WHITE
BROWN
J502
WHITE
BULE
J60-2
E
J50-1
J503
J401-1
BLACK
BROWN
J401-4
WHITE
J513
J514
BROWN
J725-2 J600-2 Q
Thermostat
BLACK
J600-6
BROWN
J725-4
BLACK Q BLACK
BROWN
J501-6
J510-2
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
BROWN
BROWN
BLACK
J511-2
BLACK
BLACK
Q
J739-4
J600-4
RVS-SW
J511-4 J510-8 J739-2
BLACK
DOOR-SW
Q
BROWN
YELLOW
Q
BLACK
J501-1
BROWN
WHITE
BROWN
SW.REG
HTR-U
(SUB)
HTR-U
(MAIN)
BROWN
BROWN
SW-PWR
BROWN
BLACK
7-3
8070/6570/5570/4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS
7.2 DC Wire Harness
8070/6570/5570/4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS
7-4
Mar. 2000 © TOSHIBA TEC
1
2
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DG
+24V
(RED)
+24V
(RED)
(BLK)
DG
(BLK)
PMBRK-0A
(BWN)
PMON-0A
(BLU)
PMOK-0A
(ORG)
PMCLK-1A
(YLW)
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
DRV-POL
CN2
M
4
5
6
7
3
2
1
PSTPS-1
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
8
T-FULL-SW
1
2
3
3
2
1
J653
2
1
J709
3
2
1
J705 J705
VDD
HVDDC-0A
DG
+24VB
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
VDD
GND
TFUSW-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
AUGMT-0A
AUGMT-1A
GND
PSTPS-1
VDD
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
HVDAC-0A
(BLK)
N.C
HVDVR-1A
(BLK)
GND
TRCS2-0A
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
(BLK)
PLFDC-0A
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
PUTRM-0A
PMTRM-1A
PMTRM-0A
PLTRM-1A
PLTRM-0A
PURGC-0A
+24VC
PMRGC-0A
+24VC
PLRGC-0A
+24VC
+36VA
+36VA
DG36
DG36
PFMCK-1A
VDD
GND
PFMON-0A
GND
LCTRM-0A
LCTRM-1A
NC
(PPE)
PUTRM-1A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J692
2
1
J691
2
1
J690
2
1
J689
2
1
J688
2
1
J687
2
1
J686
2
1
J702
PFP-MOT
RGT4-CLT
RGT3-CLT
RGT2-CLT
TR4-MOT
TR3-MOT
TR2-MOT
FD2-CLT
FD3-CLT
9
8
10
GND
PMRGT-1A
(RED)
(BWN)
(PNK)
3
2
1
J148
3
2
1
J150
PWA-IPC
(OPTION)
PSTP3-SW
FEED2-SW
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(BLK)
(WHI)
(YLW)
GND
VDD
IPRRST-0A
OE
GND
1/O7
1/O5
1/O3
1/O1
AD7
AD5
AD3
AD1
VDD
GND
IPCSW-0
VDD
CSIP2-0A
WE
GND
1/O6
1/O4
1/O2
1/O0
AD6
AD4
AD2
AD0
VDD
GND
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J327
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
(PPE)
J693 J693
LCFDM-0A
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
SFFED-1A
SFBS3-1A
SFBS2-1A
2
2
LCTRM-0A
(BLK)
SFBS0-1A
1
(BLK)
SFBSW-1A
1
(BLK)
+24VC
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBS1-1A
(BLK)
LCLED-1A
(BLK)
GND
LCKEY-1A
(BLK)
VDD
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
LCEMP-1A
(BLK)
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
LCTOP-1A
(BLK)
PURGT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
LCBTM-1A
LCFED-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
4
3
2
1
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A8
A9
LCSET-1A
GND
(BLK)
LCEMP-1A
LCKEY-1A
LCLED-1A
SFBSL-0A
+24VC
SFBSW-1A
SFBS0-1A
SFBS1-1A
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
VDD
VDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
(YLW)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
VDD
(YLW)
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
LCTOP-1A
(BLK)
N.C
LCFED-1A
(PPE)
(BLK)
(ORG)
VDD
VDD
GND
(PPE)
(YLW)
PURGT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
B14
B13
B12
B11
B4
B3
A11
A9
A6
A2
B1
A7
A4
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B2
A14
A13
A12
A10
A8
A5
A3
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B11
B12
A4
A6
A9
A13
B14
A8
A11
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B13
A1
A2
A3
A5
A7
A10
A12
A14
2
1
LCF-SET-SW
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
SFBS1-1A
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
GND
SFBS0-1A
(BLK)
GND
VDD
SFBSW-1A
+24VC
SFBSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
LCLED-1A
GND
LCKEY-1A
(BLK)
GND
VDD
LCEMP-1A
GND
VDD
LCTOP-1A
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
GND
VDD
LCFED-1A
(PPE)
PSTP2-SW
(PPE)
(BLK)
J681 J681
3
1
2
J685
2
1
J683
3
1
2
1
2
J721
1
5
4
3
2
5
1
2
3
4
LCKEY-1A
LCLED-1A
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBS1-1A
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
PFP-CST-L-SW
PFP-CST-M-SW
PFP-CST-U-SW
PS-HVT-TM
LCF-FED-MOT
SFBS0-1A
(BLK)
SFB-SW
MANUAL-SOL
J720 J720
3
1
2
J719
2
1
J718
2
3
1
LCF-EMP-SW
LCF-TOP-SW
LCF-FEED-SW
J717 J717
3
1
2
J716
3
1
2
J715
2
3
1
J714
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
J696
1
2
3
J695
1
2
3
J694
J657
1
5
4
3
2
J646
2
1
3
J1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
PCSTL-1A
GND
VDD
PCSTM-1A
GND
VDD
PCSTU-1A
GND
+24VB
DG
HVTM-0A
(BLK) HVMVR-1A
HVTT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
HVTBB-0A
HVTVR-1A
(BLK)
PWA-SFB
PWA-LCF
LCF-TRAY-MET
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J337
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J324
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
DFRQ-0A
DFCNT-0A
DFRXD-0A
GND
DFTXD-0A
GND
DFAK-0A
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J331
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J332
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
GND
EXCSW-0A
VDD
GND
TRNES-0A
VDD
J637 J637
STKSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
CLMTA-0A
CLMTB-0A
DRTH-0A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
CTDVR-1A
CTDS-1A
VDD
GND
+24VB
RSTSW-0A
FURMT-0A
FURMT-1A
+24VB
ATSVR-1A
ATS-1A
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DEVSW-0A
GND
+24VB
CTRON-0A
CTRCN-1A
GND
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
ATS-1A
ATSVR-1A
+24VB
FURMT-1A
FURMT-0A
RSTSW-0A
+24VB
GND
VDD
CTDS-1A
CTDVR-1A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
DRTH-0A
CLMTB-0A
CLMTA-0A
+24VB
ERSLP-00A
GND
MCLSW-0A
GND
CTRCN-1A
CTRON-0A
+24VB
GND
DEVSW-0A
N.C
(BLK)
+24VB
A15
A16
VDD
TRNES-0A
GND
VDD
EXCSW-0A
GND
N.C
(BLK)
ERSLP-00A
6
5
4
3
2
1
J675 J675
1
2
3
4
5
6
VDD
TRNSW-0A
GND
+24VA
N.C
(BLK)
GND
5
4
3
2
1
J638 J638
1
2
3
4
5
N.C
(PPE)
MCLSW-0A
N.C
(BLK)
TRNSW-0A
+24VA
(BLK)
GND
N.C
(BLK)
+24VA
ADUF-0A
(BLK)
STKSL-0A
+24VG
PWDN
GND
GND
VDD
VDD
DG36
DG36
+36VB
+36VA
DG
DG
DG
+24VC
+24VB
+24VA
(WHI)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(ORG)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
J636
1
2
3
J640
1
2
3
J641
1
2
3
J639
1
2
STAK-SND
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
12
13
14
11
12
13
14
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
2
J729 J729
1
2
J633 J633
2
1
J628 J628
2
1
J512 J512
9
10
9
7
6
5
4
15
1
3
2
10
7
6
5
4
15
1
3
2
J728 J728
6
5
4
3
2
1
J631 J631
RVS-EXIT-SW
EXIT-COVER-SW
RVS-SW
MCLSW-0A
14
13
12
11
10
9
J729
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
3
4
B14
B17
B16
B15
TOTAL-CTR
DEV-SW
1
6
2
3
5
4
J632
1
2
J730
THMS
CLN-MOT
ERS-300
CLN-M-SW
1
2
3
1
J418
B
A
MAIN-SW
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(PPE)
(RED)
(PPE)
2
1
J60
1
2
J634
2
1
J635
B
A
J629 J629
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(RED)
(BWN)
(BLK)
(WHI)
(PPE)
FUR-MOT
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
ATS-1A
ATSVR-1A
+24VB
GND
VDD
CTDS-1A
CTDVR-1A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
DRTH-0A
CLMTB-0A
CLMTA-0A
+24VB
ERSLP-00A
GND
GND
DCM
GND
GND
36V
+12V
+12G
EXPO-OUT+
IQC
EXPO-OUT-
N.C
ATS
3
2
1
J51
(BLU)
(YLW)
(ORG)
(RED)
(BLK)
36V
HOME SWICH
4
3
2
1
J71
5
4
3
2
1
J50
PWB-F-CBL-300
(BLK)
GND
VDD
GND
+5VA
GND
+3.3V
80
1
J1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
7
AUG-MOT
VDD
(BLK)
1
2
3
4
5
J648
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
+24VC
2
9
8
10
VDD
(WHI)
(BLK)
TUP2/EMP2-SW
J328
1
2
3
(BLK)
PMFDC-0A
1
J701
FD4-CLT
(RED)
(BWN)
7
VDD
GND
4
3
2
J204
8
7
6
(PPE)
+24VC
2
1
GND
PMRGT-1A
7
6
(GRY)
(PPE)
(BLU)
A9
A8
A10
(BLK)
B9
(BLK)
B8
VDD
B10
GND
B7
GND
A7
(PPE)
2
1
C
B9
J712
GND
A6
A5
(BLK)
PUFDC-0A
J700
9
8
10
(PNK)
6
PUFED-1A
PUTOP-1A
GND
1
J144
PSTP4-SW
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
B6
(BLK)
2
1
B11
PS-HVT-DB
VDD
TRCS2-0A
A11
A10
(PPE)
+24VC
9
8
10
VDD
(WHI)
(BLK)
5
4
3
2
(YLW)
(ORG)
3
2
1
J148
3
FEED3-SW
A10
(BLK)
GND
(BLK)
A4
A3
(BLK)
GND
7
GND
VDD
5
4
3
2
PUEMP-1A
VDD
(RED)
GND
2
1
J150
B5
(WHI)
4
5
TRCS1-1A
(BLK)
A9
A8
(BLK)
PMRGT-1A
7
6
(GRY)
(PPE)
(BLU)
1
(BWN)
PLRGT-1A
B4
(YLW)
5
4
VDD
TCMTD-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
A7
(BLK)
VDD
6
PUFED-1A
PUTOP-1A
GND
1
J141 J141
(PNK)
VDD
B3
LCSET-1A
A
B
2
1
J724 J724
B1
3
GND
(BLK)
6
7
TCMTA-0A
(BLK)
GND
5
4
3
2
(YLW)
(ORG)
9
10
(BLK)
GND
B2
2
TRCS1-1A
(YLW)
3
2
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
5
4
3
2
PUEMP-1A
VDD
9
10
8
7
6
B1
1
VDD
(WHI)
TCMTD-0A
8
A2
(BLK)
PUFED-1A
1
(RED)
8
7
6
A13
J623
3
2
1
(PPE)
1
J549 J705
A6
A5
A1
J336
(BLK)
PUTOP-1A
N.C
(BLK)
GND
1
J697 J153
GND
(BWN)
(PNK)
(BLK)
(WHI)
VDD
4
4
(PNK)
(BLK)
B10
RGT-SW
1
J622
TCMTA-0A
RGTD-0A
(BLK)
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
(BLK)
PUEMP-1A
9
10
PLRGT-1A
VDD
GND
5
A12
TR-SEP-SW
TR-TCH-SW
TRB-CAM-MOT
(RED)
RGTB-0A
(BLK)
+24VA
RGTA-0A
(BLK)
RGTC-0A
(PPE)
(BLK)
+24VA
J341
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9
B8
B10
(PPE)
VDD
9
10
8
7
6
5
A1
2
N.C
DEVBK-0A
(PPE)
(BLK)
DEVON-0A
(BLK)
DEVCK-1A
(BLK)
VDD
DG
(BLK)
GND
DG
(BLK)
(BLK)
+24VA
(PPE)
(BLK)
+24VA
(PPE)
B4
B3
B2
B1
(BLK)
GND
8
7
6
(WHI)
A11
6
GND
(BLK)
N.C
+24VA
KCTRC-1A
(BLK)
CTRON-0A
(BLK)
B7
B6
(BLK)
PLRGT-1A
VDD
A12
5
1
(ORG)
A15
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
(BLK)
VDD
5
A13
4
3
2
1
J706
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J656
4
3
2
1
J655
6
A14
A13
A12
A11
(BLK)
GND
5
3
3
(PNK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
DFRRQ-0A
(ORG)
(PPE)
(PPE)
DFRAK-0A
(PPE)
4
5
J52
1
2
3
4
5
6
J21
1
2
3
J16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PS-LRG
RGT-MOT
DEV-MOT
KEY-CTR
(OPTION)
6
GND
HOPSW-1A
GND
TEMP-0A
TNRMT-0A
A9
A8
A10
(BLK)
VDD
2
1
2
1
J723 J723
VDD
+24V
+24V
DDCMA-0A
DCMC-0A
DCMB-0A
DCMD-0A
VDD
SCHOM-0
GND
SCANVREFA
GND
STEP-0
STEP-1
STEP-2
STEP-3
GND
SCNCLK
SCNDIR
SCNRST
11
12
13
J72
(WHI)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(PNK)
6
J621
2
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
+24VA
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
TUP3/EMP3-SW
LCTRM-0A
(PPE)
A15
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
A7
A6
A5
A4
4
3
2
LCFDM-0A
(BLK)
A14
(BLK)
5
4
3
2
1
N.C
DCTIF-0A
+24VA
CHF-0A
(GRY)
PMFED-1A
(BLU)
(PPE)
(YLW)
GND
PMTOP-1A
PMEMP-1A
7
6
A12
TNR-HOP-SW
5
4
3
2
1
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
4
3
2
B9
HOPSW-1A
2
1
J652
1
J654 J654
2
(GRY)
4
3
2
B10
(BLK)
GND
TEMP-0A
TNRMT-0A
+24VA
DUCT-IN-FAN
CHF-0A
PMFED-1A
(BLU)
(YLW)
(PPE)
1
J144
B11
1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
PMFED-1A
GND
PMEMP-1A
PMTOP-1A
(ORG)
VDD
7
6
B5
J625
2
1
J624
1
2
J626
2
A3
3
2
4
1
LCTRM-0A
LCFDM-0A
16
15
14
13
12
A11
B4
EXPON-0A
J333
11
A3
(PPE)
A6
TNR-MOT
SFB-FAN
+24VA
3
2
1
FEED4-SW
B4
3
1
2
B2
2
1
J152
LCBTM-1A
(BLK)
B1
J141 J141
(BLK)
(WHI)
4
5
B3
4
(ORG)
GND
VDD
5
4
T-DOWNSW
A16
(PPE)
(N.C)
3
A13
2
+24V
(BLK)
DG
(BLK)
+12V
(BLK)
PWRDN-1
PMTOP-1A
DG12
GND
B14
PMEMP-1A
B12
LCBTM-1A
VDD
(PPE)
A11
A9
DG5B
3
J660
A11
B13
3
GND
(BLK)
LCF-DOOR-SW
B6
A10
DG5V
J684
2
1
J682
A9
A2
B9
VDD
2
LCDOR-1A
GND
7
(ORG)
(BLU)
A10
DEVF-0A
B11
VDD
B8
GND
2
1
J659
(BLK)
B10
7
A2
1
J731 J731
B9
1
GLV3
A13
A6
GND
A5
LCDOR-1A
A4
(BLK)
A3
(PPE)
A5
EXPEN-0A
B11
+24VA
2
9
B8
(BLK)
J218
10
B7
2
B12
8
B6
J651 J651
N.C
7
B5
1
ATRC-0A
6
B3
1
ARGTC-0A
5
B2
DEV-FAN
+5VB
4
B1
J698 J153
+5VDD
B7
(PPE)
GND
B6
VDD
GND
3
A12
A8
APIKS-0A
2
A9
A1
+3.3V
B3
J323
AGIDS-0A
B5
+24VA
AFEDC-0A
B2
(PPE)
ADSID-1A
1
A8
1
ADRGT-1A
J650
ADEMP-1A
B4
6
ADEND-1A
B1
7
ADTR1-1A
6
ADTR2-1A
(BLK)
ADFED-1A
(WHI)
N.C
A8
GND
VDD
A7
VDD
+5VSW
A5
7
GND
A4
6
GND
A3
7
ADCNT-1A
A2
6
SIDMA-0A
(BLK)
SIDMB-0A
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
GND
SIDMD-0A
VDD
ENDMA-0A
A7
ENDMB-0A
A1
A6
ENDMC-0A
1
STKCL-0A
2
ENDMD-0A
J740
IRCLK-1A
RVS-FAN
GND
4
LTXD-0A
(GRY)
(BLK)
PLFED-1A
LRTS-0A
LRXD-0A
5
(BLK)
(BLK)
4
LCTS-0A
5
(BLK)
4
LSBSY-1A
(GRY)
PLRST-0A
(BLK)
PLFED-1A
(BLK)
5
GND
4
N.C
5
MVDEN-0A
4
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
PLFED-1A
N.C
A5
N.C
A4
N.C
3
+24VA
(PPE)
DG
PLTOP-1A
CMD-0A
3
CBSY-0A
3
CERR-0A
(PPE)
CACK-0A
PLTOP-1A
STS-0A
3
SBSY-0A
3
SACK-0A
(BLK)
VDD
TUP4/EMP4-SW
SERR-0A
(BLU)
SYSRST-0
GND
GND
2
GND
B13
1
EXPON-0
B12
PLTOP-1A
VDD
HTRML-0A
A3
J201
(BLK)
B11
B8
IHSNC-0A
GND
2
IVDEN-0B
HTRMT-0A
(BLK)
(BLU)
HSYNC-0B
(BLK)
GND
HSNC4-0B
GND
(BLK)
IDT0-1A
(BLK)
GND
GND
VDD
B7
IDT2-1A
HTRCK-1A
RVSF-0A
IDT4-1A
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
IDT6-1A
DG36
1
IDT7-1A
(BLK)
HTR-FAN
IDT5-1A
DG36
(YLW)
IDT3-1A
(BLK)
PLEMP-1A
IDT1-1A
+36VA
2
GND
+36VA
(ORG)
1
IDCLK-1A
(ORG)
2
J668
1
(BLK) FUSSW-1A
(YLW)
IHDEN-0A
+5VSW
PLEMP-1A
GND
(BLK)
1
(PPE)
SSSR+-1A
2
(BLK)
GND
(WHI)
A11
1
N.C
(BLU)
A10
2
(BLK)
GND
USSR+-1A
(BLK)
9
(BLK)
(YLW)
PLEMP-1A
J726
A2
2
A1
1
B6
10
STHU--1A
+24VC
8
(BLK)
A2
HTRF-0A
7
STHU+-1A
A1
(BLK)
J637 J637
6
J326
(PPE)
HDD
5
(BLK)
B16
A2
4
THML--1A
J146
3
(BLK)
B15
(ORG)
2
THML+-1A
B14
VDD
1
THMU+-1A
J143 J143
3
THMU--1A
(BLK)
B9
(ORG)
5
(BLK)
B11
VDD
4
(BLK)
J699 J155
1
GND
B8
(PPE)
2
(BLK)
B10
VDD
HTR-MOT
18
EXTSW-1A
B7
J661
DG
J338
PWA-SYS
18
VDD
(BLK)
A1
J505
(PPE)
A14
J501 J501
B6
B5
SSR-SUB
6
J680 J680
9
(PPE)
8
(BLK)
+36VB
GND
(PPE)
LCDOR-1A
6
B13
A1
J335
+36VB
B4
(PPE)
B3
5
B12
DG
N.C
+24VC
N.C
+24VC
N.C
4
(BLK)
3
(BLK)
SSR-U
8
20
6
DCTOF-0A
(PPE)
J507
8
20
(BLK)
2
6
21
+24VA
1
(BLK) DRMTD-0A
2
21
(PPE)
DG
J662
B2
2
DRMTB-0A
ADMBK-0A
(BLK)
J671
1
DRMTA-0A
B1
(BLK) DRMTC-0A
9
9
(BLK)
A8
19
9
GND
GND
7
19
4
(BLK)
ADMON-0A
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
DG36
8
(BLK)
A7
DG36
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
DG36
7
DG36
(BLK)
A6
(BLK)
B12
6
B11
A5
N.C
VDD
7
3
EXITF-0A
(BLK)
2
+24VA
(BLK)
5
17
(PPE)
A4
B10
DG36
17
SCRP-0A
ADUCK-1A
3
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
5
+24VA
4
4
5
(PPE)
A3
4
2
DRCLK-1A
3
1
(BLK)
A2
J509
VDD
DG36
2
(BLK)
(BLK)
1
TRMD-0A
2
2
TRMB-0A
(BLK)
+36VA
1
(BLK)
A1
2
TRMC-0A
(PPE)
PWA-ADU
J329
(BLU)
1
(BLK)
+36VA
4
(RED)
B2
+36VA
(PPE)
4
3
2
1
A8
TRMA-0A
1
22
3
2
1
A7
+36VA
(BLK)
+24V
J217
J672
GND
(BLK)
(BLU)
(RED)
A6
(PPE)
1
(BLK)
DG
+24V
A4
EXPWM-1A
J23
A2
(PPE)
A1
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
NC
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
A7
1
22
2
1
(PPE)
ADU-MOT
22
21
20
7
5
4
3
2
1
J406
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J402
4
3
2
1
J73
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J8
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
(PPE)
(PPE)
(WHI)
A10
J711
GND
(BLK)
VDD
ADTR1-1A
J9
A2
A1
VDD
GND
H.OFF
80
1
J4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J6
5
TNR-EMP-SW
3
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
21
DUCT-OUT-FAN
20
J405
21
EXIT-FAN-MOT
20
B4
VDD
B3
ADTR1-1A
A8
(BLK)
A5
(BLK)
5
2
B8
N.C
SOL3
B1
B7
B14
FAN2ON-0A
1
(BLK)
REVCL-0B
B3
B1
A4
J419
PWA-MOT
4
19
A12
18
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J12
FAN2SP-0A
GND
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
A11
ADSID1A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J403
9
7
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
J407
PWRDN-1
SG5SYS
SG5SYS
5VSYS
5VSYS
SG3SYS
SG3SYS
A3
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLU)
(BLU)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHI)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BWN)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(YLW)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
(BLK)
SIDT1-0A
SIDT3-0A
SIDT5-0A
SIDT7-0A
GND
SDCLK-0
GND
HSNC4-0
SCNT-0
SRTS-0
SRXD-0A
SYSRST-0
EXPOON-0C
SCTS-0A
STXD-0A
GND
HSYNC-0
B62
B61
B60
B59
B58
B57
B56
B55
B54
B53
B52
2
3VSYS
3VSYS
3
19
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
SVDEN-0A
SHDEN-0A
GND
SIDT6-0A
SIDT4-0A
SIDT2-0A
SIDT0-0A
VDD
VDD
ACK64-0
VDD
AD1-1
GND
AD3-1
AD5-1
+3.3V
AD7-1
B51
1
J140
11
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J102
J109
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J108
B62
B61
B60
B59
B58
B57
B56
B55
B54
B53
B52
AD8-1
B50
B49
B48
B47
A2
19
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
B1
40
B51
N.C
N.C
GND
AD10-1
10
18
(BLU)
39
B50
B49
B48
B47
A1
2
J617
GND
(BLK)
GND
(GRY)
38
37
36
35
J420
1
TR1-SW
ADSID1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DASP-0
(GRY)
J421
3
B2
B3
CSA1-0A
(GRY)
AD12-1
B46
B45
B44
8
2
B13
B12
CSA0-0A
(GRY)
34
GND
AD14-1
THMSL
(BLK)
ADR2-1A
(BLU)
B46
B45
B44
THMSU
ATRC-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADR0-1A
(GRY)
33
32
CBE1-0
B43
PWA-MTB
B2
B3
B4
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(GRY)
31
+3.3V
B42
B41
B40
B39
B38
EXIT-SW
17
(BLK)
ARGTC-0A
B11
B5
B6
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADR1-1A
(GRY)
B43
B42
SERR-0
+3.3V
PERR-0
B37
B36
B35
6
VDD
(BLK)
APIKS-0A
B10
B9
B7
B8
B9
B10
N.C
(GRY)
30
B41
B40
LOCK-0
GND
DVSL-0
B34
B33
7
(BLK)
(BLK)
B8
B7
B6
B5
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
HIREQ-1A
(BLU)
29
28
B39
B38
B37
B36
+3.3V
B32
B31
5
17
(BLK)
AGIDS-0A
(BLK)
ADSID-1A
AFEDC-0A
(BLK)
ADRGT-1A
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
GND
(GRY)
(GRY)
N.C
IDACK-0A
(GRY)
27
26
25
24
B35
IDRY-0
GND
CBE2-0
4
B4
B5
B6
(BLK)
ADEND-1A
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
(BLK)
(GRY)
23
B34
B33
3
17
16
15
(BLK)
ADTR1-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADTTR2-1A
ADEMP-1A
(BLK)
ADFED-1A
(BLK)
VDD
(BLK)
(BLK)
+5VSW
N.C
(BLK)
GND
A4
A5
GND
(GRY)
22
21
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
CN2
2
VDD
GND
ADEMP-1A
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
A11
A10
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DIOWR-0A
(GRY)
B32
AD17-1
+3.3V
AD19-1
AD21-1
GND
AD23-1
CBE3-0
+3.3V
AD25-1
AD27-1
GND
AD29-1
AD31-1
VDD
SCSREQ-0
GND
PCICLK5
GND
PCICLK4
GND
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
1
(BLK)
16
(BLK)
(BLK)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
(BLK)
GND
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
(BLK)
GND
(GRY)
20
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
GND
N.C
LANREQ-0
N.C
N.C
SCSINT-0A
VDD
VDD
N.C
PS-ACC
16
15
VDD
SIDMD0A
SIDMB0A
SIDMC0A
SIDMA0A
+24V
ENDMD0A
A4
A5
(BLK)
ADCNT-1A
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A11
A12
(PPE)
IDREQ-1A
(BLU)
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J106
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B9
15
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
7
6
(BLK)
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
SIDMA-0A
(BLK)
SIDMD-0A
SIDMB-0A
(BLK)
SIDMA-0A
A4
A3
A13
A14
N.C
(GRY)
IOCRDY-1A
GND
(GRY)
(GRY)
DATA15-1A
(GRY)
GND
DATA0-1A
(GRY)
DIORD-0A
DATA14-1A
(BLU)
(BLU)
DATA1-1A
(GRY)
(GRY)
DATA2-1A
DATA13-1A
(GRY)
DATA12-1A
(GRY)
DATA4-1A
(GRY)
DATA3-1A
DATA10-1A
(GRY)
DATA11-1A
DATA5-1A
(GRY)
(BLU)
DATA9-1A
(GRY)
DATA6-1A
(GRY)
(BLU)
DATA8-1A
(GRY)
(GRY)
GND
DATA7-1A
(GRY)
IDRST-0A
(YLW)
B15
B14
J422
SID-SW
J225 CN1
(BLK)
(BLK)
SIDMB-0A
A2
A1
J516 J516
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J130
B1
(BLK)
B1
FAN2SP-0A
1
1
GND
GLV2
ADEMP-1A
2
(BLK)
J219
(BLK)
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J227
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
VDD
LED5V
(BLK)
B3
1
14
1
(BLK)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
B2
B13
J17
J616
GLV4
6
14
GLV1
ENDMB0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
+5VB
+5VB
DG5B
DG5B
PPCKD-1
PPCKD-0
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
PDTD0-1A
GND
LDVPD-1A
DG5B
CALOD-0A
SCRST-1D
POSD-1A
N.C
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
DG5B
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
DG5B
DG5B
PPCKD-1
PPCKD-0
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
PDTD0-1A
GND
LDVPD-1A
DG5B
CALOD-0A
SCRST-1D
POSD-1A
N.C
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
5
CPRST-0A
(BLK)
6
3
2
5
(BLK)
(GRY)
TRB-MOT
2
B25
3
EMP-SW
B24
2
VDD
B23
1
(BLK)
2
13
B22
J620
1
J206
1
13
(WHI)
A6
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J209
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
(WHI)
(WHI)
B3
DRM-MOT
J615
GND
8
(YLW)
GLV1D-1
5
(GRY)
B21
(WHI)
GLV0D1
SIDMD0A
GND
(RED)
GLV1B-1
(BLK)
BMAD11-0
GLV0B-1
12
BMAD10-0
J216
12
(WHI)
7
(WHI)
SIDMB0A
(WHI)
(GRY)
6
B20
GLV1A-1
(BLK)
BMAD9-0
5
B19
(BWN)
4
(WHI)
B18
(WHI)
GLV0A-1
11
BMAD8-0
4
(ORG)
GLV1C-1
10
BMAD7-0
(WHI)
B17
GLV0C-1
11
BMAD6-0
(WHI)
3
10
(GRY)
2
B16
SIDMC0A
BMDA5-0
1
B15
(BLK)
(ORG)
B14
3
BMDA4-0
B11
SIDMA0A
BMAD3-0
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
BMAD2-0
(GRY)
J212
(RED)
9
(GRY)
B13
(N.C.)
FAN-0A
9
BMAD1-0
FANSP-1A
+24V
BMAD0-0
(GRY)
3
+24V
(RED)
(GRY)
2
8
BMSW2-0
1
8
(GRY)
B10
J213
ENDMD0A
BMSW1-0
B9
(BLK)
(GRY)
B8
(BLK)
B7
7
BMSW0-0
6
(GRY)
7
B5
6
BMRST-0
ENDMC0A
B4
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
A7
B3
5
(GRY)
B2
ENDMA0A
(GRY)
9
(BLK)
(GRY)
8
(BLK)
5
J233 J233
7
(BLK)
4
(GRY)
B1
6
(BLK)
+24V
GND
4
(RED)
GND
(GRY)
A25
5
A8
(GRY)
A24
3
A9
VDD
A23
(BLK)
A10
(GRY)
A22
(BLK)
3
VDD
A21
2
GND
(GRY)
A20
1
(BLK)
BMDA7-0
J202
A11
BMDA6-0
(GRY)
A19
A12
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
A18
2
(GRY)
A17
1
BMDA4-0
ADEND-1A
BMDA3-0
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
2
2
BMDA2-0
SID-MOT
2
(GRY)
A16
1
4
BMDA1-0
J614
4
(GRY)
16
4
5
6
BMDA0-0
15
+24V
ENDMB0A
6
WLL-0A
SNSCK-1A
(GRY)
A13
13
(BLK)
8
A62
J18
4
10
8
(WHI)
(GRY)
A12
12
5
12
10
WUL-0A
A11
14
3
BMSW1-0
12
(WHI)
A9
END-MOT
BMSW0-0
14
GND
A8
ENDMC0A
(GRY)
16
14
(GRY)
A10
9
(BLK)
BMRST-0
18
16
BUSY-0A
11
ENDMA0A
(GRY)
18
DAWR-0A
10
(BLK)
(GRY)
20
OFFST-0A
A7
2
(GRY)
20
(GRY)
(GRY)
A6
4
(GRY)
19
(GRY)
A5
4
GND
17
19
DASC1-0A
+24V
(GRY)
15
17
DASCO-1A
(GRY)
8
(RED)
(GRY)
15
OUTAB-0
(GRY)
7
1
(GRY)
13
(GRY)
A4
6
J613
GND
9
11
13
OUTAB-1
5
3
(GRY)
9
11
(GRY)
A3
4
3
VDD
7
BMCK-0
3
GND
VDD
(GRY)
7
BMCK-1
(GRY)
A2
(BLK)
BMDA7-0
(GRY)
5
(GRY)
A1
3
(GRY)
5
J211
2
BMDA6-0
3
VDD
1
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
3
1
VDD
(GRY)
11
SIDMD-0A
2
1
STKCL-0A
1
10
A13
B9
9
A14
B8
8
3
J414
B7
TR2-SW
B6
4
1
B5
2
2
B4
(BLK)
B3
7
2
(GRY)
29
B2
5
1
BMDA4-0
27
29
B1
6
ADEND-1A
(GRY)
27
A9
5
(BLK)
BMDA3-0
25
DG5B
GND
7
2
(GRY)
25
4
1
BMDA2-0
1
23
WRLVD-1
LTXD-0A
VDD
A8
END-SW
(GRY)
23
LRTS-0A
4
6
BMDA1-0
21
(ORG)
LRXD-0A
8
3
A7
6
2
PWA-PLG
LCTS-0A
3
J416
BMDA0-0
(GRY)
21
5
LSBSY-1A
3
A6
J618
A5
9
VDD
(WHI)
19
PLRST-0A
(BLK)
A4
2
(BLK)
GND
19
GND
(BLK)
A3
10
J713 J713
(WHI)
17
4
MVDEN-0A
ADTR2-1A
A2
1
VDD
GND
(WHI)
17
PWA-LDR
11
(BLK)
(WHI)
15
J231
GND
A1
J612
BMAD11-0
13
15
(WHI)
4
(WHI)
9
11
13
GND
LAN-ADP(OPTION)
(BLK)
3
BMAD10-0
9
11
B2
(BLK)
5
BMAD9-0
(GRY)
7
B12
(YEL)
N.C
(ORG)
5
7
B4
(BLK)
N.C
BMAD8-0
5
A61
(BLK)
AFEDC0A
BMAD7-0
3
N.C
(YEL)
(BLK)
(GRY)
1
N.C
(PPE)
2
BMAD6-0
2
1
B1
(PPE)
1
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
4
2
B11
B5
1
BMDA4-0
(GRY)
4
4
PWA-LDR
J417
(GRY)
3
GND
B4
2
BMAD3-0
6
3
PWA-LDR
(GRY)
+24V
BMAD2-0
(GRY)
8
6
(WHI)
J231
(BLK)
PWRDN-1
(BLK)
(GRY)
8
BILVD-1
J231
DG
2
BMAD1-0
10
3
CONTROL PANEL
9
J610
(GRY)
RTS0-0A
11
(WHI)
1
BMAD0-0
(BLK)
SCSI (OPTION)
10
+24V
ARGTC0A
(GRY)
10
(BLK)
PWA-SLG
(BLK)
(BLK)
BMSW2-0
12
B5
A9
DG12V
1
SNSCK-1A
(GRY)
14
12
2
A10
(WHI)
J415
WLL-0A
(GRY)
16
14
(WHI)
A8
8
+12V
+24V
(WHI)
16
(WHI)
A7
(BLK)
(BLK)
WUL-0A
18
DG5B
7
GND
J609
(WHI)
20
18
+5VB
A6
(PNK)
1
GND
22
20
2
6
(BLK)
+3.3V
2
(GRY)
A60
5
A5
(BLK)
GND
3
BUSY-0A
22
A62
A4
GND
+24V
OFFST-0A
(GRY)
24
B10
4
STKCL0A
DAWR-0A
(GRY)
CTS0-0A
3
A3
(YLW)
(WHI)
(GRY)
(BLK)
2
A2
VDD
(WHI)
DASC1-0A
24
B6
A1
(YLW)
+24V
DASCO-1A
(GRY)
26
1
1
VDD
(BLK)
OUTAB-0
(GRY)
26
1
J10
4
(GRY)
A59
FAN2ON-0A
J73
5
OUTAB-1
28
VDD
A series
+24V
(GRY)
30
28
A61
GND
REVCL0B
BMCK-0
30
B9
APS6-0
(BWN)
BMCK-1
(GRY)
J232 J232
B7
B12
6
(GRY)
J227
VDD
AGIDS0A
VDD
(WHI)
J37
(BWN)
VDD
(GRY)
+5VB
B10
7
(ORG)
J207
NC
A58
LT series
VDD
NC
REQ64-0
NC
A60
NC
B8
NC
RXD0-1A
(GRY)
TXD0-11A
NC
GND
(BLK)
APS4-0
(BLK)
VDD
A57
J35
A59
(GRY)
B7
(GRY)
B8
GND
(BLK)
(GRY)
B9
(GRY)
30
GND
30
(GRY)
A56
(GRY)
VDD
FAN3ON-0A
A58
(GRY)
B6
(GRY)
FAN3SP-0A
B10
(GRY)
GND
29
APS1-0
(WHI)
(GRY)
A55
VDD
AD0-1
(GRY)
AD2-1
GND
A57
(GRY)
B5
(GRY)
+5VB
UD3-1A
(BLK)
(GRY)
29
UD2-1A
(BLK)
(GRY)
B11
(GRY)
28
FAN1ON-0A
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
FAN1SP-0A
+5VB
GND
DG5B
APS3-0
A54
(PPE)
A56
(PPE)
B4
(PPE)
28
UD1-1A
(BLK)
(PPE)
B12
(PPE)
27
(PPE)
GND
(WHI)
APS4-0
DG5B
A53
VDD
(PPE)
GND
(PPE)
A55
(PPE)
B3
(PPE)
27
UD0-1A
(BLK)
(PPE)
B13
(PPE)
26
A52
(PPE)
AD4-1
VDD
AD6-1
J34
A54
APS2-0
B2
VDD
B1
FAN3ON-0A
26
GND
(BLK)
A51
(PPE)
B14
+3.3V
A50
A49
A48
GND
A53
A52
CBE0-0
N.C
N.C
APS5-0
B15
LCDEN-1A
(BLK)
A15
A51
A50
VDD
25
XSCL-1A
(BLK)
A14
A13
A47
A46
A45
FAN3SP-0A
(WHI)
LP-1A
(BLK)
A49
AD9-1
GND
AD11-1
J36
(WHI)
WF-1A
(BLK)
A12
A48
A47
(PPE)
PPCKD-1
YD-1A
(BLK)
A11
A10
J35
PPCKD-0
INVGND
(BLK)
A44
A43
(PPE)
GND
25
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
BZON-0A
(BLK)
A46
AD13-1
GND
24
23
22
21
20
19
A6
A9
A45
APS3-0
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
18
CPPOW-1A
(BLK)
A8
VDD
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
(WHI)
(WHI)
A7
A8
J34
24
23
22
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
17
Personal Comp.
21
20
19
18
17
J231
16
1
(WHI)
A42
2
8
+3.3V
7
AD15-1
3
A44
4
6
A7
5
5
PDTD0-1A
LDCLK-1A
(BLK)
4
16
LDDAT-1A
(BLK)
6
A9
7
15
2
(WHI)
8
(WHI)
J31
1
LDVPD-1A
J31
GND
A41
1
A43
2
4
A6
3
15
LDLTH-1A
(BLK)
2
A10
4
14
J40
1
(WHI)
J40
DG5B
A40
3
PAR-1
1
14
PWA-LDR
A42
3
A5
(GRY)
8
A11
A39
(GRY)
GND
SBO-0
(GRY)
A41
(GRY)
A4
(GRY)
13
LDON1-0A
(BLK)
(GRY)
2
13
LDON0-0A
(BLK)
A38
(GRY)
A12
A40
(WHI)
12
A3
(BLK)
(WHI)
SG5
(BLK)
A37
APS2-0
(WHI)
A13
SDONE-1
A36
A35
(RED)
CALOD-0A
11
A39
+3.3V
STOP-0
GND
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
(BLK)
SCRST-1D
(WHI)
A2
A38
A37
TRDY-0
GND
FRAME-0
+3.3V
AD16-1
AD18-1
(RED)
12
POSD-1A
VDD
(BLK)
A1
J105
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A28
A27
FAN1SP-0A
11
A14
INV5V
(PPE)
8
A30
GND
A26
FAN3ON-0A
10
TXD3-1A
(WHI)
7
A29
AD20-1
AD22-1
A25
A24
GND
10
RXD3-1A
(WHI)
6
A28
+3.3V
A23
FAN3SP-0A
A15
RTS3-0A
(WHI)
5
4
A27
A26
SCSID-1
AD24-1
APS1-0
9
DSR3-0A
(WHI)
N.C
DTR3-0A
(WHI)
3
A25
VDD
(WHI)
J733
9
3
2
7
6
4
CTS3-0A
(WHI)
2
1
VDD
N.C
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J227
30
PCCNT3-0A
(WHI)
J32
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
8
1
5
J33
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
DG5B
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
29
28
FAN1ON-0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J208
30
29
(WHI)
(WHI)
FAN-SYS
+5VB
DG5B
1
28
2
A22
3
GND
VDD
A24
GND
GND
SCHOM-0
(WHI)
J35
27
1
(WHI)
2
DG5B
3
27
VDD
A21
SCHOM-0
A23
GND
J103
J34
J120
1
26
VDD
26
2
A20
3
AD26-1
SCHOM-0
25
1
(WHI)
2
PPCKD-1
3
25
GND
A19
VDD
AD28-1
SCHOM-0
+3.3V
GND
A22
1
A21
2
24
3
(WHI)
VDD
(WHI)
SCHOM-0
PPCKD-0
1
DG5B
GND
24
A18
2
A20
3
23
1
(WHI)
2
PDTD7-1A
3
23
A17
VDD
AD30-1
A16
J32
LANID-1
GND
SCHOM-0
A19
A18
GND
22
3
A15
VDD
22
(BLK)
A17
A14
A13
J33
21
2
SCSGNT-0
VDD
PRST-0
J37
(WHI)
FANSPD-0
GND
A16
A15
SCHOM-0
(WHI)
20
1
J110
GND
PDTD6-1A
(WHI)
+24V
J36
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
19
(RED)
J35
21
20
19
18
1
(WHI)
2
(WHI)
3
PDTD3-1A
1
PDTD2-1A
1
18
2
A12
2
PWRON2-1
3
GND
GND
2
A14
J19
1
A13
1
A12
J19
17
2
16
3
15
1
(WHI)
2
(WHI)
3
(WHI)
A11
2
PDTD0-1A
A9
A8
A10
1
GND
LANGNT-0
A7
2
LDVPD-1A
A11
A10
VDD
A6
1
17
14
13
12
N.C
VDD
N.C
1
16
(WHI)
(WHI)
A9
2
15
DG5B
CALOD-0A
(WHI)
APS4
14
13
12
SCRST-1D
3
1
7
APS1-0
FED-CLT
B1
LANINT-0A
1
2
3
RGT-CLT
B2
2
(PPE)
4
6
(PPE)
8
B3
A8
3
(PPE)
5
(PPE)
VDD
1
B4
A7
1
(PPE)
(PPE)
GND
2
B5
A6
APS3
VDD
(PPE)
APS2-0
1
B6
2
3
5
J603
B7
9
3
FAN3ON-0A
6
4
STK-CLT
B8
11
1
FAN3SP-0A
7
3
REV-CLT
B9
GND
J19
2
(BLK)
B10
10
+24V
GND
(PPE)
2
B11
2
SCHOM-0
(PPE)
1
B12
(WHI)
3
(PPE)
J604
B13
(WHI)
J34
GND
GID-SOL
B14
(WHI)
APS1
1
APS1-0
2
B15
N.C
APS2
1
VDD
1
B16
GND
2
1
(PPE)
J605
B17
POSD-1A
+24V
2
2
VDD
VDD
B18
DDISD-1A
J19
3
J10
(YLW)
B19
GND
VDD
8
(PPE)
2
B20
9
+24V
GND
(PPE)
J31
1
(WHI)
FAN1ON-0A
FED-SW
B21
(GRY)
11
CN2
APS6
SCHOM-0
(PPE)
J31
FAN1SP-0A
ADFED-1A
B22
A5
(WHI)
FAN2ON-0A
(WHI)
B23
A4
1
GND
1
9
J215
10
C
2
1
2
4
GND
B24
A3
APS5
J32
3
(BLK)
B25
VDD
3
2
(BLK)
FAN2SP-0A
3
A1
A5
APS4
VDD
APS2-0
3
J606
A2
8
J32
VDD
4
2
10
A4
(WHI)
1
3
J40
1
L SRA-21T-3
1
A5
SMPD0-1A
APS3
GND
J40
(LAMP)
11
A6
GND
(BLK)
K
VDD
A3
8
SLG-FAN
2
SCHOM-0
(RED)
(BLK-WHILINE)
ADRGT-1A
A7
A2
3
(RED)
EXPO-OUT- L
(YLW)
A8
A4
+24V
J33
EXPO-OUT+
(BLK)
(WHI)
A9
7
APS1
FAN1ON-0A
EXPO-OUT-
2
A10
(WHI)
J33
1
(BLK)
RGT-SW
A11
SMP1-1D
J17
1
EXPO-OUT+
12
A12
7
A1
APS2
FAN1SP-0A
PWA-SDV
2
13
A13
N.C
OPT-FAN1
2
(BLU)
J57
2
GND
A14
A3
OPT-FAN2
1
MOT-A
J57
+24V
A15
GND
FAN2ON-0A
(RED)
(BLK)
A16
6
CN1
+24V
FAN2SP-0A
1
MOT-D
(BLK)
A17
N.C
N.C
N.C
SLG-FAN
1
MOT-C
3
A18
6
J1
OPT-FAN1
2
MOT-B
1
A19
A2
A1
2
J607
A20
5
4
3
J18
3
TR-CLT
A21
GND
4
14
A22
(WHI)
+24V
5
ATRC0A
A23
DG5B
2
OPT-FAN2
3
2
A24
(WHI)
(WHI)
1
J227
SCN-MOT
J413
A25
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
B
5
4
3
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
PWA-CCD
(BLK)
E
2
D
1
J210
A
2
J608
PWA-SNS
1
8
J56
MOT-E
CRG1
THERMOSTAT
Q
STO-21-250N
M
(BLK)
A
J325
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
N.C
A6
A7
A10
A8
A11
B1
B2
B5
N.C
B6
N.C
B7
B8
B
C
J330
B15
B14
B13
B12
B8
PWA-LGC
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
A15
B2
A14
B1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A3
A2
A4
D
A6
A10
A11
A9
A12
A13
A14
DG
A14
A15
E
B6
J226
1
2
LSU-FAN
GND
(N.C.)
F
7. HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS
7. 2 DC Wire Harness
(1) 6570 / 4580
1
2
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DG
+24V
(RED)
+24V
(RED)
(BLK)
DG
(BLK)
PMBRK-0A
(BWN)
PMON-0A
(BLU)
PMOK-0A
(ORG)
PMCLK-1A
(YLW)
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
DRV-POL
CN2
M
4
5
6
7
3
2
1
PSTPS-1
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
8
T-FULL-SW
1
2
3
3
2
1
J653
2
1
J709
3
2
1
J705 J705
VDD
HVDDC-0A
DG
+24VB
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
VDD
GND
TFUSW-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
AUGMT-0A
AUGMT-1A
GND
PSTPS-1
VDD
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
HVDAC-0A
(BLK)
N.C
HVDVR-1A
(BLK)
GND
TRCS2-0A
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
B1
A13
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
(BLK)
PLFDC-0A
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
PUTRM-0A
PMTRM-1A
PMTRM-0A
PLTRM-1A
PLTRM-0A
PURGC-0A
+24VC
PMRGC-0A
+24VC
PLRGC-0A
+24VC
+36VA
+36VA
DG36
DG36
PFMCK-1A
VDD
GND
PFMON-0A
GND
CPSW2-0
LCTRM-0A
LCTRM-1A
NC
(PPE)
PUTRM-1A
A9
A12
A13
A14
3
2
1
J148
3
2
PWA-IPC
(OPTION)
PSTP3-SW
FEED2-SW
27
28
29
30
2
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
1
PFP-MOT
RGT4-CLT
RGT3-CLT
RGT2-CLT
TR4-MOT
TR3-MOT
5
4
3
2
J692
2
1
J691
2
1
J690
2
1
J689
2
1
J688
2
1
J687
2
1
A11
1
(RED)
(BWN)
A10
CN1
TR2-MOT
FD2-CLT
GND
PMRGT-1A
1
A6
J686
2
1
J702
FD3-CLT
9
8
10
(PNK)
J150
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(BLK)
(WHI)
(YLW)
GND
VDD
IPRRST-0A
OE
GND
1/O7
1/O5
1/O3
1/O1
AD7
AD5
AD3
AD1
VDD
GND
IPCSW-0
VDD
CSIP2-0A
WE
GND
1/O6
1/O4
1/O2
1/O0
AD6
AD4
AD2
AD0
VDD
GND
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J327
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
(PPE)
J693 J693
LCFDM-0A
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
SFFED-1A
SFBS3-1A
SFBS2-1A
2
2
LCTRM-0A
(BLK)
SFBS0-1A
1
(BLK)
SFBSW-1A
1
(BLK)
+24VC
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBS1-1A
(BLK)
LCLED-1A
(BLK)
GND
LCKEY-1A
(BLK)
VDD
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
LCEMP-1A
(BLK)
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
LCTOP-1A
(BLK)
PURGT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
LCBTM-1A
LCFED-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
4
3
2
1
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A8
A9
LCSET-1A
GND
(BLK)
LCEMP-1A
LCKEY-1A
LCLED-1A
SFBSL-0A
+24VC
SFBSW-1A
SFBS0-1A
SFBS1-1A
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
VDD
VDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
(YLW)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
VDD
(YLW)
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
LCTOP-1A
(BLK)
N.C
LCFED-1A
(PPE)
(BLK)
(ORG)
VDD
VDD
GND
(PPE)
(YLW)
PURGT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
B14
B13
B12
B11
B4
B3
A11
A9
A6
A2
B1
A7
A4
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B2
A14
A13
A12
A10
A8
A5
A3
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B11
B12
A4
A6
A9
A13
B14
A8
A11
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B13
A1
A2
A3
A5
A7
A10
A12
A14
2
1
LCF-SET-SW
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
SFBS1-1A
LCFDM-1A
LCTRM-1A
GND
SFBS0-1A
(BLK)
GND
VDD
SFBSW-1A
+24VC
SFBSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
LCLED-1A
GND
LCKEY-1A
(BLK)
GND
VDD
LCEMP-1A
GND
VDD
LCTOP-1A
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
GND
VDD
LCFED-1A
(PPE)
PSTP2-SW
(PPE)
(BLK)
J681 J681
3
1
2
J685
2
1
J683
3
1
2
1
2
J721
1
5
4
3
2
5
1
2
3
4
LCKEY-1A
LCLED-1A
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
SFBS1-1A
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
PFP-CST-L-SW
PFP-CST-M-SW
PFP-CST-U-SW
PS-HVT-TM
LCF-FED-MOT
SFBS0-1A
(BLK)
SFB-SW
MANUAL-SOL
J720 J720
3
1
2
J719
2
1
J718
2
3
1
LCF-EMP-SW
LCF-TOP-SW
LCF-FEED-SW
J717 J717
3
1
2
J716
3
1
2
J715
2
3
1
J714
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
J696
1
2
3
J695
1
2
3
J694
J657
1
5
4
3
2
J646
2
1
3
J1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
PCSTL-1A
GND
VDD
PCSTM-1A
GND
VDD
PCSTU-1A
GND
+24VB
DG
HVTM-0A
(BLK) HVMVR-1A
HVTT-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
HVTBB-0A
HVTVR-1A
(BLK)
PWA-SFB
PWA-LCF
LCF-TRAY-MET
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J337
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J324
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
DFRQ-0A
DFCNT-0A
DFRXD-0A
GND
DFTXD-0A
GND
DFAK-0A
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J331
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J332
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
GND
EXCSW-0A
VDD
GND
TRNES-0A
VDD
J637 J637
STKSL-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
CLMTA-0A
CLMTB-0A
DRTH-0A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
CTDVR-1A
CTDS-1A
VDD
GND
+24VB
RSTSW-0A
FURMT-0A
FURMT-1A
+24VB
ATSVR-1A
ATS-1A
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DEVSW-0A
GND
+24VB
CTRON-0A
CTRCN-1A
GND
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
ATS-1A
ATSVR-1A
+24VB
FURMT-1A
FURMT-0A
RSTSW-0A
+24VB
GND
VDD
CTDS-1A
CTDVR-1A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
DRTH-0A
CLMTB-0A
CLMTA-0A
+24VB
ERSLP-00A
GND
MCLSW-0A
GND
CTRCN-1A
CTRON-0A
+24VB
GND
DEVSW-0A
N.C
(BLK)
+24VB
A15
A16
VDD
TRNES-0A
GND
VDD
EXCSW-0A
GND
N.C
(BLK)
ERSLP-00A
6
5
4
3
2
1
J675 J675
1
2
3
4
5
6
VDD
TRNSW-0A
GND
+24VA
N.C
(BLK)
GND
5
4
3
2
1
J638 J638
1
2
3
4
5
N.C
(PPE)
MCLSW-0A
N.C
(BLK)
TRNSW-0A
+24VA
(BLK)
GND
N.C
(BLK)
+24VA
ADUF-0A
(BLK)
STKSL-0A
+24VG
PWDN
GND
GND
VDD
VDD
DG36
DG36
+36VB
+36VA
DG
DG
DG
+24VC
+24VB
+24VA
(WHI)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(YLW)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(ORG)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
J636
1
2
3
J640
1
2
3
J641
1
2
3
J639
1
2
STAK-SND
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
12
13
14
11
12
13
14
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
2
J729 J729
1
2
J633 J633
2
1
J628 J628
2
1
J512 J512
9
10
9
7
6
5
4
15
1
3
2
10
7
6
5
4
15
1
3
2
J728 J728
6
5
4
3
2
1
J631 J631
RVS-EXIT-SW
EXIT-COVER-SW
RVS-SW
MCLSW-0A
14
13
12
11
10
9
J729
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
3
4
B14
B17
B16
B15
TOTAL-CTR
DEV-SW
1
6
2
3
5
4
J632
1
2
J730
THMS
CLN-MOT
ERS-300
CLN-M-SW
1
2
3
1
J418
B
A
MAIN-SW
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(PPE)
(RED)
(PPE)
2
1
J60
1
2
J634
2
1
J635
B
A
J629 J629
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(RED)
(RED)
(BWN)
(BLK)
(WHI)
(PPE)
FUR-MOT
GND
ATSSW-1
GND
ATS-1A
ATSVR-1A
+24VB
GND
VDD
CTDS-1A
CTDVR-1A
GND
CLSW1-0
GND
DRTH-0A
CLMTB-0A
CLMTA-0A
+24VB
ERSLP-00A
GND
GND
DCM
GND
GND
36V
+12V
+12G
EXPO-OUT+
IQC
EXPO-OUT-
N.C
ATS
3
2
1
J51
(BLU)
(YLW)
(ORG)
(RED)
(BLK)
36V
HOME SWICH
4
3
2
1
J71
5
4
3
2
1
J50
PWB-F-CBL-300
(BLK)
GND
VDD
GND
+5VA
GND
+3.3V
80
1
J1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
7
AUG-MOT
VDD
(BLK)
1
2
3
4
5
J648
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(PPE)
+24VC
2
9
8
10
VDD
(WHI)
(BLK)
TUP2/EMP2-SW
J328
1
2
3
(BLK)
PMFDC-0A
1
J701
FD4-CLT
(RED)
(BWN)
7
VDD
GND
4
3
2
J204
8
7
6
(PPE)
+24VC
2
1
GND
PMRGT-1A
7
6
(GRY)
(PPE)
(BLU)
A9
A8
A10
(BLK)
B9
(BLK)
B8
VDD
B10
GND
B7
GND
A7
(PPE)
2
1
C
B9
J712
GND
A6
A5
(BLK)
PUFDC-0A
J700
9
8
10
(PNK)
6
PUFED-1A
PUTOP-1A
GND
1
J144
PSTP4-SW
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
B6
(BLK)
2
1
B11
PS-HVT-DB
VDD
TRCS2-0A
A11
A10
(PPE)
+24VC
9
8
10
VDD
(WHI)
(BLK)
5
4
3
2
(YLW)
(ORG)
3
2
1
J148
3
FEED3-SW
A10
(BLK)
GND
(BLK)
A4
A3
(BLK)
GND
7
GND
VDD
5
4
3
2
PUEMP-1A
VDD
(RED)
GND
2
1
J150
B5
(WHI)
4
5
TRCS1-1A
(BLK)
A9
A8
(BLK)
PMRGT-1A
7
6
(GRY)
(PPE)
(BLU)
1
(BWN)
PLRGT-1A
B4
(YLW)
5
4
VDD
TCMTD-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
A7
(BLK)
VDD
6
PUFED-1A
PUTOP-1A
GND
1
J141 J141
(PNK)
VDD
B3
LCSET-1A
A
B
2
1
J724 J724
B1
3
GND
(BLK)
6
7
TCMTA-0A
(BLK)
GND
5
4
3
2
(YLW)
(ORG)
9
10
(BLK)
GND
B2
2
TRCS1-1A
(YLW)
3
2
(BLK)
(BLK)
VDD
5
4
3
2
PUEMP-1A
VDD
9
10
8
7
6
B1
1
VDD
(WHI)
TCMTD-0A
8
A2
(BLK)
PUFED-1A
1
(RED)
8
7
6
A13
J623
3
2
1
(PPE)
1
J549 J705
A6
A5
A1
J336
(BLK)
PUTOP-1A
N.C
(BLK)
GND
1
J697 J153
GND
(BWN)
(PNK)
(BLK)
(WHI)
VDD
4
4
(PNK)
(BLK)
B10
RGT-SW
1
J622
TCMTA-0A
RGTD-0A
(BLK)
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
(BLK)
PUEMP-1A
9
10
PLRGT-1A
VDD
GND
5
A12
TR-SEP-SW
TR-TCH-SW
TRB-CAM-MOT
(RED)
RGTB-0A
(BLK)
+24VA
RGTA-0A
(BLK)
RGTC-0A
(PPE)
(BLK)
+24VA
J341
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B9
B8
B10
(PPE)
VDD
9
10
8
7
6
5
A1
2
N.C
DEVBK-0A
(PPE)
(BLK)
DEVON-0A
(BLK)
DEVCK-1A
(BLK)
VDD
DG
(BLK)
GND
DG
(BLK)
(BLK)
+24VA
(PPE)
(BLK)
+24VA
(PPE)
B4
B3
B2
B1
(BLK)
GND
8
7
6
(WHI)
A11
6
GND
(BLK)
N.C
+24VA
KCTRC-1A
(BLK)
CTRON-0A
(BLK)
B7
B6
(BLK)
PLRGT-1A
VDD
A12
5
1
(ORG)
A15
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
(BLK)
VDD
5
A13
4
3
2
1
J706
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J656
4
3
2
1
J655
6
A14
A13
A12
A11
(BLK)
GND
5
3
3
(PNK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
DFRRQ-0A
(ORG)
(PPE)
(PPE)
DFRAK-0A
(PPE)
4
5
J52
1
2
3
4
5
6
J21
1
2
3
J16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PS-LRG
RGT-MOT
DEV-MOT
KEY-CTR
(OPTION)
6
GND
HOPSW-1A
GND
TEMP-0A
TNRMT-0A
A9
A8
A10
(BLK)
VDD
2
1
2
1
J723 J723
VDD
+24V
+24V
DDCMA-0A
DCMC-0A
DCMB-0A
DCMD-0A
VDD
SCHOM-0
GND
SCANVREFA
GND
STEP-0
STEP-1
STEP-2
STEP-3
GND
SCNCLK
SCNDIR
SCNRST
11
12
13
J72
(WHI)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
(PNK)
6
J621
2
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
+24VA
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
TUP3/EMP3-SW
LCTRM-0A
(PPE)
A15
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
A7
A6
A5
A4
4
3
2
LCFDM-0A
(BLK)
A14
(BLK)
5
4
3
2
1
N.C
DCTIF-0A
+24VA
CHF-0A
(GRY)
PMFED-1A
(BLU)
(PPE)
(YLW)
GND
PMTOP-1A
PMEMP-1A
7
6
A12
TNR-HOP-SW
5
4
3
2
1
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
4
3
2
B9
HOPSW-1A
2
1
J652
1
J654 J654
2
(GRY)
4
3
2
B10
(BLK)
GND
TEMP-0A
TNRMT-0A
+24VA
DUCT-IN-FAN
CHF-0A
PMFED-1A
(BLU)
(YLW)
(PPE)
1
J144
B11
1
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
PMFED-1A
GND
PMEMP-1A
PMTOP-1A
(ORG)
VDD
7
6
B5
J625
2
1
J624
1
2
J626
2
A3
3
2
4
1
LCTRM-0A
LCFDM-0A
16
15
14
13
12
A11
B4
EXPON-0A
J333
11
A3
(PPE)
A6
TNR-MOT
SFB-FAN
+24VA
3
2
1
FEED4-SW
B4
3
1
2
B2
2
1
J152
LCBTM-1A
(BLK)
B1
J141 J141
(BLK)
(WHI)
4
5
B3
4
(ORG)
GND
VDD
5
4
T-DOWNSW
A16
(PPE)
(N.C)
3
A13
2
+24V
(BLK)
DG
(BLK)
+12V
(BLK)
PWRDN-1
PMTOP-1A
DG12
GND
B14
PMEMP-1A
B12
LCBTM-1A
VDD
(PPE)
A11
A9
DG5B
3
J660
A11
B13
3
GND
(BLK)
LCF-DOOR-SW
B6
A10
DG5V
J684
2
1
J682
A9
A2
B9
VDD
2
LCDOR-1A
GND
7
(ORG)
(BLU)
A10
DEVF-0A
B11
VDD
B8
GND
2
1
J659
(BLK)
B10
7
A2
1
J731 J731
B9
1
GLV3
A13
A6
GND
A5
LCDOR-1A
A4
(BLK)
A3
(PPE)
A5
EXPEN-0A
B11
+24VA
2
9
B8
(BLK)
J218
10
B7
2
B12
8
B6
J651 J651
N.C
7
B5
1
ATRC-0A
6
B3
1
ARGTC-0A
5
B2
DEV-FAN
+5VB
4
B1
J698 J153
+5VDD
B7
(PPE)
GND
B6
VDD
GND
3
A12
A8
APIKS-0A
2
A9
A1
+3.3V
B3
J323
AGIDS-0A
B5
+24VA
AFEDC-0A
B2
(PPE)
ADSID-1A
1
A8
1
ADRGT-1A
J650
ADEMP-1A
B4
6
ADEND-1A
B1
7
ADTR1-1A
6
ADTR2-1A
(BLK)
ADFED-1A
(WHI)
N.C
A8
GND
VDD
A7
VDD
+5VSW
A5
7
GND
A4
6
GND
A3
7
ADCNT-1A
A2
6
SIDMA-0A
(BLK)
SIDMB-0A
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
GND
SIDMD-0A
VDD
ENDMA-0A
A7
ENDMB-0A
A1
A6
ENDMC-0A
1
STKCL-0A
2
ENDMD-0A
J740
IRCLK-1A
RVS-FAN
GND
4
LTXD-0A
(GRY)
(BLK)
PLFED-1A
LRTS-0A
LRXD-0A
5
(BLK)
(BLK)
4
LCTS-0A
5
(BLK)
4
LSBSY-1A
(GRY)
PLRST-0A
(BLK)
PLFED-1A
(BLK)
5
GND
4
N.C
5
MVDEN-0A
4
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
PLFED-1A
N.C
A5
N.C
A4
N.C
3
+24VA
(PPE)
DG
PLTOP-1A
CMD-0A
3
CBSY-0A
3
CERR-0A
(PPE)
CACK-0A
PLTOP-1A
STS-0A
3
SBSY-0A
3
SACK-0A
(BLK)
VDD
TUP4/EMP4-SW
SERR-0A
(BLU)
SYSRST-0
GND
GND
2
GND
B13
1
EXPON-0
B12
PLTOP-1A
VDD
HTRML-0A
A3
J201
(BLK)
B11
B8
IHSNC-0A
GND
2
IVDEN-0B
HTRMT-0A
(BLK)
(BLU)
HSYNC-0B
(BLK)
GND
HSNC4-0B
GND
(BLK)
IDT0-1A
(BLK)
GND
GND
VDD
B7
IDT2-1A
HTRCK-1A
RVSF-0A
IDT4-1A
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLK)
IDT6-1A
DG36
1
IDT7-1A
(BLK)
HTR-FAN
IDT5-1A
DG36
(YLW)
IDT3-1A
(BLK)
PLEMP-1A
IDT1-1A
+36VA
2
GND
+36VA
(ORG)
1
IDCLK-1A
(ORG)
2
J668
1
(BLK) FUSSW-1A
(YLW)
IHDEN-0A
+5VSW
PLEMP-1A
GND
(BLK)
1
(PPE)
SSSR+-1A
2
(BLK)
GND
(WHI)
A11
1
N.C
(BLU)
A10
2
(BLK)
GND
USSR+-1A
(BLK)
9
(BLK)
(YLW)
PLEMP-1A
J726
A2
2
A1
1
B6
10
STHU--1A
+24VC
8
(BLK)
A2
HTRF-0A
7
STHU+-1A
A1
(BLK)
J637 J637
6
J326
(PPE)
HDD
5
(BLK)
B16
A2
4
THML--1A
J146
3
(BLK)
B15
(ORG)
2
THML+-1A
B14
VDD
1
THMU+-1A
J143 J143
3
THMU--1A
(BLK)
B9
(ORG)
5
(BLK)
B11
VDD
4
(BLK)
J699 J155
1
GND
B8
(PPE)
2
(BLK)
B10
VDD
HTR-MOT
18
EXTSW-1A
B7
J661
DG
J338
PWA-SYS
18
VDD
(BLK)
A1
J505
(PPE)
A14
J501 J501
B6
B5
SSR-SUB
6
J680 J680
9
(PPE)
8
(BLK)
+36VB
GND
(PPE)
LCDOR-1A
6
B13
A1
J335
+36VB
B4
(PPE)
B3
5
B12
DG
N.C
+24VC
N.C
+24VC
N.C
4
(BLK)
3
(BLK)
SSR-U
8
20
6
DCTOF-0A
(PPE)
J507
8
20
(BLK)
2
6
21
+24VA
1
(BLK) DRMTD-0A
2
21
(PPE)
DG
J662
B2
2
DRMTB-0A
ADMBK-0A
(BLK)
J671
1
DRMTA-0A
B1
(BLK) DRMTC-0A
9
9
(BLK)
A8
19
9
GND
GND
7
19
4
(BLK)
ADMON-0A
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
DG36
8
(BLK)
A7
DG36
GND
(BLK)
(BLK)
DG36
7
DG36
(BLK)
A6
(BLK)
B12
6
B11
A5
N.C
VDD
7
3
EXITF-0A
(BLK)
2
+24VA
(BLK)
5
17
(PPE)
A4
B10
DG36
17
SCRP-0A
ADUCK-1A
3
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(BLK)
5
+24VA
4
4
5
(PPE)
A3
4
2
DRCLK-1A
3
1
(BLK)
A2
J509
VDD
DG36
2
(BLK)
(BLK)
1
TRMD-0A
2
2
TRMB-0A
(BLK)
+36VA
1
(BLK)
A1
2
TRMC-0A
(PPE)
PWA-ADU
J329
(BLU)
1
(BLK)
+36VA
4
(RED)
B2
+36VA
(PPE)
4
3
2
1
A8
TRMA-0A
1
22
3
2
1
A7
+36VA
(BLK)
+24V
J217
J672
GND
(BLK)
(BLU)
(RED)
A6
(PPE)
1
(BLK)
DG
+24V
A4
EXPWM-1A
J23
A2
(PPE)
A1
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
NC
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
A7
1
22
2
1
(PPE)
ADU-MOT
22
21
20
7
5
4
3
2
1
J406
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J402
4
3
2
1
J73
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J8
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
(PPE)
(PPE)
(WHI)
A10
J711
GND
(BLK)
VDD
ADTR1-1A
J9
A2
A1
VDD
GND
H.OFF
80
1
J4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J6
5
TNR-EMP-SW
3
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
21
DUCT-OUT-FAN
20
J405
21
EXIT-FAN-MOT
20
B4
VDD
B3
ADTR1-1A
A8
(BLK)
A5
(BLK)
5
2
B8
N.C
SOL3
B1
B7
B14
FAN2ON-0A
1
(BLK)
REVCL-0B
B3
B1
A4
J419
PWA-MOT
4
19
A12
18
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J12
FAN2SP-0A
GND
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
(PPE)
A11
ADSID1A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J403
9
7
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
J407
PWRDN-1
SG5SYS
SG5SYS
5VSYS
5VSYS
SG3SYS
SG3SYS
A3
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(BLU)
(BLU)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHI)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BWN)
(PPE)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(YLW)
(YLW)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
(BLK)
SIDT1-0A
SIDT3-0A
SIDT5-0A
SIDT7-0A
GND
SDCLK-0
GND
HSNC4-0
SCNT-0
SRTS-0
SRXD-0A
SYSRST-0
EXPOON-0C
SCTS-0A
STXD-0A
GND
HSYNC-0
B62
B61
B60
B59
B58
B57
B56
B55
B54
B53
B52
2
3VSYS
3VSYS
3
19
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
SVDEN-0A
SHDEN-0A
GND
SIDT6-0A
SIDT4-0A
SIDT2-0A
SIDT0-0A
VDD
VDD
ACK64-0
VDD
AD1-1
GND
AD3-1
AD5-1
+3.3V
AD7-1
B51
1
J140
11
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J102
J109
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
J108
B62
B61
B60
B59
B58
B57
B56
B55
B54
B53
B52
AD8-1
B50
B49
B48
B47
A2
19
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
B1
40
B51
N.C
N.C
GND
AD10-1
10
18
(BLU)
39
B50
B49
B48
B47
A1
2
J617
GND
(BLK)
GND
(GRY)
38
37
36
35
J420
1
TR1-SW
ADSID1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DASP-0
(GRY)
J421
3
B2
B3
CSA1-0A
(GRY)
AD12-1
B46
B45
B44
8
2
B13
B12
CSA0-0A
(GRY)
34
GND
AD14-1
THMSL
(BLK)
ADR2-1A
(BLU)
B46
B45
B44
THMSU
ATRC-0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADR0-1A
(GRY)
33
32
CBE1-0
B43
PWA-MTB
B2
B3
B4
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
(GRY)
31
+3.3V
B42
B41
B40
B39
B38
EXIT-SW
17
(BLK)
ARGTC-0A
B11
B5
B6
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADR1-1A
(GRY)
B43
B42
SERR-0
+3.3V
PERR-0
B37
B36
B35
6
VDD
(BLK)
APIKS-0A
B10
B9
B7
B8
B9
B10
N.C
(GRY)
30
B41
B40
LOCK-0
GND
DVSL-0
B34
B33
7
(BLK)
(BLK)
B8
B7
B6
B5
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
HIREQ-1A
(BLU)
29
28
B39
B38
B37
B36
+3.3V
B32
B31
5
17
(BLK)
AGIDS-0A
(BLK)
ADSID-1A
AFEDC-0A
(BLK)
ADRGT-1A
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
GND
(GRY)
(GRY)
N.C
IDACK-0A
(GRY)
27
26
25
24
B35
IDRY-0
GND
CBE2-0
4
B4
B5
B6
(BLK)
ADEND-1A
B4
B3
B2
B1
A14
A13
A12
(BLK)
(GRY)
23
B34
B33
3
17
16
15
(BLK)
ADTR1-1A
(BLK)
(BLK)
ADTTR2-1A
ADEMP-1A
(BLK)
ADFED-1A
(BLK)
VDD
(BLK)
(BLK)
+5VSW
N.C
(BLK)
GND
A4
A5
GND
(GRY)
22
21
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
CN2
2
VDD
GND
ADEMP-1A
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
A1
A2
A3
A11
A10
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
DIOWR-0A
(GRY)
B32
AD17-1
+3.3V
AD19-1
AD21-1
GND
AD23-1
CBE3-0
+3.3V
AD25-1
AD27-1
GND
AD29-1
AD31-1
VDD
SCSREQ-0
GND
PCICLK5
GND
PCICLK4
GND
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
1
(BLK)
16
(BLK)
(BLK)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
(BLK)
GND
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
(BLK)
GND
(GRY)
20
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
GND
N.C
LANREQ-0
N.C
N.C
SCSINT-0A
VDD
VDD
N.C
PS-ACC
16
15
VDD
SIDMD0A
SIDMB0A
SIDMC0A
SIDMA0A
+24V
ENDMD0A
A4
A5
(BLK)
ADCNT-1A
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A11
A12
(PPE)
IDREQ-1A
(BLU)
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J106
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B9
15
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
7
6
(BLK)
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
SIDMA-0A
(BLK)
SIDMD-0A
SIDMB-0A
(BLK)
SIDMA-0A
A4
A3
A13
A14
N.C
(GRY)
IOCRDY-1A
GND
(GRY)
(GRY)
DATA15-1A
(GRY)
GND
DATA0-1A
(GRY)
DIORD-0A
DATA14-1A
(BLU)
(BLU)
DATA1-1A
(GRY)
(GRY)
DATA2-1A
DATA13-1A
(GRY)
DATA12-1A
(GRY)
DATA4-1A
(GRY)
DATA3-1A
DATA10-1A
(GRY)
DATA11-1A
DATA5-1A
(GRY)
(BLU)
DATA9-1A
(GRY)
DATA6-1A
(GRY)
(BLU)
DATA8-1A
(GRY)
(GRY)
GND
DATA7-1A
(GRY)
IDRST-0A
(YLW)
B15
B14
J422
SID-SW
J225 CN1
(BLK)
(BLK)
SIDMB-0A
A2
A1
J516 J516
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J130
B1
(BLK)
B1
FAN2SP-0A
1
1
GND
GLV2
ADEMP-1A
2
(BLK)
J219
(BLK)
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J227
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
VDD
LED5V
(BLK)
B3
1
14
1
(BLK)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
B2
B13
J17
J616
GLV4
6
14
GLV1
ENDMB0A
(BLK)
(BLK)
+5VB
+5VB
DG5B
DG5B
PPCKD-1
PPCKD-0
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
PDTD0-1A
GND
LDVPD-1A
DG5B
CALOD-0A
SCRST-1D
POSD-1A
N.C
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
DG5B
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
DG5B
DG5B
PPCKD-1
PPCKD-0
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
PDTD0-1A
GND
LDVPD-1A
DG5B
CALOD-0A
SCRST-1D
POSD-1A
N.C
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
5
CPRST-0A
(BLK)
6
3
2
5
(BLK)
(GRY)
TRB-MOT
2
B25
3
EMP-SW
B24
2
VDD
B23
1
(BLK)
2
13
B22
J620
1
J206
1
13
(WHI)
A6
(BLK)
SIDMC-0A
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J209
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
(WHI)
(WHI)
B3
DRM-MOT
J615
GND
8
(YLW)
GLV1D-1
5
(GRY)
B21
(WHI)
GLV0D1
SIDMD0A
GND
(RED)
GLV1B-1
(BLK)
BMAD11-0
GLV0B-1
12
BMAD10-0
J216
12
(WHI)
7
(WHI)
SIDMB0A
(WHI)
(GRY)
6
B20
GLV1A-1
(BLK)
BMAD9-0
5
B19
(BWN)
4
(WHI)
B18
(WHI)
GLV0A-1
11
BMAD8-0
4
(ORG)
GLV1C-1
10
BMAD7-0
(WHI)
B17
GLV0C-1
11
BMAD6-0
(WHI)
3
10
(GRY)
2
B16
SIDMC0A
BMDA5-0
1
B15
(BLK)
(ORG)
B14
3
BMDA4-0
B11
SIDMA0A
BMAD3-0
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
BMAD2-0
(GRY)
J212
(RED)
9
(GRY)
B13
(N.C.)
FAN-0A
9
BMAD1-0
FANSP-1A
+24V
BMAD0-0
(GRY)
3
+24V
(RED)
(GRY)
2
8
BMSW2-0
1
8
(GRY)
B10
J213
ENDMD0A
BMSW1-0
B9
(BLK)
(GRY)
B8
(BLK)
B7
7
BMSW0-0
6
(GRY)
7
B5
6
BMRST-0
ENDMC0A
B4
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
A7
B3
5
(GRY)
B2
ENDMA0A
(GRY)
9
(BLK)
(GRY)
8
(BLK)
5
J233 J233
7
(BLK)
4
(GRY)
B1
6
(BLK)
+24V
GND
4
(RED)
GND
(GRY)
A25
5
A8
(GRY)
A24
3
A9
VDD
A23
(BLK)
A10
(GRY)
A22
(BLK)
3
VDD
A21
2
GND
(GRY)
A20
1
(BLK)
BMDA7-0
J202
A11
BMDA6-0
(GRY)
A19
A12
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
A18
2
(GRY)
A17
1
BMDA4-0
ADEND-1A
BMDA3-0
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
2
2
BMDA2-0
SID-MOT
2
(GRY)
A16
1
4
BMDA1-0
J614
4
(GRY)
16
4
5
6
BMDA0-0
15
+24V
ENDMB0A
6
WLL-0A
SNSCK-1A
(GRY)
A13
13
(BLK)
8
A62
J18
4
10
8
(WHI)
(GRY)
A12
12
5
12
10
WUL-0A
A11
14
3
BMSW1-0
12
(WHI)
A9
END-MOT
BMSW0-0
14
GND
A8
ENDMC0A
(GRY)
16
14
(GRY)
A10
9
(BLK)
BMRST-0
18
16
BUSY-0A
11
ENDMA0A
(GRY)
18
DAWR-0A
10
(BLK)
(GRY)
20
OFFST-0A
A7
2
(GRY)
20
(GRY)
(GRY)
A6
4
(GRY)
19
(GRY)
A5
4
GND
17
19
DASC1-0A
+24V
(GRY)
15
17
DASCO-1A
(GRY)
8
(RED)
(GRY)
15
OUTAB-0
(GRY)
7
1
(GRY)
13
(GRY)
A4
6
J613
GND
9
11
13
OUTAB-1
5
3
(GRY)
9
11
(GRY)
A3
4
3
VDD
7
BMCK-0
3
GND
VDD
(GRY)
7
BMCK-1
(GRY)
A2
(BLK)
BMDA7-0
(GRY)
5
(GRY)
A1
3
(GRY)
5
J211
2
BMDA6-0
3
VDD
1
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
3
1
VDD
(GRY)
11
SIDMD-0A
2
1
STKCL-0A
1
10
A13
B9
9
A14
B8
8
3
J414
B7
TR2-SW
B6
4
1
B5
2
2
B4
(BLK)
B3
7
2
(GRY)
29
B2
5
1
BMDA4-0
27
29
B1
6
ADEND-1A
(GRY)
27
A9
5
(BLK)
BMDA3-0
25
DG5B
GND
7
2
(GRY)
25
4
1
BMDA2-0
1
23
WRLVD-1
LTXD-0A
VDD
A8
END-SW
(GRY)
23
LRTS-0A
4
6
BMDA1-0
21
(ORG)
LRXD-0A
8
3
A7
6
2
PWA-PLG
LCTS-0A
3
J416
BMDA0-0
(GRY)
21
5
LSBSY-1A
3
A6
J618
A5
9
VDD
(WHI)
19
PLRST-0A
(BLK)
A4
2
(BLK)
GND
19
GND
(BLK)
A3
10
J713 J713
(WHI)
17
4
MVDEN-0A
ADTR2-1A
A2
1
VDD
GND
(WHI)
17
PWA-LDR
11
(BLK)
(WHI)
15
J231
GND
A1
J612
BMAD11-0
13
15
(WHI)
4
(WHI)
9
11
13
GND
LAN-ADP(OPTION)
(BLK)
3
BMAD10-0
9
11
B2
(BLK)
5
BMAD9-0
(GRY)
7
B12
(YEL)
N.C
(ORG)
5
7
B4
(BLK)
N.C
BMAD8-0
5
A61
(BLK)
AFEDC0A
BMAD7-0
3
N.C
(YEL)
(BLK)
(GRY)
1
N.C
(PPE)
2
BMAD6-0
2
1
B1
(PPE)
1
BMDA5-0
(GRY)
4
2
B11
B5
1
BMDA4-0
(GRY)
4
4
PWA-LDR
J417
(GRY)
3
GND
B4
2
BMAD3-0
6
3
PWA-LDR
(GRY)
+24V
BMAD2-0
(GRY)
8
6
(WHI)
J231
(BLK)
PWRDN-1
(BLK)
(GRY)
8
BILVD-1
J231
DG
2
BMAD1-0
10
3
CONTROL PANEL
9
J610
(GRY)
RTS0-0A
11
(WHI)
1
BMAD0-0
(BLK)
SCSI(OPTION)
10
+24V
ARGTC0A
(GRY)
10
(BLK)
PWA-SLG
(BLK)
(BLK)
BMSW2-0
12
B5
A9
DG12V
1
SNSCK-1A
(GRY)
14
12
2
A10
(WHI)
J415
WLL-0A
(GRY)
16
14
(WHI)
A8
8
+12V
+24V
(WHI)
16
(WHI)
A7
(BLK)
(BLK)
WUL-0A
18
DG5B
7
GND
J609
(WHI)
20
18
+5VB
A6
(PNK)
1
GND
22
20
2
6
(BLK)
+3.3V
2
(GRY)
A60
5
A5
(BLK)
GND
3
BUSY-0A
22
A62
A4
GND
+24V
OFFST-0A
(GRY)
24
B10
4
STKCL0A
DAWR-0A
(GRY)
CTS0-0A
3
A3
(YLW)
(WHI)
(GRY)
(BLK)
2
A2
VDD
(WHI)
DASC1-0A
24
B6
A1
(YLW)
+24V
DASCO-1A
(GRY)
26
1
1
VDD
(BLK)
OUTAB-0
(GRY)
26
1
J10
4
(GRY)
A59
FAN2ON-0A
J73
5
OUTAB-1
28
VDD
A series
+24V
(GRY)
30
28
A61
GND
REVCL0B
BMCK-0
30
B9
APS6-0
(BWN)
BMCK-1
(GRY)
J232 J232
B7
B12
6
(GRY)
J227
VDD
AGIDS0A
VDD
(WHI)
J37
(BWN)
VDD
(GRY)
+5VB
B10
7
(ORG)
J207
NC
A58
LT series
VDD
NC
REQ64-0
NC
A60
NC
B8
NC
RXD0-1A
(GRY)
TXD0-11A
NC
GND
(BLK)
APS4-0
(BLK)
VDD
A57
J35
A59
(GRY)
B7
(GRY)
B8
GND
(BLK)
(GRY)
B9
(GRY)
30
GND
30
(GRY)
A56
(GRY)
VDD
FAN3ON-0A
A58
(GRY)
B6
(GRY)
FAN3SP-0A
B10
(GRY)
GND
29
APS1-0
(WHI)
(GRY)
A55
VDD
AD0-1
(GRY)
AD2-1
GND
A57
(GRY)
B5
(GRY)
+5VB
UD3-1A
(BLK)
(GRY)
29
UD2-1A
(BLK)
(GRY)
B11
(GRY)
28
FAN1ON-0A
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
FAN1SP-0A
+5VB
GND
DG5B
APS3-0
A54
(PPE)
A56
(PPE)
B4
(PPE)
28
UD1-1A
(BLK)
(PPE)
B12
(PPE)
27
(PPE)
GND
(WHI)
APS4-0
DG5B
A53
VDD
(PPE)
GND
(PPE)
A55
(PPE)
B3
(PPE)
27
UD0-1A
(BLK)
(PPE)
B13
(PPE)
26
A52
(PPE)
AD4-1
VDD
AD6-1
J34
A54
APS2-0
B2
VDD
B1
FAN3ON-0A
26
GND
(BLK)
A51
(PPE)
B14
+3.3V
A50
A49
A48
GND
A53
A52
CBE0-0
N.C
N.C
APS5-0
B15
LCDEN-1A
(BLK)
A15
A51
A50
VDD
25
XSCL-1A
(BLK)
A14
A13
A47
A46
A45
FAN3SP-0A
(WHI)
LP-1A
(BLK)
A49
AD9-1
GND
AD11-1
J36
(WHI)
WF-1A
(BLK)
A12
A48
A47
(PPE)
PPCKD-1
YD-1A
(BLK)
A11
A10
J35
PPCKD-0
INVGND
(BLK)
A44
A43
(PPE)
GND
25
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
BZON-0A
(BLK)
A46
AD13-1
GND
24
23
22
21
20
19
A6
A9
A45
APS3-0
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
18
CPPOW-1A
(BLK)
A8
VDD
DG5B
PDTD7-1A
(WHI)
(WHI)
A7
A8
J34
24
23
22
PDTD6-1A
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
PDTD3-1A
PDTD2-1A
17
(Personal Comp.)
21
20
19
18
17
J231
16
1
(WHI)
A42
2
8
+3.3V
7
AD15-1
3
A44
4
6
A7
5
5
PDTD0-1A
LDCLK-1A
(BLK)
4
16
LDDAT-1A
(BLK)
6
A9
7
15
2
(WHI)
8
(WHI)
J31
1
LDVPD-1A
J31
GND
A41
1
A43
2
4
A6
3
15
LDLTH-1A
(BLK)
2
A10
4
14
J40
1
(WHI)
J40
DG5B
A40
3
PAR-1
1
14
PWA-LDR
A42
3
A5
(GRY)
8
A11
A39
(GRY)
GND
SBO-0
(GRY)
A41
(GRY)
A4
(GRY)
13
LDON1-0A
(BLK)
(GRY)
2
13
LDON0-0A
(BLK)
A38
(GRY)
A12
A40
(WHI)
12
A3
(BLK)
(WHI)
SG5
(BLK)
A37
APS2-0
(WHI)
A13
SDONE-1
A36
A35
(RED)
CALOD-0A
11
A39
+3.3V
STOP-0
GND
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
(BLK)
SCRST-1D
(WHI)
A2
A38
A37
TRDY-0
GND
FRAME-0
+3.3V
AD16-1
AD18-1
(RED)
12
POSD-1A
VDD
(BLK)
A1
J105
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A28
A27
FAN1SP-0A
11
A14
INV5V
(PPE)
8
A30
GND
A26
FAN3ON-0A
10
TXD3-1A
(WHI)
7
A29
AD20-1
AD22-1
A25
A24
GND
10
RXD3-1A
(WHI)
6
A28
+3.3V
A23
FAN3SP-0A
A15
RTS3-0A
(WHI)
5
4
A27
A26
SCSID-1
AD24-1
APS1-0
9
DSR3-0A
(WHI)
N.C
DTR3-0A
(WHI)
3
A25
VDD
(WHI)
J733
9
3
2
7
6
4
CTS3-0A
(WHI)
2
1
VDD
N.C
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J227
30
PCCNT3-0A
(WHI)
J32
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
8
1
5
J33
DDISD-1A
SMPD0-1A
SMP1-1D
DG5B
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
29
28
FAN1ON-0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J208
30
29
(WHI)
(WHI)
FAN-SYS
+5VB
DG5B
1
28
2
A22
3
GND
VDD
A24
GND
GND
SCHOM-0
(WHI)
J35
27
1
(WHI)
2
DG5B
3
27
VDD
A21
SCHOM-0
A23
GND
J103
J34
J120
1
26
VDD
26
2
A20
3
AD26-1
SCHOM-0
25
1
(WHI)
2
PPCKD-1
3
25
GND
A19
VDD
AD28-1
SCHOM-0
+3.3V
GND
A22
1
A21
2
24
3
(WHI)
VDD
(WHI)
SCHOM-0
PPCKD-0
1
DG5B
GND
24
A18
2
A20
3
23
1
(WHI)
2
PDTD7-1A
3
23
A17
VDD
AD30-1
A16
J32
LANID-1
GND
SCHOM-0
A19
A18
GND
22
3
A15
VDD
22
(BLK)
A17
A14
A13
J33
21
2
SCSGNT-0
VDD
PRST-0
J37
(WHI)
FANSPD-0
GND
A16
A15
SCHOM-0
(WHI)
20
1
J110
GND
PDTD6-1A
(WHI)
+24V
J36
PDTD5-1A
PDTD4-1A
19
(RED)
J35
21
20
19
18
1
(WHI)
2
(WHI)
3
PDTD3-1A
1
PDTD2-1A
1
18
2
A12
2
PWRON2-1
3
GND
GND
2
A14
J19
1
A13
1
A12
J19
17
2
16
3
15
1
(WHI)
2
(WHI)
3
(WHI)
A11
2
PDTD0-1A
A9
A8
A10
1
GND
LANGNT-0
A7
2
LDVPD-1A
A11
A10
VDD
A6
1
17
14
13
12
N.C
VDD
N.C
1
16
(WHI)
(WHI)
A9
2
15
DG5B
CALOD-0A
(WHI)
APS4
14
13
12
SCRST-1D
3
1
7
APS1-0
FED-CLT
B1
LANINT-0A
1
2
3
RGT-CLT
B2
2
(PPE)
4
6
(PPE)
8
B3
A8
3
(PPE)
5
(PPE)
VDD
1
B4
A7
1
(PPE)
(PPE)
GND
2
B5
A6
APS3
VDD
(PPE)
APS2-0
1
B6
2
3
5
J603
B7
9
3
FAN3ON-0A
6
4
STK-CLT
B8
11
1
FAN3SP-0A
7
3
REV-CLT
B9
GND
J19
2
(BLK)
B10
10
+24V
GND
(PPE)
2
B11
2
SCHOM-0
(PPE)
1
B12
(WHI)
3
(PPE)
J604
B13
(WHI)
J34
GND
GID-SOL
B14
(WHI)
APS1
1
APS1-0
2
B15
N.C
APS2
1
VDD
1
B16
GND
2
1
(PPE)
J605
B17
POSD-1A
+24V
2
2
VDD
VDD
B18
DDISD-1A
J19
3
J10
(YLW)
B19
GND
VDD
8
(PPE)
2
B20
9
+24V
GND
(PPE)
J31
1
(WHI)
FAN1ON-0A
FED-SW
B21
(GRY)
11
CN2
APS6
SCHOM-0
(PPE)
J31
FAN1SP-0A
ADFED-1A
B22
A5
(WHI)
FAN2ON-0A
(WHI)
B23
A4
1
GND
1
9
J215
10
C
2
1
2
4
GND
B24
A3
APS5
J32
3
(BLK)
B25
VDD
3
2
(BLK)
FAN2SP-0A
3
A1
A5
APS4
VDD
APS2-0
3
J606
A2
8
J32
VDD
4
2
10
A4
(WHI)
1
3
J40
1
L SRA-21T-3
1
A5
SMPD0-1A
APS3
GND
J40
(LAMP)
11
A6
GND
(BLK)
K
VDD
A3
8
SLG-FAN
2
SCHOM-0
(RED)
(BLK-WHILINE)
ADRGT-1A
A7
A2
3
(RED)
EXPO-OUT- L
(YLW)
A8
A4
+24V
J33
EXPO-OUT+
(BLK)
(WHI)
A9
7
APS1
FAN1ON-0A
EXPO-OUT-
2
A10
(WHI)
J33
1
(BLK)
RGT-SW
A11
SMP1-1D
J17
1
EXPO-OUT+
12
A12
7
A1
APS2
FAN1SP-0A
PWA-SDV
2
13
A13
N.C
OPT-FAN1
2
(BLU)
J57
2
GND
A14
A3
OPT-FAN2
1
MOT-A
J57
+24V
A15
GND
FAN2ON-0A
(RED)
(BLK)
A16
6
CN1
+24V
FAN2SP-0A
1
MOT-D
(BLK)
A17
N.C
N.C
N.C
SLG-FAN
1
MOT-C
3
A18
6
J1
OPT-FAN1
2
MOT-B
1
A19
A2
A1
2
J607
A20
5
4
3
J18
3
TR-CLT
A21
GND
4
14
A22
(WHI)
+24V
5
ATRC0A
A23
DG5B
2
OPT-FAN2
3
2
A24
(WHI)
(WHI)
1
J227
SCN-MOT
J413
A25
WRLVD-1
BILVD-1
(WHI)
(WHI)
(WHI)
B
5
4
3
DG5B
+5VB
+5VB
PWA-CCD
(BLK)
E
2
D
1
J210
A
2
J608
PWA-SNS
1
8
J56
MOT-E
CRG1
THERMOSTAT
Q
STO-21-250N
M
(BLK)
A
J325
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
N.C
A6
A7
A10
A8
A11
B1
B2
B5
N.C
B6
N.C
B7
B8
B
C
J330
B15
B14
B13
B12
B8
PWA-LGC
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
A15
B2
A14
B1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A3
A2
A4
D
DG
A14
A15
E
B6
J226
1
2
LSU-FAN
GND
(N.C.)
F
7. HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS
7. 2 DC Wire Harness
(2) 8070 / 5570
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
SD-D-102, 00-03 AB
File No. 31110001
1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8442, JAPAN